Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria

Google

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project

to make the world's books discoverable online.

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the

publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.

About Google Book Search

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web

at |http: //books .google .com/I

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

aijal ^amtD of §irtark

VOL. KX. (New Series).

PART I.

Edited under the Authority of the Council.
ISSUED AUGUST, 1907.

{Containiftf! Papers read before the Society during the months of

April, June, July, igoy).

THK AUTHORM OV TUK HRVKRAL PAFMRS ARK SKVKRALLY RIMFUM81BLK FOR TIIK
gOUNDNKSS or THK OPINIONS OIVKN AND FOR THK ACOURACT OK THK

STATKMKNT8 MADK THBRBIK.

MELBOUKNE :
KOKD & SON, PKINTERS, DRUMMOND STKEE'J', CARLTOJ^.

^ rf

« . • . . ^ _.

AGENTS TO THE SOCIETY:
WILLIAMS & NOROATE, 14 HENRIETTA STREET, COVENT QAKDEN, LONDON.

To whom all ooramunioations for transmission to the Royal Society of Victoria,

from all {wrts of Europe, should be sent.

1907.

164219

■ •

* * •

CONTENTS OF VOLUME XX., Pr. I.

PAOK

Art I. — A Living Descendent of an Extinct (Tasmanian) Kace.

By BiCHARD J. A. Berry. (Plate 1.) 1

Art. II. — Note on the Deposition of Bedded Tuffs. By T. S.

Hall, M.A. (Plate II.) ... ... ... 21

Art. III. — New Species of Australian Chiton from Queensland,

Enoplochiton torri. By E. A. Bastow and J. H.
Gatlifp. (Plates III. and IV.) ... ... 27

Art. IV. — Additions to the Catalogue of the Marine Shells of

Victoria. By J. H. Gatlipf ... .. ... 31

Art. V. — The Movements of the Soluble Constituents in fine

AUuvial Soil. By Alfred J. Ewart, D.Sc,
Ph.D., F.Ii.S. ... ... 38

Art. VI. — Fossil Fish Kemains from the Tertiarics of Australia.

— Part II. By F. Chapman, A.L.S., &c., and
G. B. Pritchard, F.G.S. (Plates V.-VIII.) ... 59

Art. VII. — Contributions to the Flora of Australia. — No. 6. By

Alfred J. Ewart, Ph.D., D.Sc, F.L.S., &c.
(Plates IX.-XIII.) ... ... ... ... 76

_ - • » •

[Proc. Rot. Soc. Victoria, 20 (N.S.), Pt. I., 19t?5.;h'^

• *

Akt. 1. — A Living Descendant of an Extincf/^^.

(TasTYianian) Race.

• - •

«

•

By RICHARD J. A. BERRY,

M.D. Edin. et Melb., F.R.C.S. Edin., F.E.S. Edin.
Professor of Anatomy in the University of Melbourne.

(With Plate I.).

[Read 11th April, 1907].

As in all probability it has not been the lot of any living
British anatomist to gaze on a living representative of the ex-
tinct native Tasmanian race, the photograph of the half-caste
daughter of a member of that race may not be without interest.

The circumstances under which the author was fortunate
enough to obtain the photograph were as follows :

At the conclusion of the meeting of the Australian Associa-
tion for the Advancement of Science, held in January, 1907, the
Government of South Australia was good enough to place at the
disposal of a limited number of members of the Association, of
which I was fortunate enough to be one, the Government
steamer," Governor Musgrave," for a three days' scientific excur-
sion to the various islands and other places of interest in the
Spencer and St. Vincent Gulfs. Amongst the various places
visited on this interesting excursion was Hog Bay, in Kangaroo
Island, at which place the subject of the present photograph is a
resident, and where the photograph was taken.

Kangaroo Island receives but scant attention in the majority
of modern Geographical Text-books, but the extracts which
follow will give some idea of what the Island was, and what it
has since become.

An anonymous member of the Royal Geographical Society of
London, writing in 1856, says (1) : —

'* Kangaroo Island, an island off the coast of South Australia,
was discovered by Flinders in 1802, and was so named by that
navigator from the great number of kangaroos which he found

» » "

«

• •

2 /..'•'- Richard J. A. Berry:

• • •

on ^t.*» It extends about eighty miles in length from west to
e^'t/.and is 32 miles broad on the meridian of Cape Gan-
th»8'time, or 137 deg. 29 min. Ekist, which is nearly its central
meridian. The parallel of 35 deg. 50 min. South intersects it
•centrally. Its coast line presents numerous headlands and bays.

* The rocks generailly are devoid of stratification,

and belong to the trap class. Its area has been estimated at
2,500,000 acres. The greater part of the surface is covered w^ith
matted bush, which swarms with snakes, tarantulas, scorpions,
and mosquitoes. The trees principally belong to the classes
of Eucalyptus and Casuaxina. The few streamlets which flow
north are dried up in summer ; but a few on the south side flow
permanently. Some patches of grain of good quality are grown,
and about 2Q00 sheep are at present pastured upon it. Stone
is occasionally brought from it to Port Adelaide ; also fine cray-
fish, and salt, which id supplied by several extensive lagoons.
A lighthouse has been erected on Cape Willoughby, its south-
east extremity, which is 16 miles south-south-east of Cape
Jervis."

Whatever progress the Island may have made during the
latter half of the nineteenth century will be shown by the two
descriptions which follow: —

Chisholm, the editor of Longman's " Gazetteer of the World,"
writing in that work in 1895, says (2): —

"Kangaroo Island, South Australia, is separated by Investi-
gator Strait (at the mouth of Gulf St. Vincent), from Yorke's
Peninsula, on the north; and by Backstairs Passage from the
mainland of South Australia on the east, Kingscote, o*n the
north-east coast, was the first settlement in South Austra;lia.
The area fit for cultivation and pasturage is extremely small, the
island being covered with scrub. Discovered by Captain
Flinders in 1802 ; uninhabited up to 1828 ; from 1877 immigra-
tion increased rapidly, but latterly the settlers have been re-
duced to great distress by the spread of a wild plant. Length,
east to west, 87 miles, xlverage breadth, north to south. 20
miles. Area, 1679 tiquare miles. Population in 1881, 379 ; in
1891, 599."

In the last edition of the Admiralty sailing directions which
is available to me (3) the island is thus described: —

A Half-caste Taamanian, 3

" Kangaroo Island, at the entrance of the Gulf of St. Vincent,
is 80 miles long eaet and west, and about 24 milee broad, resem-
bling in shape the Malay Oris or dagger, with its handle to the
eastward. The land is of good elevation and well wooded.

Kangaroo Island is becoming settled as an agricultural area.
The farmers are located mostly about th€ eastern part of the
island, at Antechamber Bay, Hog Bay, Eastern Cove, and Kings-
c©te. They are a very orderly and healthy community. Town-
ships are forming at Nepean Bay, and jetties are being con-
structed.

There is a scattered population settled along the banks of the
Three Well or Cygnet River, and some land has been taken up
for agricultural purposes along the course of Hog Bay River, on
the south coast.

There are settlers at Emm, Smith, Dashwood, and Stokes
Bays, and the barley fields at Snellings Beach were conspicuous
marks from the sea during the survey (1863-73). There are also
settlers at Ling Cove, at D'Estree and Vivonne Bays.

Barley is the staple product of the ierland, which grows the
best in South Australia.

The island is well watered, but from Kingsoote westward
is mostly covered with thick scrub and unfit for either sheep
or wheat farming."

In addition to the foregoing, there have also appeared some very
readable articles of a more popular nature in the columns of the
morning press of Adelaide, which have since been reproduced in
pamphlet form. (4).

Such being Kangaroo Island, it is now necessary to show what
connection this island has with the distant land of Tasmania,
and how it comes about that a descendant of the original native
population of the latter island is now to be found on the former.

Prior to the year 1835, when the coLonisation of the island
may be said to have commenced with the foundation of the town-
ship of Kingscote, ^* the island was tenanted by a few nomads,
who had either deserted from vessels which had iDreviously called
there, or had come m boats from Tasmania. Their histories
need not here be recounted." The chronicler does well to sup-
press them. "One of them, who enjoyed the sobriquet of
** Wally," wa« said to have arrived from Tasmania in 1819,

lA

4 Richard J, A. Berry:

brining with him two aboriginail women named " Puss " and
"Bet'' (4).'*

It is, therefore, obvious that the earliest lawless inhabitants
of this lonely island imporjted native Tasmanian aboriginal
women to Kangaroo Island in the capacity of " wives," amd hence
it comes about thait to-day a descendant of such a union between
a white man and a female representative of one of the most
ancient races in the world, is now to be found in Kangaroo
Island, far removed from the land of her ancestors.

Mrs. S., on the spectator's right in the illustration, is a
genuine half-caste Tasmanian, who waa born on ELangaroo Island
some seventy-five years ago, as the result of the union of a white
man — the late N.T. — with a native Tasmanian woman. Educated
by the wife of the first appointed head-keeper of the Cape Wil-
loughby lighthouse. Miss T. was married to the lafte Mr. William
S. at Antechamber Bay, prior to the death of either of her
parents. " Her father died subsequently to her marriage ; and
her mother, an aboriginal of Tasmania, survived him for ten
years, and died at Cajpe Borda, where she is buried '' (4).

Mrs. S. has one son, and two daughters, one of whom, an
imbecile, is shown in the photograph, and who is, of course, a
quarter-caste Tasmanian.

As at the time of my visit to Adelaide I could not foresee that
I should have the opportunity of visiting Kangaroo Island, or
even had I known that much^ as I could still not have foreseen
that I should have been fortunate enough to come across such an
interesting anthropological problem as Mrs. S., I was unable to
make any cranionietrioal measurements as I had none of the
necessary instruments with me, though it is an open question
if it is not worth the two days' journey to make such measure-
ments. As, therefore, it is impossible for me, as yet, at all
events, to give any measurements of this half-caste Tasmanian,
we may next, perhaps, briefly sumniarise some of the physical
characters of this most ancient race, concluding with a resume
of some of the theories as to the origin of the same.

Notwithstanding that the native Tasmanian race only became
finally extinct little more than a generation ago, it will be suf-
ficiently obvious that the date of its extinction, 1868, just about
coincides ^vith the birth of anthropology as an exact science^

A Half-caste Taamanian. 5

and that our scientific knowledge of this highly interesting, but
little known race, cannot, in view of modem methods, be re-
garded as very accurate.

Bonwick, in his " The Lost Tasmanian Race " (6) thus de-
scribes, from personal experience, the physical characteristics
of the race : —

The native Tasnianians '' were dark in skin, brilliant in eye,
with massive jaw, immense teeth, woolly hair, curly beard,
bridgeless nose, expanded noi^tril, scarred body, shapely feet,
small hand . . . . Except in colour, they were unlike their
neighbours of New Holland (Australia). In hair, in nose, in

limb, they differed The lowest down the depths of

barbarism, they were neither stupid nor miserable . . . ,
but had sense and feeling."

Bonwick, in his larger work on the " Daily Life and Origin of
the Ta^manians " (5) gives some anthropometrioal measurements
of the race, and also goes, at much greater length, into the
physical characteristics of the latter, of which the following is a
brief summary: —

Skin, dark brown, or nearly black, but so disguised with pig-
ments as to make it difficult to state exactly what colour.

Hair hangs in corkscrew appendages about the men's faces, is
black, and has a crisp, woolly look. The diameters of the hair
ellipse are given as 25 is to 15, to which point reference will
again be made.

The eyes have the iris always dark colom-ed, whilst the white
of the eye is not so clear as in Europeans.

Mouth, great width; lips, though full, had not the negro
dimensions.

Jaws, strongly «et ; chin, inferior to that of civilised races, and
in the women, particularly, very small and retreating.

Nostrils, exceedingly wide and full, but the great peculiarity,
though not absolutely confined to this people, lay in the depres-
sion at the commencement of the organ, giving the feature much
of a pyramidal character.

Teeth, large and powerful, so much so as to constitute a
decided peculiarity. On the question of the teeth, Bonwick ap-
parently enlisted the services of a dentist, for he quotes Pardee,
a Melbourne representative of that profession, as follows : —

6 Richard J. A. Berry:

**The TasmAnian teeth have large crowns, thickly covered by
enamel, more so than in Eiuropeans. Fangs are not so deeply
seated in alveolar sockets, nor does epiphysis of maxillary bone
come so high as in Europe. Gums are much thicker and make
up this loss." The colour of the teeth remarkably white, so
much so as to have been greatly envied by some of the earliest
French voyagers to the island.

Modern methods, with exact meaeurementa and indices, would
now enable us by means of Flower's dental index (7) to- style
these teeth megadont, with an index above 44.

Regarding the relative proportions of the hair ellipse, Bonwick
gives the following table; —

Tasmanians -

as 25 is

to 15

Neg^o -

„ 20

„ 12

Fiji

,, 35

„ 20

Malay -

„ 22

„ 15

New Zealand

„ 24

„ 18

Chinese -

,, 33

„ 24

It is not stated whether these proportions are actual measure-
ments of the hair, as viewed microscopically in transverse section
or not, but ais it would be difficult to obtain such proportions
without actual measurements, we may assume for the moment
that they represent actual measurements, and apply thereto the
index mentioned by Duckworth (8), thus ; —

T_j- Breadth of the Section x 100

Length

of the Section

with the following results : —

Tasmanians -

Index 60

NegfTO -

60.

Fiji -

» 57

Malay -

68

New Zealand

M 75

Chinese

» 72

Duckworth says **the numerical value of this index has been
found to vary between 28 and 100, the lowest figure being pro-
vided by the curly hair of an Oceanic (Papuan) Negro, and the
highest by the lank and straight hair of Mongolians." He also
gives a figure of the cross sections of the hair of a Negrito
Semang from the Malay Peninsula, where the index is in the one
66.2, and in the other 58.9.

A Half-castt Tasmania n. 7

As it will be presently shown that the consensus of opinion
is apparently in the direction of allying the Tasmaaiians to the
Papuans of New Guinea, the discrepancy in the hair index, as
worked out from Bonwick's figures, and of Duckworth's state-
ment regarding the low nature of the genuine Papuan hair
index would be somewhat remarkable could we relv absolutely
on Bonwick's proportions representing actual measurements,
but this, as stated, is only conjectural.

Roth (12) in his " The Aborigines of Tasmania," published in
1890, has presented us with what is, perhaps, the best general
description of this race ; as, however. Roth's account of the
physical characteristics of the native Tasmaniaai is a compilation
from various authors, whilst Bonwick's account is from personal
observation, I have preferred to utilise the latter author only,
more particularly as, after all. Roth does not, on this question,
differ very considerably, if ait all, from the earlier writer. Roth,
however, being of more recent date than Bonwick, is much more
precise in his anthropometrical data, emd these data I hope to
avail myself of in a future communication on this subject.

The subject of the present paper is, as already mentioned, a
Tasmanian half-caste, and a reference to her photograph will
show that she bears many striking resemblances to the pen pic-
ture quoted from Bonwick, particularly in the colour of the skin,
the width of the mouth and nostrils, the weak ohin, and the
dark eyes. The hair, though distinctly woolly, has departed
from the racial type consequent on the admixture of the white
blood, though curiously enough, the native type is, on the
whole, more marked in the grand-daughter of the aboriginal
mother than in the daughter. In this connection, it is interest-
ing to see what has been said of the first Tasmanian half-caste,
in contradistinction to this, which is the last of such crosses.

Evans (9), in his "History and Description of the Present
State of Van Dieman's Land " (Tasmania), says : —

"The eldest child of this (native Tasmanian) woman, now a
fine girl about eleven years old, and the first child born by a
native woman to a white maai in Van Dieman's Land ....
is called Miss Dalrymple, and, like all the other children since
jMToduced by an intercourse between the natives and the Euro-
peans, is remarkably handsome, of a light copper colour, with

8 Richard J, A. Berry :

rosy cheekfi, large black eyes, the whites of which are tinged
"with blue, and long well-formed eye-lashes, with the teeth un-
commonly white, and the limbs admirably formed."

Whatever opinion may be formed as to the good looks of the
subject of the present paper there can be no two opinions as to
her intelligence. In conversing with her, the two facts which
impressed me most strongly were her remarkable in-
telligence and the absolute purity of her English
speech, and had I not actually heard her, I could not
have believed that such intelligence could have been derived in
one generation from a race, often, but, perhaps, quite eiTone-
ously, believed to have been one of the most degraded and brutal
in the world's races. That this opinion is in no way exaggerated
is shown by Hallack (4), who says : —

" Mrs. William S. is . . . . of a bright and happy dis-
position, a most entertaining conversationalist, and, withal, ex-
tremely apt at repartee."

The records of the deaths of the la>t pure- bred Tasmanians
are as follows : —

'* The last Tasmaoiian man, William Lanney, Lunny, or Lanne,
alias King Billy, died on March 3rd, 1869, aged 34. In January
of the previous year (1868), he had walked proudly with Prince
Alfred; Duke of Edinburgh, on the Hobart Tow^n Regatta ground,
conscious that they alone were in possession of royal blood " (6).

Whikt Lanney was the la«t surviving man of the race, he was
outlived by a woman named *' Truganini, or Lalla Rookh ....
who died in May, 1876, and was supposed to be seventy-three
years old " (6). With her, the native Tasmanian race became
finally extinct, and there now remain but a few half-castes, of
whom the subject of this paper forms one of the oldest, it' not
actually the oldest,, now living.

We now pasti to the purely controversial side of the question,
and though there are many debatable points in connection with
the lost Tasmanian race, aittention will only be directed tu three
of these problems. These three are, however, of the very
greatest importance, and are as follows : —

1. Is the Tasmanian of remote or recent origin?

2. With what race is the Tat^manian most closely allied/

3. How did the Tasnjanian reach Tasmania]

A Half-caste Tasmanian. 9

Regarding the first of these questions it may be stated that
the few authors who have made any scientific observations
whatsover upon this unhappy race, as well as those, who, from
personal contact with its then living representatives have been
in the best position to judge, are all agreed as to the great an-
tiquity of the Tasmanian aboriginal.

Bonwick, whose excellent description of the Tasmanian
aboriginal haB already been quoted, has no doubts upon this
point, for he says (5) : —

"That the Tasmaniams .... are of high antiquity,
even as regards other inhabitants of the world, can admit of
little doubt. A strong argument for their remote age may be
gathered from their ignorance of navigation." And, again, the
same aaithor says, "No race presents itself to us of a greater
relative amtiquity (than the Tasmanian). They lived throughout
history."

Tylor, in his preface to Roth's "The Aborigines of Tas-
mania" (12), says: —

" If there have remained anywhere up to modern times men
whote condition has changed little since the early stone tb^e,
the Tasmamians seem to have been such a people. They stand
before us as a branch of the Negroid race, illustrating the con-
dition of man near his lowest known level of culture ....
it appears that the aborigines of Tasmania .... by the
workmanship of their ftone implements rather represent the
condition of Palaeolithic Man." The some author (Tylor 13)
has elsewhere pointed out that the Tasiiianians were representa-
tives of the stone age development, and were in a stao^e lower
than, that of the Quaternary period of Europe, and hence the
distinction may be claimed- for them of beiniz; the lowest of
modern nomad tribes.'"

Howitt (14), too, bears witness to the same idea, for he says :
— "In considering all the facts before me bearing upon the ques-
tion of the origin of the Tasniamans and the Australians, I have
been much impressed by the immense periods of time which
seem to be essential to any solution of the problem," and, again,
"I have said before, and desire to repeat, thart: the conclusions
to which I have been led as to the origin of the Tasmanians
and Australians necessarily demand a vast antiquity on the

10 Richard J. A, Berry:

Australian Continent, for the former, and a very long period of
at least prehistoric time for the laitter."

As examples of scientific evidence the foregoing extracts count
for little, but as examples of close scientific reasoning from the
known to the unknown they count, or should count, for much,
and it seems to me that an antiquity, a great antiquity, must
be allowed the now extinct Tasmanian race, for there is no ques-
tion that the more one examines the problems attaching to the
Tasmanian, the more the opinion forces itself upon one's atten-
tion.

Concerning the second of these debatable points — ** With
what race is the Tasmanian most closely allied?" the consensus
of opinion appears to be in favour of regarding the Tasmanians
as quite distinct from their neighbours of the adjacent Austra-
lian mainland, and, second, of allying them to the much more
distant Papuans of New Guinea, or, rather, to the primitive
stock from which that people may have been derived.

As regards the first point, and, incidentally, the second also,
Mr. Protector Parker, quoted by Bonwick (5), says : —

'• It is one of the many strange anomalies of Australian geo-
graphy that a branch of this Papuan race should have been found
in Australia (i.e., Tasmania), whose woolly hair and blacker com-
plexion clearly distinguish them from the Continental Austra-
lian, and yet that no branch of the same family should be found
on the shores of the mainland nearest the presumed locality
where the race originated."

Gaarson, who contributed the osteological chapters to Roth's
work on the Tasmanian aborigines (12), says: —

'* The race to which the Tasmanians might naturaJlly be
thought most allied from their geographical position is the Aus-
tralian, but many points in the physical characters of the two
races are so totally unlike as to render this relationship pro-
blematical."

Topinard, the great French anthropologist (15), stated that the
skulls of Australians and Tasmanians examined by him differed
considerably, and he gave it as his opinion that these two peoples
were distinct races.

Huxley (16) points out thart; the type of Australian man is
quite distinct from that of the Tasmanian.

A Half-caste Tasmanian, I 1

It. would therefore appear that, so far from the Tasmanian
being akin to his nearest neighbour, the Australian aboriginal,
he is rather to be regarded as being closely allied, as we shall
now endeavour to show, to the much more distant Papuan of
New Guinea, and the adjacent islands.

At the present day, the region of Melanesia, which includes
ftll the islands from New Guinea in the west to Fiji in the east
is inhabited by the blajck Papuan, or Melanesian race, a race
which includes the people of New Guinea, the Bismarck Archi-
pelago, the Admiralty Islands, the Solomon Islands, the New
Hebrides, and New Caledonia. All these people have frizzly
hair, and it is one of their characteristics that the whole head
of hair has much the appearance of a mop (17). It is to the^e
people that the now extinct Tasmanian aboriginal is to be al-
lied, that is if the following testimony is to be relied upon : —

That Prichard (10) held this view as to the identity of the
Tasmanian with the Papuan is obvious, for his statement is ais
follows : —

"From the southern extremity of New Britain and New Ire-
land, tribes of Pelagian negroes are spread along the chains of
Louisiade and Solomon Isles to Santa Cruz, and thence still
farther to several of the New Hebrides and to New Caledonia.
. . . . Lastly, the Tasmanians .... are decidedly of
the Pelagian negro stock."

Garson sums up this question admirably in the osteological
chapter already referred to (l2), for he therein says: —

'*In some respects, the Tasmanians resemble very closely the
Negrito race, not only in the character of their hair, but in some
of their osteological characters. Their relationship to the Poly-
nesians, though suggested, has not received much support. The
Melanesian race has, by many persons, been claimed as that to
which the Tasmanians are most nearly allied, and many of their

physical characters support this hypothesis From

the osteological characters and those of the hair, skin, etc., it
appears as if the Tasmanians were most allied to the Negrito
and Melanesian types. In amy case, the Tasmanians have re-
naained for a long period isolated from other races, ais evidenced
by the uniformity of their osteological characters.

It may seem somewhat difficult to relate the Tasmanians to
the two races just named, so far separated tmder the present

12 Richard J. A. Berry:

existing geographical distribution of land and water. The
" Negritos appear to have been much more widely spread than at
present, and give every evidence of being a very primitive type ;
so that, as Flower has suggested, they may be the primitive
stock from which the Melanesians on the one hand, and the
African negroes on the other, have been derived. Such an hypo-
thesis of the relationship of the Negrito to the Melanesian would
explain, perhaps, the similarity of physical characters found to
exist between these races and the Tasmanians. Should this be
the case, the Tasmanians would, like the Andamanese, be the
remnants of a primitive stock from which the other Melanesians
have sprung."

Huxley's opinion on this . intricate question is as follows
(16):-

" In the Andamanese Island^', in the Peninsula of Malacca, in
the Philippines, in the islands which stretch from Wallace's line
eastward and southward, nearly parallel with the east coast of
Australia to New Caledonia, and finally in Tasmania, men with
dark skin and woolly hair occur who constitute a special modi-
fication of the Negroid type — the Negritos. Only the Anda-
manese have presented skulls approaching or exceeding an index
of 80, all the other Negritos, the crania of which have been

examined, are dolichocephalic The best known and

most typical of these Eastern Negritos are the inhabitants of
Tasmania and of New Caledonia, and those of islamds of Torres
Straits and of New Guinea. In the outlying islands to the
eastward, especially in the Fijis, the Negritos have certainly
undergone considerable intermixture with the Polynesians ; and
it seems probable that a smiilar crossing with Malays may have
occurred in New Guinea."

Flower (18) is brief and to the point. He says: — "The view
then that 1 am most inclined to adopt of the origin of the Tas-
manian is that they are derived from the same stock as the
Papuans or Melanesians."

Gigiioli (19), quoted by Howitt, concludes that the Tasmanians
were members of the great Papuan family, and that they owed
their inferiority to the complete state of isolation in which they
have existed ever since that very remote epoch.

Mathew (20) apparently holds the like view, for he thinks the

A Half'COHte luswanian. 11^

first occupants of Australia were a pure Paipuan fainily, of which
the Tasmanians are the lineal descendants, whilst the Australian
aboriginal has resulted from a crossing, on the mainland, of that
primitive stock by one, or two, other subsequent invasions.

Howitt, in his '' Native Tribes of South-East Australia " (14)
does not make it very clear as to whether he hold% the Tas-
manian as most nearly allied to the Papuan or not. His exact
words are that he would suggest the following tenta/tive hypo-
thesis :

" An original Negrito population, as represented by the wild
tribes of Malaysia ; a subsequent offshoot, represented by the An-
damanese and Tasmanians ; and another offshoot in a higher state
of culture, originating the Melanaesians." So far as I can interpret
this view, Howitt at ail events regards the Papuan as not being
farther removed from the Tasmanian than a younger brother is
from his elder brother, and if this interpretation be correct, it
brings Roth'ts (12) view that the Tasmanian is most nearly
allied to the Andamanese into line with all the other views
quoted. An objection to the alliance between the Andamanese
and the Tasmanian is Huxley's remark that the Andamanese
skull is brachycephalic or mesaticephalic, whilst the Papuan is
markedly dolichocephalic.

It is, therefore, perhaps not too much to assume tha-t the
native Tasmanian is more nearly allied to the Papuan than to
any other race, and in assuming even this much, it must be re-
membered that nothing more is meant than that the Papuan as
we now see him, the Tasmanian as he recently existed, and,
posi^ibly, the Andamanese Islander, are nut more widely apart
than arc the sons of one father. In this connection, however,
it ought to be possible in a country like Australia, with one of
the families actually living in close contact with the mainland,
and the other only recently extinct, and equally accessible, to
obtain positive proof, for what is necessary is an examination of
the skulls and other osteological remains of the two branches
of the race. If such an examination be not conducted, and that
at once, it will be little short of a national disgrace, whilst for
the policy which consists in scattering the most valuable Tas-
manian material et hoc genus onme in European and other
foreign museums, I have nothing but condemnation. The

i4 Richard J, A. Bevvy:

material havint;^ been sown in Australia, let Australians see to it
that they reap the harvest.

Pending the arrival of this positive proof as to the relation-
ship between the Papuan and the Tasmanian, we shall assume,
on the opinions of those whose works have been quoted, that
such is reaHy the case, and now, therefore, we pass to the third
and laist question, how did the Papuan get to Tasmania?

If the foregoing view as to tMe identity of the Papuan and the
Tasmanian, using the terms * Papuan " and '* identity '' in their
very broadest sense, be correct, it implies that representatives
of the same Papuan ^tock have become widely separated, both
geographically and ethnologically ; geographically by the separa-
tion of the islands of New Guinea and Tasmania from the Conti-
nent of Austrailia ; and ethnologically by the interpolation of a
distinct race, the Australian aboriginal.

On this point, Bonwick asks the question (5): — * Hoa' could
the woolly haired Papuans of Tasmania get so far separated from
the woolly haired Papuans of New Guinea;, New Hebrides, etc.,
whilst having their cousins of more luxuriant hair occupying
the Continent of Australia between the two?" He answers his
own question by assuming that "parts of New Holland (Aus-
tralia) were united to New Guinea, to New Zealand, a*nd to
Tasmania,*' and a little farther on Bonwick adds, "The Aus-
tralians proper are now confined between the two great seats
of the so-called Pajpuan race, and as there are no evidences of
their race dwelling in New Zealand, New Guinea, o-r in New
Caledonia, it is much to be doubted whether their advent in
their Australian home was not after the separation of those
islands. In the same way, it may be that they came after Tas-
mania became disconnected."

It is a somewhat remarkable fact that although that part of
Bonwiok's assumption relative to a primitive land connection
between Australia and New Zealand is not capable of geological
proof, the land connection between New Guinea, Eastern Aus-
tralia, and Tasmania, may be regarded as certain from the re-
searches of Wallace (11), Howitt (14), Spencer (22), and many
others. Since Bonwiok's time, Wallace (11), working out the
problems attendant on the distribution of New Zealand flora,
has also endeavoured to show that during the early cretaceous

A Half-caste Tasfnianian, 15

period > the present continent of Australia was divided into two
parts, an Eastern and a Western Australia.

His precise statement is as follows : —

" If we examine the geological map of Australia (given in
" Stanford's Compendium of Geography and Travel, volume
Australasia), we shall see good reason to conclude that the
eastern and the western divisions of the country first existed
as separate islands, and only became united at a comparatively
recent epoch. This is indicated by an enormous stretch of cre-
taceous amd tertiary formations extending from the Gulf of
Carpentaria completely across the Continent to the mouth of
the Murray River At this epoch then .... Aus-
tralia may not improbably have consisted of a very large and
fertile western island, almost or quite extra-tropical, and extend-
ing from the silurian rocks of the Flinders Range in South
Australia, to about 150 miles west of the present west coast, and
southward to about 350 miles south of the Great Australian
Bight To the east of this, at a distance of from 250 to 400
miles, extended in a north and south direction, a long, but com-
paratively narrow island, stretching from far south of Tasmania
to New Guinea, while the crystalline and secondary formations
of Central North Australia probably indicate the existence of
one or more large islands in that direction."

I am informed that Wallace's contention as to complete sepa-
ration of the Australian Continent into two halves is geologi-
cally untenable, althougK the wide extension of a cretaceous sea
over what is now Central Australia, as well as the land connec-
tions between New Guinea, Elastern Australia, and Tasmania
are admitted.

Notwithstanding that certain parts of Bonwick's assumptions
as to land connections have thus been proved to be correct, the
theory which he built thereon as to the origin of the Tasmanians
cannot, in my opinion, be sustained. Bon wick assumed the pre-
sence of a large southern continent, by means of which Austra-
lia, Tasmania, and New Zealand were connected together, and
he thinks thait both the Tasmanians and the Australians eman-
ated primarily from this continent. The submergence of this
continent, and the subsequent separation of Tasmania from the
Australian mainland resulted in the long isolation of the Tas-

16 Richard J, A. Berry:

manians. Whilst this theory is hardly caipable, as stated, of be-
inp: sustained, it is only fair to mention that in favour of it
there is a view that, the aboriginal inhabitants of the southern
extremities of the three great continents of Australia, South
Africa, and South America, thait is the Tasmanians, the Bushmen,
and the Fuegians, appear to have some features in common,
though even this similarity is much more closely confined to
the Tasmanians and the Bushmen than to the Fuegians, the
last mentioned of which differ very markedly in stature from
the first two mentioned races.

If, however, we reverse Bonwick's theory, and make the Tas-
manians emanate from the north instead of from the south, it
seems to me that we approach much more nearly to the known
facts, and, before broaching this theory, which is no new one, it
will be well to state what are the facts, meagre at the best,
upon which we have to build.

It is certain that the Tasmanian had no knowledge of naviga-
tion ; it is almost certain that he is of great antiquity, and that
he is closely allied to the Papuan of the New Guinea district ; it
is further known that the Northern or New Guinea section of
the family is, or was, until recently, separated from the Southern
or Tasmanian section by the presence of a different race, the
Australian aboriginal; whilst, lastly, it may be taken as fully
proved that there was once a land connection between New
Guinea, Eastern Australia, and Tasmania.

With these, the nearest approaches to facts available to us,
and assuming the land connections to have been somewhat a^
sketched, the distribution of the Papuan race, or the primitive
progenitors of that race, would have extended from what is now
New Guinea in the north to what is now Tasmania in the south,
and this extended range would require no knowledge of naviga-
tion. The separation of New Guinea and Tasmania would then
have broken up the race into three areas. New Guinea, the nar-
row belt of Eastern Australia, or more likely the present Aus-
tralian mainland, and Tasmania. The lack of knowledge of
navigation would have confined each section to the area on which
it then found itself, whilst the subsequent introduction of a new
race into the Australian continent would, on the assumption
«)f those who hold the Australian aboriginal to be a homogeneous

• A Half-caste Tdsmanian. 17

race, have resulted in the extermination of the existing Papuan
element in the mainland by the new occupants, the Australian
aboriginal, or on the view of those who hold the Australian abo-
riginal to be an admixture of Negro or Papuan stock with some
other race or races, would, by cross breeding with the Papuan,
form the present aboriginal race. Thus there would be a
detached group of Papuans in the North, a detached group of
Papuans in the south, and ai central group differing from the
north and south groups, which is exactly what is found. Fur-
ther, these races would be of great antiquity, though not neces-
sarily of tertiary times, though even this is not impossible,
whilst, lastly, the Taemanian would have reached Tasmania by
land in very distant periods. He would, therefore, be of a
most ancient race ; he would have no knowledge of navigation ;
he would differ from the inhabitants of the adjacent mainlaoid
of Australia; and also from those of New Zealand. He would
be closely allied to the natives of distant New Guinea, but would
from his isolation and from the apparent fact that he had not
been visited by other and more recent races, retain his primitive
manners, and show less signs of advancement than his brothers
of New Guinea, all of which coincides in every detail with what
we know of this unhappily extinct race, the extinction of which
is a blot upon the fair history of British colonisaition.

Even though this theory be accepted, the writer has no desire
to claim any exclusive rights in, or priority for, the view, for
it is merely a revised version of what many anthropologists
have already put forward. Howitt (14) has long held the view
that the Tasmanians came from the north, and has stated : — '^I
have long since come to the conclusion that one of the ftinda-
mental principles to be adopted in discussing the origin of those
^Tasmanian) savages must be, that they reached Tasmania att a
time when there was a laiid communication between it and Aus-
tralia."

Bonwick (5) hais stated that ; — " The fact of the crisp-haired
Papuans being found in islands all round the New Holland
(Australian) coasts, and over so vast an extent of space, ought
certainly to indicate their prior migration to that of the Aus-
Iraliaois.''

Flower (18) has, in his usual clear and terse way, sunuued
oip the whole theory in the words, '' they (the Tasmanians)

18 Richard J* A, Berry:

reached Van Dieman's Land, by way of Australia, long anterior
to the commencement of the comparatively high civilisation of
those portions of the race &till inhabiting New Guinea and the
adjacent islamds, and also anterior to the advent of the existing
native race, characterised by their straight hair amd by the pos-
session of such weapons as the boomerang, throwing stick, and
shield, quite xmknown to the Tasmanian/'

De -Quatefages (21) says: — In Australia there are two dis-
tinct types — Australians proper and Australian Neanderlhaloides
-7-the latter a small group occupying the country about Adelaide,
and having, among other characteristics, hair which closely re-
sembles the woolly hadr of the negro This fact can

be accounted for by presuming that true negroes formerly oc-
cupied the whole or a part of Australia; that they were invaded
by a black race with straight hair; and that it is to a blood
mixture that the differences in the hair must be attributed. It
is probable that the Tasmanians furnished this negritic element.
Their former existence in Australia hajs nothing about it which
may not be very natural, and their facial characteristics occa-
sionally approximate closely enough to those of the Australians
to allow of the probability of this hypothesis. An examination
of the skulls of Australians with woolly hair from the Southei'n
tribes would probably solve the question. Finally, if my con-
jecture be well founded, we must admit that the crossing must
have taken place at a very remote period, and that the woolly
hair could only reappear more or less modified by atavistic phe-
nomena."

Of the objectors to am essential part of the theoi*y, namely,
that the Tasmauian ancestry first inhabited, or passed through
the Australian continent on their wuy to Tasmania, Huxley
(16) IS the most important. He considers that it is ** physically
inxpossible that the Tieudnl'anian <iou\d have come from Aitstralia,
and apparently the only way of accounting for the presence of
the Tasmanian was to assimie his migratibn from New Caledonia
and the neighbouring ishmds. It would appear that at one time
a low negrito type spread eastwards, and reached Tasmania, not
by means of direct and Uninterrupted land communication be-
tween New Caledonia and Tasmania, but rather by means of
broken land in the form of a chain of islands now submerged,

A Half-caste Taarfianian, 19

similar to that which at present extends between New Caledonia
and New Guinea."

In view of Howitt's subsequent work, to which reference has
already been made, it does not appear to me that Huxley's ob-
jection to the land theory of the Tasmanian migration can any
longer be regarded as tenable, and whether the present theory
be upheld, or whether it be replaced by some other theory
based on a surer foundation of fact than is as yet possible, I
am convinced that Howitt's view as to the migration by land
will eventually be found to be the correct foundation on which
that theory will be built.

I can, therefore, only conclude by expressing the hope that
this epitome of so much that is at present mere visionary theory
will lead to the accumulation of such a collection of jnaterial
as will enable us to ascertain the true facts of the case, and
that the credit of the discovery will belong, as it ought to do,
to Australia and Australian scientists.

WORKS REFERRED TO IN THE TEXT.

1. Anonymous. "Gazetteer of the World." Edited by a

member of the Royal Geographical Society Vol.

iv., page 445. Edinburgh, London and Dublin ... 1856

2. Ohisholm, G. 0. Longman's Gazetteer of the World."

Edited by G. C. Ohisholm. Page 771. London 1895

3. Admiralty Sailing Directions. Australia Directory.

. Vol. i., page 294. Ninth edition. London ... 1897

4. Hallack, E. H. " Kangaroo Island." Adelaide ...1905

5. Boowick, James, F.R.G.S. ** Daily Life and Origin

of the Tasmanians." London ... ... 1870

6. Ibid. " The Lost Tasmanian Race." Lmdon ... 1884

7. Flower. Journal of the Anthropological Institute 1885

8. Duckworth, W. L. H. " Morphology and Anthropo-

logy." Page 358. Cambridge ... ... 1904

9. Evans, G. W. "History and Description of the

Present State of Van Dieiiiau's Land." Page 19.

Liondon ... ... ... ••• ••• 1824

2a

20 Richard J. A. Berry: A Half -caste TasTnanian,

10. Prichard, J. C. "The Natural History of Man."

Vol. ii., page 467. London... ... . 1855

11. Wallace, A. R. "Island Life." Third and revised

edition. London ... ... ... ... 1902

12. Roth, H. Ling. "The Aborigines of Tasmania.

London ... ... ... ... ... 1890

13 Tylor, E. B. "On the Tasmanians as Representatives

of Palaeolithic Man." Journal Anthropological

Institute, November ... ... ... 1893

U. Howitt, A. W. "The Native Tribes of South-East

Australia." London ... ... ... 1904

15. Topinard. Mem. Soc. d'Anth. Vol. iii., page 322 1869

16. Huxley, T. H. Journal of Ethnological Society.

Vol. 11. ... ... ... ... ... lofv

17. Hutchinson, Gregory, and Lydekker. "The Living

Races of Mankind " ... ... 1906

18. Flower, Sir W. H. "The Aborigines of Tasmania."

Manchester and London ... ... ... 1878

19. Giglioli, E. H. "I Tasmaniaui conni storice ed etno-

logici di un popolo estinto." Page 174. Milan ... 1874

20. Mathew, John. "Eaglehawk and Crow." London

and Melbourne ... ... ... ... 1899

21. De Quatrefages. " Introduction 4 TEtude des Races

Humaines." Paris ... ... ... 1899

22. Spencer, W. Baldwin. Rep. Aust. Assoc. Adv. Sci.,

President's Address, Sec. D. ... ... 1892

DESCRIPTION OF PLATE L

Photograph of half-caste Tasmanian woman from Kangaroo
Island (on right) and her daughter, a quarter-caste Tasmanian
(on left).

•••

• •••

• •••.

•••••

• • •
•• ••

•••••

• •

• • •

.....

w

--■'

[Pboc. Eot. Soc. Victoria, 20 (N.S.), Pr. 1., 1907 ]

Art II. — Note on the Deposition of Bedded Tuffs*

By T. S. hall, M.A.

Melbourne University.

(With Plate II.).
[Read 11th April, 1907].

In many, if not most, of the places in South-western Victoria
where tuffs are displayed they are well stratified. These tuffs
are associated with the basaltic lavas which form such a feature
of the geology of th€ State, and are referable to various parts
of the tertiary period. The volcanic rocks cover, according to Sel-
wyn, somewhere about 9000 square miles, or about a tenth of the
total area of Victoria.

The tuffs with which we are at present concerned are usually
fawn-coloured, and vary with considerable irregularity in the
size of their constituent grains. They show a tendency to split
into flags along their bedding planes, and are fairly coherent,
so that they are used, as in the neighbourhood of Camperdown,
as a rough building stone.

The decomposition of the tuffs and of the coarser scoria
yields a remarkably rich soil, and the porous subsoil affords both
natural dradnage and a capacity for storing up water. The tuffs
are then commonly tree-clad.

Among the plaices which have come under my notice where
well bedded tuffs are to be seen are two belonging to the older
volcanic series, which is here seen to underlie the marine Bar-
wonian beds. One of these is at Curlewis, about eight miles
east of Geelong, where on the beach platform a continuously dip-
ping series is seen extending for about four miles. The basalt
of similar age at Airey's Inlet is also associated with well bed-
ded tuffs which dip inland from the shore, pointing to the old
vent having been out at sea.

Among the more recent tuffs which also show this character
may be enumerated those of Mount Leura and BuUenmerri,
near Camperdown. These beds cover a very large area. On the

22 T. S. Hall:

flanks of Tower Hill, as the railway runs down through cuttings
towards WarrnamboQl, well stratified tuffs are extensively dis-
played. There is a similar well bedded tuff, though only a few
feet in thickness, overlying the Kalimnan at '^ McDonald's " on
Muddy Creek, near Hamilton. Quite recently I have seen many
square miles of equally well bedded tuffs about Mount Gambler
in the south-east corner of South Australia, and to these atten-
tion will be more fully directed later.

Similar, though usually obscure, bedding is shown in the
scoria on the flanks of Mount Leurai. The great banks have
been extensively worked for many years for railway ballast and
for covering footpaths, so that ever changing sections wer«
displayed.

Though bedding appears extremely common in the tuffs, it is
not universal, and I call to mind a section shown in a road out-
ting near the Park gates at Camperdown where bedded tuffa
show a faulted contact with unstratified ones.

The bedding is generally of such a well marked character that
rough flags can be quaorried almost everywhere.

The question arises. To what is this bedding due? Was the
deposition subaqueous or merely subaerial? Till recently 1
never thought of the possibility of anything but subaerial de-
position being suggested in most of the places mentioned. Pro-
fessor J. W. Gregory^ holds that the beds round Camperdown
are of subaqueous origin, and that the stratification is due to
sorting by water. Of the correctness of this view I have doubts,
and I have lately found evidence at Mount Gambler which shows
that well bedded tuffs may owe their stratification to subaerial
sorting, and hence no reason exists for calling on large lakes
or the sea to explain their character.

The assertion of subaqueous deposition for all these tuffs would
demand the existence of large bodies of water, either marine or
fresh water, extending over very wide areas and at various
periods. The well-bedded tufl's of Curlewis and Airey's Inlet
are older tertiary age. Those of Koroit, Muddy Creek and
Mount Gambler are recent. The BuUenmerri tuffs may be
pleistocene. The supposed subaqueous deposition of the tuffs of

1 Geography of ^'ictoria, p. 128.

Deposition of Bedded Tuffs. 23

various age» and localities is the only evidence in favour of the
former existence of these seas or lakes, and that, too, at times
in peculiar positions in reference to the modem surface drainage.

Then, again, the tuffs, though stratified and very evenly bed-
ded, are not of uniform grain. Taking a small piece, stratifica-
tion is not evident. Dust and small scoriaceous fragments seem
mingled in confusion. It is the fine matter which brings about
the fissility, and yet the amount of commingled larger material
is considerable. There are, of course, well marked beds of dust,
amd equally well marked ones of coarse grain, but to my mind
the sorting is not as thourogh as it would have been had water-
that is, standing water — been the cause of the beddintj^.

Mud torrents have been suggested, but they also are, I think,
out of the question. Such torrents would, if they formed strati-
fied deposits at all, show false bedding, and not layer after
layer through a thickness of many feet, and a lateral measure-
ment of scores of yards.

However, apart from this, we have ait Mount Gambler evidence
which, I think, shows clearly tbsut tu|^s, as well stratified as
any of those of the Camperdown district, may occur under con-
ditions which forbid aquepus action.

A iMrief sketch of the geology of the district is necessary to
enable this evidence to be properly weighed.

The bed-rock over hundreds of square miles is a white lime-
stone mainly composed of polyzoal remains. This is of Bar-
wonian age (? Eocene), and is, as far as can be seen, quite
horizontal. It is extremely porous, and water-courses are absent.
There are, of course, many swallow holes, caves and underground
drainage channels, so that many of the irregularities of the sur-
face are undoubtedly due to subterranean solution. This point
may be considered unfavourable to my view, so that I wish to be
properly considered. The general surface of the country is
slightly undulating, and the hills to the north of the town are,
for the most part, sandy. They are, in fact, sand dunes of
pleistocene or recent age, and vary somewhat in the amount of
lime they contain, and consequently in the amount of con-
solidation they have undergone. In places they are loose yellow
sands, and in other places consist of the ordinary cross-bedded
dune-rook. A few miles to the south of the town similar dune-

24 T, S. HaU:

rook forms the surface, and the typical form of the oupe so
characteristic of dunes is easily traced. In other places we find
long, branching and anastomosing ridges, the dune-rock being
frequently capped by the white so-called travertine, the residue
of evaporated ground water.

We thus have two limestones, the lower one a marine, poly-
zoal-rock, and the upper an aeolian one. The marine limestone
affords a richer soil, and ait the same time flints are commonly
scattered on the surface, while they are not found in the dune-
rock. So that the preeence of flints is a key to the underlying
rock.

It will be seen that a large number of the low ridges and hills
cannot be ascribed to subterranean denudation, for in the flats
and valleys between them flints olten occur, and swallow holes
and cavee are common. The hills are isolated, or practically
isolated ridges of calcareous, wind-borne sand. It is essential
that this fact be insisted on, and I paid attention to it in several
places in the district. The dunes extend inland for many miles,
and probably lose their marine origin as they pass north through
the mallee country.

A mile to the south of the town of Mount Gaimbier occurs the
mount itself, a voloanio pile. There has been practically no
effusion of lava. A sheet of it is seen inside the shattered crater
walls, and was the first material ejected. The tuffs extend for
two or three miles round the foot of the mount, and are of no
great thickness.

A little more than a mile south of the mount is a long east
and west ridge of dune rock. This rises some fifty feet above
the surrounding country, and is crossed by two roads, one going
south to Port Macdonnell, and the other a couple miles east
of it, leading to Nelson at the mouth of the Glenelg river. Both
these roads pass through cuttings about twelve feet deep and
show dune rock capped by tuffs. The tuffs asce well-bedded,
quite as distinctly and as evenly as anything shown about
Camperdown. They, moreover, show a marked peculiarity in
that they follow the contour of the ground closely. It is not a
case of a tuff capping the hill and being missing on the flanks.
The bedding planes are parallel to the present surface. They
rise from the north, cross the ridge and sink down towards the

Deposition of Bedded Tujk. 25

south, forming » UAiiket4ike oorering of eren thicknesft, which
is quite unbrokni.

This feature is diagramnuiticaUT shovn <m the two roads men-
tioned, and, afto: noting them from the eoach, I walked oot to
the ''Corkscrew/' as the winding road orer the ridge on the
Port road is called, and examined the section with care.

The same feature is shown in the town itself. GraT-street,
at about a hundred vards north of Conmiercial-road. crosses a
dune ridge about thirty or f<HtT feet high. A thin tuff-sheet
follows the contour exactly as in the cases just mentioned. West
of this point, about a quarter of a mile, in a street running
north from the State school, well-bedded tuffs dip east off an
eastward facing slope of dune rock, their dip agreeing with the
slope. In this case I did not atten^>t to trace them over the
hill and down the counter slope to the west. In Gray-street, a
thin layer of old soil intervenes betwe^i the dune-rock and the
tuff. Three of these sections are, I think, crucial, and the fourth
appears similar to them. It is surely impossible for materia]
to have been deposited from water in this way. At the '' Cork-
screw," the stratification lines can be traced for a hundred yards,
the beds are but the fraction of an inch thick, and there is no
thickening of the deposit on the flanks. The whole is perfectly
regular. Had the Gray-street hill been under water, the old
soil, at any rate, must have been swept away.

Hitherto no reference has been made to the tuffs of other
countries. My adm has been to show that the tuffs of south-
western Victoria exhibit no characters inconsistent with aerial
deposition, and by this, I do not mean that a strong wind-drift
took place, for this would produce cross-bedding, a thing I
haive not seen, but merely a sorting of material raised into the
atmosphere, not by wind, but by volcanic explosion.

Professor Judd says^ : — "Thus the tuffs covering the city of
Pompeii are found to consist of nimierous thin layers of lapilli
and volcanic dust, prefectly distinct from one another, and as-
suming even the arrangement which we usually regard as
characteristic of materials that have been deposited from sus-
pension in water. The fragmentary materials in failing through
the air are sorted "

1 " Volcanoes," p. 117.

?6 T. S. Hall : Deposition of Bedded Tijuffs,

What is true of these Vesuvian tuffs is true of our Victorian
ones, and there is no need to cadi the agency of water to account
for their stratification.

SUMMARY.

1. The well-stratified tuffs of Mount Gambier closely follow
the contour of hill and valley, and so could not have been deposit-
ed from water.

2. There is no evidence of large bodies of water occurring at
different ages throughout Western Victoria, which would be re-
quired if the tuffs were subaqueous deposits.

3. Consequently, all our stratified tuffs may be subaerial, an4
not subaqueous formations.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATE II.

Cutting on road to Port Macdonnell, three miles south of
Mt. Gram bier. The arch in the bedding of the tuffs on the crown
of the hill is clearly visible. The small oaves under the tuffs are
caused by the removal of the old surface soil by wind. The core
of the arch is formed of dune-rock.

•••

• ,• • • •

• •••*•

••••
• • •-

• • •

•

• ••••

• ••••

• • •

•••••

•••••.

•i •

•••••

■ • •

[Pboc. Rot. Soc. Victoria, 20 (N.S.), Pt. I., 1907.]

Art. III. — New Species of Australian Chiton from
Queensland J Enoplochiton torri.

By R. a. BASTOW and J. H. GATLIFF.

(With Plates III. and IV.).
[Read 11th AprU, 1907].

We have received from W. G. Torr, LL.D., of Adelaide, an in-
teresting form of Chiton, which has been obtained on the coast
of Queensland, and have placed it, provisionally, in the genus
Enoplochiton of Pilabry's Chitonidae,^ as that appears to be the
best fitted for its reception.

Only one species has been hitherto described, Enoplochiton
niger, Barnes, which occurs on the coast ol Peru. It is v»y in-
teresting to find that we have a representative of this rare genus
in Australian waters.

The following is the original description of the genus : —

Enoplochiton, Gray.

P.Z.S., 1847, pp. 65, 69, 169.

Valves exposed, of a uniform dark brown or chocolate colour
outside and within ; the lateral areas and head-valve irregularly
studded with extremely minute eyes. Interior minutely lami-
nated and punctate in a peculiar pattern ; sinus deep, denticu-
late. Insertion plate of anterior and median valves slit into
teeth and sharply pectinated outside. Tail valve having the
mucro posterior and terminal, and inside with a flat ledge of
callus in place of the lacking insertion plaite. Girdle fleshy,
bearing extremely broad and short, blunt, separated, striated
scales.

Enoplochiton torri, sp. nov. (PI. III. and IV., Fig. 1-12).

Description. — Shell oblong, convex, dorsal angle rounded. The
whole surface finely pustulated. Colour blackish brown, with

1 Tryon's Manual of Concholoify, vol. xiv., pp. viii. and 252.

28 BastowandOaUiff:

creamy angular markings at eaoh side of the dark well-defined
dorsal triangular area. Girdle alternating blaokish brpwn and
creamy, with radiating separated soales.

In perfect specimens the mediam yalves are beaked, and are
covered over their whole surfaces with small granulated pustules,
for the most part in longitudinal and transverse lines, the diago-
nal rib not showing very plainly. The triangular patch of colour
on the dorsal ridge is evident on all the specimens examined.
The anterior valve is pustulated over the whole surface in a
concentric manner; the anterior portion of the posterior valve
is radially pustulated, and the posterior part is similar to the
median valves.

The interior is considerably coloured brownish purple, and the
surface finely laminated ; the sinus is broad and denticulate ;
the anterior valve has ten slits, the teeth are long, deep, sharply
and closely pectinated outside ; the median valves have one slit ;
there are no slits in the posterior valve, but the posterior edge
is strongly denticulate.

The girdle is tough and fleshy, difficult to remove, bearing
numerous wide, blunt, striated, separated scales; in the inter-
stices are a few scattered spines.

The head-valve is studded with numerous bright, clear, amber
eyes, not ocelli, but real and very human-looking eyes ; these
also occur on the lateral areas and on the posterior valve. They
have optic nerves which can be traced by slightly decalcifying
the valve and thus making bare the eye orbit ; the nerve threads
pass from the eyes to the mantle of the animal, as may be de-
tected by breaking away the teeth from the ventral surface of
the anterior valve, the outlets of the nerve threads are then
revealed in the caves, just under the tegmentum, and from
thence, Mr. Pilsbry informs us, they are connected to the central
ganglion. There are also numerous punctures on the ventral
sides of the valves, and a multitude of megalopores and micro-
pores visible as very narrow granulated «triations over the
pustules of the dorsal areas (Fig. 3) with chambers embedded
in the shell; these are all similanrly connected; it is probable
that these latter are also nerve channels for tactile, auditory,
or other sense organs. The girdle, with its radially striated

Naw Species of Chiton, 29

^

scales, is unmistakably well secured to the very numerous and
deeply-cleft teeth in the insertion plates.

Dimensions. — Length, 13.20 mm. ; breadth, 10.15 mm.

Locality. — Queensland (Dr. TorrJ.

Observations. — The genus Enoplochiton, probably the highest
form of Chiton life (excepting perhaps Tonicia and Acantho-
pleura) is new to Australia, and it is one of the most interesting
objects in Molluscan development.

The new species is not a typical form, and we have placed it
in this genus provisionally, as it has the characteristics of
numerous oval eyes and a scaled girdle, but these girdle scales
in the Australian species are smaller, much more numerous
amd closely compacted ; and the whole of the dorsal sculpture
is gramulate ; whereas in £. niger the sculpture is incised.
The eyes in our species are very much larger.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES III. AND IV.

The following figuree of details are from another specimen
slightly varying in colouration: —

Fig. 1. — Enoplochiton torri, Bastow and Gatliff.

Fig. 2. — Girdle, dorsal aspect.

Fig. 3. — An enlarged view of one of the eye orbits shown in

Fig. 2, also very fine granulation which extends
over the whole of the pustules on the valves.

Fig. 4. — Dorsal aspect of portion of anterior valve, tilted up so

as to show the teeth. The eyes are .075 x .050
mm.

Fig. 5. — Partially decalcified anterior valve, dorsal aspect, show-
ing eye orbits and optic nerves, also partly
eroded teeth.

Fig. 6. — Anterior valve, dorsal aspect, in nat\u*al state, show-
ing arrangements of pustules.

Fig. 7. — ^Anterior valve ventral aspect, showing teeth punctures,

slits; part of the teeth are broken away to show
the ends of nerve channels, where they connect
with the nerve system of mamtle.

30 Bastmv and Qatliff: New Species of Chiton.

Fig. 8. — Median valve, dorsal aspect.

Fig. 9. — ^Median va]ve, ventral aspect, showing grooves and

punctures, also the jagged denticullition of slit

and insertion plate.
Fig. 10. — Posterior valve, dorsal aspect.
Fig. 11. — Posterior vadve, ventral aspect, with peculiar grooves

in eaves, and denticulation.
Fig. 12. — Anterior and aspect of median valve, showing dorsal

angle and pectination of sinus.

All the figures are considerably enlarged.

Pioc. K.S. Victoi-in, 1907. Plate III.

I

m^^

• ••

'•••.:•

••••*•

•••••

• ••,

« •

•• •-

• • •

to
**>to • to

•* toto to

'^v,

^ c>

True. R.S- \'ictoria, lEIOT. Plato iV.

• •••

•v.;-

•••••

• •

•• ••

•••••

• • •

•••••
• ••••

[Paoc. JBoY. Soc. Victoria, 20 (N.S.), Pt. I., 1907.]

Art. IV. — Additions to the Catalogue of ihe Marine

Shells of Victoria.

By J. H. GATLIFF.

[Read 11th April, 1907.]

Since the Catalogue was compiled, new species have been
found and described, and others obtained here that have been
named previously.

The following list records 18 species of univalves and 10
species of bivalves. Some changes in nomenclature have also been
made, and they will probably be given on a future occasion.

Mitra cineracea, Eeeve.

1845. Mitra cineracea, Reeve. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 57.
1845. Mitra cineracea. Reeve, Conch. Icon., vol. ii., pi.

37, f. 311.
1874. Mitra cineracea, Sowerby. Thes. Conch., vol iv.,

p. 32, pi. 373, f. 494, 495.
1882. Turricula (Costellaria) cineracea, Tryon. Man.

Conch., vol. iv., p. 175, pi 52, f. 492.
1886. Mitra (Pusia) cineracea, Watson. Chall. Zool., vol.
XV., p. 251.
Hab. — Off East Moncoeur Island, Bass Straits (Challenger).
Obs. — I have not yet found this species; the shell is about 16
mm. in length and about 7 mm. in breadth, it is turreted, color
ashy grey and white, sculpture strong.

Mangilia delicatula, T. Woods.

1879. Mangelia delicatula, T. Woods. P.R.S. Tas., p. 37.
1S84. Daphnella delicatula, Tryon. Man. Conch., vol.

vi., p. 332, pi. 32, f. 29.
1901. Mangelia delicatula, Tate and May. P.L.S. N.S.W.
vol. xxvi., p. 369, pi. 24, f. 35.
Hab.— Dredged 6 to 8 fathoms off Phillip Island, Western Port.
Obs. — Similiar in size and general habit to M. alucinans,,
Sowerby. s

32 J. K Gatliff:

Mangilia granuiosissima, T. Woods.

1879. Clathurella granulosissima, T. Woods. P.R.S.
Tas., p. 37.

1884. Clathurella granulosissima, Tryon. Man. Conch.,

vol. vi., p. 282, pi. 32, f. 20.
1901. Clathurella granulosissima, Tate and May. F.L.S.

N.S.W., vol. xxvi., p. 370, pi. 24, f. 34.
1903. Mangelia granulossisima, Hedley. Mem. Aust.
Mus., vol. iv., part vL, p. 393.
Hab. — Dredged 6 to 8 fathoms oflF Phillip Island, Western Port.
Obs. — Much resembles the preceding species.

MItromorpha pallidula, Hedley.

1906. Mitromorpha pallidula, Hedley. P.L.S. N.S.W. for
1905, p. 534, pi. 32, f. 26.
Hab.— Port Albert (T. Worcester).

Obs. — The columella lacks the tran verse lirations found in most
of the members of this genus.

Daphne! la excavata, Gatliff.

1906. Daphnella excavata, Gatliff. P.R.S. Vic, vol. xix.
(n. s.), part i., p. 1, pi. 1, f. 1, 2.
Hab. — Portsea, Port Phillip; Ocean Beach, Point Nepean.

Scala tenella, Hutton.

1876. Scala lineolata, T. Woods (non Kiener). P.R.S.
Tas., p. 33.

1885. Scalaria tenella, Hutton. P.L.S. N.S.W., vol. ix.,

p. 943.
1901. Scalaria tenella, Tate and May. Id., vol. xxvi.,
p. 379.
Hab. — Dredged 6 to 8 fathoms off Phillip Island, Western

Port; Port Albert (T. Worcester).
Obs. — Also found in New South Wales, Tasmania, and New
Zealand. Length about 12. mm., breadth about 6 mm., has a
narrow brown encircling band. Varices numerous.

Additions to Catalogue of Shells. 33

Scala nepeanensrs, Gatliff.

1906. Scala nepeanensis, Gatliff. P.R.S. Vic, vol. xix.
(n. s.), part i., p. 1, pi. 1, f. 5.
Hab. — Sliell sand Ocean beach, Point Kepean ; and Portsea,
Port Phillip.

Scala translucida, Gatliff.

1906. Scala translucida, Gatliff. P.R.S. Vic, vol. xix.

(n. s.), part i., p. 2, pi. 1, f. 34.
1906. Scala translucida, Verco. T.R.S. S.A., vol. xxx.,
p. 219.
Hab. — Shell sand Portsea, Port Phillip; dredged 6 to 8 fathoms
off Phillip Island, Western Port.

Scala invallda, Verco.

1906. Scala invalida, Verco. T.R.S. S.A. vol. xxx., p.
148, pi. 4, f. 9, 10.
Hab. — Dredged in about 8 fathoms off Phillip Island, Western
Port; Shoreham, Western Port.

Crossea lablata, T. Woods.

1876. Crossea labiata, T. Woods. P.R.S. Tas., p. 151.

1900. Crosseia labiata, Hedley. P.L.S. N.S.W., p. 500,

pi. 26, f. 18.

1901. Crosseia labiata, Tate and May. Id., vol. xxvi.,

p. 379.
1906. Crossea labiata, Verco. T.R.S. S.A., vol. xxx., p.
149.
Hab. — Dredged 6 to 8 fathoms, off Phillip Island, Western

Port.

CIngulina diaphana, Verco.

1906. Cingulina diaphana, Verco. T.R.S. S.A., vol. xxx.,
p. 143, pi. 4, f. 11.
Hab. — Shell sand. Ocean Beach, Point Nepean.

3

34 J. H, Gatliff:

Cerithiopsis marmorata, Tate.

1893. Cerithiopsis marmorata, Tate. T.R.S. S.A., p. 190.
Hab. — Shell sand, Ocean Beach, Point Nepeau.

Styliferina translucida, Hedley.

1906. Diala translucida, Hedley. P.L.S. N.S.W., p. 522,
pi. 33, f. 35.
Hab. — Dredged off Phillip Island, Western Port, about 7
fathoms.

Obs. — This is the species referred to p. 61, vol. xviii. (n. s.), of
these Proceedings.

Cyclostrema bastowi, Gatliff.

1906. Cyclostrema bastowi, Gatliff. P.R.S. Vic, vol.
xix. (n. 8.), pt. i., p. 3, pi. 2, f. 8-10.
Hab. — Dredged in about 9 fathoms off Phillip Island, Western
Port.

Nacella stowae, Yerco.

1906. Nacella stowae, Verco. T.R.S. S.A., vol. xxx., p.
209, pi. 10, f. 4 and 5.
Hab. — Shell sand Shoreham, Western Port ; Torquay.
Obs. — A small translucent species with about 16 pink radial
lines. Apex at the anterior sixth. The specimens from Torquay
are more solid and the apex is nearer to the anterior. This is
the first record of the genus occurring in Victorian waters.

Ischnochiton resplendens, Bednall and Matthews.

1906. Ischnochiton resplendens, Bednall and Matthews.
P. Malac. Soc. Lond., vol. vii., p. 91, pi. 9,
f. 4-4f .
Hab. — Shoreham, Western Port ; Port Fairy.

Acanthochites (Meturoplax) retrojectus, Pilsbry.

1894. Acanthochites (Meturoplax) retrojectus, Pilsbry.

Nautilus, vol. vii., p. 107.
1894. Acanthochites (Meturoplax) retrojectus, Pilsbry.
P. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., p. 78, pi. 2, f. 12-15.
Hab. — Ocean beach, Point Nepean.

Additions to Catalogue of Shells, 35

Siphonaria stowae, Verco.

1906. Siphonaria stowae, Verco. T.R.S. S.A., vol. xxx.,
p. 223, pi. 8, f. 3-8.
Hab. — Portsea, Port Phillip.

Obs. — A small species described as length, 7.5 ux,m,; breadth,
5.9 m.m.; height, 3.25 m.m. The only two specimens I have
found are much smaller. White, with brown specks and blotches.

Thraciopsis angustata, Angas.

1867. Alicia angustata, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 908,

pi. 44, f. 1.
1901. Thraciopsis angustata, Tate and May. P.L.S.
N.S.W., vol. xxvi., p. 422.
Hab. — Dredged in 6 to 8 fathoms off Phillip Island, Western
Port, odd valves only obtained.

Thraciopsis elegantula, Angas.

1867. Alicia elegantula, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 908,
pi. 44, f. 2.
Hab. — Same as preceding species.

ChOPistodon rubiginosus, Adams and Angas.

1863. Naranio rubiginosum, Adams and Angas. P.Z.S.

Lond., p. 245, pi. 37, f. 17.
1884. Clementia tasmanica, Petterd. Jour, of Conch., p.

145.
1901. Choristodon rubiginosus, Tate and May. P.L.S.
N.S.W., vol. xxvi., p. 426.
Hab. — Two odd valves only, dredged in about 8 fathoms off
Phillip Island, Western Port ; and two odd valves dredged off
Portsea, Port Phillip.

Cryptodon globosum, Eorskal.

1775. Lucina globosum, Forskal. Descript. Anim.

Egypte.
1850. Lucina ovum. Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. vi., pi. 5,

f. 21.

3A

36 J. H, Oatliff:

1899. Oryptodon globosum, Hedley. Mem. Aust. Mus.,

vol. iii., p. 498.
1901. Cryptodon globosum, Tate and May. P.L.S.
N.S.W., vol. xxvi., p. 432.
Hab. — Port Fairy, odd valves only.

Obs. — I have been unable to consult the original description
and am not. sure in what genus it was classed by Forskal.

Rochefortia lactea, Hedley.

1902. Rochefortia lactea, Hedley. Mem. Aust. Mus.,
vol. iv., p. 320, f. 59 in text.

Diplodonta zealandica, Gray.

1843. Diplodonta zealandica. Gray. Dieflfenbach's New

Zealand, vol. ii., p. 256.
1852. Lucina inculta, Gould. U. S. Exploring Expedition,

Moll., vol. xii., p. 417, Atlas, f. 524.
1874. Diplodonta zealandica, E. A. Smith. Voy. Erebus

and Terror, Moll. pi. 3, f. 8.
1880. Diplodonta zealandica, Hutton. Man. N. Z. Moll.,

p. 156.
Hab. — Lakes Entrance, Gippsland. (C. J. Gabriel).

Kellia jacksoniensis, K A. Smith.

1884. Kellia jacksoniensis, E. A. Smith. Zool. " Alert,"
p. 105, pi. 7, f. F, F. 1.
Hab. — Dredged about 10 fathoms off Phillip Island, Western
Port.

Kellia solida, Angas.

1877. Kellia solida, Angas. PZ.S. Lond., p. 176, pi. 26,
f. 25.
Hab. — Same as the preceding species.

Additions to Catalogue of Shells. 37

Carditella elegantula, Tate and May.

1901. Carditella elegantula, Tate and May. P.L.S.
N.S.W., vol. xvvi., pp. ^34 and 463 f. 14,
in text.
Hab. — Shell sand, Ocean beach. Flinders. One valve only.

Lima angulata, Sowerby.

1843. Lima angulata, Sowerby. Thes. Conch., vol. i.,

p. 86, pi. 22, f. 39, 40.
1872. Lima angulata. Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. xviii.,

pi. 3, f. 13i
Hab. — Portland.

I ' ■ >

I; .

[Pboc. Kot. Soc. Victoria, 20 (N.S.), Pt. I., 1907.]

Art. v. — The Movements of the Soluble Constituents

in fine Alluvial Soil.

By ALFRED J. EWART, D.Sc, Ph.D., F.L.S.,

Government Botanist and Professor of Botany
in the Melbourne University.

[Eead 13th June.]

One of the faults of the chemical aaialysis of the soil, as car-
ried out by the latest methods, is that it pays far too little at-
tention to the soil as a changeable matrix, and attaches too
much importance to analyses made usually from samples of soil
taken at one time of the year only, and sometimes only from
one, or at most two, layers of the soil. This applies even to
those analyses where the water-soluble and acid-soluble con-
stituents are separately distinguished. As to' the so-called
" complete " soil analyses formerly so common, and still in
favour in some quarters, these have about ajs much value to the
agriculturist as the destructive analysis of a pair of boots would
have to a shoemaker.

In the soil, the constituents of plant food consist (a) of the
water-soluble constituents immediately available for use ; (b)
of the acid (hydrochloric) -soluble ones, representing plant
food, which may become gradually avadlable in one to several
years. The rest of the soil may practically be regarded as a
mere matrix, whose physical properties are of great impor-
tance, but whose chemical properties have little or no immediate
concern to the plant. The water soluble constituents are con-
centrated in the surface-adhesion films of water around the
solid particles and air bubbles in the soil, so that prolonged
washing is needed to remove them completely. The plant,
on the other hand, in case of need, can concentrate the dissolved
salts in the process of absorption, although when actively tran-
spiring, it usually absorbs them in more dilute form than they
exifit in the soil.

In any case, every shower of radn falling on the land must
tend to lower the percentage of dissolved matter in the surface

Solvhle Constitv^erUs in Alluvial Soil, 39

layers, and will actually do so if no causes are at work in the
opposite direction. When evaporation is going on the reverse
takes place, the dilute solutions drawn up by capillarity con-
centrating at the surface. The purpose of the following r^
search has been to determine how pronounced these movements
are during an ordinary season, whether they are shown when
the land is growing a crop, how manuring affects them, and
whether any changes are also shown in the percentage of acid-
soluble constituents, and of humus at different depths through-
out the year. For this purpose, Mr. Luffmann was so good as
to allow Mr. A. G. Campbell to start a series of experimental
plots at the Burnley Gardens. These were selected and made
up so as to be as uniform as possible throughout each of the
two sets of series, one being composed of a fine alluvial sandy
soil, the other a rather fine clay, and both haiving a subsoil
nearly sixteen inches below the siu^aice, as will be seen by refer-
ence to the following report by Mr. Campbell: —

The soils selected were : — (I) A leached basalt clay, shallow,
overlying a very tough clay subsoil ; and (II.) deep sand of al-
luvial nature, overlying white sandy subsoil, with some clay.
By preparing the beds well, the subsoil in the first instance
was put about 12 inches below the surface, and in the second
15 inches. The elevated beds remained high and dry all the
winter, even in series I., which was on quite flat land. The
€andy lot sloped very slightly southward. The plots in each
series were each 1 square pole in area (30J square yards), and
treated as follows, the quantities per acre being given in the table
of results. The mamu-es were applied in quantities much above
ordinary agricultural practice, although the land wajs already in
good heart, since otherwise the amounts in the soil would be
almost imperceptible.

Plot -

Unmanured

,. 1 -

Air-slaked Lime

- 281bs.

„ 2 -

Nitrate of Soda (N = 15.5%)

- 12oz.

„ 3 -

Star Phosphate (P = 18%)

- 21b. 12.80Z.

„ 4 -

Gypsum - - - -

- 141b.

„ 5 -

Bone Dust (N 2.5, P 21%)

- 21b. 12.80Z.

„ 6 -

Sulphate of Ammonia (N 20)

- 8oz.

„ 7 -

Blood Manure - - -

- lib. 6.4.0Z.

„ 8 -

Cone. Superphosphate (P 43)

- lib 6.4oz.

» 9 .

Quicklime- . - .

- 281b.

40 Alfred J. Ewart:

The two series were ploughed and harrowed on 16th May,
1906, then sown with a mixture of rye and oats sown broadcast,
The manure was sprinkled evenly on the surface of each plot, and
the harrow run over again ; both grain and manure being buried
1 inch to 1^ inches. The last plot, however, quicklime, was
not sown till a week later, until the lime had slaked and its
alkalinity had been reduced.

Growth. — Germination was very good and quick, the weather
being favourable. The growth was good in the sand series espe-
cially, and continued without a check during winter, there be-
ing no noticeable difference between the manured plots and un-
manured lands alongside until late in September, when they
mostly shot ahead. However, in the clay series, the contrast be-
tween raised beds and unformed lands was very great all along,
and though growth slackened in very cold weather, it never
went yellow like unmanured parts. Representative soil samples
were taken about 20th of each month in each plot (a) of surface
soil, (b) 8 inches deep, and (c) 16 inches deep. The samples from
each plot were bulked to the amount of 1 kilogram of air-dried
soil from each depth, which was used for the extraction of food
salts. The sixth set of monthly samples was taken in De-
cember, three months after the fifth. The crop was harvested
green late in October, and gave the following returns : —

lot

aay

Sand

Per acre

1291b.

1201b.

Unmanured

1

1561b.

1401b.

2 tons Slaked Lime

2

1441b.

1391b.

1201b. Nitrate Soda

3

1541b.

1221b.

4c wt. Star Phosphate

4

1211b.

1041b.

1 ton Gypsum

5

1471b.

1211b.

4cwt. Bone Dust

6

1321b.

1321b.

801b. Sulphate Amm.

7

1361b.

1381b.

2cwt. Blood Manure

8

1431b.

1411b.

2cwt. Superphosphate

9

721b.

1491b.

2 tdns Quicklime

The injurious action of the quicklime on the crop from plot
9 (clay) was partly due to the seed being sown before the alkalinity .
was fully neutralised, partly to the binding action of the quick-
lime on the clay soil. Owing to the fact that the soils were
not at all impoverished, the effect of the manuring is not as
pronounced as it might otherwise have been, but on the is^andy
soil the quicklime produced a heavier crop than any other

Soluble Gonstihients in Alluvial Soil. 41

manure, probably because of its solvent chemical action on the
mineral constituents of the soil. The superphosphate, slaked
lime, nitrate of soda and blood manure seemed to be equivalent
as regards the sandy soil, but the two former were more effi-
cient in the clay soil. The star phosphate and bone-dust exer-
cised ai strong action on the clay soil, but none on the sandy
soil, while the gypsum reduced the yield on both. The order of
value for the manures, in the proportions given, are as follows : —
For the sandy soil — (1) Quicklime ; , (2) superphosphate, slaked
lime, nitrate of soda, blood manure ; (3) ammonium sulphate ;
(4) star phosphaite, bone dust, and no manure ; (5) gypsum ;
For the clay soil — (1) Slaked lime, star prosphaite; (2) bone
dust, nitrate of soda, superphosphate ; (3) blood manure, sul-
phate of ammonia ; (4) unmanured and gypsum ; (5) quicklime.

In such cases as these no analyses of the soil, of the crop,
or of the manure would enable the results of the application
of the latter to be predicted, hence it is essential that the
farmer should be guided by local tests rather than by general
principles, which are often misleading if improperly applied.
Herein lies one of the chief justifications for the existence of
experimental plots on farming land throughout the State, and
one of the reasons for the avoidance of too much centralisation
of experimental field-work in one locality.

A point of great interest is to compare the above data with
the fluctuations in the soluble water, and of the humus in the
soil. The soil saonples were taken from the surface and from
depths of 8 and 16 inches, weighed, dried, weighed again, and
soaked in 2 litres of distilled water per kilogi-am of soil. In
the first experiments, the clear filtered liquid was boiled down
to a small bulk at Burnley, and sent to the University for final
testing. The escape of the dissolved carbon dioxide, and the
concentration caused, however, a considerable loss, so that all
the soil samples were sent to the University, there extracted
and filtered. One-half of the liquid added to the soil was
evaporated in the same vessel in which the residues were
weighed. The total number of soil samples exceeded 400, and
the weight nearly half a ton.

Some idea ais to the prevailing conditions in regard to mois-
ture and temperature is presented by the following data, giving
the percentage of water and the temperatures at different depths

42

Alfred J. Ewart:

during the median portion of the year. From September on-
wards the temperature became higher, amd the percentage of
soil water decreased, especially in the upper layers of the soil.
Both soils were wettest in July, driest in December.

Febcentage op

Water.

T^ck^A

Clay Soil

Fine Sandy Soil

l/ftT

1^

Top «in.

16in.

Top

Sin. 16in.

May

18

-

18.2 17.5

17.2

11.85

11.85 8.85

June 20

«

7.75 12.2

11.1

6.5

7.75 8.6

July

20

-

44.5 42.5

44.5

51.0

54.0 55.5

Aug.

25

-

24.25 25.25

23.5

17.5

16.5 12.5

Sept.

25

-

19.0 20.5

22.5

14.0

17.0 19.6

Tempebatubb (F

AHR.) OP

Each In

Situ.

Top

Clay Soil

■*■

Sill.

lein.

Fine Sandy Soil

Top

Sin. 16in.

June 20 -

50

deg. 49.5 deg.

47 deg.

51 deg

'. 50 deg. 51 deg

July 20 -

46

it

45 „

46 .,

- 41 „

43 „ 43 „

Aug. 25 -

50

»»

49.5 „

51 „

- 51 „

50 „ 51 „

Sept^25 -

66

y*

61 ,.

60 „

- 65 „

60 „ 66 „

Great difficulty was found in obtaining clear watery filtrates
from the clay soil without filtering through biscuit porcelain,
which is tedious with large bulks, and is apt to cause the
loss of some of the materials really held, originally, in solution.
The acid extracts filter readily, but this part of the work was
confined to the sandy soils, since the residues from the watery
extracts of the clay soil are not at all reliable.

The following are two sets of data from the clay soils in
May and September, i.e., before and after the main radnfall,
the numbers giving the amount of matter dissolved by 2 litres
of water from 1 kilogram of dry soil, plus the amount of non-
settling suspended matter able to pass through doubled filter-paper :

Top

Sin.

16in.

May 5.

Sept. 25.

May 5.

Sept. 25.

May 5.

Sept 25.

lotO

0.99

0.72

0.88

0.69

0.76

0.98

„ 1 -

0.76

0.61

0.45

1.16

0.49

1.11

„ 2 -

0.56

1.12

1.11

1.23

1.25

1.21

,, 3

1.28

1.24

1.31

1.13

1.28

1.15

„ 4 -

0.81

0.92

132

1.38

1.41

1.18

„ 5

0.72

0.64

0.85

1.14

1.25

1.28

„ 6

1.25

1.28

1.11

0.72

1.37

1.38

„ 7 -

1.2

0.72

1.21

1.28

1.28

1.12

„ H

1.15

1.28

1.16

0.76

0.96

0.92

» 9

0.89

0.52

1.13

1.18

1.19

0.81

Average

0.96

0.90

1.05

1.07

1.12

1.11

Soluble Constituents in Alluvial Soil. 43

The data are of value simply as showing the coagulating
action of slaked and quicklime, and to a less extent of bone
dust and gypsum upon the surface layers of clay soil, while all
the other manures appear to have either the opposite effect
or only a temporary coagulating action. There is, however,
no apparent relation between this action and the crop yield. In
addition the surface average falls distinctly after the wint^er
rains.

The sandy soil proved to be more amenable to treatment,
and samples were taken from the plots, not only while the
crop was growing, but also in December, a month after it had
been harvested. The first sets of samples were taken practi-
cally simultaneously with the planting of the crop, and shortly
after manuring. The manures were applied in the same quan-
tity and order as in the clay plots. The sandy soil was of such
density that one acre 1 foot deep would weigh approximately
4,800,000 lb., so that 18 inches deep would weigh 7,200,000
lb., and 2 inches deep, 800,000 lb. In the following table the
amount of manure applied j>er acre is given in the first column,
in the second column is the amount per kilogram in the super-
ficial 2 inches, as when first applied, and in the third column the
amount per kilogram when spread through the superficial 16
inches, assuming that none had been washed lower down.

Manure -

Plot 1 - Slaked Lime

„ 2 - Nitrate of Soda

„ 3 - Star Phosphate

„ 4 - Gypsum

„ 5 - Bone Dust

„ 6 - Ammoniimi Sulphate

„ 7 - Blood Manure

„ 8 - Superphosphate

,, 9 - Quicklime

Although the manures were, on the whole, applied in more
than the customary concentrations, the usual application of
star phosphate being, for instance, ^ cwt. per acre, it is evident
that by the time the manures are distributed through the upper
18 inches of soil the amounts per kilogram will be too small

Amount
per acre

Amount in
superficial
2 inches.
Qrms. per
Kilc^am.

In Upper
16 inches

2 tons

5.6

0.70

1201b.

0.148

0.016

4cwt.

0.56

0.07

1 ton

2.8

0.35

4c wt.

0.56

0.07

801b.

0.1

0.012

2cwt.

0.28

0.035

2cwt.

0.28

0.035

2 tons

5.6

0.7

44 Alfred J, Ewart :

■' ' --^ . • • ' .

to perceptibly affect the amount of the water-soluble, and still
less of the acid-soluble residues per kilogram. Fluctuations in
these of less than 0.02 to 0.01 of a gram appear to be mean-
ingless, or, at least, to result from fluctuations or conditions
beyond control,, such as slight differences in the drainaige, in the
fineness of the soil, and in the slight unevenness in the distri-
bution of the vital, physical and meterological conditions which
affect it during the period of observation. Even when first ap-
plied, and distributed at a depth of 2 inches, the nitrate of soda
and ammonium sulphate are baa-ely present in sufficient amount
to appreciably affect the soluble extractions from the soil by
the method of partial lixiviation (2 litres of water to 1 kilogram)
employed. By this method is determined merely the amount
of soluble material immediately available for absorption, and
which can be readily washed from the soil by rain. The
blood mani^e and superphosphate might be expected to produce
a distinct temporary rise of concentration in the superficial
layers, whereas the relative insolubility of th€ star phosphate
and bone dust would prevent them from producing any direct
effect upon the superficial concentration. In the case of plots
2, 3, 5 and 6, any rise of concentration is either the result of a
secondary action of the manure on the soil, or to the ascent
and concentraition by evaporation of the dissolved matter from
the deeper layers of the soil. An apparent decrease of concen-
tration may represent either an actual loss or aj lessened
solubility of certain constituents.

The following table gives the amounts of soluble matter
extracted from a kilograon of dry soil by two litres of water, as
calculated by the evaporation of one litre of the clear filtrate,
the samples of soil taken in May, September, and December of
1906 being tested, and those of intermediate months used for
control. The manuring took place in the month previous to
the taking of the first samples (and the planting of the crop),
while the last set of soil samples were taken the month alter
harvesting: —

May 18
Plot 0— Umiianured Top 0.31

8 inches 0.48

16 inches 0.4^

Average 0.42

Sept. 26

Dec. 20

0.18

0.49

0.35

0.48

0.6H

0.41

040

0.46

May 18

Sept 25

Dec. 20

0.53

o:4i

0.48

0.32

0.40

0.40

0.12

0.48

0.52

0.32

0.43

0.47

Sclvhle Constituents in Alluvial Soil, 45

The effect of the heavy rains of July, August, and partly of
September, in washing the soluble ; constituents downwards is
well shown, and the upward flow, of the soluble constituents . and
their accumulation at the surface is well shown in the December
result. The increased average probably partly results from the
attraction of soluble matter from still deeper layers, and partly
from nitrification in the soil during warm dry weaither, after the
removal of the crop and the aibsence of rain allowed the nitrates
to accumulate.

Plot 1. — Air-slaked Lime Surface
(Two tons per acre) 8 inches

16 inches
Average

This plot was obviously poorer originally thasa the unmanured
one, the high value for the top layer on May 18 being direct-
ly due to the addition of lime. This appears to keep the soluble
matter more uniformly distributed in the upper layers of the
soil, and also to cause a greater increase in the December aver-
age than occurs in the unmanured plot. The September aver-
age also shows a strong increase, in spite of the presence of a
growing crop. . .

May 18
Plot 9. — Quicklime Surface 0.94

(Two tons per acre) 8 inches 0.42

16 inches U.36
Average 0.57

The chemical action of the quicklime results in a liberation
of soluble constituents (potash, etc.) in the superficial layers,
but so much of this is ultimately washed away that the Decem-
ber average is below that for the preceding plots. The soluble
matter is, however, kept evenly distributed, as in the case of the
previous limed plots. The use of powdered quicklime for direct
application to the soil is coming into vogue in English agri-
culture, a Birmingham firm manufacturing large quantities of a
phosphatic and magnesian powdered lime for agricultural pur-
poses. The lime needs to be drilled in as though it were so much
seed, some time before the crop is planted, and its purpose
is obviously to render a large amount of soluble matter im-
mediately available for the use of young seedings. It is evi-
dent, however, that the quicklime will be apt to exercise an

Sept. 25

Dec. 20

0.64

0.4

0.5

0.4

0.4

U.46

0.51

0.42

46 Alfred J. Ewavt:

exhausting action on the fertility of the soil, especially in
regions with a high rainfall.

Quicklime is often stated to have a special power of burning out
humus from the soil, especially if applied at the rate of one or
more tons per acre. This is quite incorrect as regards the
ordinary mode of application of lime in Agriculture. Quick-
lime from the kilns, if directly put into the soil, would be rather
injurious tham useful, since all lumps of any size would retain
their causticity in the soil long enough to delay seeding, and by
their local action would result in very patchy cultivation. In
ordinary practice, to secure fine subdivision and even distribu-
tion, lump lime must be allowed to slake in heaps on the sur-
face, which, when the lime has crumbled down, can be scattered
and harrowed in. During this process the whole or the greaiter
part of the lime is converted into carbonate of calcium by the
carbon dioxide of the air and soil. The presence of a carbonate
of an alkaline base or alkaline earth is one of the conditions
for the continuance of the nitrification of humus in the soil,
the nitrous and nitric acids produced displacing the carbon
dioxide from the carbonates in the soil. In this way the ao-
cumulation of acid, which is fatal to further nitrification, is
prevented, but it must be remembered that strong alkalies
like quicklime are very nearly as injurious to the nitrifying
and other €oil bacteria as are free mineral acids. Hence we
should expect to find that the direct application of quicklime
would, for a time at least, result in a lessened bacterial oxida-
tion of the humus in the soil, as is in fact shown by the follow-
ing results, giving the percentages of humus by weight in the
dried soil of the various plots at three depths, at the beginning
and close of the experiments : —

Percentages op

Humus (fine

sandy

soil).

May 6

Sept. 17

Dec. 20

Plot — Unmaniu*ed

Surface

1.6

1.85

1.8

8 inches

1.6

1.7

1.75

IG inches

1.4

1.41

1.3

Average

1.53

1.65

1.62

Plot 1 — Air-slaked Lime

Surface

1.55

—

1.55

(Two tons per acre)

8 inches

1.15

0.9

16 inches

1.3

—

0.66

Average

1.33

—

1.03

2.0

2.4

1.35

1.75

1.5

1.46

1.62

1.87

1.8

1.85

1.9

1.8

1.9

1.8

1.87

1.82

Soluble ConstituenU in Alluvial SoiL

Plot 9— Quiddime Surface

(Two tons per acre) 8 inches

16 inches
Average

Plots 2, 8, 5, 7, 8 Surface

(Bulked Average) 8 inches

16 inches
Average

In all the plots, the fallen dejecta membra of the crop tend to
raise the percentage of humus in the surface layers. The air-
slaked lime produced a pronounced fall in the percentage of
humus, which, however, increased at a depth of 8 inches with
the quicklime, and to ai slight extent also in the unmaniu'ed
plots. At 18 inches, the humus decreased in all cases, though
only to a slight extent, except where air-slaked lime was
applied. It must be remembered that the quicklime plot
produced the heaviest crop, so that the increase in the percent^
age of humus is, to a slight extent, due to the greater develop-
ment of the root system, and not entirely to the lesbened
oxidation. The air-slaked lime produced less crop, and caused
a great waste of humus. The averages for the other manured
plots show that, as compared with the immanured plot, the
rate of oxidation of the humus was increased disproportionately
to its heightened productio'n by the manured crop.

Wateb-Soluble Constituents (continued).

May 18 Sept. 26 Dec. 20
Plot 4 — Gypsum Surface 1.12

(One ton per acre) 8 inches 0.73

16 inches 0.59
Average 0.81

The gypsum is comparatively readily soluble, and comes
readily away in the filtrate. It is easily washed downwards by
rain, a very large part being lost during the rainy season, but is
drawn to a certain extent up to the siu^aoe again in dry weather.
The manurial value of this substance is commonly greatly exag-
gerated. It has but little of the favourable mechanical action of
lime, it does not favour nitrification, and is a poor and expen-
sive way of adding calcium to the soil. The unduly high
manurial value attached to it may possibly arise from the fact
that, when plants are grown in nutrient solutions, the calcium

0.36

0.54

0.72

0.72

1.11

0.91

0.73

0.72

48 Alfred J, Etvart:

is often for convenience supplied in the form of the sulphaite,
which is more soluble than the carbonate, not poisonous like
the chloride, and less liable to contamination with injurious
impurities than the nitrate. Gypsum exercises, however, a
feeble action in freeing potash in soils containing this substance
in an insoluble form, but it is much less active than quicklime.
It also neutralises alkalino soil or alkaline irrigation water.

Thus—

Neutral

Alkaline soluble

Neutral

Soluble neutral

soluble gypsum

[, '

soctiUm oetrbonalte i ^

air-slaked lime

sodium sulphate

CaSO^

and

NaaCOg form

CaCOg

and

NagSO^

No action of this kind took place, however, in the soil under
examination^ and in' both the clay and sandy soils the gypaum
rediiced the yield below that for the unmanured plot. Gypsum
is, in fact, a substance which has crept into agricultural use as
a manure largely under false pretences. Even its action on
manure heaps in preventing the loss of ammonia is largely
exaggerated, and the «ame end is far better and more cheaply
attained by packing the manure tightly in walled enclosures or
in pits shielded from the weather.

Plot 2 — Nitrate of Soda Surface

(1201b. per acre) 8 inches

16 inclies

«ay 18

Sept. 25

Dec. 20

0.48

0.29

0.40

0.32

0.37

0.41

0.32

0.58

0.40

0.37

0.41

0.40

0.43

0.405

0.34

0.53

049

0.44

0.55

0.41

0.36

0.5

0.435

0.38

ible.

and since they

Plot 6 — Sulph. of Ammonia Surface
(801b. per acre) 8 inches

16 inches
Average

Both these manures are highly soluble,
represent in the case of the nitrate of soda 0.148 gram per kilo-
gram of the superficial 2 inches, and in the case of the
ammonium sulphate 0.1 gram per kilogram, it is evident that
the movements of the added salts are not solely responsible
for the results, which are partly due to an indirect action, or
to the absorptive action of the crop. The latter probably ex-
plains the steady decrease in plot VI., which appears to be less
affected by rain than usual, and to show no increase in thje
superficial layer after drought. The plot II. shows the usual
movements of the soluble matter, though these are not very

May 18

Sept. 25

Dec. 20

0.59

0.37

0.36

0.34

0.53

0.44

0.48

0.42

0.44

0.47

0.43

0.41

Soluble Gmistitxients in Alluvial Soil. 49

pronounced, and the slight increase in the average ^hows that
the solvent actions in the soil more than balanced the loss by
.drainage amd by the crop.

Plot 3 — Star Phosphate Surface
(4cwt. per acre) 8 inches

16 inches

Average

The manure being only sparingly soluble, the steady decrease
of the averages probably represents soil constituents previously
present. These show the usual drop after rain in the surface
layer, and no absolute, but only a relative increase or lessened
decrease on the surface after dry weather.

May 18
Plot 5 — Done Dust Surface 0.51

(4cwt. per acre) 8 inches 0.50

16 inches 0.63
Average 0.55

This resembles the preceding closely, except thait the concen-
tration on the surface in December is better shown. Both ca^es
indicate an exhaustion of the soluble soil constituents by the
crop or by drainage, for if the manures fixed or precipitated
the soluble constituents, the first surface estimation in May
would be a low instead of a high one.

Sept. 25

Deo. 20

0.32

0.44

0.43

0.41

0.52

0.38

0.42

0.41

May 18

Sept. 25

Dec. 20

Plot 8 — Calcium Superphosphate Surface 0.54

0.36

0.46

(2cwt. per acre) 8 inches 0.57

0.51

0.40

16 inches 0.56

0.52

0.44

Average 0.55

0.46

0.43

Although the manure is highly soluble, and the amount of it
not too small (0.28 gram per kilogram of upper 2 inches when
first applied), it does not seem to produce any pronounced direct
effect upon the changes in the distribution of the soluble matter
in the soil, which resemble those in the preceding plot.

Plot 7 — Blood Manure Surface
(2cwt. per acre) 8 inches

16 inches
Average

The blood manure apparently exercises an important indirect
action on the soil, increasing the amount of soluble matter

lay 18

Sept. 25

Dec. 20

0.64

0.61

0.42

0.67

0.6

0.41

0.55

0.56

0.54

0.62

0.59

0.46

60 Alfred J. Ewart :

present in it. The action apparently continues for some time,
and suffices to maintain a high percentage in the surface soil of
September, in spite of the previous rains. Even in December*
the average is higher than in any of the three preceding plots.
Presumably the blood-manure sets up active nitrification in
the soil, and this involves a considerable conversion of diffi-
cultly soluble or insoluble earthy and alkaline bases into readily
soluble nitrates. One part by weight of the nitrogen of the
blood-manure is capable of producing 6 parts of calcium nit-
rate, or IQJ^ parts of potassium nitrate. The effect on the crop
was similar to that of the nitrate of soda on plot II.

If stock owners would abamdon the practice common in cer-
tain parts of allowing dead stock to rot in creeks by running
water, or to decay where they fall, and instead to bury all dead
animals so that they are covered by at least a foot of soil,
the nitrogen and phosphates of the carcase will enrich the soil,
instead of being wasted, and the land-owner will benefit instead
of the streams being polluted, or the land disfigured. The bene-
fits of burying do not merely consist in the saiving of nitrogen
for the soil, but also apply to the phosphates of the bones which
become much sooner available for plant use when the carcase
is buried than when the bones left on the surface to bleach and
weather quite hard. Bare bones when buried rot slowly, es-
pecially in calcareous soil, but if surrounded by flesh their
disintegration is hastened. Hence the carcase should be buried
while still fresh for practical, as well as for sesthetical, reasons.

Changes in the Acid-Soluble Constituents, — For complete com-
parison, a knowledge of the changes in the acid-soluble con-
stituents of the soil is necessary, for these are in a continual
process of solution, absorption, and reprecipitation, and undergo
an increase during the slow disintegraition of the soil, as well as
being liable to decreases of chemical or physical origin (pre-
cipitation, formation of double or dehydrated salts, allotro-
pic changes, etc.). The use of drastic solvent agencies is
inadvisable, since these could quite readily give a false impression
as to the condition of the soil. Hence for the extraction, 2 litres
of very dilute hydrochloric acid of approximately decinormal
strength were added to each kilogram of dry soil. One litre of
the clear filtered liquid was evaporated to dryness, and the

Sohthle Coitstituentfi In AUavlal Soil, '51

weight of residue doubled. The vailues obtained may be taken
as giving the amount of mineral matter in the soil capable
for the most part of solution and absorption under exhaustive
conditions In from one to several yeara

The acid extracts filtered readily and came through quite
clear with a single filtering. This is mainly the result of the
coaigalating action of the acid, which, by lowering the surface
tension of the finely divided pairticles, causes them to coalesce
and then settle rapidly. To a slight extent it is due to the
solution of some of the finer particles, for on adding acid to a
turbid watery filtrate it cleared to a slight extent by solution,
the remaining suspended particles then settling. Throughout
the following tables the numbers in brackets give the acid
soluble less the water-soluble matter.

May 5 Sept. 25 Deo. 20

Plot 7— Blood Manure Surface 6.08 (4.44) 4.25 (3.64) 3.68 (3.26)

(2cwt: per acre) 8 inches 5.74 (5.07) 4.41 (3.81) 3.96 (3.55)

16 inches 5.64 (5.09) 5.4 (4.84) 3.76 (3.22)

Average 5.49 (4.87) 4.69 (4.1) 3.8 (3.34)

If these figures are reliable, they indicate that blood manure
causes a liberation and loss of the reserve plant-food which is
altogether out of proportion to the amount removed by the crop.
By itself, therefore, blood manure should «eeni to have a very
exhausting action on the soil, and there is no evidence to show
that the materials rendered soluble are drawn up to the surface
again to any appreciable extent from the deeper layers of the
soil. Instead, being mainly nitrates, they readily wash out of
it and are lost.

May 18 Sept. 25 Dec. 20

Plot 2— Nitrate of Soda Surface 5.02 (4.54) 4.58 ^4.29) 5.68 (5.28)

(1201b. per acre) 8 inches 4.72(4.38) 4.50(4.13) 4.1 (3.69)

16 inches 4.8 (4.48) 5.02 (4.44) 3.68 (3.28)

Average 4.84 (4.50) 4.70 (4.29) 4.48 (4.08)

The fluctuations at different depths might possibly be the
result of imperfect sampling, which is always of great import-
ance, however homogeneous the soil may aippear to be. The
averages, however, show a steady decrease. It is always possible
that soluble material from one layer may continually diffuse
towards another layer in which it is deposited by some kind of
chemicajl precipitation, or as a result of evaporation, or the loss

4a

52 • Alfred J. Ewart:

of a solvent gas. This may be the case here, although the
fluctuations in the percentage of acid -soluble and water-soluble
matter show no apparent relationship. The latter represents,
however, merely the condition at the time of taking, whereas
the former results from cuniulaJtive action prior to sampling.

May 18 Sept. 25 Dec. 30

Plot 6— Ammonium sulphate Surface 0.55(6.12) 5.64(5.24) 6.16(5.82)
(801b. per acre) 8 inches 6.34(5.81) 5.7 (5.21) 5.7 (5.34)

16 inches 6.25(5.7) 6.32(5.91) 4.8 (4.56)
Average 6.38(5.88) 5.89(5.45) 5.55(5.24)

Here the acid- soluble matter undergoes on the average a dis-
tinctly greater reductFon than in the previous plot, in spite of
its lesser yield of crop. The variations closely follow those in
plot II., so that it appears as though acid-soluble matter
passes downwards to some extent after prolonged rain, and
is slowly drawn upwards during prolonged drought.

May 18 Sept. 25 Dec. 30

Plot 8— Star Phosphate Surface 5.36 (4.77) 5.06 (4.69) 4.36 (4.0)

(4cwt. per acre) 8 inches 4.98 (4.64) 4.76 (4.23) 4.8 (4.36)

16 inches 5.40 (4.92) 5.18 (4.76) 4.72 (4.28)

Average 5.25 (4.78) 5.0 (4.56) 4.63 (4.21)

May 18 Sept. 25 Dec. 30

Plot 5— Bone Dust Surface 5.3 (4.79) 5.2 (4.68) 5.7 (4.26)

(4cwt. per acre) 8 inches 4.92 (4.35) 4.86 (4.43) 4.58 (3.87)

16 inches 4.96 (4.33) 4.82 (4.3) 4.04 (3.66)

Average 5.06 (4.36) 4.96 (4.47) 4.67 (3.93)

In plots III. and V. the announts of manure added represent
0.56 gram per kilogram of the surface 2 inches, and 0.07 per 18
inches depth. Since only a portion of eaich is soluble in the
the dilute acid used, it is evident that the steady fall represents
mainly materials previously present in the soil. In the star
phosphate plot no superficial accumulation of acid-soluble materials
takes place in December, but this phenomenon is shown with
the bone dust plot, possibly because of secondary reactions
excited by the organic material of the bone dust.

May 18 Sept. 25 Dec. 30
Plot 8.— Calcium Superphosph. Sui-face 6.08(5.24) 5.61(5.25) 4.1(3.62)
(2cwt. per acre) 8 inches 7.96(7.39) 7.2 (6.69) 4.4(4.0)

16 inches 5.86(4.66; 5.22(4.5) 4.2(3.74)
Average 6.63(5.76) 6.01(5.58) 4.2(3.79)

Soluble Gonstituentfi in Alluvial Soil. 53

The amount of manure added represents 0.28 gram per kilo-
gram of the superficial 2 inches, and the high solubility explains
the high amount of water-soluble matter in the superficial layers
on May 18. At the same time the superphosphate seems to
exercise a strong ^Ivent action on the soil itself, of such
character as to strongly increase the amount of matter soluble
in dilute a<3id. The net result is to leave the soil distinctly
poorer in matter soluble in dilute acid than any of the previous
plots, but if this matter is utilised by the crop it represents an
increased yield and profit instead of so much inert material. Un-
fortunately but little appeared in the crop as ash, so that super-
phosphates by themselves appear to be highly wasteful and exhaust-
ing. If these facts hold good for soils in general, the exclusive use
of phosphates in Victorian agriculture is likely to rapidly exhaust
the fertility of the soil, not only because of the greater demands
of the increased crop, but also because the superphosphate exercises
a secondary action on the soil, temporarily increasing the amount
of water-soluble matter and also that of materials soluble in
very dilute acid. The former are rapidly and the latter slowly
removed from the soil by the action of rain water charged with
carbon dioxide as well as by the crop.

May 18 Sept. 25 Dec. 20

Plot4-Gypsiun Surface 5.2 (4.08) 4.04(3.68) 4.2 (3.66)

(One ton per acre) 8 inches 4.4 (3.67) 3.9 (3.18) 3.5 (2.78)

16 inches 4.15(3.50) 3.4 (2.29) 3.1 (2.19)

Average 4.58 (3.77) 3.78 (3.05) 3.6 (2.88)

May 18 Sept. 25 Dec. 20

Plot -No Manure Surface 3.32(3.01) 3.9 (3.72) 4.58(4.09)

8 inches 3.90 (3.42) 3.4 (3.05) 3.44 (2.96)

16 inches 3.82 (3.34) 3.7 (3.02) 3.06^(2.65)

Average 3.68 (3.26) 3.7 (3.26) 3.69 (3.23)

Not only did the gypsum produce a less crop yield than the
immanured plot and unduly increase the amount of water-
soluble material liable to waste by drainage, but it also caused
a pronounced decrease in the amount of acid-soluble material
by the end of the year. In the unmanured plot the averages
remain very nearly constant in spite of an increase towards
the surface and a decrease in the deeper layers.

54 Alfred J, Ewart :

May 18 Sept 25 l>ec. 20

Plot 1— Air-slaked Lime Surface 6.3 (5.77) 5.08 (4.67) 5.44 (4.96)

(Two tons per acre) 8 inches 4.6 (4.18) 4.68(4.28) 5.12(4.72)

16 inches 4.88 (4.76) 4.46 (3.98) 4.0 (4.48)

Average 5.23 (4.9) 4.74 (4.31) 4.85 (4.72)

Plot 9— Quicklime Surface 7.38 (5.44) 7.66 (7.' 2) 7.08 (6.68)

(Two tons per acre) 8 inches 6.34 (5.92) 6.7 (6.2) 5.52 (5.12)

16 inches 6.38 (6.02) 6.5 (6.1) 5.6 (6.54)

Average 6.7 (6.13) 6.95 (6.i4) 6.07 (5.78)

The acid-soluble materials appear to increase in the quick'
lime plot in September, and are throughout high. This is
undoubtedly due to the chemicail action of the quicklime on
the soil, and this action involves a considerable waste of food
materials by the end of the year. This waste is not apparent
in the oaise of the slaked lime plot, in which, as in the unma-
nured plot, the total amount of readily soluble material appears
to be greater in December than it is after the winter rains in
September. In all the other plots the amount steadily decreases
towards the close of the year.

For convenience of reference a joint table is given beneath
showing the aiverages from the upper \% inches for all the plots
in parallel columns. From the totals it appears that the manure
added represents the ash of the crop fourfold, and that the total
apparent loss from the soil was four times greater than the

I

amount of chemical manure added. In other words, chemical
manures do not permanently enrich, but rapidly impoverish, fine
soils poor in humus, especially when applied in excess.

SUMMARY.

As regards the unmanured plot, the sodium nitrate appears
to lower the percentage of dissolved matter duiing the eight
months following its applica/tion ; the slaked lime lowers the
amount at first, but by the end of the year it is up to the
normal level again. In all other cases, the amount of water-
soluble matter is increased at first, and lowered below the un-
manured level by the end of the year, except in the case of
the gypsum, in which it remains high in spite of a heavy loss, and
of the blood manure, in which it does not fall below the amount
in the unmanured plot.

Soluble GonstituenU in Alluvial Soil. 56

In regard to the distribution of the soluble matter in the
different layers, the downward movement, as the result of con-
tinuous rain, and the less marked upward ascent during
drought, were well shown by the unmanured, slaked lime, gyp-
sum, nitrate of soda, bone dust, and superphosphate plots,
while the downward movement was merely lessened in summer,
and not actually reversed in the case of the quicklime, ammonium
sulphate, star phosphate, and blood manure plots. The averages
for the water-soluble matter in all the plots are remarkably
consistent with the conclusions meatioued, the surface showing
a fall and rise, 8 inches depth a slow fall, and the 16 inches an
almost similar rise by the end of the year.

#

AvEBAtiE TVateb-soluble Matteb for all the Plots.

May 18

Sept. 25

Dec. 20

Top

0.61

0.3&

0.43

8 inches

0.49

0.48

0.45

16 inches

0.46

0.47

0.49

The amount of matter soluble in dilute acid underwent a
secondary rise at the end of the year in the superficial layers
in the case of the immanured, sodium nitrate, ammonium sul-
phate, bone dust, and slaked lime plots, but in all other
cases decreased steadily in the surface layers of soil. The
quicklime plot was exceptional in showing not only a rise in
the superficial layer in September, but also an increase in the
average for the whole 16 inches, followed by a pronounced fall
in December. As regards the averages, these decreased during
the year in all the plots excepting the unmanured and slaked
lime plots, but the increases in these were very slight in
amount.

AvEBAOE Matteb Sol

UBLE IN Dilute

Acid from

ALL THE Plots.

May 18

Sept. 25

Dec. 20

Surface -

-

4.82

-

4.69

-

4.56

8 inches

-

4.88

-

4.52

m

4.04

16 inches

.

4.69

_

4.41

.

3.76

The average acid-soluble matter decreases steadily on the
surface and more rapidly in the deeper layers, especially during
the summer months.

Without claiming anything more than^ a preliminary and
suggestive value for these data, they nevertheless may be taken

66 Alfred J. Ewart:

to apply to the fine alluvial soil occurring on so many river
flats and valleys in Victoria. None of the manures as applied
in the somewhat excessive quantities given would have paid
for their application by the increased crop yield. It will fur-
ther be noticed that the apparent loss from all the plots except-
ing the slaked lime and unmjinured ones (where there is a
slight gain) is very much greater than can be explained by
the ash removed by the crop. To what extent these apparent
losses are real ones, and to what extent they are due to decreases
in solubility, to increases in absorptive power, or to changes
in distribution, must be reserved for further investigaition. As
far as they go they seem to show that the fine alluvial, «andy
river- flat soils widely cultivated in many parts of Victoria ap-
pear to be peculiarly liable to exhaustion under the action of
all chemical manures excepting slaked lime. Even if the maxi-
mal apparent loss (851b.) were entirely a real loss, it would take
530 years to remove the top 16 incTies, assuming that all was
removed by solution and none by erosion. These soils appear
also to be comparatively deficient in humus, but where
this is not so the manurial diagnosis in the case of virgin soil
would be slaked lime at the rate of \ to 1 ton per acre,, until
the soil begins to show signs of exhaustion, then farmyard manure
at a probable mininmm of 2 to 5 tons per acre, soluble, nitrogen-
ous, or phosphatic manures to be used sparingly, or not at all
unless thje soil shows need for them.

PRACTICAL AXIOMS.

Quicklime binds a clay soil, slaked lime ameliora;tes it.

Quicklime in excess exercises a wasteful solvent action on
composite sandy soils. Small quantities drilled in prior to
seeding should, however, stimulate the early growth of seed-
lings, aaid perhaps lessen the danger of infection by fungi.

The indirect action of a manure on the soil is usually much
more important than its direct chemical value as a nutrient
substance. This applies not only to those manures which exert
a direct chemical action on the soil, but also to those nitrogen-
containing, acid or alj^aline manures which affect the activitv of
the micro-organisms in the soil.

SolvJ)le Constituents in Allamal Soil. 57

Chemical manures, especially soluble phosphatic ones, should
not be applied in any quantity to soils poor in humus, except in
company with farmyard manure or some form of humus.

The soil is a changeable matrix, whose percentage solubility
in water and acid varies appreciably at different depths through-
out the year, and also undergoes seasonal changes as a whole,
especially under the action of "chemical manures. The apparent
losses from the soil after heavy manuring are many times
greater than the ash contained in the crop, and also greater than
the amount added to the soil by any of the chemical manures
used excepting lime.

The oxidation and nitrification of humus in the soil is more
favoured by air-slaked lime than by the direct application of
quicklime, so long as the latter retains any alkalinity injurious
to nitrifying micro-organisms.

Postscript.

Since the above was written, Mr. Hall has drawn my atten-
tion to the fact that Nornian Taylor, in Maclvor's "Chemistry
of Agricultmre," 1879, p. 224, suggested that the superficial
limestone deposits common in the Mallee may have been pro-
duced by the continued drawing up of chalk in solution by
capillary action from the moist er hiyers below. This ex-
planation was adopted by Howchin for the desert limestones
around Adelaide, and was extended by Gregory (" Geography
of Victoria," 1903, p. 93) to the hard siliceous superticial cherts
or quartzite beds, and also to the ironstones of superficial gold
deposits. Recent research has, however, shown that iron bac-
teria may play a most important part in the formation of iron
deposits wherever water is present, and such deposits will, in
the first instance, be superficial. In any case, the data obtained
by me are insufficient to do more than establish the fact that
material may rise to the surface in dry weather, but say nothing
as to whether wet weather may not w^ash it down again to an
equally 'great extent. The alkaline ash left after bush fires
would certainly tend to carry silica downwards again as soon
as any rain fell.

58

Alfred J. Evxirt : Alluvial SoU.

added
pole

1

O

X

•

•

4!

•
N

4i

•

1

Manure
persq.

•

1

•

09

•

55

1

fH

09

-H

i

•

CO

•

CO

•

Xi

r—i
fH

•

00

1

*sqi u{ 'q^dap

•o

la

Ud

eo

iH -

"CO

09

o

Od

Ud

CO

'8U]9i }o aiod
'bs jad asvajo

•

O

CO

•

•

^

5

id

09

S

g

s

09 .
01

CO
CO

-u\ JO asvajoap

+

+

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

00

^uaivddviii^ox

(M

eo

X

i>

A

9

•

•

CO

O)

Ud

CO

anaaa

O

•

iH

•

•

00

•

•

•

eo

•

. X

•

•u{ JO asvajoaa

o
1

o
1

O

1

o
1

O
1

o
1

o

1

»H
1

iH

1

o
1

CO

1

•OM

^

eo

(M

»

I-H

00

CO

rf»

CO

Od

9P

•

^H

i.s

•

04

CO

1>

•

09

00
09

03
CO*

09

•

*>

CO

id

<D

r-t

05

CO

lO

1>

\a

X

5

fH

to

•

4J

(N

CO

09

la

o

-*

-&

iH

lA

CC

•

'«f<

^•

CO

-"^

o

"*

U3

CO

»o

Oi

S

00

1>

CO

oo

$

fe

CO

1>

CO
iH

iH

09

•

eS OpS

1

CO

^•

-*}<

-"^

eo

-*

la

^

iO

CO

$

HH

kO

CO

CO

Oi

-•f

09

CO

09

US

09

■ astsaja

O

1-1

o

o

o

1-i

I-H

iH

fH

iH

•

CO

•UI JO asvdjoaa

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

d

+

+

+

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

5«

•

5

5;

§

rH

09

l-l

X

oo

^

3

^

s

uble mat
in 2 litn

•

•

o

O

•

o

•

o

•

o

o

o

•

o

•

O

o

•

•

•

5i

•

eo

•

01

Oi

•

58

•

fH

lA

•

»H

X

■

11

00

o

o

o

o

O

o

•

o

o

O

o

-*

S:a

i-<

oq

<M

r^

tj

iH

to

09

o

1>

X

rt*

>t

-*

00

eo

•<*

X

kO

»o

CO

iO

iO

r-i

^^

3

•

o

•

o

•

o

•

o

•

o

•

o

•

o

•

o

•

o

•

o

•

aiod 'bs

jad

i>

•

\a

Od

1-H

CO

"*

X

Oi

t

•
iH

*8qi u; qtrs dojo

CO

•

•

CO

•

00

•

CO

«

•

X

•

X

•

Oi

•

pa^vinaivaxnK

rH

i-H

iH

I-H

iH

l-(

fH

iH

iH

iH

ajod
'be Jad -sqi

o

09

s

i

09
09

s

-H
09

09

00

X
00

iH

?

i

u\ p[aii{ dojQ

f— 1

iH

»-H

I-H

iH

I-H

iH

1-i

iH

-H

iH

q^dap saqaui

X)

09

kti

iO

91 J»d SoHH

l>

i-H
O

s

US

CO

s

»H

o

s

3

1>

S

Jdd siUBJf)

•

o

o

o

d

d

o

d

O

o

I-H

q^dap saqau;
Z Jad SoijH

CO

CO

X

X

CO

CO

I-H

o

X

U5

iH

09

•

09

CO

OS

jad snivjo

o

d

o

09

o

o

O

o

iO

-H

•

•
00

1

00

•

.fa

t

1

1

•

•

4i

1

.a

1

1

Manure per acre

1
O

43

S
09

cH

i

48
1

oo
O

1

»H

d

•

00

O

1

1

02

•

a
s

09

§

1

u

S3
CO

a2

l2

1

09

' S3

o

•*oid

jz;

02

02

O}

O

PQ

<

PQ

c;

o»

o

•H

09

CO

-*

to

CO

1^

X

1

Oi

[Pboc. Boy. Soc. Victoria, 20 (N.8.). Pt. I., 1907.]

Art. VI. — Fossil Fish Remains from the TertiaHes

of Australia.

Part II.

By F. chapman, A.L.S., tfec,
Palaeontologist, National Museum, Melbourne,

AND

G. B. PRITCHARD; F.G.S.,
Lecturer on Geolopfy, &c.. Working Men's College, Melbourne.

(With Plates V.-VIII.).

[Read l.Sth June, 1907.] *

Contents.

PAGB

I. — Introduction 59

II. — Description of Species 60

III. — Range in time of the Genera 71

IV. — Distribution of Species 72

V — Bibliography 73

VI. — Corrigenda to Part I 74

VII.— Explanation of Plates .--... 74

L— INTRODUCTION.

The present paper is written as a continuation of the section
previously published,^ which dealt entirely with our Tertiary
selachians included in the sub-order Asterospondyli. We now
describe one of our remaining selachians, as well as the chimae-
roids and two members of the Actinopterygii, altogether repre-
sented by seven species. We have adso many specimens of ver-

1 Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., vol. xvii., n.u., pt. i., 1904, pp. 267-297.

60 Chapman and Pritchard :

tebrae and oth^r fish remains from the Barwonian and KAlim-
nan deposits, as well as several examples from the Pleistocene
of Victoria. Tliese are not included at present, as we
wish to obtain a more complete recent series for comparison.
The following genera are now dealt with, all the species of
which appear to be new, namely, Myliobatis, Edaphodon, Ischyo-
dus, Labrodon, and Diodon. Of these, Myliobatis and Atopo-
mycterus (Diodon) have been previously recorded by Professor
Tate, but no species have been figured or described.

In addition to the large, amount of material available to us
in the National Museum collection and in the private collection
of one of us, we have made use of the collections of Messrs. G.
Sweet, F.G.S., J. R. Dixon, and F. P. Spry, and to these gentle-
men we now express our thanks for kindly favouring us with
the opportunity of dealing with their specimens. To Prof.
Baldwin Spencer, C.M.G., F.R.S., we are indebted for handing
to us for description the example of Ischyodus from Table
Cape.

II.— DKHCRIPTION OF SPECIES.

Order Selachii.

Family Myliobatidae,

Genus Myliobatis^ Cuvier.

Myliobatis moorabbinensis, sp. nov. (Plate V., Figs 1-3).

Description. — Median palatal teeth about five times as wide
as long, with a rather narrow and depressed aspect, and a dis-
tinct marginal curvature. Palatal surface flat to slightly con-
vex. Denticles of the articulating surface strong, and number-
ing about ten in 10 mm. of length.

Dimensions. — Width of palatal teeth, 22 to 23 mm. ; length,
5 to 6 mm. ; length of articulating surface, about 5 mm.

Locality and Horizon. — Beaumaris, Port Phillip, Kalimnan.
(Pritchard Coll.).

Observations. — The genus Myliobatis has previously been re-
corded by the late Prof. R. Tate in his ''Census of the Austra-

Fossil Fish Remains. 61

> •

lian Tertiary Fauna/' ^ Two species of the genus have also

been recorded by Messrs. J. Dennant and A. E. Kitson in their
"Catalogue of the Described Species of Fossils in the Cainozoic
Fauna of Victoria, South Australia and Tasmania /'2 namely,
M. toliapica Agassiz (from Beaumaris), and M. plicatilis
Daivis (from Table Cape). Mr. Denna'nt,'* with whom we have
conferred respecting these fossils, is unable to give us any
definite information ais to the original identification of the fossils
referred to, but they were presumably identified by Prof. Tate.
Our specimens from Beaumaris are distinct from M. toliapica in
their shorter lateral dimension, but since the latter species is in
other respects fairly closely allied, it is probable thart; the earlier
Victorian record of M. toliapica was based on an imperfect com-
parison of M. moorabbinensis. The Table Cape specimen is not
available for comparison.

M. moorabbinensis appears to differ from our living forms by
being much smaller and of ai more slender character. These
features seem constant, judging by their uniformity in the frag-
mentary remains hitherto obtained.

Order Chimakroidp:i.

Family Chiftiaeridae,
Genus Edaphodon, Bucklaud.

Edaphodon sweeti, sp. nov. (Plate V., Figs. 4-6.)

Description. — Mandibular teeth robust, with 5 tritors, and a
prominent and rather sharp beaik. In its structure, the beak
tritor is laminated in front to half its length, and tubulated be-
hind ; the tubules follow the direction of the laminae, and are
obliquely airranged along the oral margin. The remaining tri-
tors have a fine, conspicuous, tubulated structure. Median tri-
tor very large, strongly convex, elongately triangular, and

1 Jour. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., vol. xxii., pt. 2, 1888, p. 247.

2 Records Geol. Surv., Victoria, vol. i., pt. 2, 1903, p. 94.

3 Since writing the above, we have heard with much regret of the decease of this widely
known geologist, who has done so much to further the study of our Victorian Tertiary
fauna

62

Chdi^pinian and PHtchard:

closely conjoined by a smaller and narrow tritor which extends
to the oral margin. Posterior tritor elongate-subquadrate, tend-
ing posteriorly to subdivide lineally. The fifth tritor lies behind
the symphysial facette, and is narrow, long-elliptical, and follows
the curve of the lower border. Symphysial ffuoette slightly
longer than one-third the entire length of the lower border.

Palatine teeth (nearly always imperfect) relatively broad, and
showing the presence of three tritors, the hinder and inner one
being very much larger than the remaining two, and generally
fully twice the length and breadth of the next largest tritor.
Structure of the tritors similarly tubulaite to tkose of the man-
dibular, but coarser. This may account for their usually more
decomposed condition in the fossil state.

Vomerine teeth narrow ; inner symphysial surface concave,
and furnished with a usually large number of elongated tritors,
ranging from 7 to 24. Tritors of the symphysial margin largest,
elongate towards the front, whilst in the oral margin they are
more numerous, and broken into an imbricated succession. Tri-
tors with a very finely tubulated structure.

Dimensions. — ^Approximate, on account of worn condition of
teeth.

Mandibular Tbeth.

Spec. a. (type) -
Spec. b. - - ■

Palatine Tooth.

(Figd. spec, imperfect)
Vomerine Teeth.

Spec. a. - - -

Spec. b. (imperfect) ■

Spec. c. (imperfect) -

Spec. d. - - •

Locality and Horizon. — Grange. Burn, near Hamilton, Western
Victoria from the nodule bed at the base of the Kalimnan
(Nat. Mus. Coll., pres. A. A. Kelley ; also F. Spry Coll., G. Sweet
Coll., and G. B. Pritchard Coll.), Beaumaris, Port Phillip, base of
the Kalimnan (Nat. Mus. Coll., pres. by the late W. B. Jennings,
and Coll. by the late W. Kershaw ; also G. B. Pritchard Coll.).

Length.

Height.

Thickness.

69

36

-

17

75

30

-

16

Leiidfth.

Greatest width.

Thiokncbs.

47

31

-

16

Length.

Height.

Greatest
Thickness.

71

29

-

12

43

12

-

10

37

20

-

10

34

i4

_

6

Fossil Fish Remains. 63

Observations. — ^As in the case of the Diodon presently to be
described, we are also fortunate in having so complete a series
of these fish remains, and although we lack many completely
preserved specimens, there is a large number of fragmentary
specimens, and these have materially assisted in the elucidation
of their characters as a whole. In all, we have examined about
35 examples of this form. Judging by the general characters
shown in the previously illustrated examples of Edaphodon teeth,
our forms show some slight divergences from typical specimens
in the number and arrangement of the tritors, apparently mak-
ing an approach towards Chimsera.^ The recorded range of
Ekiaphodon is Cretaceous to Oligooene. It does not appear to
have been noted before as occurring in the rocks of the southern
hemisphere.

Comparing our fossils with specimens of Edaphodon in our
Museum from British localities, and with various descriptions
and figures available for our purpose, the nearest ally appears
to be Edaphodon buoklandi, Agaseiz'' from the British Eocene;
but this species is a larger form, is more heavily built, and the
tritors have a coarser structure.

Genus Ischyodus^ Egerton.

Ischyodus mortoni, sp. nov. (Plate VI., Fig. 6.)

Description. — The specimen to which we append the above
name is part of a left mandibular tooth having a very elongate
and robust character, and with a remarkable conca/vity towards
the upper part in the posterior region. The extreme anterior
portion of the tooth is missing, but the posterior is fairly com-
plete, showing part of the smooth superficial bony layer of the
posterior margin. This marginal layer is marked by a series of
slightly undulaiting thread-like ridges, which are most distinct
on the inner third of the sm^ace, a stronger ridge marking off
this area. It is, moreover, oonvexly rounded off where it meets

1 Compare diagrams in Smith Woodward Cat. Foss. Fishes (Brit. Miis.), pt. ii.^
1801, p. 64.

2 Poiss. Fo88., vol. ill., 1843, p. 851, pi. xl., a, figs. 1-4, 9-12, 19-24 ; also E. eurygna-
thus, Ag., Dixon, Fosa. Sussex, 1850, p. Ill, pL x., figs. 18, 19, 22, pi. xii., f. 5.

64 Chapman and Pritchard :

the symphysial facette. The width of the latter is 8 mm. near
the posterior margin. A narrow elevated ridge runs along the
symphysial facette about 5 mm. from the margin, making an
angle of about 30 deg. with the posterior layer. The tritors
consist of very coarsely tubulated material, and in this speci-
men have been almost entirely weathered out, only a thin layer
remaining, but sufficient 1 > show the presence of three very
long, narrow tritors on the posterior portion of the tooth.

Dimensions. — Height, 30.5 mm.; greatest thickness, 16 mm.

Locality and Horizon. — Table Cape, Tasmania. From the
"Turritella beds," Jan Jukian. Tasmanian Museum Collection,
Hobart.

Observations. — The above species shows a striking similarity
in its general characters to Ischyodus egertoni, Buckland^ from
the British Jurassic, but is much narrower and more elongate,
with long narrow tritors showing a more marked parallelism.

The genus Ischyodus ha? been previously recorded from the
Tertiary rocks of Amuri Bluff, New Zealand, and identified with
Agassiz's I. brevirostris by E. T. Newton.'^ The latter species
belongs to the Lower and Upper Cretaceous of England. It
is unfortunate that a reference to the Amuri Bluff deposits as
Greensand^ should have been made and perpetuated, consider-
ing that the fauna is so distinctly tertiary. Subsequent to
Newton's description of the New Zealaaid specimen, three others
have been recorded under the same specific name by J. W.
Davis, from Amuri Bluff.* It is just possible, however, that
since these specimens are more or less fragmentary, further
material may show the New Zealand form to be a distinct
species.

With regard to the name I. brevirostris, A. S. Woodward has
already shown* that I. thurmanni, Pictet and Campiche, has
priority over it.

1 Ghimaera egertonii, Buckland. Proc. Geol. Soc. Lond., vol. ii., 1836, p. 206.
Chimaera (Ischyodus) egertoni, Agassiz. Poiss. Foes., vol. iii., 1843, p. 340, xl.c, figs. 1-10.

2 Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc., vol. xxxii., 1876, p. 326, pi. xxi., fig. 5.

3 Hector, Handbook of N. Zealand, 1883, p. 31 (referred to as Lower GreensandX—
Newton, Q.J.G.S., vol. xxxii., 1876, p. 326 (Lower Greensand).- Davis, Trans. R. Dubl.
Soc., vol. iv., ser. 2, 1888, p. 42 (Cretaceo-tertiary). -Smith Woodward, Cat. Foss. Fishes,
Brit. Mus., pt. ii., p. 68 (Greensand).

4 Trans. R. Dubl. Soc., vol. iv., ser. 2, 1888, p. 42, pi. vii., figs. 10-13.

5 Cat. Fossil I'^ishes, Brit. Mus., pt. ii., 1891, p. 67.

FoaaU Fish JRemaiTta. 65

The Tasmanian specimeiQ, collected from Table Cape, was pre-
sented to the Tasmaniaoi Museum, Hobart, by Chas. Mackenzie,
Esq. We owe the opportimity of dealing with this specimen to
the courtesy of Prof. W. B. Sgpncer, C.M.G., who received it
from Mr. Morton, the curator, after whom we have much plea-
sure in naming it.^

Order Actinopterygii.

Familv Labridae,

Genus Labrodon^ Gervais.

Labrodon confertidens, sp. nov. (Plate V., Fig. 7.)

Description. — Lower pharyngeal dentition subtriangular, with
a very broad base, and apparently produced in front to a broadly
rounded point, but our specimen is unfortunately imperfect in
this respect. Surface strongly convex in the median area and
tumid towards the front. Teeth very densely crowded, normally
circular in section, excepting where so closely packed as to be-
come compressed into polygonal form, both laterally, amd from
back to front along the lines of greatest convexity. Posteriorly
the teeth become distinctly triangular. The largest teeth are
situated in the median area, and form about 4 rows ; thej^
measure up to 3 mm. in diameter. The smallest teeth are
situated anteriorly, and principally along the lateral extremi-
ties ; they average about .75 mm. in diaoneter. By the fractured
anterior of this pharyngeal, it may be noted that there are five
suocessional series of teeth in addition to the functional layer.
The unworn teeth are seen to have perfectly spherical and
highly enamelled crowns.

Dimensions. — Width of completed specimen, 54 mm. ; width
at the base of beak-like projection, about 10 mm. ; antero-
posterior diameter, probably about 31 mm.

Locality and Horizon. — ^Grange Burn near Hamilton, Western
Victoria. Base of the Kalimnan. National Museum Collection
(presented by A. A. Kelley, Esq.).

1 Since this was written we have heard with the deepest regret of the death of the
distinguished curator of the Tasmanian Museum.

6

66 Chapman and Pritchard :

Observations. — The nearest ally to the above species appears
to be the North American form described under the name of
Pharyngodopilus carolinensis,! from the Tertiary Phosphate
beds of South Carolina; but the characters and arrangement of
the teeth are distinct, the latter form having its dentition in
more regular series. We might also draw some comparison with
L. haueri, Miinster, sp.,^ from the Miocene of the Vienna Basin,
Italy, Sicily and Brittany, but this form does not have its teeth
so crowded, being usually openly spaced.

Labrodon depressus, sp. nov. (Plate V., Figs. 8-9.)

Description. — There is amother specimen of the dentition of
Labrodon in our collection which, since it show« considerable
divergence from the foregoing species, we have thought ad-
visable to separate, noting some of its principal features. This
pharyngeal is remarkable for its thin and depressed aspect,
nearly equiangular in outline, with rather irregular and closely-
packed teeth, and showing on the edges four successive layers.
On the lower surface the baises of the teeth are well shown, and
each possesses a conspicuous and well-developed cavity, which
is centaral and circular. As compared with the previous species,
the teeth are rather lenticular than circular.

Dimensions. — Diameter of largest teeth, 3.5 mm. ; smallest
teeth, 2 mm. Average height of teeth, 1.75 mm. Width of
hapryngerl, about 27 mm. ; antero-posterior diameter, 16 mm. ;
total thickness^ 8 mm.

Locality and Horizon. — ^Beaumaa-is, Port Phillip. Kalimnan.
(Pritchard Coll.).

Family Diodontidae,

Genus Diodon^ Linnaeus.

Diodon formosus, sp. nov. (Plate VL, Figs. 1-3; Plate VII.;

Plate VIII., Figs. 1-7.)

Description. — Jaws solid, and apparently heavier than in other
known fossil forms. Upper jaw with a broadly-angular beak.
Lower jaw rounded in front, and more depressed on the inner

1 Joum. Acad. Nat. Sci., 2nd ser., vol. viii., 1877, p. 256, pi. xxxiv., figs. 19-24 (especi-
ally fig. 20).

2 Phyllodus haueri, von MUnster, Beitr., Petrefaot, pt. vii., 1846, p. 6, pi. i., fig. 1.

Fossil Fish Remains.

67

surface than the corresponding palatal surface of the upper
jaw. Denticles of the jaw margin comparatively coarse, and
irregular in size, with a vermiculately crinkled surface except
where worn. In the largest specimen the pile of palatal plates
numbers seventeen, whilst in the smallest specimens before us
there are only five, and average sized examples show eleven or
twelve.

These Diodon jaws show very considerable variation in form,
both as to the angle of the upper jaw margin, which ranges from
95 degrees to 110 degrees; and also in the excavart:ed area
between the palatal pile and the margin, which is often deeply
concave, while the distance between the anterior margin of the
plates and the denticulated border varies between 8.5 mm. and
18 mm. These measurements were made on full grown
examples.

The shape of the palate is generally suboval, in which the
lateral axis is the longer.

Dimensions op the Jaws op Diodon pormosus, based
on the more perpbct examples.

UPPER JAW.

Lateral
Width.

Base to
Front.

Width of
Palate.

Depth of No. of
Palate. Plates.

Locality.

15mm.

9.5mm.*

11.5mra.

7 mm 4 imperfect

Beaumaris

31 „

19.5 „

20.5 „

11 » (?)

Beaumaris

36 „

21 ,,

25 „

14 ,, 10

Beaumaris

39 „*

31 .,

36.5 „

18 „ 8

Beaumaris

52 „

49 „

34 „

28 „ S

Grange Burn

51 „

41 „

32 „

28.5 ,, only 7 visible

Grange Burn

56 „

46 „

39 „

26 „ 12

Bean maris

66 „*

57 „

37 „

33 „ only (> visible

Grange Burn

70 „

57 „

41 „

33 „ 17

* (Circ.)

Beaumaris

LOWER JAW.

Lateral
Width.

Base to
Front.

Width of
Palate.

Depth of No. of
Palate. Plates.

Ijocality.

26.5mm.

17 mm.

17.5mm.

12.5mm. 6

Grange Burn

29 „

15,6 „

20 .,

11.5 „ 6

Beaiunaris

32 „

20 „

19 „

16 „ 6 visible

Beaumaris

42* „

36 „

30 „

30 „ 12
♦ (Giro.)

Beaumaris

5A

68 Ghapman and Pritchard :

In addition to the above, we have a large number of more
or less imperfect palates from which the average number of
plates in the pile was more accurately determined than might be
judged from the above table, and the proportion of incomplete
to complete specimens we would estimate at about three to one.

The relatively greater abundance of the upper jaw as com-
pared with the lower may be due to the fact that the lower jaw
soon falls away from the fish after death, and thus runs a greater
risk of destruction before coming under the influence of sedimen-
tation, and consequent preservation of the remains.

Locality and Horizon. — Grange Burn, Western Victoria, from
the nodule bed at the base of the Kalimnan (Nait. Mus. Coll.,
purchased R. Lindsay ; also 2 fine specimens of upper jaws pre-
sented by A. A. Kelley ; also Spry Coll. and Pritchard ColL).

Beaumaris, Port Phillip (Nat. Mus. Coll. specimens collected
by the late W. Kershaw, several presented by J. A. Kershaw, an
exceptionally fine upper jaw presented by C. P. Smart, a lower
jaw presented by the late J. F. Bailey and 8 specimens pur-
chased from W. B. Jennings ; also Pritchard Coll., including an
extensive series of small specimens ; and Dixon Coll., which has
yielded the largest specimen). — Base of the Kalimnan.

Observations. — ^The palatal aspect of the upper jaw shows the
fossil form to be more angularly pointed at the beak than in the
living D. hystrix, L., and more nearly approaching D. blochii,
Casteln., both of which species occur in Port Phillip, the latter
being the commoner. Lateral margin less curved and more
widely divergent than in the living forms, the marginal denticles
being generally coarser, averaging ten on each side, whilst our
recent forms have twice that number. There is also a greater
tendency in the full-grown fossil forms to an extension of the
excavated area between the palatal plates and the denticulated
oral margin.

It appears' that the recent form D. hystrix occasionally at-
tained dimensions nearly equal to that which is indicated by
the size of the jaw in the fossil species, since one individual
is recorded from the British Museum Collection^ which has a
length of thirty inches, but this is exceptional. Giinther* men-
tion>> the largest form as attaining a length of two feet.

1 Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus., vol. viii., 1870, p. 30(5.

2 An Introduction to the Study of Fishes, 18S0, p. 689.

Fo8»il Fish Remains. 69

Tho present species differs from other described fossils in
many particulars. From D. sigma^ it differs in having the
dental plates with a subquadrate outline, instead of, as in that
species, strongly rounded sides.

From D. vetus^ it may be readily separated by the broad
and angular shape of the jaws, and by their more massive build in
the palatal area. It is noteworthy that of the several described
fossil forms of Diodon only D. vetus appears to have been
preserved as perfectly as the present species.

The only other authentic species to which we may refer is
D. scillae, Agassiz^ from the Miocene of Italy, Sicily and Malta.
In this form the pala^tal plates are thinner and consequently
more numerous than in our species, and its lateral boundaries
are sinuous and incurved instead of convex.

It was in all probability the herein described species that
the late Professor Ralph Tate had in mind when he recorded
Atopomycterus from the Older Tertiary of Australia in his
"Census" of its fauna.* The reason that Tate assigned this
fossil to the genus Atopomycterus may probably have been due
to the fact that a fish, recorded by Steindachner^ as Atopomyc-
terus bocagei, had been found in Port Jackson, but this has
since been indicated as synonymous with Diodon novem-
maculatus, Cuviei.^

The genus Diodon is commonest as a Miocene fossil, and is
usually associated with other fish and cetacean remains charac-
teristic of phosphaJtic beds in various parts of the world, but it
also occurs in beds of Oligocene and Eocene age.

Diodon connewarrensis, sp. nov. (Plate VIIL, Figs. 8-10).

Description. — Spine smooth, short and strong, after the type
of those of D. hystrix, but not so acutely pointed, and without

1 Martin, Saraml. Geol. Reichsmus. Leiden, ser. 1, vol. iii., p. 16, pi. i., figs. 5, 5a, 5b.

2 Leidy, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., vol. vii., 1855, p. 397; also Journ. of same
Society, ser. 2, vol. viii., 1877, p. 255, pi. xxxiv., figs. 15-18.

3 Poiss. Fobs., vol. ii., pt. ii., p. 274. See also Smith Woodward, Cat. Foss. Fishes
Brit. Mu8., pt. iv., 1901, p. 572 ; text-figure 20 (p. 573).

4 Journ. Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales, vol. xxii., pt. ii., 1888, p. 247.

5 Sitzungsb. and K. Ak. Wiss. Wien, vol. liii., 1866, p. 477, pi, vi., f. 3.

6 A. GUnther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus., vol. viii., 1870, p. 308; also W. Macleay, Descr.
Cat Australian Fishes, vol. ii., 1881, p. 280.

70 Chapman and Pritchard :

the basal grooves. On the other hand, there is evidence of the
presence of an anterior ridge such as is seen ou the spines of D.
blochii. Both the above-mentioned species are living in Port
Phillip, D. hystrix being readily distinguished by its short
spine with a broad base, whilst D. blochii has fewer and more
slender spines with a comparatively narrow base.

The section of the fossil spine is subtrigonal, with the inner
surface concave at the base, the roots or basal prongs making
an angle of about 120 degrees with the maiin shaft.

Dimensions. — Length, 6 mm.; width from point to point of
the roots, 5 mm. ; thickness at the base of the spine, 2 mm.

Locality and Horizon. — Point Campbell clays, Lake Con-
newarre, near Geelong. — Baloombian (Pritchard Coll.).

Observations. — No separate spines of Diodon a.ppear to have
been recorded in the fossil state except those of the type speci-
men of D. erinaceus Agassiz, from the Upper Eocene of Monte
Bolca, near Verona.^ It therefore seems desirable to record the
above fossil with a distinctive name, especially since the example
was found in beds of older dat6 than those from which the
palates have hitherto been procured.

1 Poisfl. Fos8., vol. ii., pt. ii., p. 274. See also Smith Woodward, Cat. Foss. Fishes,
Brit. Mus., pt. iv., 1901, p. 672.

Fossil Fish Remains.

71

o

-♦3

d

(ii

a:

m

is

O

fie

PQ

-<

H

o
z

c

c

n

>5

O

O

0)

s

0)

s
o

O

a

o
u
o

3
o

0)

»

OQ
CO

s

S3
•-3

P5

I

00

a:

c

&4

X

CO

s

o

72

Chapman and Pritchard :

n

o

O

o

M4

H

D
PQ

M4

OQ

O
PQ

> 5

CO

I

\4

• o

^

g p^ s

S ® s

4^ S P

O o *

52; cS >

■ i

• be

i

s

A. 00 00

cT pq 'C -a §

« li i^

^ fl 3 S3 ®
^ d d ee 4tf

Eh O OQ ffl ^3

09
00

a

EO

o

4:)

I

o

O

a

O

t

o

O

o

CO

00 S

2 .

o
o

30

• pH

00

a

OQ ^

T.^-^ ^
S

o _

'^ o o

J ^ .3 s s

Fossil Fish Remains, 73

V. — Additions to Bibliography.

Agassiz, A, — Poissons fossiles. Vol. ii., 1835.

DixoHy F. — Geology and Fossils of Sussex. 1850.

JEastman^ C R, — Miocene Fishes.

In Report of Maryland Geological Survey, 1 904. Pp. 7 1-93.

Giinther^ A. — Catalogue of the Physostomi in the British Museum.
Cat. of Fishes. Vol. vii., 1870.

Id, — Introduction to the Study of Fishes. Edinburgh, 1880.

Leidy^ J, — Description of Vertebrate Remains, chiefly from the
Phosphate Beds of South Carolina.
Journ. Acad. Nat. Sciences, Philadelphia. Second ser., vol.
viii., 1877.

Afadeay^ W, — Descriptive Catalogue of Australian Fishes. Vol.
ii., 1881.

Miinstery G. von, — XJeber die in der Tertiar-Formation des
Wiener Beckens vorkonimenden Fisch-Ueberreste,
etc. Beitrage zur Petrefacten-Kunde. Heft 7. 1846.

Newton^ E, D, — On Two Chim»roid Jaws from the Lower
Greensand of New Zealand.
Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. Vol. xxxii., 1876, pp. 326-331.

Id, — The Ohimasroid Fishes of the British Cretaceous Rocks.

Mem. Geo). Surv. United Kingdom. Monograph iv.,
1878.

Phillipi^ E, — Ueber Ischyodus suevicus, nov. spec.

Palseontographica. Vol. xliv., 1897, pp. 1-10.

Riess^ /. — XJeber einige fossile Chimseriden Reste in Miinchener
palseontologischen Museum.
PalsBontographica. Vol. xxxiv., 1887-8, pp. 1-27.

Steady Z>, G. — Fishes of Australia. Sydney, 1906.

Woodward^ A. S, — Catalogue of Fossil Fishes, British Museum
(Natural History), pt. ii., 1891.

74 Chapman and Pritchard:

VI.— CORRIGENDA FOR PART I.

P. 280.— 12th line from top, for "pi." I. read "pi. XI."
p. 285.— 14th line from top, for "Creep" read "Creek."
P. 297. — In Explanation to Plates.

Uth line from top, delete " [5434]."

After Fig. 14 read " Oxyrhina hastalis^ Agassiz. Inner
surface of posterior tooth ; from Beaumaris. Nat-
ural size. [5424]."

Before Acanthias geelongensis insert "fig. 15" instead of
"14."

Delete last two lines on p. 297, " fig. 4 Oxyrhina hastalis^'^
etc.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES V.-VIIL

V.

Fig. 1. Myliobatis moorahbinensis, sp. no v. Tooth showing

articulating and outer surfaces. Beaumaris.

Fig. 2. M. moorabbinensis^ sp. nov. Lower surface of same

tooth.

Fig. 3. M. ffioorabbinensisy sp. nov. A tooth of less curvatnre,

showing lower surface. Beaumaris.

Fig. 4. Edaphodon sweetie sp. nov. Right mandibular tooth,

inner side. Grange Burn, near Hamilton.

Fig. 5. E, sweeti\ sp. nov. Right vomerine tooth. Grange

Burn.

Fig. 6. E. sweetly sp. nov. Left palatine tooth. Beaumaris.

Fig. 7. Labrodon confertidens, sp. nov. Lower pharyngeal.

Grange Burn. Natural size.

Fig. 8. Labrodon depressus^ sp. nov. Pharyngeal ; upper sur-
face. Beaumaris.

Fig. 9. Z. depressuSy sp. nov. Lower surface of same specimen.

All figures of the natural size.

Proc. li.S. Victoria. 1907. Plate V.

Teeth of Australian Tertiary Fishes.

• •• IT*

«

••-

«

» •

•• •

•m*.

• • ••

«« w W M ^

Proe, K.S- Vii'lori*. 191)7- Pl.il.' VI.

Teeth of Australian Tertiary Fishes.

••• .

•••

'•••

•v.-

•

• •

•••

• •

••

••

••••
•••

• ••
•••

• • •

• •

'••,

• • • ?.

'••.

• «

'»>•••

•••

•••• •

•••••

• • ••

••• ••

••• • «

• • •

• ••*»,

--WW

w
to w k

^ i.

Fossil Fish Remains. 75

Fig. 1. Diodon formosus, sp. no v. Outer surface of upper jaw.

Grange Burn, near Hamiltoi).
Fig. 2^ £). formosus, sp. nov. Inner surface of same specimen.
Eig. 3. D. formosus, sp. nov. Profile of same.
Fig. 4. Diodon blochii^ Oastelnau. Anterior view of upper

jaw of one of the species now living in Port

Phillip.
Fig. 5. D, blochii^ Castel. Profile of same.
Fig. 6. Ischyodus mortoni^ sp. nov. Left mandibular tooth.

Table Cape, Tasmania.
All figures of the natural size.

Vil.

Fig. 1. Diodon formosus, sp. nov. Outer surface of upper jaw

of a full grown example (Dixon Coll.). Beau-
maris.

Fig. 2. D, formosus^ sp. nov. Inner surface of same specimen.
Both figures of natural size.

VIII.

Fig. 1. Diodon formosiis^ sp. nov. Inner surface of upper

jaw. Beaumaris.
Fig. 2. D. Jormosus, sp. nov. Inner surface of lower jaw.

Beaumaris.
Fig. 3. D, fonnosus, sp. nov. Inner surface of lower jaw of a

young example. Beaumaris.
Fig. 4. D. formosus, sp. nov. Inner surface of upper jaw of

a young example. Grange Burn.
Fig. 5. D, formosus^ sp. nov. Inner surface of upper jaw of

a full-grown example. Showing the pile of

strong palatal plates and the marginal alveolar

ridges. Beaumaris.
Fig. 6. The same ; outer surface.
Fig. 7. The same ; edge view.

Fig. 8. Diodon connewarrensis^ sp. nov. Outer surface of spine.
Fig. 9. The same ; inner surface.
Fig. 10. The same; basal view.

Figs. 1-7 of the natural size; 8-10 magnified twice.

[Proc. Rot. Soc. Victoria, 20 (N.S.), Pt. I., 1907.]

Ar'w VII. — Contributions to the Flora of Australia,

No. 6}

By ALFRED J. EWART, Ph.D., D.Sc, RL.S., &0!,

Government Botanist and Professor of Botany
at the Melbourne University.

(With Plates IX.-XIII.).

[Read 11th July, 1907].

Anqianthus humipusus, Benth., var. grandiflorus, new var.
(Compositae), M. Koch. Woorooloo, W. Australia, 1906.

Attention is drawn to this plant on account of its remarkable
external resemblance to large specimens of Myriocephalus
rhizocephalus, Benth., forming a striking case of plant mimicry.
The two plants are readily distinguished by the pappus, which in
M. rhizocephalus consists of a single bristle, and in A. humifusus
of five or six fringed ragged scales. [Specimens exhibited].

Baeckea crispiplora, F. v. M. Fragm. IV., p. 72, var. tenuior

(Myrtaceae).

Elder exploring expedition No. 2. Kangaroo Hill, R Helms.
1891. Cowcowing, W.A., M. Koch, 1904. The variety is more
slender than the type forms and has a shorter pedicel, so that
the usually slightly smaller bracts are close under the ovary,
which is less urceolate than in the type form. A specimen from
Jibberding, W.A., M. Koch, 1905, is in some respects intermediate
between the variety and type form.

Callitris Morrisoni, R. T. Baker (Coniferae). Linn. Soc. of

N.S.W., vol. xxxi., 1906, p. 717.

Under this head Baker includes one of Oldfield's specimens
from W. Australia, which was placed by Mueller as a variety of

1 No. 6 in Vict Nat., vol. xxiv., 1907, p. 56

FUyi^a of Australia. 77

C. verrucosa, R. Br. This latter species is a synonym for C
robusta, R. Br., to which Baker admits his species closely
approaches. The internodes to which Baker attaches special
importance are not any shorter than in other specimens of C.
robusta, and the scales which he gives as obtuse are acute as in
C. robusta. There can be no doubt that this species is a variable
one, but variations are shown often on one and the same speci-
men, and hence it is necessary to retain for it the scope given by
Bentham, and include under it such varieties as microcarpa*
verrucosa, intratropica, and possibly also the columellaris of F.
M., and the Morrisoni of R. T. Baker. The last-named especi-
ally seems to come within the range of the C. robusta type, and
a similar specimen was referred to that species by Bentham in
the Flora Austral iensis, p. 237.

Cassinia laevis, R. Br. (Compositae).

This plant was recorded by Mueller as new to Victoria (Vict.
Nat., vol. X., 1893 and 1894, pp. 132 and 160), on the strength of
three specimens, one from Werribee Gorge, A. J. Campbell,
1892, one from J. F. Mulder, C. Otway, 1693, and the other
from C. French, Goulburn R. Mr. Tovey drew my attention
to the fact that these specimens were peculiar in several
respects, and on examination the Werribee specimen proves
to be C. longifolia, R. Br., and the Otway specimen C
aculeata. These three species are fairly closely related, but the
specimens in question are identical with the types of their respec-
tive species. [Specimens and types exhibited]. Hence C. laevis
has been wrongly recorded as Victorian.

Cassinia Thkodori, F. v. M.

The Victorian specimens in the Herbarium all prove to be
T5assinia arcuata, B. Br. Hence the former has been wrongly
recorded as Victorian owing to incorrect identification. See
Vict. Nat., vol. X., p. 160, 1894.

Chamaklaucium Halli, n. sp. (Myrtaceae), (after the Secretary
of the Royal Society). Cowcowing, W.A., M. Koch, Sept., 1904.

A small shrub with stiff erect rough greyish branches, the
leaves alternate and closely set at their ends in clusters of

78 Alfred J. Ewart :

nearly 1 to 3 cm. length. The leaves are terete, mostly half a cm.
long, slightly narrowed at the base, the apex curved to a small,
usually straight, white point, and sparsely covered with glandular
spots.

The flowers are practically sessile in terminal clusters of
usually three or more. Calyx tube wrinkled but not prominently
ridged (when dry), dark red, glandular, the five broad obtuse
ciliate lobes with a light red border, and with pellucid spots.
Corolla twice the length of the calyx, the lobes broad obtuse,
pale brownish-yellow, and minutely fringed. Staipens ten, the
anthers adherent to an enlarged glandular connective, alternating
with ten staminodes, the whole uniting to form a single distinct
tube within the corolla. Ovary of one loculus, with several
ovules arising from an erect wavy basal placenta. Style distended
below the middle, stigma globular with a basal fringe of hairs.

The plant is allied to C. ciliatum, but its pointed leaves,
flowers in terminal clusters, larger and broader unribbed calyces,
petals distinctly fringed, at once distinguish it. The latter
features show a slight approach to Verticordia, from which genus,
however, it differs widely.

CoNOSPERMUM Croniniae, Diels. Fragm. Phytog. Austr. Occid.,

p. 143):=C. amoenum, Meisn.

This "species" is merely a depauperated form of C. amoenum,
Meisn. With reduced inflorescences, somewhat smaller flowers and
bracts, perianth with the external hairs well developed, so that
the blue colour is partly hidden and the leaves usually, though not
always, horizontally spreading. None of these features is constant,
and a specimen seen by Bentham and referred to C. amoenum
diverges still more widely in the same direction. In the Flora
Australiensis, Bentham apparently described an extreme type iff
the direction of luxuriance, and hence for instance exaggerates
the size of the bracts. All grades of transition exist between the
luxuriant and depauperate forms, and Diels' flgure of the stamens
in the opened corolla is not quite correct, these and the peculiar
style being precisely similiar in both the luxuriant and
depauperate forms. Diels collected no new material, and
apparently saw only two of the extreme types at the Melbourne

Flora of Australia. 79

Herbarium, being unaware of the intermediate forms referred
by Bentham and Mueller to this species or of those since obtained.
Neither Bentham nor Mueller considered these forms to be
separable as a distinct and fairly constant variety, in which
opinion I must emphatically concur, and desire to point out the
danger of establishing a new species on a couple of odd forms
taken from another Herbarium.

Eriostemon (Phbbalium) gibbosus, Luehm. (Rutaceae). Norse-
man, W.A., J. D. Batt, 1897.

This plant was exhibited before the Field Naturalists in 1897
(vol. xiv., p. 18), but no description of it has been published.
The specimens are very fragmentary, but the leaves are like
those of E. difformis, and the flowers like those of C. obovalis.
The filaments are, however, not ciliate, and the anthers not apicu-
late, and there is no reason to suppose that the specimens form
a hybrid between these two species.

The younger branches are minutely pubescent, and the leaves
have very prominent glands. The calyx lobes are very short,
obtuse, and very slightly ciliate. The petals are glabrous and
imbricate. Of the ten stamens those opposite the petals are
somewhat longer than the others. The pale glabrous filaments
bear reddish spots, and the gynaeceum is glabrous.

Geococcus pusillus, J. Drumm. et Harv. (Cruciferae).

This curious plant was suggested by Bentham as being possibly
a form of Blennodia with dimorphic flowers and geophilous fruits.
This suggestion was revived by Mueller (Vict. Nat., 1892, p.
137), who pointed out that the foliage resembled that of Sisym-
brium cardaminoides, F. v. M., and that a Brazilian Cardamine
sometimes exhibits a similar peculiarity. Geococcus pusillus
might possibly be a geophilous form of Sisymbrim cardaminoides,
produced as the result of continued grazing or cropping.
Some specimens of Geococcus in the Herbarium have the
normal flowers of Sisymbrium, and show great variation in the
shape and length of the fruit. The shortened, and some-
times almost sagittate, fruit of Geococcus is obviously developed

80 Alfred J. Ewart:

in order to penetrate the ground readily. It may even be shorter
and broader than in the figures given, and may be three or more
times longer, and half as broad, thus bringing the fruit near to
some of the rather variable shapes assumed by the aerial fruits
of Sisymbrium cardaminoides.

Mr. Reader (Vict. Nat., 1905, p. 177), has, however, watched
the growth of the plant, and concludes that it is not a form of
S. cardaminoides, but is a good species (and genus) usually form-
ing hypogeal fruits, but when luxuriant also producing them
above ground. The variation in the shape of the fruit would,
however, bring it near to S. cardaminoides. The differences in
the flowers might be easily the result of their autogamous habit,
as in species of Viola or Lamiuni. Numerous attempts to germ-
inate and grow the plant from seed failed. The seed apparently
rapidly losesjts vitality, presumably in accordance with the fact
that normally it is immediately planted. The appended figures
show that Geococcus differs in many respects besides its general
habit from Sisymbrium^ but until the former plant has been
proved to remain true for several generations, the possibility of
a relationship between the two remains. Geococcus was omitted
from the census by Mueller, but on the present evidence as to its
structure must be restored, at least until cultural experiments
succeed in showing that it is a form of another plant.

GuNNiOPSis INTERMEDIA, Diels. (Diels and Pritzel, Fragm.
Phyt. Aust., etc., p. 197) = Aizoon intermedium, Diels.
(Aizoaceae).

This new species appears to be the same as the " Aizoon glab-
rum " recorded by Mr. Luehmann, but of which no description
was published.

In Engler's Pflanzenfamilien, Pax founds the genus Gunni-
opsis for the Australian species of Aizoon upon the following
characters : —

Aizoon, calyx 5 partite, imbricate ; capsule loculicidal.
GuNNiOPSis, calyx 4 partite, valvate ; capsule septicidal.

In Gunniopsis, G. quadrifaria (F. v. M.), Pax is included,
which is presumably a misprint for G. quadritida (A. quadritidum,
F. V. M.). The capsule is, however, both septicidal and partly

Flora of Australia. 81

loculicidal in both the Australian species, the valvate and imbri-
cate characters do not appear to be constant, and further, the
calyx is sometimes five partite, as was first noted by Mueller,
Fragm., vol. vii., p. 129. There seems therefore to be no solid
reason for founding a new genus for the Australian Aizoons, but
preferably to give to that genus the somewhat broader latitude
^ulmitted by Bentham to include the Australian species, in spite
of their additional development of septicidal dehiscence, and
usually of four partite calyces.

Helipterum Jesskni, F. v. M. M. Koch, W. Australia, 1904.

The plant is mentioned on account of its highly misleading
external resemblance to Myriocephalus gracilis, Benth. [Specimens
exhibited.]

Heliohrtsum SUBULIPOLIUM, F. v. M. (Compositae). (Syn. H.

filifolium, F. v. M.).

Various forms of this plant from W. Australia (Cowcowing,
M. Koch, 1904) bridge the gap to the very closely allied "species"
H. tilifoliuin, F. v. M., which appears to be merely a form of H.
subulifoiium, and can probably be classed as a variety of that
species. The plant is often confused with Helipterum tenellum
on account of its almost plumose pappus and filiform leaves but
differs widely in its involucre.

Helichrysum Tepperi, F. v. M. (Compositae). Cowcowing Lakes,
W. Australia, M. Koch, 1904; L. Boga, Victoria, H. B.
Williamson, 1898.

This pretty little Composite described by Mueller in the S.
Science Record 1882, p. 1, from S. Australia, was represented in
Herbarium by the type specimens only. The plant from L. Boga
was named Podolepis Lessoni by Mr. Luehmann, to a dwarf form
of which it bears a fairly close resemblance, as noted by Mueller.
The two are, however, quite distinct, and H. Tepperi, though
apparently rare has a wide range through Victoria, S. Australia
and W. Australia. It has been recorded from W. Australia
by Spencer le Moore in Journ. Linn. Soc. of London, vol.
xxxiv., 1899, p. 198.

6

82 Alfred J. Ewart:

Hbliptbbum Guilpoylei, n. sp. (Compositae) (named after the
Director of the Melbourne Botanical Gardens).

An annual prostate or ascending, rarely exceeding 4 to 6 cm. in
height, covered with long loosely woolly hairs, and with one or
more stems branching to form clusters of small ovoid heads.
Leaves sessile, narrow, linerfr, mostly obtusely pointed, and 4 to
5 mm. long, channelled on the upper surface, alternate or opposite.
Heads partly within the upper leaves, mostly 5 mm. long by 3
broad, the outer bracts 2 mm., the inner 4 or 5, and with small
yellow or brown laminas, the innermost smaller again without
any lamina and very thin. All with various entire margins, and
twenty or more in number. Flowers all tubular and hermaphro-
dite, usually ten, the corolla, with five blunt points, the style
swollen at the base, the pappus about the length of the corolla,
of usually 8 plumose scales flattened at their bases and united to
form a sessile ring easily separated entire. Achenes 1.5 to 2 mm.
long, and quite twice as long as broad, reddish-brown, glabrous,
the outer layers becoming mucilaginous in water, but with a
reticulate surface before swelling. Style bifurcate with papillose
ends ; it and the stamens barely projecting beyond the throat of
the corolla.

The plant has a close external resemblance to H. exiguum, F.
V. M., but appears to be allied to H. pygmaeuni, Benth., and
of recently described species. H. verecundum (S. Moore, Journ.
Linn. Soc, vol. xxxiv., 1899, p. 200) is distinguished by its min-
ute size, and H. Zacchaeus (S. Moore, Journ. of Bot., 1897, p.
166), by its pappus, achenes nearly as broad as long, and green
tips to the involucral scales. The latter species also has presum-
ably not the mucilaginous seed coat or peculiar style of H. Guil-
foylei Owing to the former fact the whole cluster of ripe
achenes adheres and comes out in one mass, usually with the
florets and pappus attached, two or three of the florets being
usually sterile.

KocHiA Massoni, n. sp. (Chenopodiaceae) (named after Prof.
Masson). Cowcowing, W.A., M. Koch, 1904.

A small annual slightly prostate, up to 15 cm. in height, soft,
and sparsely covered with a white or brownish wool, less developed

FUtra of Australia. 83

on the leaves and absent from the fruits. Leaves linear, mostly
1^ cm. long, narrow without obtuse ends, alternate, closely set,
the upper ones with sessile axillary flowers. Fruit sessile, dark
greyish-brown, table-like, with ridged sides, 2 mm. high, and
4 mm. broad at the top, 2 mm. at base. The fruit thus has a flat
top and broadened rim, but no wing. The latter fact at once
distinguishes it from K. humillima, to which it is otherwise
fairly closely allied in habit and general appearance. The plant
is much smaller than the Kochia polypterygia of Diels, has
smaller fruits with the discoid wing much less developed, and a
flattened top to the fruit with the ridges barely showing.

Patersonia Drummondi, F. v. M. (Irideae). Cowcowing, W.A.,

M. Koch, 1904.

The plant appears to be very rare, only three sheets of imperfect
specimens being in the National Herbarium, collected by
Drummond. Koch's specimens have the marginal hairs less
prominently developed than the type, but some of Drummond's
specimens show the same peculiarity, the larger hairs apparently
rubbing off* readily. A part of Drummond's specimens had
evidently been burnt back by a bush tire some time previously to
their collection.

PoDOLEPis Kendalli, F. V. M., var. nanus, new var. (Couipositae).

Height four to six inches. Flowers all terminal and smaller
than the terminal ones of the type. Waterloo, W. A., Max Koch,
1906. Champion Bay, W.A., L. Gould, 1890.

PoDOLBPis Spenceri, n. sp. (Corapositae), (named after Prof.
W. Baldwin Spencer). AVoorooloo, W.A., M. Koch, 1906.

Annual, 20-40 cm. height, one or more flowering stems from
the same root, forming a loose panicle of heads, the tinal forks
almost dichotomous. Stems glabrous, leaves hairy, and almost
woolly on the under sides. Basal leaves lanceolate, spathulate
about 5 cm. long by 1 cm. broad, the upper leaves all alternate,
becoming narrower and smaller, and all sessile, with broad
slightly-decurrent bases.

6a

84 Alfred J. Ewart :

Heads on stalks of usually 5 or more cm., 1 to ^ cm. long,
and nearly as broad as long. Basal and outer bracts small,
sessile and obtuse, the inner larger, developing pronounced claws
with glands on the outer surface, and becoming more pointed ;
all with shining transparent uuwrinkled and unfringed laminas.
Outer rows of florets, female, ligulate, pale to brownish-yellow,
with usually three blunt points, projecting beyond the bracts.
Inner disc florets tubular and hermaphrodite, with five short,
blunt, equal teeth. These in both florets are usually tipped with
red. Pappus of about eight or ten tine bristles, minutely fringed
but not plumose, present on all the florets.

The plant appears to come between P. Lessoni, and P. rugata.
It is easily distinguished from the recently described P. Georgei
of Diels, by the facts that the outer florets are ligulate, the leaves
are never oppositCj and the inner scales have curved glandular
stalks. The smooth scales distinguish it from P. rugata, and its
size and the colour of the florets from P. Lessoni.

Pterostylis reflexa, R. Br., var. intermedia, n. var.

(Orchidaceae).

This plant has been referred at different times to various
species and was finally classed by Baron von Mueller as a variety
of P. obtusa. Although closely related to P. obtusa it differs
from that species in various features. The leaves on the evanes-
cent basal rosette are three- veined instead of five- veined, and the
two lateral veins are often very faint. The leaves are also
smaller and more orbicular. The flowering stem is covered with
tine closely-set short papillae, especially short and dense on the
stalk and ridges of the ovary, and on the under surfaces of the
leaves. The upper leaves on the flowering stem are often more
than an inch long and nearly quarter of an inch broad, the edges
finely denticulate, and contracted to a subulate brownish, often
curved tip usually one-eighth of an inch or more in length, but
less developed on the basal leaves. The labellum is lanceolate,
strongly contracted in its upper third to a reddish-brown entire
tip. The basal appendage is curved and irregularly fringed with
cilia along its distal third, the terminal cilium being larger than
the rest. In other respects the plant bears a close resemblance

Flora of Australia. 86

to P. obtusa, from which however its labellum at once distin-
guishes it. The labellum and flower are like those of P. praecox,
the leaves, stem, and papillose surface are more like the charac-
ters of P. reflexa.

Since a perfect series of gradations exist as regard size of
flower, length of point of labellum, size and acuminate character
of leaves, and scabrous or glabrous character of stem and leaves
between P. reflexa and P. praecox, Lindl., the latter species
must be reduced to a variety of P. reflexa. P. obtusa, R. Br.,
seems to be distinct, especially as regards the obtusely oblong
shape of its labellum.

Mentone, J. R. Tovey and C. French, Jun., 1907 ; Chelten-
ham, J. McKibbin, 1893; Brighton, C. French, Jun.; Wedder-
burn, F. Colvin, 1880; near Beaumaris, C. French, Jun., 1882.

Tysonia phyllostegia, F. v. M. (Compositae) = Swinburnia

PHYLLOSTEGIA, F. V. M.

This plant was described in the Chemist and Druggist of
Australia, Oct. 1, 1896, at the time of Mueller's death. A
description but no specimens are in the Herbarium. The latter
were apparently claimed and retained by Mueller's Executors.
Mueller was evidently unaware of the existence of a prior generic
name of Tysonia Bolus, Boraginaceae, i-epresented by one African
species. Mueller's name therefore may be replaced Swinburnia
pliyllostegia, the generic name commeuioratiiig the services of
the present Minister of Agriculture to Botanical research.

Verticobdia Pbitzrlli, Diels. Fragm. Phytog. Austr.

Occid., p. 404.

Under this name Diels and Pritzel include the plant recorded
as V. humilis, Benth., of the Elder exploring expedition (Trans.
Roy. Soc. S. Aust. XVI, p. 353). The latter identification was
certainly incorrectly, since the specimens have bearded and not
glabrous styles, but the style is not capitate as shown in Diel's
figure but with an obtusely linear point. In other respects the
specimens tally closely with Diels' description so that their figure
of the style may^ave been incorrectly drawn.

86 Alfred. J. Ewart^

Unrecorded Naturalised Aliens.

Alkanna lutba, D. C. (Boragineae).
Derwent, Tasmania, ex. Herb., Spicer.

Alkanna lutea, D. C, var. pabviploba. (Boragineae).
Geelong, Victoria, H. B. Williamson, 1905.

Beta vulgabis, L., var. mabitima. (Chenopodiaceae).

Probably an escape from cultivation. Geelong, Victoria, H.
B. Williamson, 1907.

OoNiUM MACULATUM, L. ** Hemlock." (Umbelliferae).
Portland, 1907, and various other districts in Victoria.

EcBALLiUM ELATEBiUM, A. Rich. (Cucurbitaceae).

Squirting cucumber. Probably a garden escape. Geelong,
H. B. Williamson, 1907.

Gladiolus cuspidatus, Jacq. (Irideae).

Geelong, H. B. Williamson, 1905. Near Melbourne, F. M.
Reader, 1883. Ovens River, A. W. Euston, 1891. The first
appearance of this plant was recorded by Mr. Reader in the
Austr. Jour, of Pharmacy, 1 887.

LoLiUM ITALICUM, A. Br. Italian Rye grass (Gramineae).
Various districts in Victoria.

Matbicabia DiscoiDEA, D. C, "Wild Chamomile." (Compositae).
Widely spread in Victoria.

Ranunculus scelebatus, L. (Ranunculaceae).
Orbost, Snowy R., C. H. Grove, 1905.

Reseda Luteola, L. '* Dyer's Rocket." (Resedaceae).
Various localities in Victoria.

Proc. E.S. Victoria, 1907. Plate IX.

Chamaelaucium;[Halli, i

iJ

• ••

<:

• • •<

• ■ •

Pi-oc. K.S. ViclociH. 1907. Plat* X.

(a) GeOCOCCUS pusillUS, Drnnuii. I't Hiii-

(b) Kochia Massoni, ii. »i>.

• •

• •• «•

• • •

• •,

Proc B.S. Victoria, 1907. Plate XI.

§^^f ® ^

Geococcus pusillus, Drnmm. ct Hurv.

- -•-

•

•••••

•=:;:

■••••.:•

• •

•

•• ••

••• ••

• • •

•••••

•• -••

• •«•
• ••••

,*> •

Proc, R.S. Victoria, 1907. Plate XH.

*\!i;i^(ii4i/iA

Helipterum Guilfoylel, n- sp.

•v,

». "

Proc. K.S. Victoria, 1907. Plat* XIII.

Podolepis Spenceri,

• - •

.!•.

• •

• • •

Flora of Australia, 87

ScoLYMUS HisPANicus, L. (Couipositae).
Widely spread in Victoria, but not very plentiful.

Trigonella obnithopodoidbs, D. 0. "Fenugreek." (Legum-

inosae).
Penshurst, H. B. Williamson, January, 1907.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES.

Plate IX.

Chamaelaiuium Halli^ n. sp. — (a) Plant somewhat reduced, (b)
flower, (c) the same in vertical section, (d) leaf.

Plate X.

(a) Geococcus pusillus^ Drumm. and Harv. Plant reduced, (b)
Kochia Massoni^ n. sp. Plant reduced.

Plate XL

Geococcus pusillus, — 1 and 2, flower bud and flower ; 3 and 4,
superior and inferior views of flower ; 5 and 6, face and
back views of sepal; 7, petal; 8, hair; 9, ovary; 10,
11, 12, 13, stamen and pollen grains; 14, 15, 16, fruit;
17, seed; 18 section of seed ; 19, embryo; 20, radicle;
21, leaf.

Plate XII.

Helipterum Guiifoyiei, n. sp. — (a) Plant somewhat reduced, (b)
a median bract with lamina, (c) an innermost bract with
a blunt point but no lamina, (d) flower, (e) pollen grain,
(f) pappus.

Plate XIII.

PodoUpsis Spenceri, n. sp. — (a) plant reduced, (b) vai.y floret, (c)
disc floret, (d) inner stalked bract, (e) and (f) outer sessile
bracts.

RND OF VOLUME XX., PART T.

[Published Auqdst, 1907].

Printed by FoRO k Sox, 372 & 374 Drummond Street, Carlton, Melbourne.

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

apl ^0rieti) af §irtorm.

VOL. XX. (Nkw SimrKs).

PART II.

Edited under the Authority of the Council.
ISSUED MARCH, 1908.

{^Containing Papers read before the Society during the months of

October^ November ^ December, 1907).

THB AUTUOR8 or TUK BBVKRAL PAPHRS ARK BKVKRALLY RK8F0N8IBLK rOK TUK
BOUMONBSS OF THB OPINIONS OIVKN AND FOR THR ACCURACY OF THR

BTATBMKNT8 MADB TUBRKIN.

MELBOURNE :
VOKD & SON, FKINTERS, DRUMMOND STREE'J', CARLTON.

AGENTS TO THE SOCIETY:
WILLIAMS & NORQATB, 14 HENRIETTA STREET, CO VENT GARDEN, LONDON.

To whom all communioations for transmission to the Royal Society of Victoria,

from all parts of Europe, should be sent.

1908.

CONTENTS OF VOLUME XX., Pt. II,

PAOB

Art. VIII. — Notes on the Geology of Moorooduc in the Morn-

ington Peninsula. By Ernest W. Skbats, D.Sc,
A.R.C.S., F.G.S. (Plates XIV.-XVI.)- ... 89

•

Abt IX.—On the Validity of Callitris Morrisoni. By R. T.

Bakeb, F.L.S. ... ... ... ... 104

Art. X. — The Formation of Red Wood in Conifers. By Jean

White, M.Sc. ... ... 107

Art. XI. — Contributions to the Flora of Australia, No. 7. By

Alfred J. Ewart, D.Sc, Ph.D., F.L.S. ... 125

Art. XII. — On the occurrence of a Marsupium in an Echinoid

belonging to the Genus Scutellina. By T. S.
Hall, M.A. ... ... ... ... ... 140

Art. XIII. — The Coleoptera of King Island, Bass Strait. By

Arthur M. Lea ... ... ... ... 143

Art. XIV. — New or Little-known Victorian Fossils in the

National Museum. Part IX. — Some Tertiary
Si>ecies. By Frederick Chapman, A.L.S., &c.
(Plates XVII.-XIX.) ... ... ... ... 208

Art. XV. — The Anatomy of Some Australian Amphibia. Part

I. By GEORaiNA Sweet, D.Sc. (Melb. Univ.).
(Plates XX., XXL) ... ... ... ... 222

Art. XVI. — The Highlands and Main Divide of Western

Victoria. By T. S. Hart, M.A., F.G.S. (Plates
XXII.-XXVI.) ... ... ... ... 250

Annual Report and Balance Sheet ... ... ... 274

Office- Bearers ... .. ... ... ... ... 277

Committees ... ... ... . ... 278

List of Members ... ... ... ... ... ... 279

XNDBX ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ^oO

[Pboc. Kot. Soc. Victoria, 20 (N.S.), Pr. II., 1907.]

Ai{T. VIII. — ^otes on the Geology of Mooi^ooduc in the

Momington Peninsula,

By ERNEST W. SKEATS, D.Sc, A.R.C.S., F.G.S.

Professor of Geology, University of Melbourne.

(With Plates XIV.-XVI.).
[Eead 10th October, 1907].

Introduction.

My first visit to the neighbourhood of Moorooduc was made
in 1905, in the company of my assistants, Mesisrs. H. J. Grayson
and H. Summers, and the members of the Geological Field Class
of the University. On this visit we were concerned mainly with
three problems: —

1. The age of the Palaeozoic sediments which rise above the
mantle of Tertiary rocks.

2. The characters of the granitic mass of Mt. Eliza and of
the acid veins proceeding from it.

3. The nature of the metamorphi«m ©ffeoted by the in-
trusion to the granitic rocks into the Palseozoic sediments.

This first visit enabled us to obtain evidence bearing on the
two latter questions, but we shared the fate of previous observers
in failing to find any fossils, so that the age of the rocks
remained in doubt. A second visit made under similar auspices
in 1906 was more successful, as recognisable fossils were
obtained.

The present communication is based partly on field-work
during these visits and a later examination, and partly on a
petrological determination of the granitic and metamorphic
rocks.

90 Arvest W. SkeaU

PUEVIOITS LlTKRATURE.

Th© first published account of the geology of the district
is included in a report made by Selwyn, entitled: — "Report on
the Geology, Palaeontology and Mineralogy of the country
situated between Melbourne, Western Port Bay, Cape Schank
and Point Nepean, accompanied by a geological map and sec-
tions." This was published in the Votes and Proceedings af
the Legislative Council of Victoria, 1854-5, vol. I.

Two years later Selwyn published a fuller report on the dis-
trict, which was accompanied by a more detailed map.

Two statements in the eairlier paper have reference to the
rocks of the Moorooduc district. On page 7 he describes the
oldest rocks of the area, and in the absence of fossils ascribes
them on lithological grounds to the Older Palaeozoic series.
He recognised four lithologicad types among these rocks. One
type, "seen only on the flanks of Mt. Eliza, Mt. Martha and
Arthur's Seat," he described as '* very hard crystalline felspathic
grey-brown and red micaceous sandstones, and beds of hard,
dark-blue indurated slates and shales . . . and their cry-
stalline character is probably due to alteration caused by the
intrusion of the granite forming these hills."

The granites of the district he referred to on page 8 as
"presenting no peculiar features, being composed of quartz,
reddish-coloured felspar aaid black mica; the two latter, how-
ever, occasionally vary in colour, the mica being yellow and
the felspar white.'' On his second map, printed in 1856, Sel-
wyn records the cast of an encriuite stem from Sandstone
Island in Western Port, and the rocks are referred to the
Silurian period.

The next paper bearing on the area was by Mr. A. E. Kitson,
F.G.S., entitled, "Report on the coast line and adjacent coun-
try between Frankston, Mornington, and Dromana," and was pub-
lished in March, 1900, in Monthly Progress Report No. 12 of
the Department of Mines, Victoria. Mr. Kitson gives an in-
teresting and somewhat detailed account of the geolog}' of the
district, and the report is accompanied by sections and a geolo-
gical sketch map of the area described. Mr. Kitson does not
describe the plutonic mass of Mt. Eliza, but refers to the

Geology of Moorooduc. 91

acid dykes which penetrate the sedimentary rocks in a quarry
north of Moorooduc Radlway Station. He notes that they have
indurated the contiguous strata for distances ranging from less
than an inch to several feet. He describes rao^t of the dvkes as
aplites, and makes the interesting observation that the musco-
vite and biotite in the dykes line the walls, while the centres
consist of the more acid quartz and felspar. He gives a litho-
logicad description of the sediments, and refers to the spotted
character of the thin bedded micaceous shales. The rocks are
described under the heading " Silurian " by Mr. Kit son, and
the saane view is expressed in the large Geological Map of
Victoria of 1902. Mr. Kitson, however, remarks that the rocks
resemble in some respects the graptolite-bearing shales of the
Lancefield district, and " they may eventually prove to be of
Ordovician age, though the Silurian belt may be the exten-
sion of the Upper Silurian of the Melbourne district."

In the year 1900, Mr. Evelyn Hogg published a paper en-
titled, " The Petrology of certain Victorian granites.'^ ^ . Mr.
Hogg does not discuss the granitic rock at Mt. Eliza, but
describes one from an adjoining locality, Frankston, as a
medium-grained gratiitite, a rock with pink felspar, orthoclaae and
plagioclase being about equally represented, quartz and biotite.
The rock of Watson's Quarry, Mt. Martha, lying south of Mt.
Eliza, is described as a medium-grained syenite. As these are
the nearest granitic masses to Mt. Eliza, their composition is of
some interest in this connection. It is to be noted, however,
that Mr. Hogg defines a granitite ais including all holocrystalline
quartz-biotite, rocks in which a raonoclinic felspar is not the
dominant one, while he defines a syenite as a normal granite
with hornblende. Most petrologists would now, I think, describe
such a rock as a hornblende granite.

In 1901, Messrs. T. S. Hall and G. B. Pritchard published a
paperinthe Proceedingsof theRoyal Society of Victoria, Vol. XIV.,
N.S,. Pt. 1, entitled " Some Sections Illustrating the Geological
Structure of the Country about Momington." They go fully into
the previous literature of the area, and the greater part of the
paper is devoted to the detailed discussion of the Tertiary rocks
and fossils of the district. The rooks of the Moorooduc quarry

1 Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., ii.y., vol. xiii., UKK), p. 218.

lA

92 Ernest W, Skeats :

are described as Silurian or Ordovician. In this paper we have
the first indication that the palaeozoic rocks are fossiliferous
They describe a coarse conglomerate which underlies the older
basalt in many places as being "derived in the main from the
older palfieozoic sedimentary rocks of the district, and from the
granitic series. In two places — namely, in the first cutting on
the coast road south of Frankston, and near the first outcrop of
granite rock south again from this place on the shore, we have
found, a few graptolites in slate pebbles. They are very indis-
tinct, and beyond saying that they are species of Diplograptus,
we do not at present care to venture. Their evidence, rhen,
leaves the a^e of the rocks still open.^

In the year 1904 the first definite record of fossils found " in
situ'' in the older Palaeozoic rocks of the Mornington Peninsula
was given by Mr. T. S. Hall, M.A. ^ The record does not
mention the fijider of the fossils, but I understand that it was
Mr. W. H. Ferguson, of the Geological Survey of Victoria. The
first record is that of the occurrence of Climacograptus and
Diplograptus in boulders from Grice's Creek, Mornington, a
locality nearer to Moorooduc than the earlier finds of Messrs.
Hall and Pritchard. The evidence of these fossils, however,
still leaves the age of the beds doubtful. A second »uite of
fossils found " in situ " at Balnarring, and identified by Mr.
Hall, shows clearly that Lower Ordovician rocks occur in that
part of the Mornington Peninsula. Mr. Hall records

Didyinograptus, c.f. pritchardi.

Tetragraptus approximatus.

Tetragr aptus quadribrac hiat u s.

Tetragraptus fruticosus (V).

Ostraooda.
Mr. Hall states that if the identification of T. fruticosus (]) is
correct,' the age of the rocks is Bendigonian, amd in any case
cannot be higher than the horizon of Castlemaine. Another
series of fossils from Bulldog Creek, near Dromana, yielded to
Mr. Hall the same forms as those from Balnarring, and in
addition undoubted specimens of Tetragraptus fruticosus, thus
fixing their Bendigoniam horizon.

1 Reports on Graptolites, Records of Geological Suney of Victoria, vol. i., pt. Hi., 1904,
pp. 220, 221.

Geology of Mooroodnc. 93

Didymograptus, sp. indet.

Temi]X)graptus, sp.

Dendrograptus (?).

Rhinopterocaris maccoyi.

Braohiopod cast,
and indeterminate Hexactinellid sponge spicules were also recog-
nised from among the collection made by Mr. Ferguson at this
locality. The credit, then, for first finding fossils ''in situ" in
the Palaeozoic rocks of the Momington Peninsula belongs to
Mr. Ferguson, amd for determining their Lower Ordovician
(Bendigonian) age to Mr. Hall.

The Agk of the Older Sedimentary Hocks of Moorooduc.

The foregoing account of the geological literature dealing
with the district shows the progress already made towards deter-
mining the age of the Palaeozoic rocks of the Momington Pen-
insula. The records from Balnarring and Bulldog Creek defi-
nitely established the Lower Ordovician age of the rocks of the
southern part of the Momington Peninsula, but the age of the
aeries near Moorooduc remained still in doubt, as it lies about
ten miles to the north of the localities mentioned above, and,
moreover, the graptolites found in the boulders of the conglo-
merates of Grice's Creek and near Frankston showed only that
the rocks might be Ordovician or Lower Silurian.

The aorea near Moorooduc does not look promising, as apart
from the highly altered rocks in the quarry north of Moorooduc
station, rock exposures are very few, and several observers had
already searched -the locality with negative results. This also
was oiu: experience in 1905, but on the second visit in 1906 we
were more fortunate. We were searching the hillside about a
third of a mile north-east of the large quarry at about an eleva-
tion of 350 feet above sea level, and almost due west of a slight
bend in the road which runs north towards Frankston. Here the
uprooting of a tree had exposed a very limited area of the slates,
and from this and another small exposure close at hand we
found a number of graptolites. They were clearly of Lower
Ordovician age, as forms belonging to Didymograptus and
Tetragraptus were recognised. On returning to Melbourne I

94 Ernest W. Skeats :

submitted the collection to Mr. Hall for more detailed examina-
tion, and he has kindly identified the followings forms: —

Didymograptus caduoeus, Salter.

Tetragraptus serra (sensu stricto) Brongn.

Diplograptus, sp.

Trigonograptua, sp.

Laaiograptus, sp.

Glossograptus, sp.
Also specimens of Rhinopterocaris maccoyi, Eth. fils., and sponge
spicules^

Mr. Hall adds the following notes : — ** The horizon is that of
the Upper Caetlemaine series, although the presence of Glosso-
graptus is suggestive of the horizon of the Darriwill series. The
species of Diplograptus is similar to one which occurs as low
down as the Victorian GruUy beds at Castlemaine, but is in-
distinct. Trigonograptus is known from higher beds, but pos-
sibly occurs at Castlemaine. The presence of graptolies in the
Eocene (?) conglomerate on the beach near Frankston has been
recorded by Mr. Pritchard and myself.^ We announced the pre-
sence of Diplograptus, but ventured no further. At the same
time I found a specimen which I thought might be Didymo-
graptus caduceus, but it was so indistinct that I thought it wiser
not to mention it, especially as the record of even the genus
would have upset the generally-received opinion as to the age of
the slates of the district." The discovery of these graptolites
provides the evidence previously wanting for determining the
age of the Moorooduc rooks, clearly shows their Lower Ordovician
character, and Mr. Hall's determinations show that the rocks
belong to the Upper Castlemaine, or possibly the Darriwill
series, a higher horizon than that of the graptolitc' bearing rocks
previously described from the southern part of the Peninsula, It
is now probable that all the slates and sandstones of the Morn-
ington Peninsula belong to the Ordovician series. The grapto-
lites were found on a steeply sloping part of the hillside, where
no observations of the dip or strike of the beds could be
obtained. At a lower level the Ordovician rocks pass below the
Tertiary series, the general direction of the eastwn boundary of

1 Proc. Ro.v. Soc. Vict., xiv., 1901. p. 41.

Geology of Moovoiydac. 95

the hill being N. 60 deg. E. On walking south-westwards to-
wards the large quanry, further search gave negative results.
The rocks of the quarry are in places much disturbed. On the
south-western face of the quarry a steep anticlinal fold is seen,
and towards the N. end an abrupt change of strike to E. and W.,
and a dip to N. at 70 deg. is noticed, while at the south end,
where the beds are lees dititurbed, the strike is nearly N.E. and
S.W., and the dip N.W. at 80 deg. At the opposite or North-
eatit face of the quarry the strike was observed to be
N. 20 deg. E., and dip E. 20 deg. S. at 70 deg. Possibly the
rocks of the quarry belong to the same series as those in which
the graptolites were found, as a continuance of the N. 20 deg. E.
strike would pass close to the graptolite localities.

The Metamorphic Rocks of the Mookooduc Quarry.

The rocks consist of sandstones and slaves. The sandstones,
some of which occur in fairly thick beds, show little visible
alteration except that in places they are changed to quartzite.
The slates are, however, highly altered. Among the slates are
some with alternate dark and light laminae. On splitting a
specimen of laminated slate along a bedding plane, elongated
colourless prismatic crystals up to an inch in length were seen.
A fragment of one of these crystals examined under the micro-
scope shows the refractive index, polarization colours, and pink
to colourless pleochroism characteristic of andalusite.

Thin sections of the slates show the occurrence of two types,
the one more, the other less altered. The less altered type is
a spotted slate (Sections 505a and 506b). Under the microscope
crypto-crystiilline to micro-crystalline aggregates of a white mica-
ceous mineral are seen to form abundant lighter areas with sub-
rectangular boundaries^ while the fine-grained groundmass con-
sists of biotite, quartz, uniaxial white mica, hematite, limonite,
and some dark red-brown rutile crystals.

The white uniaxial mica is possibly bleached biotite, since
some oi' the larger crystals have apparently unaltered brown
areas jiarallel to the cleavage traces, while hematite and limonite
surround the white mica in such a way as to suggest that th-
iron lias been leached from biotite and deposited as oxide round the

96 Eldest W, Skeats :

bleached cystals. Several sections of anotKer mineral are present.
It occurs as colourless prismatic sections, showing minute fluid and
other inclusions, with high refractive index and low polarization
colours which are grey to yellow, of the first order. Two cleavages
are noticed, a well-defined one parallel to the longer axis of the
crystal, and a less well developed one at right angles to this.
A few sections showed straight extinction, but the majority
extinguished in aa oblique position. Thd maximum extinction
angle observed was 43 deg. from the longer axis. It is invariably
associaited with a marginal oolomrless mineral of lower refractive
index and higher polarization colours. This mineral extends
inwards from the margins of the crystals, and appears to be an
alteration product consisting of a white uniaxial micaceous
mineral. Most of the sections of the mineral show the emer-
gence of an optic axis in a somewhat oblique position. The
mineral is andalusite. The sections are too tiiin to exliibit
the characteristic pleochroism, and the high angle of extinction
noticed in some sections is to be connected with the large optical
axial angle exhibited by this mineral. ^

The more altered type of slate (Section 507) shows complete
recrystallization of the clastic materials. The rock consists
madnly of a number of interlocking quartz granules and mica-
ceous minerals. The latter include biotite, muscovite and
bleached biotite (?). No trace of a spotted structure is seen,
but the original bedding planes are defined by linesi along which
there is a greater concentration of biotite and hematite, and
larger crystals of the micas occur along these laminee. Among
the minor constituents minute rutiles occur, and a few pleochroic
granules of tourmaline, which have been included in the
bleached micas. Andalusite is not represented in this rock.

These altered rocks, containing an abundance of micas, are evi-
de-ntly rich in alkalies. It is therefore probable that in the
formation of the shale the alkali contents were not leached out
as sometimes happens. It must be remembered, however, that
the alkali contents of the shales may have been reinforced by
thermal solutions passing out from the margin of the granitic
intrusion.

1 The iiuinberH of the rock sections refer to the University collection of roclc slices.

Geology of Mom'ooduc. 97

The Grano-Diorite and Apophyses op Mount Eliza.

The Apophyses. — These have only been noticed in the meta*-
morphosed slates and sandstones of the large Moorooduc quarry,
about three-quarters of a mile north of Moorooduc railway sta-
tion. They consist of acid extrusions from the plutonic mass,
and vary from fine-grained aplitic rocks to fairly coarse pegmatites.
The largest vein seen measured about three feet in width. They
are all somewhat decomposed, and on that account no rock sec-
tions have been made from them. In places quartz and felspar
alone are present, in others biotite and muscovite also occur,
usually in large flakes up to three-quarters of an inch in length,
and in one or two oases black tourmaline was noticed.

Mr. Kitson has drawn attention^ co the most interesting
feature in connection with them — ^viz., the general concentration
of the mica along the walls of the veins, the central parts being
relatively free from that mineral. The small sizes of the veins
makes it improbable that convection currents liave played any
part in the marginal grouping of the micas. This arrangement
may be referred to as an illustration of a process first investigated
by Soret* in the case of crystallization from aqueous solutions.
He showed that if a constant difference of temperature is main-
tained between two parts of a vessel containing a saturated
solution, crystallization will proceed at first only in that part of
the vessel which is at the lower temperature. Mr. TealP has
sought to explain the concentration of the earlier formed basic
minerals on the walls of some ingenous intrusions in terms of
Soret's principle.

The disposition of the mica flakes in the acid veins of the
Moorooduc quarry may probably be referred to the same cause.

The Grano-diorite, — ^The plutonic mass of Mt. Eliza extends
as a somewhat elliptical shaped mass ju^t over two miles long
from N.E. to S.W., and about a mile across in the widest part in
a N.W. S.E. direction. Most of this area is covered with a
mantle of granite detritus, and only two or three limited out-
crops are seen of the rock " in situ.'' The best exposure occurs

1 Op. cit.

2 Ann. Chiin. Phy., Paris, 1881, (5) 22, p. 293.
8 British Petrography, p. 402.

98 Eimest W. Skeata :

in a shallow quarry near the summit of the hill. The rock is
grey, fairly even grained, and felspar, quartz, blaK>k biotite and
a little hornblende are viisible in the hand specimen. Its specific
gravity is 2.69. Under the microscope (Section 504) it is no-
ticed that both plagioclase and orthoclase are present, that some
of the biotite has been altered to chlorite, abundant needles of
apatite are included in the generally ragged crystals of biotite,
and a little rutile is probably present. The symmetrical extinc-
tion angles of tlie plagioclase lamellae range from about 11 deg.
to 17 deg. The crystals are frequently zoned, the margins being
invariably more acid, and are sometimes untwinned. The cen-
tral parts of the crystals correspond to andesine of composition
AbgAng, the margins to oligoclase of composition Ab4Ani. The
average composition of the plagioclase as a whole is probably
near AbgAng. The plagioclase is generally somewhat kaolinised,
and is usually idiomorphic. The orthoclase, containing some
minute irregular intergrowths with albite is, however, fresh and
moulded on the plagioclase. The structure of the rock, as a
whole, is hypidiomorphic, and the average grain-size is 1 mm.

Petrographically, it should be classed with a number of other
Victorian granitic rocks as a grano-diorite, on account of the
large 'amount of quartz present, the considerable quantity of an
alkali felspar, and the relatively acid character of the plagioclaaes
present in this group of rocks. Professor Gregory,^ following
American usage, has suggested the application of this term in
preference to Quartz-mica-diorite, to which group Dr. Howitt ha.s
referred some of them.

No chemical analysis of this rock is available, but an attempt
has been made to determine, quantitatively, its mineral volume
composition. From this the bulk mineral composition is found
by multiplying the percentage volume of each mineral by its
specific gravity. Finally, by accepting analyses of minerals
having similar optical properties, an attempt has been made to
determine approximately the chemical composition of the rock.

The method followed in determining the volume percentage of
each mineral in the rock is due to Rosiwal.^ He has used a

1 The Geolofc'y of Mount Macedon, Victoria, Prpc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 14 (1902), p. 192.

2 Verhandl d.k.k. Oeol Reichsaiiut. 1898, pp. 143, etseq. The Quantitative Clausiflcatioti
of Igrneous Rocks, 1903, p. 204. J. I'. Iddint^s, Journal of Geolojry, vol. xii. (1904), p. 262.

Geology of Moorooduc. 99

travelling stage or eye-piece micrometer to obtain a number of
traverses across a microsection, and has shown that the volumes
of the different minerals are proportional to the sums of their
intercepts or any line or lines drawn across the rock, if the
number of minerals traversed be sufl&cient. Applying this
method, it was found that, out of a total length of 1035 units,
the sums of the intercepts of the different minerals were as
follows : —

The percentage volumes are shown in the second column : —
Plagioclase - - - 4)4 - 40
Quartz . - - . 305 - 29.47
Orthoclase - - - 198 - 19.13
Biotite - - - - 113 - 10.91
Hornblende - . - 5 - 0.48

Apatite (estimated^ - - 2.5 - 0.24

100.23
The specific gravities of the minerals is taken to be as follow : —
Plagioclase (Abg Ang) - = 2.B5

Orthoclase - - - - = 2.55

Quartz = 2.65

Biotite^ _ - - . ^ 2.99

Hornblende - - - - = 3.28

Apatite - . - - = 3.20

Multiplying the percentage volumes of the minerals by their

densities we obtain the proportions by weight which are then

recalculated as percentages.

Gravimetric

Percefita^e Mineral

proportions.

Composition.

Plagioclase

106.00

39.87

Qiiartz

78.09

29.37

Orthoclase

46.78

17.59

Biotite

32.62

12.23

Hornblende

1.57

.59

Apatite -

.80

.30

265.86

99.95

1 The specific jfravity of the Biotite was determined from flakes by immersing them in
Sonstadt's heavy liquid, and detennining by the Westphal balance the specific gravity of
the liquid in which they floated in any position. The composition of the Biotite is assumed
to be similar to that of Chebarkul of similar specific gravity (see Dana's System of Miner-
alogy, p. 630), while the Hornblende is assumed to be similar to that from a Vesuvian
locality.

100 Ernest W, Skeats:

The plagioclase is assumed to have the composition Ab^ Aiif.
Distributing the 39.87 per cent, among these two molecules we
obtain Albite 25.63 per cent., Anorthite 14.24 per cent.

Knowing the chemical composition of all the minerals and the
percentage of each mineral present we arrive at the ultimate
chemical composition of the rock.

tt

ts f-m fn mm '^ .

SJ « a i S .12 2

s c s :m 2 2 2

cuS.o O «< •< 0»

- 17.59 14.24 25.63 29.37

o

s
S

s

o

<

Percentage

Chemical

Compoeition

12.23

.59

.30

—

4.70

.24

69.46

1.76

.09

15.33

.66

.01

—

.67

1.80

1.80

2.00

.07

2.07

.08

.20

3.14

J .00

3.96

.07

—

3.07

—

•10

.10

.13

a2

SiOa 11.38 6.15 17.62 29.37

AI2O3 3.24 5.24 5.00 —

Fe,0, _ _ _ _

FeO _ _ _ _

MgO _ _ _ _

CaO — 2.86 — —

K.,0 2.96 — — —

Na,0 — — 3.00 —

P,0, _ _ _ -

H,0 _ _ _ _

Total - 99.72

In this mineralogioal analysis, apart from the small experi-
mental error in the traverses and estimation of the volume com-
position of the minerals of the rock, there are two sources of
ambiguity. The Biotite analysis from Chebarkul, chosen for
comparison on account of similfiur specific gravity, is that of a
variety in which ferrous and magnesia oxides are present in
almost equal amounts. Tbe biotite in this grano-diorite may not
have these oxides present in similar proportions. The other
ambiguity rises from the fact that no allowance has been made
for the small quantity of albite irregularly intergrown with the
orthoclase. If this could be allowed for, potash would be slightly
diminished and soda correspondingly increased in amount.
Apart from these possible sources of error, it is believed that
the figures fadrly represent the chemical composition of the
rock. Although the indicated silica percentage is higher
than in some of the Victorian grano-diorites, the high total of
the alkaline earths and the lack of preponderance of the potash

Geology of Moorooduc. ..-'.. 101

in the alkalies, shows thfut it should be grouped with the graso-
diorites rather than the granites or granitites. An analyiiic of
the granodiorite from two miles N. or Dandenong township is
appended for comparison.^

Grafio-diorite

Urano-diorite

Mount Eliza.

N. of Dandenong.

SiOa -

69.46

63.38

Al,03 -

15.33

17.36

Fe,03 -

.67

1.61

FeO-

1.80

1.98

MgO- -

2.07

1.80

CaO -

3.14

4.18

K^O-

3.96

.31

NaJO

3.07

4.07

PqOs

.10 -

.54

H^O-

.42

- CO.^ 1.13
Fes 3.38

99.72 99.74

Summary and Conclusion.

1. This paper discusses the sedimentary, igneous and meta*-
morphic rocks of Moorooduc, in the Mornington Peninsula,
Victoria.

2. The previous literature on the area is discussed. Chrono-
logically arranged, the salient features so far as they bear on
thia communication are as follow : —

1856. Selwyn finds a cast of an encrinite stem on Sand-
stone Island, Western Port, and indicates the age of
the older sedimentary rocks of the district as Silurian
on his geological map.

1900. A. E. Kit son suggests a lithological resemblance
between the older sedimentary rocks of Moorooduc
and the L. Ordovician rocks of Lancefield. He al«o
notes the localization of the micais in the acid veins
from the granite to the walls of the intrusion.

1900. Evelyn G. Hogg describes petrologically the granite
rocks of areas adjoining Mt. Eliza. Some are de-
scribed as " granitite," others as ** syenito."

1 Geology of Mount Macedon, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 14 (1902), p. 201.

••-.

102 '•'/.'* Ernest W. Skeats :

•.'.

'»-•

••.

.-..ISOl. T. S. Hall and G. B. Pritchard discover Diplograptus
in pebbles of Eocene (?) conglomerates near Frank-

• • ston.

;• 1904. T. S. Hall identifies graptolites found by W. H.
Ferguson "in situ" at Balnarring, 10 or 12 miles
south of Moorooduc. Tetragraptus fruticosus and
other L. Ordovician forms are noted, and the horizon
is described a« Bendigonian.

3. T/ie Aj^e of the Sedimentary Rocks of Moorooduc,

The following L. Ordovician graptolites were found by me " in
situ " in 1906, in slates three-quarters of a mile north of
Moorooduc railway station, and identified by Mr. T. S. Hall: —

Didymograptus oaduceus, Salter.

Tetragraptus serra (sensu stricto), Brongn.

Diplograptus, sp.

Trigonograptus, sp.

Lasiograptus, sp.

Glossograptus, sp.
Mr. Hall fixed their horizon as Upper Castlemaine, or possibly
Darriwill. The discovery at Balnarring, and this later one at
Moorooduc makes it probable that all the slates and sandstones
of the Mornington Peninsula are of Ordovician age.

4. The Metamorphic Rocks,

Near the intrusive granite highly altered micaceous slates
occur. One type is spotted, and contains andalusite showing
high extinction angles. In the other type the recrystallization
is more complete, although the bedding planes are still trace-
able. Rutile and tourmaline occur as accessory constituents,
while bleached biotite (?) muscovite and biotite are abundant.

5. The Grano-diorite and Apophyses.

The Apophyses. — These are aplites and pegmatites. It is sug-
gested that the concentration of the micas near the walls of the
veins provides an illustration of the application of Soret^s prin-
ciple to igneous intrusions.

The Grano-diorite. — The rock is a hypidiomorphic, even-
grained grano-diorite of Specific Gravity 2.69. In order of de-
creasing abundamoe the minerals present are : — Plagioclase,

Proc E.S. Victoria, 1907. Plate XIV.

•'•

•:,

' • • • •

••••
• •

'••••

• •

• - -•

« -•

• •

' "■ •

•••••

Proc. E.S. Victoria, 1907. Plate XVI.

• *

••••

•
• • • •

«

Geology of Moorooduc. 103

Quartz, Orthoclase, Biotite, Hornblende, Apatite. By Rosiwal's
method the volume proportions of the minerals are determined,
their proportions by weight calculated, and from a knowledge of
the chemical composition of each mineral the composition of the
rock is estimated. The analysis supports the identification as
grano-diorite. Po?45ible errors in the estimation of relative pro-
portions of the oxides of iron and magnesia, and in the relative
proportions of potash and soda are noted. Finally, a comparison
is instituted between the analysis so estimated and that of the
Grano-diorite from two miles north of Dandenong township.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES XIV.-XVI.

Plate XIV.

Geological sketch map of the Moorooduc district, reduced from
the Geological sketch map of the Mornington district, by
A. E. Kitson, F.G.S.

Plate XV.

Upper figure. Grano-diorite, Mt. Eliza (No. 504) + Nicols
X 17 diameters.

Lower figure. Metamorphic spotted Ordoviciau Slate, N. of
Moorooduc Railway Station (No. 506B), + Nicols. x
48 diameters.. H. L. Grayson, Photo-micro.

Plate XVL
Key to plate XV.
Upper figure. Q-= Quartz, Bi = Biotite, H = Hornblende, And =

Andesine, Ab = Albite and Albite-Oligoclase.
Lower fignre. M = Micaceous alteration product, Q = Quartz,

Bi = Biotite, M. A. = Mica aggregates, Hem = Hematite.

[Pboc. Rot. Soc. Victoria, 20 (N.S.), Pr. H., 1907.]

Art IX. — On the Validity of Galliti^ Morriaoni,

By R. T. baker, F.L.S.

Curator Technological Museum, Sydney

Communicated by Professor Alfred J. Ewart, Ph.D., D.Sc, F.L S.

[Read 14th November, 1907.]

In Vol. 20 (N.S.), part I., 1907, p. 76, of these Proceedings,
Professor Ewart under ** Contributions to the Flora of Australia,
No. 6," expresses an opinion as to the specific rank of this species.

Inter alia he states, " There can be no doubt that this species
(C. robusta) is a variable one, but variations are often shown on
one and the same specimen, and hence it is necessary to retain
for it the scope given by Benthani, and include under it such
varieties as microcarpa, verrucosa, intratropica, and possibly also
the coluniellaris of F. v. M. and the Morrisoni of R. T. Baker. "^

Unfortunately no facts are educed to support the statement
that there " can be no doubt that C. robusta is a variable species,"
or that it is necessary to retain for it the scope given by
Bentham and include microcarpa, verrucosa, intratropica, and
possibly coluniellaris and C. Morrisoni. That a variation of fruits
can be found on the same twig is common in most species, but the
point is, can fruits similar to C. verrucosa, C. intratropica, C.
Drummondii and C. calcarata be found on one and the same speci-
men, for my species is allied to these two last and not C. robusta,
which was a misprint in my paper ? I maintain. No.

The establishment of C, Morrisoni was made only after

1. A thorough examination of all Callitris material in

the principal herbaria of Europe and Australia.

2. A thorough morphological examination of living material

of nearly every known Callitris species of Australia
and Tasmania.

3. A macro- and microscopical examination of their

timbers, barks, leaveij and fruits.

1 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., vol. xxxi., 1906.

Validity of Callitria Morrosoni 105

4. A chemical investigation of their oils, sandarachs, camphors

<kc.

5. And lastly the aid of the physicist (which supports this

differentiation) has been ]aid under tribute.

The result of all this has been the accumulation of specific data
that leave no alternative but to differentiate all these species
enumerated (supra). That is, if differences constitute a species,
as I believe they do.

It would be asking the Royal Society too much to publish here
all the results obtained in this connection, in order to prove the
case, but it is hoped they will be in print next year.

I might, however, state en passant that, concerning two of the
proposed varietal forms, i.e. verrucosa and columellaris, these two
morphologically, cortically, ligneously, chemically, and physio-
logically are quite different, and again any one who has compared
only the timbers of intratropica and microcarpa would hardly be
• prepared to say they also are one and the same species.

unfortunately Professor Ewart does not say to which C. robusta
his remarks refer. It was to clear the identity of this species
more especially that the European herbaria were visited by me,
for in my opinion it was hopeless to do it in Australia, and this
was especially impressed on me after reading De Candolle's list of
doubtful and excluded species of Callitris, [Prodromus, vol. 16.
pp. 451-3].

To place nil those Callitris enumerated by Professor Ewart
under one species would be a parallel case to that of Baron von
Mueller, who when dealing with Eucalyptus amygdalina, Labill,
synonymised at least half a dozen good species under this name,
which can all be shown to possess distinctive morphological,
cortical, chemical, and other physiological differences from La
Billardi^re's species.

These two cases are only another illustration of the failure of
morphology alone in the determination of species in Eucalypts
and Callitris.

In this connection no better example can be quoted than that
of Eucalyptus maculata and E. citriodora. Both species were
established by Hooker, and later were synonymised by Baron von
Mueller because morphologically the leaves and fruits were
identical. 2

106 R, T, Baker: Validity of GaUitris.

Recent research has shown (1) that the two trees differ in facies,
being easily distinguished in the field ; (2) that they differ in the
quality and texture of their timber and hark ; (3) most decidedly
in the chemical constituents of the leaf content.

In all probability E. citriodora will be a source of considerable
commercial enterprise in the future when it will be known as
such, and not as E. maculata, var. citriodora, of recent botanists,
and the same remarks will also apply to the several Pines it is
now proposed to classify as Callitris robusta.

[Paoc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 20 (N.S.), Pt. II., 1907.]

Art. X. — The F(ynnation of Red Wood in Conifers.

By jean white, M.Sc.

[Bead I4th November, 1907].

A series of experiments was carried out by Professor Ewart
and Mr. Mason-Janes, on Pinus contorta, and P. cembra, and on
Cupressus nutkaensis and C. Lawsoniana, in which certain of
the lart;eral branches were curved round and tied securely for
some time, until new wood could be formed. The results of their
experiments, published in the " Annals of Botany," April, 1906,
led them to conclude that in all probability the formation of
red wood was a '' morphogenic response to a gravitational
stimulus."

Professor Ewart suggested that I should carry the investiga-
tions further by noting the effects of diffusing the action of
gravity, by causing a plaait to rotate on a klinostat.

The plants experimented on were growing in flower pots, and
included Araucaria excelsa, CaJlitris Gunnii, Cedrus deodara,
Cryptomeria elegans, Cupressus sempervirens, Juniperus phoe-
nicea, Pinus strobus, Podocarpus elata, Sequoia sempervirens,
Taxus baccata, Thuja orientalis.

On 20th September, 1906, the Cupressus was put on to the
klinostat, which was set rotating at the rate of one turn in
four hours. The remaining plants were laid down horizontally on
their sides, in a glass-house, the upper side of each pot being
marked. The plants had been previously tied to long stakes,
so as to relieve the pressure on the under side.

The plants were all examined on 28th November, 1906, and
the following results were noted : — In Araucaria excelsa, Cryp-
tomeria elegans, Juniperus phoenicea, Pinus strobus, Podocarpus
elata. Sequoia sempervirens, and Taxus baccata, there was an
extremely well-marked layer of red wood developed on the under
side of the stem, as it lay horizontally. Also the red wood was
very conspicuous on the under surface of all the lateral branches
which were examined. 2a

108 Jean White:

In Callitris gunni, Cedrus deodara and Thuja orientalis, there
was a leisa conspicuous layer of red tracheides produced on the
under surface of the main stem and its branohes.

The Cupressus sempervirens was also removed from the
klinostat on 28th November, 1906.

During the two months' rotation, there were two stoppages of
the klinostat for a possible duration of 16 hours and 3 hours
respectively. Examination showed a uniform exceedingly faint
layer of red wood round the main stem and lateral branches. The
Cupressus plant had two similar main stemsi, one of which was
examined when it was first removed from the klinostat, and the
other one after it was removed for the second time.

The Cupressus plant was replaced on the klinostat on 29th
November, 1906, the speed of rotation being changed to one
revolution in two minutes. It was kept on the klinostat till 28th
December, during which time there was a stoppage of the
machine possibly for 30 hours. On examination of the stem, after
removal of the plant from the klinostat on 28th December, no
red wood was visible. Evidently, therefore, to produce any per-
manent impression upon the developing cambial segments, the
gravitational stimulus must last at least 1 to 2 hours. One
minute's stimulation is either not perceived, or leaves the seg-
ment cell in aj labile condition, continually reversed by the
completion of each rotation without producing any permanent
and definite morphogenic response.

The pot containing the Cupressus plant was laid on its side in
the glass-house on 25th January, 1907, the upper side of the
flower pot being marked. It was left in this position till 18th
October, 1907. On stripping off the bark, a thick layer of
red wood, about 20 tracheides deep, was observed on the under
surface* of the main steam aaid lateral branches.

The above results serve to strengthen Professor Ewart's tmd
Mr. Mason-Jones' conclusions as to the primary stimulus re-
sponsible for the production of the red wood, being a gravita-
tional one.

Diameter of the Xylt/n Vea.seh, and Thickness of

Their Walls.

The diameters of the cavities of the vessels, and also the
thickness of the vessel walls were measured by means of the

Red Wood in Conifers.

109

screw micrometer eyepiece, in both the red and white wood.
Sections were out of the main stems of several of the plants,
which had been growing in the pots placed on their sidee from
20th September to 28th November, 1906.

Taking the averages of the thickness of the walls in the red
and white wood, the two sets of readings being taken from the
same section aa nearly diametrically opposite as possible, in
practically every case, the walls of the white tracheides were
found to be thicker than those of the red, whilst the cavitie*
of the tracheides of the white wood were smaller in diameter
than those of the red tracheides.

These results are not in accordance with those previously
recorded by Son n tag, ^ who found that the walls of the
tracheides in the red wood were thicker than those of the white.

Experimental Results,

A number of readings were taken of the internal diameters
and the thickness of the walls of the tracheides, and the results
are given in the form of averages of sets of five readings, fol-
lowed by averages of these again.

Taxus baccata.

In the thickest part of the red wood in the sections examined,
the tracheides were 20 deep.

Sectio

N I.

Bed

Wood

White

Wood

Internal Diameter

Thicknes8 of Wall

Internal Diameter

Thickness of Wall

.008 ram.

.004 mm.

.008 mm.

.008 mm.

.009 ,,

.004 ,,

.008 „

.008 „

Oil „

.004 „

.008 ,,

.007 „

.012 „

.005 ,,

.009 ,,

.007 „

Avenm^e

Average

Avei-age

Average

.010 mm.

.004 mm.

.008 mm.

.008 mm.

1 Jahrb. fUr wias, Bot., Bd. x.xxix., p. 71.

no

Jean WIdte :

Section

II.

Eed Wood

White Wood

nal Diameter

Thickness of Wall Internal Diameter

Thickness of Wall

.011 mm.

.006 mm.

.007 mm.

.005 mm.

.008 „

.006 „

.008 „

.006 „

.010 „

.006 „

.008 „

.007 „

.010 „

.006 „

.007 „

.005 „

.009 „

.006 „

.008 „

.008 „

.011 „

.007 „

.011 „

.007 „

Average

Average

Average

Average

.009 mm.

.006 mm.

.008 mm.

.006 mm.

Section

III.

Eed Wood

White

Wood

nal Diameter

Thickness of Wall Internal Diameter

Thioknes of Wall

.008 mm.

.006 mm.

.006 mm.

.008 mm.

.008 „

.007 „

.009 „

.008 „

.011 „

.008 „

.007 „

.006 „

.008 „

.005 „

.008 „

.007 „

.007 „

.005 „

.009 „

.007 „

.010 „

.004 „

.008 „

.006 „

Average

Average

Average

Average

.008 mm.

.006 mm.

.008 mm.

.007 mm.

Pinus strobus.

Section I.

Red Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

.005 mm.

.003

.004

.016

mm.

.012

)f

.012

)>

Average

013

mm.

>>

>>

Average

.004 mm.

White Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

.014 mm.

.012

.014

yj

>j

Average
.013 mm.

.005 mm.

.005

.003

>j

it

Average
.004 mm.

Section II.

Red Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

.015 mm.

.014

.012

>>

.004 mm.

.004

.005

>>

j»

Average
.014 mm.

Average
.004 mm.

White Wood

Internal Diameter
.014 mm.
.015
.012

)>
>>

Thickness of Wall
.005 mm.
.005
.005

»>

j>

Average

.014 mm.

Average
.005 mm.

Red Wood in Conifers,

111

Araucaria excelsa.

Section I.

Kbd Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

.017 mm. .007 mm.

.017 „ .007

.020 ,, .007

>i

Average
.018 mm.

Average
.007 mm.

White Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall
.017 mm.
.018
.016

Average
.017 mm.

.009

mm.

.009

>>

.009

j>

Average

.009

mm.

Section II.

Red Wood

Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

.006 mm.
.008
.007

.016

mm.

.018

j>

.017

>j

Average

.017

mm.

>5

Average

.007 mm.

White Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

.020 mm.

.017

.016

Average

.018 mm.

.009 mm.

.009

.008

Average

.009 mm.

Podocarpus elata

Section I.

Red Wood
Internal Diameter

.014 mm.

.011 ,, .005

j»

Average

.012 mm.

White Wood
Thickness of Wall Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

.007 mm. .008 mm. .007 mm.

.011 ,, .007

> J

> J

Average
.006 mm.

Average

.009 mm.

> J

Average
.007 mm.

Red Wood.
Internal Diameter
.012 mm.
.012 ,, .005

> J

Average
.012 mm.

Section IT.

White Wood.

Thickness of Wall Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

.009 mm. .008 mm. .007 mm.

.011 ,, .007

J J

Averegfe
.007 mm.

>>

Average

.009 mm.

>)

Average
.007 mm.

Summary of Preceding Results.

The phmts were placed horizontally, the upper side being the
more strongly illuminated.

112

Jean

White :

Taxus

BACCATA.

Thickness

OP "Walls

Internal Biametbb

Red Wood

White Wood

Red Wood

White Wood

.004 mm.

.008 mm.

.010 mm.

.008 mm.

■006 „

.006 „

.009 „

.008 ,,

.006 ,,

.007 „

.008 „

.008 „

Average

Average

Average

Average

0053 mm.

.0070 mm.

.0090 mm.

.0080 mm.

PiNUS

8TBOBU8.

.004 „

.004 „

.013 „

.013 „

.004 „

.005 „

.014 „

.014 „

Average

Average

Average

Average

0040 mm.

.0045 mm.

.0135 mm.

.0135 mm.

Abaucabia excblba.

.007 „

.009 „

.018 „

.017 „

.007 „

.009 „

.017 „

.018 „

Average

Average

Average

Average

0070 mm.

.0090 mm.

.0175 mm.

.0175 mm.

PODOCABPUS BLATA.

.006 ,,

.007 „

.012 „

.009 „

.007 „

•007 „

.012 „

.009 „

Average

Average

Average

Average

,0065 mm.

.0070 mm.

.0120 mm.

.0090 mm.

The above results appeared to indicate that the thickness of
the traoheide walls might be influenced by either pressure or illu-
mination, o-r both.

In order to investigate this matter further, some of the lateral
branches of Gedrus deodara, Thuja orientalis, Callitris Guiinii,
Cryptomeria elegans, and Pinus strobus, were curved round and
tie4 in the saone manner as were those described by Professor
Ewart and Mr. Mason- Jones. ^ The plants were set upright in
the gloss-house on 21st May, 1907. Parts of the lateral branches
of Taxus baccata, Podocarpus elata, ti<nd Araucaria excelsa were
bound round with tinfoil, and the pot« were laid horizontally in
the glass-house, and the uppermost part of the pot marked, also
on 2l8t May, 1907.

1 Annals of Botany, vol. xx. , p. 202.

Bed Wood in Conifers.

113

On lOth August, 1907, same of these plants were exfumined.
Very conspicuous layers of red wood were developed on the und^
surface of both parts of the curve, just bb described in the
" Annals of Botany." Sections were cut from the parts of the
curve where the development of red wood was greatest, and the
internal diameters of the red and white tracheides, and also the
thickness of their walls, were measured.

Experimental Results,

Pinus strobus.

^BcnoN I. — (From upper portion of curve).

Red Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

White Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

.008 mm.

.003 mm.

.012 mm.

.006 mm.

-010 „

.002 „

.012 „

.006 „

.009 „

.003 „

.010 „

.006 ,,

.010 „

.002 „

.010 „

.007 „

Average

Average

Average

Average

.009 mm.

.003 mm.

.011 mm.

.006 mm.

Section

II.

Bed Wood

White Wood

mal Diameter

Thickness of Wall Internal Diameter

Thickness of Wall

.009 mm.

.003 mm.

.008 mm.

.005 mm.

.012 „

.003 „

.010 „

.006 „

.012 „

.002 „

.009 „

.006 „

.009 „

002 „

.010 „

.007 „

Average

Average

Average

Average

010 mm.

.003 mm.

.009 mm.

.006 mm.

Section

III.

Red Wood

White

Wood

mal Diameter

Thickness of Wall Internal Diameter

Thickness of Wall

.009 mm.

.002 mm.

.008 mm.

.006 mm.

.013 „

.003 „

.010 „

.006 „

.008 ,,

.002 „

.009 „

.006 „

Average

Average

Average

Average

.009 mm.

.002 mm.

.009 mm.

.006 mm.

114

Jean White :

Callitris gunni.

Section
Rbd Wood

I.

Whitb Wood

Qftl Diameter

Thickness of WaU

Internal Diameter

Thickness of Wall

.012 mm.
.006 „
.009 „
.009 „

.002 mm.
.002 „
.003 ,.
.002 ,,

.009 mm.
.008 „
.008 „
.008 „

.004 mm.
.003 „
.005 ,,
.003 „

Average
.008 mm.

Average
.002 mm.

Average

.008 mm.

Average
.002 mm.

Section
Red Wood

11.

White Wood

nal Diameter

Thickness of Wall

Internal Diameter

Thickness of Wall

.009 mm.
.006 ,,
.008 „
.008 „

.004 mm.
.002 „
.001 „
.002 „

.009 mm.
.006 „
.006 „
.008 „

.005 mm.
.004 „
.003 „
.003 „

Average

.008 mm.

Average

.002 mm.

Average
.007 mm.

Average
.003 mm.

Cryptomeria elegans.

Section

1.

Red Wood

White Wood

Internal Diameter

Thickness of Wall

InternSl Diameter

Thickness of W

.006 mm.

.002 mm.

.006 mm.

.005 mm.

.007 „

.001 „

.006 „

.004 „

.008 ,,

.001 ,,

.008 ,,

.00(5 ,,

.008 ,,

.002 ,,

.009 „

.005 „

Average

Average

Average

Average

.007 mm.

.002 mm.

.007 mm.

.005 mm.

Section

11.

Red Wood

White

Wood

Internal Diameter

Thickness of Wall

Internal Diameter

Thickness of W

.007 mm.

.002 mm.

.006 mm.

.005 mm.

.009 „

.002 „

.006 „

.006 ,,

.008 „

.001 „

.008 „

.005 „

.010 „

.002 „

.009 „

.003 „

Average

Average

Average

Average

.009 mm.

.002 mm.

.008 mm.

.005 mm.

Red Wood in Conifers.

115

Summary of Preceding Results,

The stems were bent in curves. The white wood side was
under tension, and was the more strongly illuminated side.

PiNUS

STBOBUS.

Thickness

OP Walls

Internal

Diameter

Red Wood

White Wood

Red Wood

White Wood

.003 mm.

.006 mm.

.009 mm.

.011 mm.

.003 „

.006 „

.010 „

.009 „

.002 „

.006 „

.009 ,,

.009 ,,

Average

Average

Average

Average

.0028 mm.

.0060 mm.

.0091 mm.

.0093 mm.

Callitkis

aUNNI.

.002 „

.003 ,,

.008 „

.008 „

.002 „

.003 ,,

.008 ,,

.008 ,,

Averag^e

Average

Average

Average

.0020 mm.

.0030 mm.

.0080 mm.

.0080 mm.

Cbyptomebia

ELEQANS.

.002 „

.005 „

.007 „

.007 „

.002 „

.005 „

.009 „

.008 „

Average

Average

Average

Average

.0020 mm.

.0050 mm.

.0080 mm.

.0075 mm.

On August 16th 1907, the lateral branches which had been
covered with tinfoil were examined. A layer of red wood was
observed on the under side of the branches which had been
covered with tinfoil, as before. Hence Sonntag is incorrect in
supposing that heliotropic or pressure stimuli are responsible for
the formation of redwood. Sections of the latetal branches
which were covered were cut, and the thickness of the trache-
ide walls and their internal diameters were measured.

Experimental Results.

Taxus baccata.

Section I.

Ked Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

White Wood
Internal Diameter Thieknesu of Wall

.010 mm.

.001 mm.

.008 mm.

.005 mm.

.008 „

.002 „

.005 ,,

.002 „

.009 „

004 „

.007 „

.002 „

.009 „

.004 „

.006 ,,

.003 „

Average

Average

Average

Average

.009 mm.

.003 mm.

.006 mm.

.003 mm.

116

Jean White:

Section

II.

Eed Wood

White Wood

Internal Diameter

Thickness of Wall Internal Diameter

Thickness of W

.009 mm.

.004 mm.

.008 mm.

.005 mm.

.007 „

• UU4 fy

.005 „

.005 „

.008 „

.004 „

.006 ,,

.005 ,,

.008 „

.005 „

.006 ,,

.004 „

Average

Averaffe

Averai^e

Average

.008 mm.

.004 mm.

.006 mm.

.004 mm.

Podocarpus elata.

Section I.

Red Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

.002 mm.
.004
.006
.005

.010

mm.

.016

) J

.012

)>

.009

J5

Average

.011

mm.

) J

J>

J>

Average

.004 mm.

White Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

.009 mm.
.009
.012
.010

Average
.010 mm.

.001 mm.
.004
.005
.005

Average
.004 mm.

Section II.

Bed Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

.010 mm.
.009
.008
.009

>>

5 J

Average
.009 mm.

.003 mm.
.007
.006
.005

Average
.005 mm.

White Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall
.012 mm.
.013
.012
.012

Average
.012 mm.

.003

mm.

.005

>)

.005

>»

.008

j>

Average

.005

mm.

Section III.

Red Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

.013 mm.
.015
.010
.008

>•

j>

>»

Average
.011 mm.

.003 mm.
.005
.006
.003

>»

J)

Average

.004 mm.

White Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness uf Wall

.013 mm.
.015 ,,
.010 „
.008 ,,

Average
.011 mm.

.003 mm.
.006 „
.006 „
.003 „

Average
.004 mm.

Red Wood in Conifers,

11

Araucaria excelsa.

Section I.

Bed Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

.013 mm.
.010
.010
.010

Average
.011 mm.

Xm mm.
.001
.002
.003 „

Averaj^e
.002 mm.

>)

j>

White Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

.022 mm.
.016
.015
.013 „

Average
.014 mm.

>>

>>

.003 mm.
.004
.603
.003

Average
.003 mm.

Section II.

Kbd Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

White Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

.016 mm.
.021
.017
.018

Average

.018 mm.

.005 mm.
.004
.005
.006 „

Average

.005 mm.

.020 mm.

.016

.016

.005 mm.

.003

.006

>*
>>

Average
.017 mm.

Average
.005 mm.

Section III.

Bed Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

White Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

.013 mm.
.018
.006
.016

.005 mm.
.008
.005
.006

>>
>>
>>

.013 mm.
.023
.013
.020

.004 mm.
.006
.003
.005

Average

.013 mm.

Average
.006 mm.

Average
.017 mm.

. Average
.005 mm.

Summary of Preceding Results,

Both sides were equally darkened. The red wood side was
under compression, and the white wood side was under tension.

Tax OS baccata.

Thickness of Walls
Red Wood White Wood

Internal Diameter
Red Wood White Wood

.003 mm.

.003 mm.

.009 mm.

.006 mm.

.004

.004 „

.008 „

.006 ,,

Average

Average

Average

Average

.0036 mm.

.0036 mm.

.0086 mm.

.0060 mm.

118

Jean W)

iite :

PODOCABPUS

ETiATA.

.004 „

.004 „

.011 „

.010 ..

.005 „

.005 „

.009 ,.

.012 ..

.004 „

.004 „

.011 „

.011 „

Average

Average

Average

Averaife

0043 mm.

.0043 mm.

.0101 mm.

.0110 mm

•

Araucabia excblsa.

.002 „

.003 „

.011 .,

.014 „

.005 ,,

.005 „

.018 ,,

.017 „

.006 „

.005 „

.013 „

.017 „

Average

Average

Average

Averajje

,0043 mm.

.0043 mm.

.0140 mm.

.0490 mm

The^e sections, taken from the curved lateral branches, were
all out from the upper portion of the curve, so that the red wood
vessels were subjected to compresision, and the white wood vessels
were subject to tension.

Concerning the thickness of the walls, the ratio of the thickness
of the white to the red tracheides is not very different from their
ratio when they were not subjected to any special pressure, and
so, presumably, the thickness of the walls doee not to any appre-
ciable extent depend on pressure effects of the intensity pro-
duced by forcibly bending a stem into circular form or laying
a vertical stem in a horizontal position. Also in those sections,
cut from the parts of the branches covered with tinfoil, in prac-
tically every caise, it was found that the thickness of the walls of
red wood vessels and white wood vessels was the same, which
indicates that photomorphic stimuli take an important part in
the regulation of the thickness of the walls. In this respect my
experiments appear to agree with those of Knight,^ who found,
for instance, that roots freed from soil a^nd exposed to light
formed firmer wood.

The Cryptomeria, Callitris and Pinus had some of their lateral
branches curved and tied round in the manner described pre-
viously, the upper part of the curve being covered over with
tinfoil. They were placed upright in the glass-house on 16th
August, 1907.

Measurements of the diameters of the red and white wood
vessels, and of their walls, were taken on 4th November, 1907.

lPfeffer'8 Physiology of Plants, P^nglish Translation. Vol. ii., page 88.

Red Wood in Conifers,

119

Experimental Results.
Callitris Gunnii.

Kbd "Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

White Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

.009 mm.

.005 mm.

.008 mm.

.005 mm.

.008 „

.005 „

.009 „

.008 „

.008 „

.006 „

.008 „

.005 „

.009 „

.005 „

.006 „

.005 ,,

Average

Average

Average

Average

.008 mm.

.005 mm.

.008 mm.

.006 mm.

Cryptomeria elegans.

Ebd Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

White Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

.005 mm.

.006 mm.

.006 mm.

.005 mm.

.008 „

.006 „

.005 „

.005 ,,

.005 „

.004 „

.005 „

.004 „

.006 ,,

.004 „

.005 „

.004 ,,

Average

Average

Average

Average

.006 mm.

.005 mm.

.005 mm.

.005 mm.

Pinus strobus.

Ebd Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

White Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

.010 mm.

.006 mm.

.009 mm.

.008 mm.

.010 „

.008 ,,

.008 „

.008 „

.012 „

.005 ,,

.013 „

.005 ,,

.009 „

.006 ,,

.010 ,,

.005 „

Average

Average

Average

Average

.010 mm.

.006 mm.

.010 mm.

.006 mm.

Summary of Preceding Experimefits.
Callttbis gunni.

Intebnal Diameter
Red Wood White Wood

.008 mm. .008 mm.

Thickness of AValls
Red Wood White Wood

.005 mm.

.006 mm.

.006

1^

Cbyptomebia eleoans.
.005 .. .005

j»

>)

.005

a

120

Jean White :

PiNUS STROBUS.

.010 mm.

.006 mm.

.010 mm.

.006 mm.

A large branch of Cupressus sempervirens with sufficient bark
and phloem to cut off nearly all light from the cambium was
removed from the tree on which it was growing normally. An
extremely thick layer of red wood was visible on the under
side of the branch as it grew.

Sections of the red and white wood were examined, and the
diameters of the cavities, and the thickness of the walls of the
xylem vessels in each kind were measured, with the following
results : — •

Red Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

White Wood
Internal Diameter Thickness of Wall

.012 mm.

.004 mm.

.016 mm.

.006 mm.

.016 „

.004 „

.016 „

.005 „

.012 „

.005 ,,

.013 „

.006 „

015 „

.005 „

.018 „

.006 ,,

Average

Average

Average

Average

.0143 mm.

.0045 mm.

.0156 mm.

.0052 mm.

In this case the difference between the intensity of the illum-
ination on the upper (white wood) and the lower (red wood)
surface must be extremely small, and the average thickness of the
white wood walls is little or not at all greater than in the red wood.

Sununary of Preceding Experiments,

Thickness op Walls

Red Wood
.0160 mm.

White Wood
.0052 mm.

Intbbnal Diameter

Red Wood

.0140 mm.

White Wood
.0046 mm.

Pinus strobus.

Plant grown horizontally.

White wood on illuminated side.

Thickness op Walls

Red Wood White Wood

Average Average

Internal Diameter

Red Wood White Wood

Average Average

.0040 mm.

.0045 mm.

.0135 mm.

.0136 mm.

Red Wood in Conifers,

121

Plant grown vertically.

Curved stem. Red wood compressed. White wood stretched
and illuminated.

Thickness of Walls

Internal Diameter

Red Wood

White Wood

Red Wood

White Wood

Average

Average

Average

Average

0033 mm.

.0060 mm.

.0093 mm.

.0096 mm.

Curved stem. Both sides equally darkened.

Thickness of Walls Internal Diameter

Red Wood
Average

.0060 mm.

White Wood
Average

.0060 mm.

Red Wood

Averaige

.0100 mm.

White Wood

Average
.0100 mm.

Araucaria excelsa.

Plant grown horizontally.

White wood on the illuminated side.

Thickness of Walls

Red Wood White Wood

Average Average

Internal Diameter

Red Wood White Wood

Average Average

.0070 mm.

.0090 mm.

.0175 mm.

.0175 mm.

Plant grown upright.

Both sides equally darkened.

Thickness of Walls

Internal

Diameter

Red Wood White Wood

Red Wood

White Wood

Average Average

Average

Average

0043 mm. .0043 mm.

.0140 mm.

.0160 mm.

Podocarpus elata.

Plant grown horizontally.

Whited wood on the illuminated side.

Thickness of Walls

Internal J

Diameter

Red Wood White Wood

Red Wood

White Wood

Average Average

Average

Average

0066 mm. .0070 mm.

.0120 mm.

.0090 mm.

8

122

Jean White :

Plant grown upright.

Both sides equally darkened.

Thickness op Walls

Red Wood White Wood

Average Average

.0043 mm. .0043 mm.

Internal Diameter

Red Wood White Wood

Average Average

.0103 mm. .0110 mm.

Tax US baccata.

Plant grown horizontally.

White wood on the illuminated side.

Thickness of Walls

Red Wood White Wood

Average Average

.0053 mm.

.0070 mm.

Plant grown vertically.
Both sides equally darkened.

Thickness of Walls

Red Wood White Wood

Average Average

.0035 mm.

.0035 mm.

Internal Diameter

Red Wood White Wood

Average Average

.0090 mm.

.0080 mm.

Internal Diameter

Red Wood White Wood

Average Average

.0085 mm. .0060 mm.

Cryptomeria elegans.

Plant grown vertically.

Lateral branches curved. White wood on illuminated side.

Thickness of Walls

Red Wood White Wood

Average Average

.0020 mm. .0050 mm.

Internal Diameter

Red Wood White Wood

Average Average

.0080 mm.

.0075 mm.

Lateral branches curved. Both sides equally darkened.
Thickness op Walls Internal Diameter

Red Wood
Average

,0050 mm.

White Wood

Average
.0050 mm.

Red Wood

Average

.0060 mm.

White Wood

Average
.0050 mm.

Med Wood in Conifers.

123

Callitris Gunnii.

Plant grown vertically (lateral branches curved).
White wood on the illuminated side.

Thickness op Walls
Red Wood White Wood

Internal Diaheteb
Red Wood White Wood

.008 mm.

008 mm.

.008 „

.008 „

Average

Average

Average

Average

0020 TTTTTT.

.0030 TTTm.

.0080 mm.

.0080 mm.

Lateral branches curved. Both sides equally darkened.

Thickness op Walls Internal Diameter

Red Wood White Wood Red Wood White Wood

.0080 mm. .0060 mm. .0080 mm. .0050 mm.

Conclusion.

So far as my results dealing with this matter go, they point to
the conclusion that the formation of red wood is primarily due
to a gravitational stimulus, while the lesser thickness shown by
the wall of the red wood tracheides, as compared with that of
the white wood tracheides, appears to be largely the result of a
photomorphic stimulus, the response being somewhat akin to
-etiolation in character.

The preceding averages all agree in showing that the thickness
of the tracheide walls on the more strongly illuminated side ex-
ceeded that of the tracheide walh where the illumination was
less intense. The same uniformity, under similar conditions,
does not apparently prevail in the size of the internal cavities
of the tracheides ; thus as a general rule along a single radial
row of tracheides, isolated cases occurred in which the internal
cavities were of abnormal size in either direction, while such
abrupt variations did not appear to occur to any marked extent
in the thickness of the tracheide walls of either kind of wood.

Considering the cases in which both sides of the branches were
equally darkened, the assumption is strengthened by the fact
that in every case tested except one, the thickness of the
tracheide walls in both red and white wood tallied exactly.

3a

124 Jean White: Red Wood in Conifers.

As in some of the above cases, the parts of the stem, which
were equally darkened were subjected to unequal pressure or
tension, due to the curving round of the branches experimented
upon, the thickness of the traoheide walls in red and white wood
was the same, it seems to be improbable that pressure and ten-
sion of the intensity produced by forcibly curyiing the branch,
exert any pronounced influence on either the thickness of the
walls, diameter of the tracheides, or formation of red wood. The
latter is purely a response to gravity, and is only accompanied
by an increase in the thickness of the walls when the red wood
side is the more strongly illuminated one, which is unusucJ.
The minimal period for perception and response, as tested by the
method of summation, is two hours. Exposures to gravity of
less than two minutes' duration produce no permanently lasting
effect.

In conclusion, I wish to record my sincere thanks to Prof.
Ewart for his assistance, and also for allowing me the use of the
Botanical laboratory at the Melbourne University.

[Pboc. Eot. Soc. Victoria, 20 (N.S.), Pr. IT., 1907.]

Art. XL — Contributions to the Flora of Australia,

No. 7}

By ALFRED J. EWART, D.Sc, Ph.D., F.L.S.,

Govemment Botanist and Professor of Botany
at the Melbourne University.

[Read 14th November, 1907.]

Latin in Systematic Botany.

At the last Botanical Cungress, held at Vienna in 1905, on the
whole a salutary check was administered to the objectionable
tendencies of modern systematists in certain quarters, especially
as regards frivolous changes of name, and it is, in fact, a matter
of regret that the list of protected names was not greatly in-
creased. On the other hand, it is impossible to follow Mr.
Maiden^ when he states that botanists are as bound by these laws
as by those of their own country, and must follow these laws
whether they approve of them or not. For this to be requisite the
Congress would need to be a really representative one, to which all
botanists sent elected representatives. At present it is a fortuitous
concourse almost solely of systematists, among whom the local
interests of the country in which the Congress is held are always
unduly strongly represented. So far as I am aware, botanists
from the south of the Equator were entirely unrepresented, and
plant physiologists and anatomists were conspicuous by their
absence. Yet the man who has intimately investigated the
structure and properties of a plant has a greater claim to
decide that its nsume shall not be altered than the systematist
whose interest in the plant largely ceases as soon as it is
labelled, and is often only revived when a chance of relabelling it
occurs.

1 No. 6 in Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict, 1907, vol. 20, p. 76.

2 Jour. Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, vol. xl., 1906, p. 74.

i

126 Alfred J, Ewart:

Until the Congress i« a thoroughly representative one, it must
remain a purely voluntary matter with each botamst as to
whether he follows its rules or not, and the power of the Con-
gress to enforce its rules will depend solely upon the number
of botanists who elect to follow them. Under these ciroum&tances
I must take strong exception to Art. 36, and, by disobeying
it, adopt the best plan to have it rescinded or altered.

Art. 36 reads : " On and affer Jaaiuary l«t, 1908, the publicar
tion of names of new groups will be valid only when they are
accompanied by a Latin diagnosis." In Art. 13 a group is
defined as including a species. Any practice which tends to
render a science unnecessarily inaccessible to the general public is
bad in principle, and ultimately reacts injuriously upon the
science in question, and upon the eclectic few connected with it.
Latin is thoroughly discredited as a scientific language, and in
re-adopting it systematists are taking a step ba«k to the middle
ages. If the rule had been to the effect that diagnoses not writ-
ten in English, French, or German, or unaccompanied by diag-
nostic figures must be written in Latin, less exception could have
been taken to it, although it would have been more satisfactory
to state that diagnoses not accompanied by analytic figures,
must be written in English, French or German. A good diag-
nostic figure is worth a dozen pages of the average systematist's
dog Latin, which at its best would hardly satisfy even Tacitus,
and at its worst is sufficient to make Cicero turn in his grave.

To describe plants both in the author's language and in Latin
would be to unnecessarily increase the already enormous bulk
of systematic literature, and to swell its pouring torrent to a
permanent flood level. To avoid this, and as a protest against
the rule, the plants, in the present and subsequent papers, will
be given, as hitherto, with diagnoses in English, and if neces-
sary with explanatory figures. Any Latinist who would like to
see his initials after a plant name is at liberty to acquire this
right by publishing a translation in Latin of the plant diagnosis
here given, and thus following the rule laid down by the last
Congress. I shall make no complaint, and am willing to take
this risk in order to get an absurd law altered.

It is a pity the rules were not submitted to some well-known
authority on jurisprudence before publication. Thus the omis-

Flora of Australia. 127

sion of the word Latin in Art. 37 renders Arts. 36 and 39
invalid, or at least renders their interpretation doubtful in many
cases. By means of Art. 37, it would be possible in a round-
about way to force the acceptance of a new species according to
Congress rules without a Latin diagnosis. Further, to change
the name or authority for a new species because it had not been
published with a Latin diagnosis would be to act in fiat defiance
of Art. 50, and other instances of rules whose effects are difl&cult
to harmonise might be given.

Nomina Conservanda. — It is greatly to be regretted that the
time limit for ghange of name was put so far back as 1753, and
that the list of nomina conservanda was not greatly extended.
To give an instance. Anthistiria L. (Graiuinae), 1779, is
changed to Themeda, Forst, 1775, by Haeckel in De Candolle's
Monograph and in Engler's Pflanzenfamilien. It is impossible
to accept any such change of a Linnean name on such slender
grounds as a four years' priority, when a name has been univer-
sally accepted for over 120 years. Questions of general con-
venience override any such claim in a case of this kind.

Acacia accola, Maiden and Betclie. Proc. Linn. Soc.
N.S.Wales, 1906, p. 734. (Leguminosae).

This appears to be .a narrow-leaved and broad-fruited form of
A. neriifolia. A specimen from Bailey resembles Maiden's form
more closely as regards the fruit and the funicle of the seed, but
has the broader phyllodes of A. neriifolia. Probably the future
discovery of other intervening forms will render advisable the
reduction of this species to a variety.

Adenanthos cygnouum, Diels. Fragni. Phyt. Aust. Occid.,

p. 138. (Proteaceae).

This " species " is made to include the A. apiculata of Meiss-
ner, and the Drummond specimens of A. sericea. The species
is, however, undoubtedly the same as A. sericea, Benth., and if
Dr. Diels had seen No. 788 as well as No. 787, he would probably
not have made this error. There can be no doubt that mamy
accepted species of this genus will be ultimately reduced to varie-
ties as the result of cultural observations, and hence f reat care

128 Alfred J. Ewart :

should be exercised to avoid creating uselesB synonyms by con-
clusions made without such observations in the case of highly
plastic genera of this character. It is also doubtful whether
the A. Drummondii, Meisn., revived by Diels, represents more
than a variety of A. apiculata, R.Br.

AizooN INTERMEDIUM, Diels, and AizooN GLABRUM, n. sp.

(Aizoaceae).

The former species is distinguished by Diels from A.
zygophylloides (F. v. M.), by the shape of the leaves, longer
pedicels and narrow calyx lobes. It comes very close to some
nearly smooth stemmed specimens included by F. v. Mueller in
A. zygophylloides, and may ultimately prove to have not more
than a varietal significance. It is, however, quite distinct from
Luehmann's undescribed Aizoon glabrum. This is a rather small
plant, spreading more or less from a single root, the slender
wiry glabrous stems, 2 to 6 inches high, simple or branching
one or more times, bearing terminal flowers in loose cymes on
short pedicels, one or two pairs of linear leaves being close
under the flower, which is sometimes an inch across when fully
open, but usually less. Calyx 4 partite, usually divided nearly to
the base, enlarging during flowering to nearly J iiicli in length, in
large, fully-opened flowers, the lobes more or less acuminate,
usually lanceolate, but not always of equal breadth in the same
flower. Stamens numerous. Styles 4. Capsule dehiscing into
8 valves. Seeds numerous, almost black, shaped like the head of
a mace and covered with small tuberculate spines.

Murchison R., I. Tyson, 1898; Mt. Caroline, 1891, Miss
Sewel ; Salt Lakes, Martha Heal.

AlZOON RODWAYI, 11. sp.

Plant 3 to over 8 inches high, stems more or less decumbent
at base, and spreading. Leaves in opposite padrs, soft, fleshy,
with scattered warty, transparent tubercles, ovate or linear,
mostly J inch long, but beneath each flower usually a larger
padr more pointed and with broader bases. Plant glabrous
throughout, the stems more slender than A. quadrifidum, but
stouter than A. glabrum. Flowers large terminal, 1 to 1^ inches

Flora of Australia. 129

diauaeter when fully expanded. Calyx divided to about the
niiddle, the five segments with broad bases and more or less
^I'^ntly acuminate tips. Other features much as in A. quadri-
fi<^\xm. Seeds apparently reddish-brown, but otherwise as in A.
g^a-brum.

The absence of any scurfy tomentum at once distinguishes
these two species from A. quadrifidum. In addition, A. Rodwayi
^as broader ovate or lamceolate leaves, the calyx is less deeply
^vided, the flower larger and more bulky at its base. This, with
the less deeply divided calyx and the shape of the leaves dis-
tinguishes the plant from A. zygophylloides. A. glabrum is told
by its glabrous wiry stems, smaller flowers and calyx deeply
divided to the base.

T. Tyson, Salt Marsh, W. Australia, 1 893 ; F. A. Rod way,
M.B., dried up salt lake, Deidemona, W. Australia, 1907.

Angiantiius nuMiFusus, Benth., var. grandiflorus.

(Compositae).

In the last contribution to the Flora of Australia, No. 6, this
was erroneously given as a new variety by the accidental omis-
sion of a proof correction.

Cassixia laevis, K. Br. (Compositae).

The record from C. French, Goulburn R., under the above

heading, in Contributions to the Flora of Australia, No. 6,

should apply to Cassinia arcuata, R.Br., wrongly recorded as
C. Theodori, F. v. M.

CoNOSPERMUM POLYCKPHALUM, Meisn., var. LEIANTHUM, Benth.

(Proteaceae).

Diels and PritzeU raise this variety to specific rank as C.
leianthum, Benth. The material at the National Herbarium, a
part only of which appears to have been examined by Diels
and Pritzel, shows conclusively that there is no reason for this
change. It is impossible to lay down any clear line of demarca-

1 Fragm. Phyt. Austr. Oocid., p. UI.

130 Alfred J. JSwart:

tion based on a group of constant characters, for Diels' dis-
tinctions do not apply to all the specimens between this variety
and the type species. The typical form of the closely allied C.
Toddii of F. Mueller^ shows a trifling difference in the size and
acuminate character of the bracts, while the perianth tube is
rather more slender, is longer in proportion to the lobes, and
somewhat more slender, and is more pubescent outside. Even
these characters do not appear to be quite constant, so that C.
Toddii may also ultimately prove to be a variety of C. poly-
cephalum when more intermediate material is available.

Daviesia cokymbosa, var. St. Johnii = D. corymbosa, var.

viBGATA. (Papilionaceae).

This plant was recorded in the Victorian Naturalist, Nov.,
1906, p. 133, and specimens have since been received from Mr.
C. French, Jr., collected at Ringwood. They are identical with
the D. virgata of Cunningham, which Bentham refers to D.
corymbosa, var. uiimosoides. The condensed clusters of small
flowers and the very narrow leaves would, as suggested by Mr.
W. R. Guilfoyle, justify the recognition of a second variety
differing more widely from the type than var. mimosoides, even
though transition forms occur, but the name should be variety
virgata, in recognition of the old specific name for the variety.

DiPLOTAXis MU KALIS, D.C., the wall or sand mustard.

(Cruciferae).

This introduced alien has been variously referred to as D.
muralis and D. tenuifolia, D.C. It has, however, the small
flowers and less divided leaves of the former. The Australian
specimens have the leaves less exclusively radical and more on
the stem, and are often double the normal height, frequently
reaching 12 to 16 inches. The plants also «how a greater ten-
dency to be perennial, but these changes are probably climatic
ones, not necessarily of varietal significance, although they are
approaches towards D. tenuifolia, D.C.

1 Fraifin., vol. x., p. 20.

Flora of Avstralia. 131

Ebiostemon gracile, R. Grab. (Proteaceae). In Edinb. N.
Pbil. Journ., xvi., 1834, p. 175 = Eriostemon dipformis,

A. Cunn.

The former name is given as that of a valid species in the
Kew Index, and the Nat. Herbarium possesses specimens from
-the Grampians, which are indentical with forms of E. difformis,
the glabrous petals and slightly longer flower stalks of the
specimens being variable features in E. difformis. The speci-
mens do not exactly tally with the description given in Mueller's
Plants Indigenous to Victoria, I., 1860, p. 125, but our specimens
appear to be authentic. E. gracile is the older name, but to
change the current one would be a frivolous interference with
established nomenclature. Bentham seems to have entirely
overlooked E. gracile, and makes no mention of it in the Flora
Australiensis.

Eriostemon intermedius. (Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 19, 1907, p. 40
= E. DESERTi, Pritzel (Fragm. Phytog. Austr. Occ,

1905, p. 320).

The plant was described before Diels' and PritzePs work was
available. Their description is exceedingly condensed, and im-
perfect in several respects, but specimens of their plant since
received show that the two species are identical, the older name
standing. Pritzel seems to have overlooked the fact that the
plant is an interesting connecting link, especially as regards the
stamens between the Leionema section of '' Phebaliuni " and
Eriostemon proper. The close resemblance to E. Brucei, which
misled Mueller, and to which Pritzel attaches undue importance,
is mainly external.

Euphrasia collina, R. Br. (Syn. E. Brownii, F. v. M.,
Fragm., v. 88. (Scrophulariaceae).

There can be no doubt that Mueller was correct in placing
four of R. Brown's species in one, but as was pointed out by
Bentham, the proper course was to extend one of them to
include the others, and so avoid a new name. Even considered
as varieties, the line of demarcation is not distinct in all cases,
and the type forms show a regular gradation from dwarf, small-

132 Alfred J. E wart :

flowered forms to taller, more luxuriant and larger-leaved an(
flowered forms, in the following sequence: —

E. ooUina, R.Br., var. striata. (E. striata, R.Br. ; E. alpina..
var. humilis, Benth..).

E. ooUina, R.Br., var. alpina. (E. alpina, R.Br. ; E. di©-
menica, Spreng.).

(Type form) var. typica. (E. coUina, R.Br. ; E. tetragona,
R.Br. ; E. multicaulisi, Benth.).

E. coUina, RBr., var. paludosa.

„ „ var. specioaa. (E. speciosa, R.Br.).

Further, the size of the flowers tends to increase in cultivated
specimens, and the colour i« highly variable.

KocHiA viLLOSA, LiiidL, 1848. (Salsolaceae).

Among some stored specimens at the Herbarium, probably
derived from the Sonder collection, one waa found from A. de
Jussieu, dated 1832, E. Nova HoUandia, and named Rhogodia,
Billardierii, R.Br., which proves to be the above. Hence this Kochia
reached Europe long before it was described by Lindley, and the
present is possibly the oldest Herbarium specimen of the plant.
The label and specimen are pasted on the sheet, and hence there
is no possibility of accidental transference having occurred.

Lyonsia straminea, R. Br. = L. straminea (R. Br.). Benth.

and Mueller. (Apocynaceae).

In pursuing some interesting archaeological but hardly botanical,
studies, Britten^ concludes that the L. reticulata of F. v. Mueller,
is the true L. straminea of R.Br., and proposes a new name
(L. Brownii) for the plant, supposed to be Brown's L. straminea
by Bentham and Mueller. A more confusing and unnecessary
addition to synonymy could hardly be proposed, and it is in-
teresting to note on p. 240, that Britten sharply criticises
Druce for a similar addition to synonymy based on no more
certain grounds. Britten admits that ** Brown published no de-
tailed description of the species," but considers that de Can-
doUe's description of L. straminea referred, "ait any rate in

1 Journ. of Botany, vol. xlv., 1907, p. 235.

Flora of Australia. 133

^^^^>^," to Mueller's reticulata, and that Bauer's figure was named,
^^oubtless on Brown's authority," L. straminea. Vague assump-
^^1X8 of this kind afford no grounds for troublesome chane:e« of

•^ ca o

*^ong-standing names. Indeed, a work of this character tends to
wing systematic botany into bad odour with workers in other
^ranches, who suffer from such changes, and if there is any diffi-
^Ity in regard to the specimens at the National Museum, Lon-
don, surely the proper course is to add explanatory labels to
them, as in the above heading. Archaeology and botany are sepa-
rate subjects, and should be kept apart.

Article 50 of the International Rules of Botanical Nomencla-
ture, 1905, says: — "No one is authorised to reject, change or
modify a name (or combination of names) becaAise of the exist-
ence of an earlier homonym which is universally regarded as non-
valid, or for any other motive either contestable or of little
import." Hence the names should remain as before, L. Brownii
Britten bedng a synonym for L. straminea (R.Br.), Bentham and
Mueller.

Medicago hispida, Gaertn., var. inermis, Urb. (Papilionaceae).
(Syn. Mkdicago reticulata, Benth.). Determined at

Kew Herbarium, England.

Dimboola Shire, F. M. Reader, October 16th, 1898. Geelong
and Penshurst (1906), H. B. Williamson.

This Medick was recorded by Mr. Reader in the Victorian
Naturalist, vol. 19 (1903), p. 159, as Medicago turbinata, Willd.,
but M. turbinata is quite a distinct plant from Reader's speci-
mens. It was also known here under the names of M. striata
and M. nummularia (M. cretica), but differs from both of these.
As no specimens of the above variety were in the National Her-
barium, the plants were sent to the Kew Herbarium for verifica-
tion, and determined as above. It is a naturalized alien from
Southern Europe.

Olearia homolepis, F. v. M., var. pilosa, new var.

(Compositae).

Cowcowing, West Australia. Max Koch, No. 1087 (1904).
The variety differs from the type in having slightly longer

134 Alfred J, Ewart :

peduncles, the flowers sometimes more than three together, the
bracts usually somewhat shorter and more pointed. The leaves
ahorter (about lom. long), and the whole plant covered with a
more or lesa well-developed pubescence, the scabrous hairs less
developed.

From 0. strigosa, Benth., it differs in its twenty or more ray
florets, equal pappus and short nonseptata scabrous hairs. It
bears some resemblance to 0. adenolasia (F. v. M.), but is dis-
tinguished by its more numerous ray florets, larger heads, more
pointed amd usually coloured bracts.

Phymatocarpus. (Myrtaceae).

The leaves of this plant are given as opposite in Bentham's
Flora, aa in Beaufortia and Regelia. Examination shows that
they are all alternate in Phymatocarpus, though closely set in
P. porphyrocephalus, the bases are all at different levels, and in
P. Maxwellii the internodes between the separate leaves are
of some length. This gives an easy mode of distinguishing
roughly Phymatocarpus from Beaufortia and Regelia. The o-nly
exception to the rule of opposite leaves in the last two genera
is in Beaufortia squarrosa. This has mostly opposite leaves,
but in some of the shoots the leaves, though closely set, are
alternate, the bases being all at different levels. This is prob-
ably an instance of partial reversion to the more primitive type.

PoDOLEPis Spenceri, A. J. E. (Compositae).

This plant bears a close external resemblance to P. aristata,
Benth., Fl. Aust., III., 605, from which, however, the blunt
outer bracts, the less deeply lobed ray florets, and the flowers
white or pale instead of yellow distinguish it. Mr. Max Koch,
its discoverer, also informs me that P. spenceri is only found in
damp places near river flats, whereas P. aristata grows in drier
situations.

PtEROSTYLIS CONCINNA X P. REFLEXA, var. INTERMEDIA.

A hybrid Orchid.

In all large genera (Salix, Eucalyptus, Acacia, Rubus, Hierac-
ium) the imperfect segregation of certain species may result in the

Flora of Australia. - 135

production of hybrids, some of which in time obtain the
to the production of hybrids, some of which in time obtain the
fixity of species. The same applies to many genera of less ex-
tended scope. The present case of the occurrence of a natural
hybrid in the genus Pterostylis (Orchidaceae) is, so far as I am
aware, only the second instance recorded for that genus in Aus-
tralia. The plants were found by Mr. J. R. Tovey at Mentone, Vic-
toria, 1907, growing among patches of Pterostylis oonoinna and of
P. reflexa, var. intermedia. Externally they resemble the latter
plant, except that the basal rosette of leaves persists in some
cases until flowering. The labellum, however, instead of having
an entire obtusely-pointed tip, is broader and faintly but dis-
tinctly bifid at its extremity, in this respect, being exactly
intermediate between the two forms. Some specimens show signs
of reversion to one or the other parent. Bentham gives the
scape of P. ooncinna as rarely above 1 inch. It is usually 3 to 5
inches long, and may bear 1, 2, or even 3 bracts, the lower ones
always empty. The wings of the column are marked in white,
green and purple, but the intensity, especially of the latter
coloration, varies. The possibility of hybridisart;^ion must be
borne in mind in future studies of this genus, and this ex-
planation may apply to some of the species already described.
In Fitzgerald's Australian Orchids mention is made of a supposed
hybrid between P. curta, R.Br., and P. pedunculata, R.Br.

PuLTENABA STRiCTA, Sims. In Bot. Mag., 1588 (1813).

(Leguminosae).

Synonyms : P. maideni, F. M. Reader, in Vict. Nat., xxii.,
158 (1905); P. largiplorens, F. v. M., in Benth., Fl.
Austr., ii., 134 (1864); P. gunnii, Benth., in Ann. der
Wien. Mus., ii., 82 (1839).

As the result of a close investigation of the numerous forms of
these highly variable and closely related '' species," it can only
be concluded that we are dealing with forms of one large,
■extremely pleomorphic species. The original description of
Pultenaea stricta in the Botanical Maigazine, 1813, page 1588,
was made from a plant flowering in England, and naturally refers
to that specimen only, Sims being unaware of the varied forms
assumed by the species in its native habitat.

136 . Alfred J. Ewart:

The following deseription tallies in all essentials with the
original one, but includes the other species mentioned. P.
striota, Sims. An erect spreading or somewhat decumbent shrub
of 1 to 3 feet; the slender young branches minutely hoary or
more or le«s silky-pubescent, sometimes somewhat angular and
becoming glabrous when old. Leaves varying greatly in shape
and size, sometimes on the same plant, from about 3 to 12 mm
long, ovate, oblong, cuneate or linear, obtuse or with a small
straight or recurved point, nearly flat, but with the margin
usually slightly recurved, shining and glabrous above, paler and
hairy or silky pubescent beneath, especially when young. Mid-
rib prominent, stipules small, narrow or lanceolate, and ap-
pressed, the narrower stipules often spreading. Flowers very
shortly stalked, usually in small terminal heads o-f 2 to 8, but
sometimes laterally arranged, and then usually axillary. Bracts
imbricate, the outer ones small, the inner ones, when present,
larger, 3 or 4 mm. long and either entire, bilobed, or with a
hairy point between the two apical lobes, varying in these re-
spects in the same head. Bracteoles lanceolate or nearly linear,
usually about 3 mm. long, and more or less hairy on the back,
inserted on the calyx tube, usually near its base. Calyx about
4 mm., pubescent or silky villous the three lower lobes pointed
— lanceolate, about as long as the tube, the two upper lobes
broader, usually more or less falcate and united to about the
middle. Staaadard twice as long as the calyx, the wings and keel
a little shorter than the standard, the keel deeply coloured, the
ovary villous, the style filiform, but slightly thickened towards
the base, where a few scattered hairs may be seen. Pod obliquely
or almost triangular, ovate, more or less flattened and hairy, or
silky, pubescent, usually 4 to 5 mm., long and projecting beyond
the calyx.

Variety Maideni (Pultenaea maideni, Reader).

The stipules more lanceolate, the inner bracts usually hairy
on the back, as well as the edges and tip, and slightly shorter.
The " trifid '' or bilobed apex of some of the inner bracts is evi-
dence of their stipular character, and is not peculiar to thi»
variety, which is very close to the type form.

Flora of Australia. 137

Variety Gunnii (P. Gunnii, Bentli.). In Ann. der Wien.

Mu8., ii., 82 (1839).

This has narrower, usually spreading stipules, the inner large
brajots are usually absent, but in all the forms, including the
type, the braots usually fall as flowering advances, and some
foims of oiu" Gunnii, have much larger bracts than others. In
the typical forms the leaves are usually broader at the base and
taper more or less towards a usually pointed apex. In the
typical A. stricta the leaves are usually broader near the apex*
then suddenly contracting to a distinct point. The difference
is more constant on the larger stem leaves.

Variety Largiflorens (P. lahgiflorens), F. v. M.
In Benth. FJ. Austr., ii., 134 (1864).

The flowers may be either axillary or lateral, or in terminal
clusters, the bracteoles are usually inserted higher up on the
oeHyx tube, and the two upper calyx teeth are less or not at all
falcate, and the fruits usually smaller.

Variety Incurvata, new var. Locality, Frankston, Coll.

J. W. Audas, 1907.

This has the leaves with hard, minutely-pointed, recurved tips,
guying the plant a peculiar harsh feel when drawn through the
fingers. In some respects it is intermediate between the variety
Maideni and the type form.

Pultenaea retusa, Sm., comes near to some forms of P. stricta,
but the calyx teeth are of more equal shape and length, and the
calyx is hardly bilabiate. The usually straight upper calyx teeth
of variety largiflorens show an approach to this species.

It may seem a bold course to reduce these three well-known
species, but the numerous connecting links leave no other course
possible, and there is no evidence as to the existence of hybridi-
zation between these four species. Variety largiflorens, shows
the largest, variety Gunnii a lesser, and variety Maideni the
least divergence from the type, but the same reasons that could
be urged for their naadntenance as distinct species could be used
to found at least 12 species out of the numerous connecting forms.
It may be taken as a general rule that in all large genera the

138 Alfred J, Ewart :

term "species" sJiould be given as broad a scope as possible,
not merely for reasons of practical utility, though these are of
value, but because it is precisely in such genera that groupe of
varieties as yet imperfectly segregated into speciea are most
likely to occur, and by recognising such varieties as species too
hastily we render it more difficult for the workers of subse-
quent centuries to obtain evidence of evolution in such cases. In
addition, the synonymy is less likely to become so extensive aa
at present. Thus it is doubtful whether the genus Pultensea
contains many more than 60 valid species, although over 150
have been recorded, and the same proportion holds for most
large genera.

A specimen of P. Williamsoni, Maiden^ was referred at Kew to
a variety of P. strict a. The National Herbarium contains both
under P. stricta and P. paleacea specimens examined by
Bentham or by Mueller, which couie very close to, or prac-
tically match specimens of P. Williamsoni. Altogether there
can be no doubt that the genus will not be on a satisfactory basis
until cultural experiments imder varying conditions have been
performed with all its supposed species, and the result of such
experiments will probably be to give the selected species in the
genus a much wider range than they have hitherto enjoyed.

Sporobolus Benthami, Bailey = S. virginicus, Kunth, var.
PALLIDA. (Gramineae). Queensland Flora, p. 1880, Bull.
Dept. Agric, Queensland, xiii., p. 16.

The 22 sheets of this variety in the National Herbarium show
a far greajter range of variation than Bailey's specimen from the
type, and yet have no constant character of more than varietal
significance. Although the outer glumes are usually about
equal, the lower one is occasionally slightly longer than the
upper, and sometimes, especially on the basal spikelets, not more
than half its length. In this respect, in the more hyaline outer
glumes, and in the longer spike the variety shows am approach
to S. indicus, R.Br., from which, however, the vegetative habit
differs. It is, in fact, possible that cultural experiments might
show S. virginicus to be a marsh and maritime form of variety
of S. indicus, developed in brackish situations.

1 Vict. Nat, vol. xxH,, p. 0, 1905.

Flora of Australia, 139

Bailey admits that his S. Benthami, and his var. minor of S.
▼irginicus probably form the var. pallida of S. virginicus, recog-
nised by Bentham, and even a cursory examination of the
material at the National Herbarium would ihave shown that the
new species was untenable.

Given as new to New South Wales (L. Cudgel lice >) by Maiden
and Betche, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales, 1906, Vol. XXXI., p.
739.

Tunica prolifeba (L.) Scop., var. velutina (T. velutina,
Fisch. and Meyer). (Caryophyllaceae).

This naturalized alien was recorded by Mueller as T. velutina in
Yict. Nat. X., p. 145, 1893, and by Reader as T. polifera, in Vict.
Nat., XX., p. 88, 1903. Both species are given as valid in the
Ke-.v Index, and in Boissier'f Flora Orientalis. T. velutina dif-
fers from T. prolifera mainly in having leaves with smooth
edges (instead of minutely toothed), hairy intemodes (instead of
glabrous), longer leaf-sheaths and smaller seeds. None of these
features are constant; hairy specimens may have rough-edged
leaves, and some specimens of T. velutina have the lower leaves
minutely toothed entirely or in part. The length of the leaf-
fiheath may vary on one and the same specimen, as may also the
size of the seeds. Hence the species must be reduced to a variety
of T. prolifera, joined to that species by intervening forms.
Most of the Victorian specimens belong to the variety velutina,
but some of Mueller's are intermediate in character.

Moimt Ararat, Nov., 1883, D. Sullivan ; Upper Murray River,
C. French, 1886 ; Clyde Mts., N.S.W., Oct., 1888, W. Bauerlen ;
Delatite, 1890 and 1891, Rev. R. Thom, Goulbourn River, 1892,
W. F. Gates; near Lake Urana., N.S.W., 1894, G. Luehmann,
Jnr. ; near Seymour, 1902, Mrs. F. M. Reader.

4a

[Pboc. Rot. Soc. Victo*ia, 20 (N.S.), Pr. II., 1907.]

Art XII. — On the occwi^ence of a Marsupiuni in an
Echinoid belonging to the Genu^ ScutelliTia.

By T. S. hall, M.A.,

Melbourne University.

[Bead 14th November, 1907.]

On a visit to the mouth of the Glenelg River, in the west of
Victoria, I collected about twenty-five specimens of Scutellina.
They were found in the «oft white polyzoal limestone which
occupies such a large area of the south-east of South Australia
and the south-western borderland of Victoria. The age of tibis
formation is Barwonian, and may be Eocene.

On cleaning them with a dental engine a deep depression waB
displayed in some examples on the actinal surface, between the
peristome and the anterior margin. The size and shape of the
pit varies somewhat in different individuals. It is generally ao
deep that its upper surface is almost, if not quite, in contact
with the abaotinal surface of the test. The pit is very shallow
near the peristone, but deepens as it runs forward. Its front
and lateral walls are vertical. A rounded, but distinct median
ridge slightly divides the pit into two halves.

Scutellina sp., actinal and abactinal views,

profile, and section through marsupium

and mouth x H.

The only suggestion that I can make as to the function of the
pit is that it is a marsupium for the protection of the young.

Marsupium in Echinoid. 141

The only group of Echinoids in which a definite marsupium
ha« been recorded, as far as I am aware, is that of the Spcvtan-
goids. In them those forms with sunken petals, such as Hemi-
aater and Schizaster, the pits in some cases, and perhaps in all,
function as brood pouches. In Hemiaster oavernosus, the pits
are present in the female, absent in the male, so that they
furnish an external sexual oharaoter.

Eleven of my specimens have a marsupium, while the re-
mainder are without it. Its presence, then, if we may argue on
the analogy of Hemiaster, indicates the female.

In some of the Cidaroids a temporary protection is afforded
to the young by the tent-like arrangement of the spines, but
there is no pitting in the test, as in the case of Spatangoids,
or as in the present specimens. It is consequently of interest
to find the permanent marsupium present in a second order of
Echinoids, the Clypeasteroida.

The question as to the name of the species is not easy to settle.
The amount of specific vairiation amongst echinoids is consider-
able, and there is a growing tendency to limit the number of
specific forms. F. Jeffrey Bell is one of the most eminent of
those who hold this view.^

We have already two species of Scutellina described from our
Australian older tertiary — namely, S. patella, Tate^ and S. mor-
gani, Cotteau.' Although there are certain details of Cotteau*s
species that I cannot decipher in specimens from Mount Gam-
bier, the locality of the type, yet I have no doubt that Tate's
and Cotteau's species are identical. Tate in his description gives
Mount Gambler as one of the localities from which his species
was obtained. The species is widely spread, being found in
almost all our tertiary limestones.

The question of priority is not easy to settle, for both papers
are dated 1891. Professor Tate, many years ago, when acting
as editor of the publications of the South Australian Society,
told me that the publications for the year always appeared in
that year, so that though his present paper was read only in
October, it almost certainly appeared in 1891. Cotteau's paper

1 Marine Investigations in South Africa, vol. iii.

2 Trans. Boy. Soc. S. Australia, 1891, p. 279.

3 Mem. Soc. Zool. ds France, pt. iv. (1891), pp. 629, 630, pi. 19, figs. 10-14.

142 T, S. Hall: Marsupium in Echinoid.

appeared in part 4, the final part, of the volume for 1891. Both
species are recorded on the same page of the Zoological Record.
The fact that S. patella has been familiar to Australian geolo-
gists a« a manuscript name of Tate's is no argument for its uae,
but till the question of priority is settled I shall use Tate's
name.

The present specimens, with the marsupium, are not, I think,
separable, though in most of them the pentagonal outline is
decided, and I think they may be regarded as S. patella. I
have found one or two specimens from Mount Gaanbier also
showing the marsupium.

[Pjboc. Eot. Soc. Victoria, 20 (N.S.), Pr. II., 1907.]

Art. XllI — The Coleoptera of King Island, Bass Strait

By ARTHUR M. LEA.

(Communicated by J. A. Kershaw, F.E.S.)

[Eead 12th December, 1907.]

In December, 1906, in company with Mr. A. Conlon, of the
Tasmanian Department of Agriculture, I spent a few days on
King Island, where we stopped in the vicinity of Currie Harbour.
Mr. Jas. A. Kershaw, of the National Museum, Melbourne, crossed
over to the island with us, but had to proceed some distance
away on a search for bones of an extinct emu and of various
mammals. Part of Mr. Conlon's, and almost the whole of my
time was devoted to collecting ; Mr. Kershaw has sent for exami-
nation the whole of the Coleoptera obtained by him, and I have
seen a few taken by Mr. H. J. Colbourn, by the late Mr. Alex-
ander Morton and by Mr. W. Hickmott, of the island.

Most of the species were taken on low-growing plants, close
to the seaside, on tea-tree and melaleuoa scrubs and dwarf
eucalypti, never more than a mile from the seaside, on the
beaches or in sand dunes close thereto. Bark and flower fre-
quenting beetles are consequently sparsely represented, and very
few were obtained under logs and stones. The collecting, in fact,
was much the same as could be done on the N.W. coast of Tas-
mania or on the S.E. coast of Victoria.

For the names of 32 species I am indebted to the Rev. T.
Blackburn ; I am also indebted to him for suggestions as to the
generic positions of a few species. To Mr. T. G. Sloane I am
indebted for four names, in addition to two others, the descrip-
tions of which are included here.

The " Victorian Naturalist " for January, 1888, contains an ac-
coimt of an outing of the Field Naturalists' Club of Victoria to
the island, with an account of the island itself and lists of the
plants, birds, beetles, etc. Of the beetles 39 species are re-
corded, of which, however, 16 are named by the genus only

144 Arthur M. Lea:

(probably a number of these, and at least Staphylinus and
Amycterus, wrongly named). Of the others Chileone deyrollei
is almost certainly wrongly recorded from the island ; for
Creophilus lachrymosus was probably meant Ptomaphila lachry-
mosa; Clivina clivinoides, Heteronyohus interpunctus, Ehtilus
apochilus, Cossonus ephippiger and Graptodera australis appear
to be manuscript names only.

The following species recorded from their outing were not seen
by me, and should probably be added : —

Histeridae Saprimus laetus^

Scarabaeidae Trox australasiae.

Scitala pruinosa.

Heteronyx dimidiata.

Bolboceras proboscideus.
Buprestidae Melobasis superba.
Elateridae Crepidomenus taeniatus.

Tenebrionidae Adelium calosomoides.

Meiieristes servulus.
Cerambycidae Phoracantha recurva.

In addition to the species here recorded, 25 others were ex-
amined, most of which, however, were represented by unique or
damaged specimens. The total here given can only be regarded
as a comparatively small fraction of the whole, as no specimens
were obtained from the hilly or forest country. It is probable
that the island contains almost as many species as an area of
equal size in Tasmania, and probably at least 1000 species are
to be obtained on it.

Where I have had specimens of the new species from Australia
or Tasmania the additional localities have been given; but for
previously described species this was not considered necessary.

Eleven of the names given are manuscript only. Of these
there are six'' by Mr. Blackburn, which will be described shortly
in the Transactions of the South Australian Royal Society, and
five by myself. Of these two' are included in a revision of the
Australian and Tasmanian Malacodermidae, which was " read "

1 Given as latus.

2 Cercyon kingensis, Cryptophagrus tasmaniensis, Cis leanus, Paropsis acclivis, P.
subfasciata, Chp., var. planior, and Arsipoda varieti^ata, Wath., var. kins^ensis. Since this
was written, these names have been published.

8 Metriorrhynchus obscuripennis and Hypattalus exilis.

Coleoptera of King Ishtnd, 145

at the Science Congress in Adelaide (January, 1907) ; and three^
are included in a paper entitled " Notes on the Genus ' Lemidia '
with Descriptions of new Species " ; sent for publication to the
Belgian Entomological Society.

Carabidae.

1. Calosotna schrayeri, Er.

2. Trigonothops vittipennis^ Sloane, n. sp.

Mr. Sloane's description is as follows : —

" Undersurface, legs, antennae, head, sides of prothorax
(widely) and elytra (narrowly), and a median vitta on each
elytron yellowish; vertex subinfuscate ; apical ventral segments
infuscate ; femora paler tham tibiae and tarsi ; disc of prothorax
piceous black; elytra black.

^^ Head elongate, narrow (1.65 mm. across eyes), laevigate;
neck wide ; eyes prominent ; orbits small behind eyes ; front
narrowly convex on each side above base of antenna ; these
supra-antennal ridges defined on inner side by a slightly oblique
preocular impression.

^^ Prothorax lightly transverse (1.7 x 2.15 mm.), widest before
middle; disc convex; apex (1.4 mm.) lightly and widely emar-
ginate ; anterior angles widely rounded ; sides rounded on an-
terior four-fifths, sinuate posteriorly and meeting base at right
angles; base wider than apex (1.8 mm.), a little oblique on each
side, lightly rounded in middle ; basal angles sharply rectamgu-
lar; lateral margins wide, widest towards base, hardly narrower
near anterior marginal seta, lightly narrowed to apex. Elytra
much wider than prothorax (5.5 x 3.3 mm.), fully striate ; striae
narrowly linear, finely subcrenulate ; first interstice with a
stride at base; ninth decidedly narrower than eighth, seriate
pimctate, the punctures wide apart in middle. Length, 9.5 ;
breadth, 3.3 mm.

" Allied to T. lineata, Dej., but I have thought it best not to
regard it as conspecific with that sp. owing to the following differ-
ences from Chaudoir's description of T. lineata (Bull. Mosc. III.,
1877, p. 222) : — Size larger ; prothorax with disc black ; prothorax

1 LemidU oioatrioosa, nigrovaria and simsoni.

\

146 Arthur M. Lea:

not as in T. pacifica, Er., the sides being more widely margined
anteriorly and more strongly sinuate posteriorly. The elytral
vittae seem the same as in T. lineata, Dej., beginning ait the
base on the fifth and sixth interstices, but at once leaving the
sixth and extending on to the fourth, then over the third at the
anterior discal puncture, then continuing towai:ds the apex along
the fourth interstice and turning inwards towards the suture
rartiher indistinctly to unite with the marginal border. T.
vittipennis differs decidedly from T. plagiata, Germ., by pat-
tern ; head longer, narrower, more convex, far leew strongly
narrowed to neck behind eyes ; prothorax more emarginate at
apex with anterior angles not absolutely rounded off as in T.
plagiata. The close resemblamce of T. vittipennis to T. lineata,
Dej., and its evident difference from T. plagiata, Grerm., has
convinced me that the Rev. T. Blackburn was mistaken in his
opinion that these two species were in all probability synonymous
(c.f. Trans. Roy. Soc, S.A., 1890, p. 82)."

3. Homeihcs sericeus, Er.

Three specimens from the island agree with the description
of sericeus, given as a synonym of elegans in Master's catalogue;
but I think it should be regarded as a variety, as it differs from
typical specimens of elegans in being smaller, with narrower
elytra and the fine waved lines on the prothorax less con-
spicuous.

4. Sarothrocrepis callida^ Newm.

5. S. civica^ Newm.

6. Ectroma benefica, Newm.

7. Agonochila binotaia^ White.

8. A. curtula^ Er.

9. Scopodes boops, Er.

10. Scopodes iineatus, n. sp.

Coppery; in places, especially front of head, shading off to
coppery green ; elytra with numerous fine coppery brown lines ;
under surface black with a greenish gloss, legs flavous, the tarsi
becoming infuscated towards apex.

Head finely corrugated ; with a setose pimcture near middle

Coleoptera of King Island, 147

of each eye, and another on eaioh side of clypeus. Proihorax
ang^arly' dilated near apex; with a long seta at widest part of
eaich side, apex itself widely rounded, eaeh side near base with
another seta on a small projection, sides behind rather strongly
notched ; densely and finely corrugated, and with a distinct
median line. Elytra suboval, each side near apex slightly in-
curved ; surface shagreened ; with three large but shallow
foveeie on each side near suture, and a few less distinct ones near
the sides. Length, 4^ mm.

The male differs from the female in being slightly smaller
and narrower, more brightly coloured, with larger eyes and
basal joints of front tarsi wider.

In size resembling flavipes, but with coppery elytra, on which
the foveae are also more distinct ; grifiithi having metallic elytra
has black legs, and is considerably larger; sigillatus is much
smailler with less metallic elytra and darker antennae. In
Sloane's table-^ it would be placed beside aterrimus and syd-
neyensis, from both of which its colour will readily distinguish
it. The antennae are sometimes slightly infuscated towards the
apex. The lines on the elytra (about eight on each) are not al-
ways clearly defined, especially towards the sides and apex,
they are somewhat similar to those on sigillatus, but are de-
cidely brighter.

11. Adelotopus politus^ Cast.

12. Scaraphiies insuianus^ Sloane.

13. Chlaenius australis^ Dej.

14. Promecoderus bassii\ Cast.

15. P. cordicoiiis, Sloane, n. sp.

Mr. Sloane's description is as follows : —

^ Robust ; head with post-ocular tubercles small ; prothorax
cordate; elytra ovaJ, faintly striate; ventral segments 3 — 6
with a deep round foveae on each side ; anterior tarsi with four
basal joints dilatate and densely spongiose beneath ; inter-
mediate tarsi with three basal joints spongiose beneath (first
joint more decidedly so than usual, third joint very slightly so) ;
posterior tarsi long, slender; fifth -joint elongate, not flattened

1 Proo. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1903, p. 638.

>

148 Arthur M. Lea:

on upper surface. Nitid, upper surface dark olive green ; under
surface bronzed black, submetallic ; antennae palpi and tarsi
reddish.

" Head moderate (3.25 mm. across eyes), convw^ ; front with
a well-marked, wide foveiform impression on each side just be-
hind clypeal seta. Prothorax laevigate, oonvetx (subdepressed
along median line), cordate (3.8 x 4.3 mm.) ; base (2.8 mm.)
narrower than apex (3.4mm.) ; basal angles marked, a little
obtuse; border subsinuate just before basal angles, obsolete on
middle of base ; median line strongly impressed, a wide, shallow,
transverse impression at posterior extremity of median line.
Elytra oval (8; 5 x 5.3 mm.), widest behind middle, lightly
narrowed to base, widely rounded at apex; humeral angles
marked, a little distant from peduncle ; striae very faint on
disc, obsolete on sides. Legs light ; posterior femora narrow.

Length 15, breadth 5.3 mm.

"This fine species is at once differentiated from P. gibbosus
Gray, by the round foveiform lateral impressions of the ventral
segments. The form of these foveae associates it with Cas-
telnau's species, P. nigricomis, P. striato-punotatus, and P. mari-
timis, from Victoria, and all unknown to me in nature. From
P. maritimis. it is evidently distinct, if only by the spongiose
tissue of the anterior joints of the tarsi extending on to the
outer side of the joints, and of the intermediate tarsi unusually
well developed ; from P. nigricomis and P. striato-punctatus it
seems to differ by its less convex elytra (less convex than in
P. gibbosus, not more so, as sadd by Putzeys of P. nigricomis),
antennae reddish, etc."

16. Hypharpax inornatus^ Germ.

17. Lecanomerus master si ^ Macl.

18. Euihenarus projntus^ Er.

19. Mecyclothorax ambiguus, Er.

20. Amblytetus brevis^ Blackb.

21. Dystrichothorax placidus^ n. sp.

Piceous-brown ; scutellum, margins ( f p^'othorax and of elytra,
mouth parts and appendages paler.

Coleoptera of King Island. 149

<id smooth ; shallowly foveate at sides, between and in
of eyes. Antennae extending to middle coxae. Prothorav
i once and one-third as wide as long, apex feebly emarginate,
sinuous towards the sides, each hind angle wifh a long
sides rather strongly reflected, greatest width about middle ;
finely wrinkled; with a feeble median line; transversely
»sed neoir base ; each side of base shallowly foveate. Elytra
', margins narrower than on prothorstx and near apex
i to a narrow carina that extends backwards for a short
ace ; very feebly striate, the striae almost impuncta/te and
pearing before apex. Front tarsi with fourth joint -some-
dilated, deeply bilo»bed and almost white below. Length,
■ mm.
10 from Tasmania (Hobart and Mount Wellington).

Blackburn's table this species would be placed beside
ictatus, from which it differs in the elytra being darker
the head, and with the third interstice impunctate. In size
general appearance it strongly resembles Epelyx lindensis,
9ipart from the front tarsi and unisetose sides of prothorax, it
adily distinguished therefrom, by the almost impunctate
a. The elytra are always darker than both prothorax and
, but in one specimen they are almost black (except for
on of the suture and the sides) ; at a glance they appear to
lite impunctate, and it is only from certain directions that
small and shallow punctures can be seen in the striae. On
ipecimen the prothoracic sculpture is very feeble. The Tas-
an specimens have been described as the unique one from
Island appears to be immature.

22. Notonomus accede ns, Chd.

23. N. chalybeus, Dej.

24. Prosopogmus chalybeipennis^ did.

25. Chlaenioidius prolixus^ Er.

26. Leptopodus so/icitus, Er.

27. Simodontus aeneipennis, Dej.

28. Tachys semisiriatus^ Blackb.

10 specimens appear to belong to this species, but have
)ody darker than in South Australian specimens, the subapi-

150 Arthur M. Lead-

ed! maculae are also scarcely traceable. Tasmanian (and Kin^'
Island) specimens, however, are frequently so much darker thar»^
those from the mainland that no importance can be attached t(^
this.

DYTTSCrDAE.

29. Bidessiis gemellus^ Clark.

30. Rhatitus pu/verosus, Steph.

31. Hyderodes shuckhardi^ Hope.

32. Cyb islet-* tripunctatus^ Fab.

Hydbophyllidab.

33. Paracymus pygmaeus^ Macl.

34. Cercyon flavipes^ Fabr.

35. C. lossum^ Blackb.

36. C kingensis^ Blackb.

Staphylinidae.

37. Falagria Jauveli^ Sol.

38. Aleochara kershawi, n. sp.

Black ; elytra in part, parts of palpi and of legs of a more or
less reddish brown. Sparsely pubescent, the sides with a few
longish hairs.

Head coarsely punctate, with a sparsely punctate impreBsion
in middle, the impression terminating in a subtrangular im-
punotate space. Antennae fairly stout, first joint as long as
second and third combined, these subequal in length, fourth —
tenth strongly transverse. Froth or ax about once and one-half
as wide as long, sides and base strongly rounded ; with coarse,
irregulariy distributed punctures, but forming an irregular line
on each side of middle. Elytra with rather coarse punctures, be-
coming smaller posteriorly, and absent from a shining narrow
space on each side, and from a small space near the suture and
scutellum. Abdomen with small and fairly dense punctures, in-
terspersed with larger ones on the apical half of each segment ;
under surface with sparser punctures of medium Rize. Length,
5J, to apex of elytra 3 ; variation in length, 4J-6 mm.

Coleoptera of Kivg Idand, 151

Belongs to section of genus having " Prothoraa with, two im-
jMressed rows of punctures." In appearance fairly close to specu-
lifera, but smaller and narrower, colour of elytra and legs
different, impunotate space on each elytron much smaller (on
some specimens it might almost be regarded as absent) and the
punctures on the abdomen and elytra larger and less numerous.
From the description of pelagi it differs in its very different
punctures of prothoraz and »bdomen.

In some specimens the elytra are entirely blackish except at
their tips, whilst in others the brownish colour extends over
most of their surface ; the entire legs are sometimes brown, but
the femora are sometimes black, and the tarsi are always pale.
The tips of the abdominal segments on the under side are
reddish. The aoitennae are occasionally diluted with red.

39. A, aciae. Oil.

40. Quedius pectinatus^ n. sp.

$ Black; head, prothorax and elytra with a coppery gloss; iirst
and eleventh joints of antennae, palpi, femora (wholly or in part),
tarsi, and tips of abdominal segments, more or less reddish or
flavous. Head and prothoraa glabrous, except for a very few
long hairs at the sides ; elsewhere densely pubescent ; sides and
apex of abdomen with long hairs.

Head distinctly longer than wide, or without the neck about as
long as wide; upper siu^ace with two setiferous punctures close
to each eye, one on each side close to the neck, and another
between this and each eye. Antennae extending to base of pro-
thorax, first joint as long as the second and third combined,
second slightly shorter than third, the others to the tenth
gradually decreasing in length, but none transverse. Prothorax
■strongly rounded at sides and apex ; margins with a few seti-
ferous punctures, usually one on each side, about four on basey
And about six on apex, disc with two simple punctures.^ Elytra
moderately transverse, slightly dilated posteriorly, apex rather
strongly incurved to middle; with dense and fine punctures.
Abdomen with dense amd fine punctures, except at the base of

1 On one of the four specimens before me a seta arises from one of these punctures.

>

162 Arthur M. Lea:

each segment. Basal joint of middle tarsi stout, blackish, and
with a distinct comb of about 20 black teeth. Length, 8i, to
apex of elytra 4 mm.

$ Differs in having tlie middle tarsi simple and the eighth-tenth
joints of antennae somewhat transverse.

The teeth of the oomb are quite distinct under an ordinary
Coddington lens. From some directions there appear to he
faint opalescent tints on the head, prothorax and abdomen.
The antennae slightly diminish in colour towards the apex, but
only the first and eleventh joints could be regarded as pale, al-
though some of the others are reddish at the extreme base.

Belongs to the long-headed section of the genus, and seems
close to the description of aeneus, but base of antennae pale
and with four punctures on each side of head ; that species is
also described as " totus aeneus."

41. Quedius xvlophilus^ n. sp.

Pale castaneous, head and elytra somewhat darker. Head
and prothorax glabrous, except for a few long hairs at the sides,
elsewhere rather densely pubescent ; sides and apex of aibdomen
with long hairs.

Head, including neck, slightly longer than wide, without the
neck, somewhat transverse ; upper surface with two setiferous
punctures close to each eye, and four near the neck. Antennae
extending to base of prothorax, first joint as long as second and
third combined, second slightly shorter than third, fifth feebly
transverse, sixth-tenth more noticeably so. Trothorax with sides
and base strongly rounded, with a sparse marginal row and two
discal setiferous punctures. Elytra subquadrate ; with dense fine
punctures. Abdomen with dense fine punctures, except at the
base of the three first segments. Basal joint of middle tarsui
stout. Length, 5f, to apex of elytra 2^ mm.

Also from Tasmania (New Norfolk).

A remarkably active species, which occurs in soft rotting tim-
ber ; although there are but two specimens before me, I saw
others, but wais unable to catch them. The colour is not due to
immaturity. From some directions the second joint ot the an-
tenna^ appears to be slightly longer than the third.

Coleoptei^a of King Island. 153

42. Q. ana/is, Mad.

43. Homalota pavens, Er.

44. Leucocraspedum iugens, Blackb.

45. Creophilus erythrocephalus^ Fab.

46. Cafius littoralis^ Fvl.

47. C. sabuiosuSy Fvl.

48. C sericeus^ Holme.

49. Xantholinus phoenicopterus, Er.

50. Paederus cingulatus^ Macl.

51. P. simsoni^ Blackb.

52. Oxytetus inconstans^ Lea.

53. O. trisulcicoilis. Lea.

SCYDMAENIDAE.

54. Scydmaenus kingiy n. sp.

Reddish castaneus, head and prothoraix slightly darker, and
legs somewhat paler than elsewhere. Rather sparsely clothed
with long, yellowish pubescence, denser on base of head and
margins of prothorax than elsewhere; very short on under
surface.

Head almost impunctate. Eyes small and very prominent.
Antennae passing base of prothorax ; first joint slightly longer
And stouter than second, the last four forming an elongate and
loosely jointed club. Penultimate point of palpi stout, last joint
very small. Prothorax slightly wider than long, disc flattened,
front angles depressed, hind almost rectangular ; with a large
fovea on each side of base, the space between with distinct
punctures; elsewhere almost impunctate. Elytra elongate-
ovate, at base not much wider than prothorax, rather strongly
dilated to near the middle, apex conjointly rounded, with a sub-
foveate depression on each side of extreme base, and a feeble
longitudinal depression on each side of suture at base; with
minute scattered punctures. Femora clavate, tibiae and tarsi
long and thin. Length, \\ — 1^ mm.

Also from Tasmania (Mount Wellington).

The sexes are evidently before me, as on one of the island
specimens the fourth segment of the abdomen has two strong

154 Arthur M. Lea :

notches at its apex, and the front tibiae are notched and hirsute
near apex; in the other the front tibiae and abdomen are
simple. Closer to parramattensis than any other described
species known to me, but larger, more brightly coloured, elytra
wider and prothoracic impressions much more pronounced.

SiLPHIDAK.

55. Ptomaphila lachrymosa, Sch.

Trichopterygidae.

56. Actinopteryx aushaiis, Matth.

NiTlDULIDAE.

57. Brachypepbis basalis^ Er.

58. Haptoncura meyricki\ Blackb.

59. Cryptarcha ele^aniior^ Blackb.

Trogositidae.

60. Leperina decoraia, Er.

COLYDIIDAE.

61. Penihelispa fuliginosa, Er.

62. P. secuta^ Pasc.

CUCUJIDAE.

63. Prostomis at kin so ni^ Wath.

64. P, cornutus, Wath.

65. Hyliota australis, Er.

66. Cryptamorpha oUiffi^ Blackb.

67. Myrabolia grouvelliana^ Rtr.

68. M. longicornis^ Blackb.

Cryptopiiagidak.

69. Cryptophagus tasmanicus^ Blackb.

Lathridiidae.

70. Lathndius apicalis^ Blackb.

71. Z. nigroviaculatns^ Blackb.

Goleopteiu of King Island. 155

72. Corticaria adelaidae^ Blackb.

73. C, aus traits, Blackb.

Derm ESTi DAK.
74. Trogoderma blackhurni, n. sp.
:k, sides of prothorax obscure-ly diluted with red ; elytra
1, with numerous irregular blackish spots ; antennae red-
jut first and last joints infuscate ; legs reddish in parts ;
f abdominal segments reddish. Rather densely clothed
jreyish pubescence, becoming blackish on the dark parts

elytra^ and most of the under surface.
h apparently composed of five joints. Prothorax about
Ei-s wide as long; with small and partially concealed punc-

Elytra parallel sided to near apex, with slightly larger
ires than on prothorax. Length, 2\ — 3^ mm.
re are two specimens before me, both apparently females,
ark spots on the elytra may be regarded as forming four
rregular fasciae. To the naked eye, a large, dark, sub-
spot on each elytron, appears to be margined behind by
tish semicircle of pubescence. The club appears to be
sed of five joints, but it is hard to determine whether
sal one of these should really be considered as belonging

club. The prosternal sulci are apparently subtriangulair
pe and feeble.

oblong-elliptic species, the general outline of which is
like that of rigua, but (apart from colour) the punctures
1 prothorax and elytra are much smaller and sparser than
b species. In Mr. Blackburn's^ table of the genus it would
jced in BB, but the colour of its elytra will readily dis-
jh it from all the species placed there.

75. T. froggatti, Blackb.

76. T. morio, Er.

77. T, rigua, Er.

78. Dermestes cadaverinus. Fab.

Byrrhidae.

79. Microchaeles scoparius, Er.

08. Boj. Soc. South Australia, 1891, p. 129.

5a

156 Arthur M. Lea:

Fabnidae.

80. Elmis tasmaniais, Blackb.

LUCANIDAE.

81. Syndesus cornutus, Fabr.

82. Ceratognathus niger^ Westw.

83. Lissotes cancroides, Westw.

84. Mastochilus polituSy Burm.

SCARABAEIDAE.

85. Onthophagus australis^ Guer.

86. O, mutatus^ Har.

87. O. posticus, Er.

88. O. pronus, Er.

89. Aphodius granarius, Linn.

90. Saprosites mendax, Blackb.

91. Diphucephala pulchella, Wath,

92. D, colaspidoides, Gyll.

93. Scitala langtiida, Er.

94. Heteroiivx odesus, Burra.

95. H. striatipemiis, Blanch.

96. H. tempestivusy Er.

97. Auiomolus bicolor, Blackb.

98. Adoryphorus coiiloni^ Burm.

99. Pimelopus parcel In s, Er.

100. Cheiroptaiys moelms, Er.

BUPRESTIDAE.

101. Stigmodera flavopicta, Saimd.

1 02. Melobasis fulgurans. Thorns.

103. M. hypocrita, Er.

104. M, prisca, Er.

Elateridae.

105. Monocrepidius fabrilis^ Er.

106. Elater granulatipennis^ n. sp.

Coleoplera of Kin</ Island. 157

!BIack or blackish ; antennae (basal joint sometimes infuscate),
P*^]pi and legs (femora more or less infuscate) reddish. Rather
^Onsely clothed with fine whitish pubeecence.

Head convex ; densely and rather coarsely punctate. An-

"t^nnae extending to metasternum. Prothorax as long as wide,

l>\it apparently slightly longer than wide, strongly convex, sides

I'ounded in front, basal two-thirds subparallel, hind angles

xooderately produced, median line almost absent, with a wide

Btallow basal impression on each side ; punctures as dense as on

he«ud, but rather shallower and smaller. ScuteUum granulate.

Elytra (by measurement) about twice and one-half the length

of prothorax, gently decreasing in width from near base t(j

a.pex, apex obtusely pointed ; with narrow, apparently ini-

punctate, striae ; interstices with small dens© rounded granules.

Under surface with dense punctures, becoming granules on

c^pical segment, and subgranulate on basal segments of abdomen.

Length, 8 — 9 J mm.

A. beach frequenting species; also occurs near Sydney.
In general appearance somewhait resembling Acroniopus
rugosus, Cand, but with tarsi (except that they are longer) as
in Elater perplexus, Cand. On two of the five specimens before
me the elytra are piceous brown instead of black.

107. Melanoxantlius quadriguttatus^ Er.

108. Cardiophorus hu/niiis, Cand.

109. Corymbites snavis, Cand.

110. HapiUesus hirtus^ C;ind.

The specimens from the island seem to represent a variety
of this species, as they differ from typical ones in being smaller,
with the clothing denser and longer, and the punctures in the
elytral striae more pronounced ; they also have the elytra
more convex, and the median line of the prothorax more
noticeable. I should probably have regarded them as belonging
to a distinct species, but that a specimen before me has these
differences even more pronounced, and was returned to me by
Monsieur Candeze as var. minor of hirtus. One of the speci-
mens was taken under bark, but seven others were taken at

158 Arthur M, Lea :

the roots of beaoh growing plants, and on which their laxv^*
probably feed.

111. Crepidomenus aberrans^ n. sp.

$ Piceous-red, aiitt*niiae, scutellum, prosternum and sides o^ ^
meso- and of metasternum black or blackish; legs obscurel^^^
variegated. Rather densely clothed with short, silvery pubes- — '
cence; on the upper surface variegated with irregular spotJ
of rusty or golden pubescence.

Head densely punctate, with a wide, feeble depression be
tween eyes. Antennae extending to hind coxae. Prothorax ap-
parently twice as long as wide, but by actual measurement not
once and one-half as long as wide, sides subparaillel to near
base, hind angles acute and embracing shoulders ; median line
rather deep and wide in middle, becoming obsolete towards apex
and subobsolete towards base; punctures rather smaller and
not quite so dense as on head. Scutellum suboordate. Elytra
(by measurement) not thrice the length of prothorax, each
semicircularly notched at inner apex ; striate-punctate, punctures
in striae small, but deep, interstices with moderately dense minute
punctures. Under surface rather sparsely pimctate along
middle, but densely at sides ; base and apex of prosternum with
coarse punctures. Tarsi thin, fourth joint narrower than third.
Length, 14 — 18 mm.

? Differs in being much wider, both prothorax and elytra less
parallel-sided, antennae not passing hind angles of prothorax,
and legs shorter.

Also from Tasmania (Frankford).

The long prothorax of the male and the narrow tarsi are at
variance with others of the genus, aind in fact at a glance tiie
species looks like a Chrosis. The only female before me is
somewhat abraded, but all of its clothing appears to be more
golden than silvery ; whilst on the upper surface it is decidedly
golden, with a feeble mottling of sooty.

112. C. australis^ Boi.

113. C. decoratns^ Er.

114. C fulgidus^ Er.

Coleoptera of King Island. 159

Dascillidae.
1 1 o. Mixcrohelodes ni^er^ ii. sp.

Deep black ; parts of mouth appendages aoad of sterna flavous ;
second and third joints of antennae, kneas and parts of tarsi
>bscurely diluted with red. Upper surface glabrous, lower with
ine pubescence, except in middle of metasternum.

Head with dense and fine punctures. Second and third joints
jf antennae combined shorter than fourth. Prothorax with
sparse and very small punctures, becoming denser and larger
Bit sides, but even there smaller and sparser than on head.
Elytra with dense amd not very fine punctures, smaller along
3uture than elsewhere. Leno:th, S^ mm.

Differs from the descriptions of princeps and lucidus in its
entirely black upper surface (including the sides), and almost
entirely black antennae and legs ; princeps is also said to have
the elytral punctures " sparsim," those on the elytra of lucidus
are not mentioned, but the species is said to have " cetera ut
M. princeps." On the present species the punctures are denser
than in tasmanicus, but somewhat smaller ; and they are denser
than in crassus. On the type both antennae have the tliree
terminal joints missing.

116. Helodes vicloriae, Blackb.

117. Cyphon ovensensis^ Black I ).

118. C. pictus^ Blackb.

119. C, spilotns^ Blackb.

Malacodekmiuae.

120. Trichalus kershawi\ n. sp.

<r Black ; suture and margins of elytra reddish.

Antennae serrate, extending to middle of elytra. Prothorax
moderately transverse, hind angles acutely produced ; with
fairly nimaerous and rather large punctures in front, and a
row of somewhat larger punctures behind. Scutellum concave,
apex gently arcuate. Elytra parallel-sided to near apex, with
double rows of large transverse punctures ; each elytron with
three strong costae, except near base, where there are four.

160 Arthur M. Lea :

Penultimate segment of abdomen feeibly notched. Length,
10—13 mm.

2 Differs in being more robust, with shorter and less strongly
serrated antenna© and simple abdomen.

The antennae of both sexes are much as in ampliatus ; the
entirely black prothorax will readily distinguish it from insignia,
which otherwise it strongly resembles.

121. Meiriorrhynchus kin^ensts^ ii. sp.

? Black, shoulders very feebly diluted with red.

Rostrum very short. Antennae strongly serrated, scarcely
extending to basal third of elytra. Prothorax triareolate, middle
areolet narrowly open in front, rather more widely open behind,
middle of apex deeply notched. Scutellum concave, apex strongly
notched. Elytra wide, subparallel to near apex ; each with
four fairly strong costae, and with double rows of large sub-
quadrate punctures. Length, 12^ mm.

The combination of triareolate prothorax, very short rostrum
and double rows of elytral punctures will readily distinguish
from all other black species hitherto described. The antennae
are much as in the male of atratus.

122. M. obscun'pefinisy Lea (m.s.).

123. M. rufipennis^ Fab.

124. Telephorus tiobiliiatus^ Er.

125. T. pulcheiliis, W. S. Macl.

1 26. Heteromasiix apicijlavus, n. sp.

Black, middle of prothorax, tips of elytra, apical half of
abdomen, trochanters, and lower parts of mouth flavous. With
fine pubescence.

Head with fine punctures. Antennae extending to hind
coxae, first joint almost twice the length of second, slightly
longer than third, and slightly shorter than eleventh, fourth —
tenth very feebly decreasing in length. Prothorax almost
twice as wide as long, impunctate, with traces of a feeble
median line, margins strongly raised and in front slightly
incurved. Elytra with coarse and dense punctures, becoming
smailler posteriorly. Length, 4| mm.

Coleoptera of King Island. 161

Belongs to section having antennae simple in both sexes, and
olose to discoflavus^ from which it differs in its entirely dark
elytra^ except at the tip. The fifth se^rment of the abdomen is
feebly incurved at apex. The lower portion of the basal joint
of antennae is diluted with flavous. The flavous part of the
j>rothorax extends across rather more than one-third of the
'^dth, and almost touches both base and apex. The type is
probably a female.

127. Hypattalus insularis^ n. sp.

<r Black, with a bronzy or slightly coppery gloss ; parts of
three basal joints of antennae, and of prothorax, mouth parts,
trochanters and base of tibiae flavous ; parts of abdomen ob-
scurely flavous. With fairly dense, pale pubescence, and with
blackish hairs or setae.

Head with small, dense punctures, and with several shallow
depressions in front. Antennae serrate, extending to hind coxae.
Prothorax about twice as wide as long ; with small, dense
punctures. Elytra with dense and rather small punctures, be-
coming smaller posteriorly. Abdomen with fourth segment in-
curved to middle, the fifth deeply cleft, with a process at its
base. Feirvora and tibiae simple. Length, 4^-5^ mm.

? Ditters in being larger and wider, with shorter antennae and
simple abdomen.

On " Boobyalla " (Myoporum insulare).

Belongs to section of genus having femora simple in both
sexes, amd very distinct from any other species known to me.

Regarding the prothorax as flavous, it has, in some specimens,
a broad, dark band extending across the entire width, and
leaving but a narrow pale stripe at the base, and a still narrower
one at the apex ; in other specimens the band does not quite
extend to the sides, and the basal and apical stripes are wider ;
in others the band is fairly narrow towards the sides, but with
a wide extension towards the middle of the base. The elytral
punctures, though small, are distinct, and clearly defined,
whilst those of the head and prothorax are very much smaller

1 The description of discoflaviiM is included in my revision of the Malacotlerniidae, now
awaiting publication.

162 Arthur M. Lea :

a<Tid traceable with difficulty. The abdomen of the male appears
to have a heart-shaped opening at its apex, with a flavous,
curved, and pointed process at the base of the fifth segment.

128. If. exilis. Lea (M.S.).

129. Helcogaster effeminaius^ n. sp.

(^ Black, elytra with a faint bluish gloss ; lower surface of
four bajsal joints of antennae and trochanters more or less
flavous. Sides with a few short hairs.

Head with distinct punctures in places ; with a rather feeble de-
pression open towards the sides and in front, and with a short ridge
in the middle. Antennae serrate, extending past hind coxae. Fro-
th or av apparently about as long as wide, with a transverse
basal impression, and a very feeble one on each side of apex ;
impunctate. Elytra impunctate, at base as wide as head or
slightly wider, feebly dilated posteriorly. Legs long and thin ;
basal joint of front tarsi stout and curved on its inner edge.
Length, 3J, to apex of elytra 2^ mm.

The depression on the head, although very shallow for a
mrtle, from some directions appears to be fairly deep, its hinder
border (excluding the lateral openings) from some directions ap-
pears to be feebly tri sinuate. The abdomen is so wrinkled m
the type that its sculpture cannot be described, but the front
tarsi are essentially masculine. Obliquiceps and canaliculatus
have the face yellow, incisicollis^ has the prothorax incised,
gagatinus has two frontal f6veae and is otherwise different ; all
other species with the j)rothorax black, have the head ver}'
differently sculptured.

Cleridak.

130. Opiio sexfioiiiti/s, Westw.

Apteropilo, n. g.

Prothorax without longitudinal a-nd transverse impressions.
Elytra obovate. Metasternum short. Apterous. Other charac-
ters mostly as in Opilo.

1 Al-^o awrtitiujr publication in n>y review of Malacodonuiciae.

Coleoptera of King Island, 163

In both Blackburn's and Gorham's tables of Cleridae this
genus would be placed next to Opilo, which I believe to be its
correct position. From Opilo it is readily distinp:uished by its
apterous body ; the other apterous genera from Australia are
Cormodes and Allelidea, from the former it is distinguished by
the maxillary palpi, and from the latter by its coarsely granu-
lated and subreniform eyes.

131. Apteropilo pictipes^ n. sp.

Dark reddish brown ; antennae, palpi, coxae, trochanters,
tibiae and tarsi paler ; femora black on apical third (or two-
lifths), almost white- elsewhere. Clothed with long, straggling,
blackish setaie, and in places with shorter and paler setae.

Head rather large ; densely covered with rather small but
clearly defined punctures, in places becimiing almost confluent.
Eyes small, subreniform, coarsely faceted. Antennae extending
to base of prothorax, club rather loosely triarticulate. Vro-
thorax almost as long as wide, strongly convex, apex very feebly
incurved to middle, sides gradually increasing in width to beyond
the middle (where the width is greater than that across the
eyes), then suddenly and strongly lessened to base; punctures
much as on head, except that on the disc there are four sub-
tuberculate or cicatrised spots. ScuteUum concealed. Elytra
at base the width of head, rather strongly increasing in width to
beyond the middle and then strongly rounded ; basal third with
about eight rows, on each elytron, of large, deep punctures, else-
where almost or quite impuncate. Sterna and lower surface
of head with distinct punctures ; abdomen with feeble punctures.
Legs stout and moderately long. Length, 4J mm.

In one specimen the club is somewhat darker than the rest
of the antennae. The third-fifth rows of punctures on the
elytra are longer tham the others, but terminate before the
middle. The three specimens before me were obtained near the
beach, one on a plant occasionally wet with spray, the others
on a thick-leaved vine which sometimes almost covers its host-
plant.

132. Natalis porcaia^ Fab.

133. Thanasimomorpha bipartita, Blanch.

1 64 Arthur M. Lea :

134. Paratillus cartts, Newm.

135. Lemidia cicatricosa^ Lea (m.s.)

136. L, nigrovaria, Lea (m.s.).

137. Z. simsoni. Lea (m.s.).

138. Z. niiens^ Newm.

ClOIDAE.

139. Cis leaniis^ Blackb.

BOSTRYCHIDAB.

140. Xylobosca bispinosa^ Macl.

Tenkbrionidak.

141. Caediomorpha heteromera^ King.

142. Frio not us serf ico His ^ Hope.

143. Hyocis cancel lata ^ n. sp.

Black; muzzle, front margins of prothorax, and appendages
reddish. Sparsely clothed with fine whitish or greyish pubescence.

Head with dense but rather indistinct punctures; a depres-
sion on each side close to antennary ridge. Antennae about the
length of base of prothorax. Prothorax strongly transverse,
sides strongly rounded, but sinuated at base; with a distinct
and almost continuous median line ; with dense but small and
shallow punctures. Elytra with rows of large, round, subap-
proximate punctures ; the interstices convex and narrower than
punctures. Length, 2J - 2J mm.

Also from Victoria (Melbourne) and Tasmania (Kelso).

The colour as described above is that of two specimens from
the island, and two from Melbourne, but three others from Mel-
bourne have the suture reddish, whilst another has the entire
elytra more or less reddish. In fresh si)eciniens the clothing en
the elytra causes a fine, whitish line to appear on each interstice.
From some dire<jtions the elytral punctures appear to be sub-
quadrate. The colour of the types is much as in nigra, but
the species is larger, the elytra punctures are consideraly larger,
and the prothoracic margins are sinuated posteriorly instead
of evenly rounded ; the pubescence also is sparser. The shape

Coleoptera of King Island. 1 65

and punctures are much as in bakewelli. It is a beach frequent-
ing species.

144. Cestrinus trivialis^ Er.

145. Phaennis fasciculata^ Champ.

146. Sphargeris physoides, Pasc.

147. Achthosus westwoodi^ Pasc, var insular is, n. var.

There are ten specimens before me, which, after considerable
hesitation, I have regarded as a variety of Westwoodi, rather
than as representing a distinct species. They differ from
normal specimens of that species in being much larger and
wider ; the bilobed tubercular elevation on the front of the head
much wider and shorter ; the punctures on the head more dis-
tinct and numerous ; the antennae wider and flatter ; the legs
in places of a brighter red ; but in particular by the pro thoracic
eixcavation. In shape it is much the same, except that it is
larger and with the boundaries more rounded off ; but in its
middle portion it is densely punctured and without granules ; at
the sides, however, there are subobsolete granules. In typical
specimens there are numerous distinct granules in the excava-
tion, but no punctures. In the variety also there is a feeble
median elevation (sometimes almost a carina) at the hind end
of the excavation, and there is not a trace of this in typical
specimens. The front of the prothorax is also much more
strongly trisinuate in the variety. Length, 18 — 21 ; width, 7 — 9

mm.

148. Saragus infelix, Pasc.

149. Promethis angitlata, Er.

150. Menephiius ruficornis, Champ., var. instil ar is, n. var.

Six specimens before me tippear to represent a variety of this
species. They differ from the typical form^ in having the punc-
tures on the basal half of the hend considerably smaller, but I
can find no other structural differences. In colour they vary
to a certain extent, but so also do specimens of the typical

form.

151. M^ colydioides, Er.

152. Titaena columbina, Er.

1 I have a co-type from Mr. Champion.

166 Arthur M, Lea i

Three specimens of this species were taken on the island.
They differ from Tasmanian examples in having the pimcturee
of both prothorax and elytra larger and less numerous.

153. Adelium licinoides^ Kirby.

154. A. neophyluin^ Pasc.

155. A. tenebrioides^ Er.

156. Seirotrana elon^^ata^ Er.

CiSTKLIDAE.

157. Nocar iatus, Blackb.

Pythidak.

158. Notosalpingus variipennis^ n. sp.

Of a more or less dark reddish brown, elytra and legs paler,
but the former usually darker along suture and sides, and the
latter usually with the femora infuscated. Upper surface
glabrous.

Head large ; densely and rather coarsely punctured, feebly
produced in front. Eyes small. Antennae very feebly dilated to
apex, extending to base of prothorax. Prothorax about as long
as wide ; sides strongly narrowed to base ; base about two-thirds
the width of apex ; punctures much as on head, but leaving a
feeble median line. ScuteUum minute, strongly traoisverse.
Elytra parallel sided to near apex ; no wider than widest part
of prothorax, with series of rather large punctures in feeble
striae, both punctures and striae becoming smaller posteriorly.
Legs short, femora stout, tarsi very thin. Length, Ij — Ij mm.

Also from Tasmania (Hobart).

As the terminal joint of the tarsi is as long as the rest com-
bined, and the antennae are non-clavate (at any rate the
antennae are almost exactly as in ornatus) and most of the
other characters agree with Notosalpinirus I have referred the
species to that genus desjjite the much shorter rostral pr(»longation
of the head. From ornatus it differs in being glabrous, smaller
and differently coloured, the prothorax with more evenly rounded
sides, smoother surface and narrower base ; the punctures are
also everywhere smaller, and on the elytra more decidedly

Coleoptera of King I Hand. 167

seriate in aa:'raiigemeDt. Two specimens have the elytra entirely
pale except for a slight infuscation at the sides ; but the suture
is usually black or at least very dark ; on two specimens this
dark marking is widened into a rather feeble cloud beyond the
middle. On the darker specimens the elytra appear to have two
wide flavous stripes.

Melanduyidak.

159. Orchesia miiiuta^ n. sp.

Piceous or piceous brown, w4th or without a slight coppery
gloss; appendages paler, base of antennae and spurs of hind
tibiae still paler. Densely clothed with fine pubescence.

Head almost concealed from above ; with small and dense
punctures. Antennae just passing middle coxae. Protliorax at
base about twice as wide as long, strongly narrowed to apex,
base feebly bisinuate ; with small dense punctures, rather finer
at a!pex than at base. ScuteUuni minute, strongly transverse.
Elytra about five times the length of, and outline continuous
with that of prothorax, at base with punctures as on base of
prothorax, becoming smaller posteriorly. Spurs of hind tibiae
almost the length of basal joint of hind tarsi. Length, 2 mm.

Also from Tasmania (Swansea, Hobart and Huon River).

In shape much like austrina, but very much smaller, none of
the specimens before me exceeding 2 mm. in length. The speci-
mens from the island are rather less robust than those from
Tasmania, but I can detect no other differences.

160. Scraptia ates trait's, Champ.

Lagriidae.

161. Lagria grandis, Cryll.

Anthicidae.

162. Anthicus eras si pes ^ Laf.

Previously recorded from New Holland only, but a widely
distributed species. In addition to numerous King Island speci-
mens I have taken others at Sydney and in Tasmania. The
male has curiously distorted hind tibiae. The apical maculae
of the elytra are never so clearly defined as the basal ones, and

168 Arthur M. Lea :

occasionally conjoined and even joined to the basal ones. On
one specimen the elytra are entirely black, except for a faint
trace of red on each shoulder.

163. A, wollasfont\ King.

MORDELLIDAE.

164. Mordella b rev is, Lea.

Eight specimens from the island are before me, and in all of
them the clothing is more yellowish than white (as in the
types) ; but as in many other species the colour of the clothing
similarly varies, I attach no importance to it. The most com-
mon form of the elytra! pattern is that figured in Traais. Ent.
Soc, 1902, plate 2, fig. 33 ; but the island specimens vary just
as do those from W. Australia, especially in regard to the
longitudinal basal marking.

165. M. aus traits, Boi.

166. M. communis, Wath.

167. AI. graphiptera, Champ.

168. M, limbata, Wath.

Oedemeridae.

169. Copidiia litoraliSy w. sp.

Head (base of upper surface and sides of lower surface black),
prothorax (two, four or more black or blackish spots excepted),
coxae, femora (tips excepted), lower surface of front tibiae and
of three (or four) basal joints of antennae, and parts of palpi
flavous ; scutellum, meso-, raetasternum, abdomen, a spot on
each side of presternum close to coxae, and antennae black;
elytra metallic green. Densely clothed (but prothorax almost
glabrous), with short, pale pubescence.

Bead smooth, with small punctures. Eyes moderately faceted,
feebly notched. Antennae extending to abdomen, third joint
very slightly longer than fourth and twice the length of second.
Prothorar longer than wide, widest near apex, apex feebly in-
curved to middle, impressed near base; with small and irregu-
larly distributed punctures. Elytra subparallel to beyond the

Coleoptera of Khuj Island. 169

middle, shoulders feebly inflated ; with donse and fine punctures,
and each with traces of three very feebly raised lines. Legit
long, tibial spurs short but distinct. Length, 7J — 9 mm.

There are usually four black spots on the prvothorax — a faarly
large one on each side near the middle of the base (but not on
the extreme base), and a much smaller ono on each side about
one-third from apex ; these latter are often reduced in size and
occasionally are absent; on an occasional specimen there are
also two or three more small spots. Numerous specimens were
taken close to the sea beach.

In Blackburn's table of the Australian Oedemeridae this
species would be placed in his typical section of the genus
Copidita. The claws are slightly swollen at the base as in
Kershawi. The eyes are not so coarsely faceted as in pimctum,
still the facets are much larger than in Ischnomera sublineata.^

170. Pseudolychus haemorrhoidalis. Fab.

Twelve specimens from the island are before me, three have
the typical red tip of the elytra, two have the red tip almost
absent, whilst the others have the elytra entirely dark. I have
seen no similar specimens as the latter from Tasmania or Aus-
tralia.

171. P. margtnafuSy Guer.

CURCULIONIDAE.

172. Prosayleus hopeiy Sch.

173. Rhiidinosomus lacordairei^ Pasc.

174. Timareta subierranea^ \\. sp.

Dark reddish brown, appendages paler. Densely clothed with
white scales, usually more or less feebly mottled with brown ;
with dense, fine, white setae.

Eyts prominent, coarsely faceted, and rather small. Scrobes
distinct from above. Antennae extending to base of prothorax,
soape about the length of funicle and club combined, first joint
of funicle slightly longer than second. Prothorax moderately

1 There is considerable difference in the size of the facets of sublineata and atkinsoni^

anfl aooording to the table these would cause the species to be {(enerically separated.

6

170 Arthur M, Lea :

transverse, sides regularly rounded, median line feeble; with
dense, raither small punctures ; and small, irregular flattened
granules. Elytra ovate, conjointly arcuate at base; striate—
punctate, punctures rather large, becoming smaller posteriorly;
interstices gently convex, regular and distinctly wid^ than
striae. Under surface with dense, rather small and partiaily
concealed punctures. Abdomen with basal segment slightly con-
cave in male, slightly convex in female. Femora stout; tibiae
suddenly inflated at apex ; claw joint long. Length, 4 — 5 mm.

The sculpture is described from abraded specimens, as the
clothing is so dense as to entirely conceal the derm of the
prothorax, and to cause the elytra to appear feebly striate —
punctate, or even feebly striated only. The scales are sometimee
entirely white, but they ar^ usually mottled with very feeble
brown or smoky spots on the elytra, and on the prothorax with
feeble strij>es. From some directions the first joint of funicle
appears to be slightly shorter than the second. The granules
of the prothorax are variable, as on complete abrasion of two
specimens they are seen to be fairly dense and regular on
one specimen, and entirely absent from some parts of the
other ; on another specimen they oaiU just be traced, but the
punctures are always distinct though small. The males are
usually smaller than the females, and are slightly narrower, but
the sexual differences are not very pronounced. In appearance
it is close to some of the varities of crinita, but is rather more
robust (the male is fully as wide as the female of that species),
the setae on the prothorax and elytra decidedly finer and more
numerous, and the abdominal punctures smaller.

Numerous specimens were obtained amongst the roots of
beach-growing plants.

175. Mandalotus caviventris, n. sp.

IJlaok ; antennae, tarsi, knees and parts of tibiae more or less
reddish. Densely clothed with greyish — white scales, occasion-
ally feebly spotted with jiale brown ; and with fairly dense thin
set&e.

Head with small partially concealed granules between eyes ;
base finely corrugated. Rostrum with granules as on head;

Goleoptera of King Island. 171

with a thin and continuous median carina. Scape the length of
funicle and club combined ; first joint of funicle once and one-
half the length of second. Prothorax about once and one-third
as wide as long ; with dense and more or less flattened granules.
Elytra not much wider than prothorax, parallel-sided to near
the middle, thence regularly decreasing in width to apex ;
striate — punctate, puncture© partially concealed, interstices wide,
with numerous small seta-bearing granules. Front coxae widely
separated. Intercoxal process of mesosternum simple. Metas-
ternum transversely corrugated. Abdomen indistinctly wrinkled ;
with dense, minute and subobsolete granules. Femora stout,
tibiae bisinuate beneath. Length, 5J — 8 mm.

The male differs from the female in being smaller and nar-
rower, with thicker antennae and femora, and with a large ex-
cavation common to the two basal segments of abdomen ; these
being gently convex in female.

The claw joint from its base is as long as the three basal
joints combined. Each seta, except some on the appendages,
arises from a graoiule. One specimen has the legs entirely of a
dull red.

In general appearance much like many species of Polyphrades,
but the tarsi are not soldered together at the base. The setae
and granule® of the prothorax are much as in seticollis, aaid
the abdomen and legs, etc., are much the same; but the pro-
thorax, although without scales in the middle, is densely clothed
on the sides ; and the elytral granules, although small, are quite
conspicuous.

176. M. arciferus, Lea.

177. M. crudus^ Erichs.

178. M. ventraiis, Blackb.

179. Leptops tribulus^ Fabr.

180. Perperus cos tiros iris ^ n. sp.

Black, antennae tarsi and ocular lobes obscurely diluted with
red. Densely clothed with small white scales, and with numer-
ous more or less decumbent whitish setae.

Head with small dense punctures and with a few larger (but
still small) ones scattered about. Rostrum with a narrow acute

Ca

172 Arthur M. Lea :

costa, commencing between the eyes and terminating at the apei
in the form of a narrow triangle, apical half of sides flattened,
glabrous and with sparser punctures than elsewhere. Scrobes
deep and curved about antennae, but disappearing half-way be-
tween them and eyes. With feeble sublateral sulci. Antennae
short ; first joint of funicle distinctly longer than second, second
longer than third, fourth-sixth sub-globular, seventh feebly trans-
verse. Prothorax transverse, convex, sides evenly rounded ex-
cept at almost extreme base and apex, usually with a feeble
median impunctate line; punctures as on head. Scutellum
small but distinct. Elytra elongate — ^subcordate, conjointly
arcuate at base, with rows of fairly large but usually concealed
punctures ; interstices gently convex, the alternate ones very
feebly raised, with dense and very small punctures. Under sur-
face with small and dense punctures. Legs rather long j front
tibiae denticulate below. Length (excluding rostrum), 8^ — 10^
mm.

The male differs from the female in being smaller, with
nan'ower and more parallel-sided elytra and longer legs.

The acutely oarinated rostrum and first joint of funicle de-
cidedly longer than the second readily distinguish from most
previously described species of Perperus ; the sides of the ros-
trum in front are reminiscent of Bhinaria, In some specimens
(usually females) the derm is entirely of a dark reddish brown.
The scales are so readily abraded that the disc of the prothorax
usually appears to be glabrous, and on the elytra large irregular
patches are frequently denuded ; on the elytra the scales fre-
quently have a golden gloss ; on them also they are everywhere
dense, but they are rather denser on the odd than the even
interstices. On the upper surface the scales are more numerous
than the setae, but the reverse is the case on the under surface
and legs. The hind femora are usually feebly ringed, and trace*
of still more feeble rings can sometimes be seen on the others.

181. Perperus conloni^ n. sp.

Black, appendages and ocular lobes more or less red. Densely
clothed with small, rounded scales, varying on individuals from
fawn-coloured to muddy brown, and occasionally with a faint

Coleoptera of King Island. 1 73

golden gloss ; with spots or patches of white or whitish scales ;
with fadrly dense adpressed setae.

Head with dense concealed punctures. Rostrum noncostate;
with dense punctures tending to become confluent, but more or
less concealed. Scrobes deep near antennae, but very short.
Without sublateral sulci. Antennae rather lon^ and thin ;
second joint of funiole almost twice the length of third, and con-
siderably longer than first, none of the others transverse.
Prothorax about once and one-third a» wide as long, sides
rounaed, with greatest width slightly behind the middle ; with
dense more or less concealed punctures ; and usually with traces
of a very feeble median line. Elytra cordate, base gently and
conjointly arcuate ; with series of rather large but partially con-
cealed punctures; interstices gently and regularly convex, and
with minute concealed punctures. Under surface with dense
concealed punctures. Legs rather long ; front tibiae very feebly
denticulate below. Length, 5f — 9^ mm.

The male differs from the female in being smaller, with less
rounded elytra, narrower prothorax, longer and stoute'r antennae,
longer legs and wider t-arsi.

The derm in some females is dark brown. The femora are
usually, but not always, darker than the rest of the legs. The
whitish scales usually margin the eyes, form a twice interrupted
stripe on each side of the prothorax, amd a very irregular stripe
on each side of the elytra. On the elytra they often form small
scattered spots about the seriate punctures, and occasionally a
small cluster of spots about the summit of the posterior de-
clivity. The femora are usually feebly ringed. The paler scales
are sometimes tinged with blue, and are sometimes golden when
situated amongst very dark ones. On an occasional specimen
almost the whole of the scales and setae are of a dingy white,
with silvery scales taking the place of the white scales on normal
specimens. Many of the prothoracic punctures appear to be in
the centre of small granules. The scutellum is very small, and
is concealed when the prothorax is closely applied to the elytra.
The apex of the elytra is slightly produced, especially in the
females.

Distinguished from insular is by the second joint of funicle
being half as long again as the first, instead of but one-fourth

174 Arthur M. Lea :

longer, it is also less convex, larger, with the laiteral whitish
markings different ; in insularis the seventh elytral interstice is
clothed with white scales from the base almost to the apex ; in
the pre«ent species the white stripe is often partly on the sixth
amd fifth, and even on the eighth.

182. Goniptertis exaratus, Fhs.

183. Atelicus airophtts^ Pasc.

Kershawcis, n. g.

Head rather long. Eyes briefly oval. Rostrum short and
curved ; scrobes curved in front, behind antennae suddenly
directed obliquely downwards, and meeting on lower surface at
junction of head and rostrum. Antennae rather stout, scape
much shorter than funicle. Prothorax subcylindrical. Scutellum
small and rounded. Elytra subcylindrical. Metastemum. long.
Abdomen long, first segment longer than second, all sutures dis-
tinct. Legs short; front coxae touching; femora stout and
curved ; tibiae very short, curved, denticulate below ; tarsi wide,
third joint subcordate, claw joint scarcely projecting beyond
lobes of third ; claws feeble and close together. Winged.

The third joint of the tarsi is pad-like as in Strongylorrhinus,
but the claw joint scarcely projects beyond it, and the claws
hang closely together instead of diverging widely as in that
genus. The shape of the scrobes will readily distinguish the
genus from all other Australian genera of the Diabathrariidee,
to which subfamily it evidently belongs.

184. Kershawcis cylindricus^ n. sp.

Densely clothed with brownish scales, in places having a faint
coppery gloss, and variegated in places with paler and darker
scales ; with stout pale setae in punctures.

Head with dense, small, concealed punctures, and with some
scattered larger ones, slightly traceable before abrasion. Ros-
trum about as long as head, with a deep median groove;
punctures as on head. Scape rather suddenly curved and in
flated at apex ; first joint of funicle stouter than, but subequal
in length with second, third feebly transverse, fourth — seventh
more — noticeaibly so ; club the length of five preceding joints.

Coleopteiu of King Island. 175

Prothorax longer than wide, base very little wider than apex,
surface somewhat uneven and with large, round, deep, partially
concealed punctures. Elytra parallel sided to near apex, about
one-third wider thajn prothorax and about four times its length,
each separately and strongly rounded at base ; with rows of
large, round, deep, partially concealed punctures, becoming
smaller posteriorly; third and fifth interstices distinctly raised,
especially the third near (but not at) the base. Abdomen de-
pressed along middle of two basal segments, the others flat.
Length (including rostrum), 10 — 12 mm.

Also from Victoria.

The derm is everywhere concealed, but varies in places from
reddish brown to black. The clothing is paler on the under
surface (both of the body and legs) than on the upper. On the
prothorax to the naked eye there appear three pale continuous
longitudinal stripes, but these are obscured under a lens.
There is a short whitish stripe on each elytron, commencing
near the side at about one-fourth from the base, and extending
obliquely hindwards to the suture before its middle, but not
reaching it; both in front of and behind these stripes there are
irregular patches of darker (sometimes black) scales ; the pos-
terior declivity has feeble traces of pale spots or stripes. The
Bcutellar scales are uniformly pale. There is a very faint rem-
nant of an ocular lobe on each side of the prothorax, but these
remnants are not ciliated. The base of the prothorax at a
glance appears to be rather strongly bisinuated, but this appear-
ance is almost entirely due to the elytraj. The teeth of the
tibiae are almost concealed by clothing.

184a. Rhbiaria transversa^ Boi.

185. Lixus tasmanicus, Germ.

A specimen from the island and two from Tasmania agree
well with two from South Australia (the original locality), which
appear to belong to this species; but the prothorax in all is
closely covered with large punctures, not " dispersim punctatus "
as in the original description. It is probable, however, that
Germar's specimens were so densely covered with the mealy
exudation given off by the beetles of this genus that many of
the punctures were concealed.

176 Arthur M, Lea :

186. Orthorhinus klugii. Boh.

187. O. lepidotus, Er.

188. Rhaciodes bicaudatus^ Boi.

189. R. oranulifer^ Chev.

190. Eristus palliduSy n. sp.

Reddisli-flavous, metasteniuni and basal segment of abdo-
men sometimes somewhat darker. Clothed with fairly stout,
whitish pubescence, denser at base of prothorax and sides of
metastemiim than elsewhere, on the elytra more or less seriate
in arrangement.

Head with, numerous punctures on lower portion of forehead.
Rostrum wide, flattened, feebly curved ; in male about once and
one-half as long as wide, in female about once and two-thirds;
with numerous mare or less concealed punctures on basal por-
tion but sparse elsewhere. Prothorax moderately transverse,
apex narrower than base, sides rather strongly rounded ; with
numerous punctures, but which are concealed towards base and
sides. Elytra suboblong, consideraibly wider than prothorax,
parallel-sided to near apex ; with series of large punctures in
rather feeble striae ; interstices feebly convex, each with a row
of small punctures. Under surface with rather small but dis-
tinct punctures. Abdomen with third and fourth segments
feebly curved throughout. Legs rather stout. Length (excluding
rostrum), 2 mm.

Smaller and very differently coloured to the two species
(setosus and bicolor) hitherto described ; but there are several
closely allied undescribed species.

191. Cyttalia sydneyensis, Blackb.

192. Misophrice ohlonga^ Blackb.

193. Eiiiopea subcaeriilea^ n. sp.

Black ; rostrum and appendages (parts of tarsi infuscate) red-
dish; elytra usually reddish, but frequently the sides and the
suture near base stained with black ; prothorax also often reddish,
Moderately densely clothed with short stout pubescence (scarcely
scales, except on the under surface), varying from white (usually
with a bluish or greenish tinge) to brown.

Coleoptera of King Island. 177

Rostrum longer than prothorax in both sexes, but longer in
female than in male ; with thin oarinae to insertion of antennae
in male, for a shorter distance in female. Prothorax apparently
as long as wide, sides strongly rounded, apex about two-thirds
the width of base; with dense, concealed punctures. Elytra
conjointly incurved at base ; striate-punctate, striae feeble,
punctures fairly large, but more or less concealed ; third inter-
stice with a small fascicle about suniiuit of posterior declivity.
Length, 2 — 2J mm.

Also occurs in Tasmania (Huon River and Bruni Island)

The head and base ol rostrum are moderately clothed, but
there is » very decided white spot between the eyes. The
prothorax has mostly whitish clothing, but with darker
pubescence causing a faint (sometimes more distinct, however),
stripe on each side of a thin white median line. On the elytra
the clothing has a faintly mottled appearance, and frequently
appears to have three feeble, transverse, infuscate fasciae — ;»ne
before, one at, and one below summit of posterior declivity ;
often, however, these fasciae are represented by four spots. hO
placed as to form the angles of a square. Two of these spnts
are always the fascicles on the third interstices ; the fascicles
sometimes being very distinct on account of their colour.

In size and general appearance close to tenebricosa, and the
description of amoena, but differs in the elytra being reddish,
the femora (in 17 specimens before me) not infuscated in the
middle, and the clothing (especially of the under surface) more
or less greenish or bluish. From posticalis and sydneyensis it
differs in havin": the rostrum larjjer and the olothinp: verv
different.

Elieschodes.

This is the only described Australian genus of the Tj^chiides
having dentate femora. There are before me numerous species
which agree too closely with its generic diagnosis for me to
regard them as belonging to any other genus. But in general
appearance they are very different to the only species^ yet re-
ferred to it. For the present, therefore, I refer the following

1 Hnniiltoni, for a speoiuien of which I am indebted to the Rev. T. Blackburn.

178 Arthur M. Lea:

species to that genus, but it differs from Hamiltoni (apart from
colour and clothing) in being narrower, in haiving the rostrum
longer and more curved, the base of the prothorax bisinuate (it
is practically truncate in Hamiltoni), the femoral teeth larger
and tibiae less infla'ted at apex.

194. Eileschodes eucalypti^ n. sp.

Reddisli ; under-surface and three spots or patches on the
elytra black. Rather densely clothed with setae or stout
pubescence, varying from white to ochreous or golden.

Bead with partially concealed puncturee. Rostrum rather
thin, strongly curved, parallel sided ; with rows of punctures
caoising an appearance as of fine costae; in male scarcely, in
female noticeably longer than prothorax. Antennae thin ; scape
inserted two-fifths from apex of rostrum in female, one-third in
male, slightly longer than funicle ; funicle with first joint stouter
than and the length of two following joints combined. Prothorax
about once and one-third as wide as long ; with a faint median
carina or impunctate line; base bisinuate and about one-third
wider than apex. Scutelluvi small, rounded, with distinct punc-
tures. Elytra elongate-cordate, base not much wider than
prothorax, sides parallel to near apex ; with rows of fairly large
punctures, separated by fine transverse lines ; interstices scarcely
convex, themselves with fairly dense punctures. Utider surface
with fairly dense but partially concealed punctures. Femora
stout, acutely and rather strongly dentate. Length (excluding
rostrum), 2 — 2§ mm.

('omiuon on the foliage of young eucalypts. Also occurs in
Tasmania (Frankford, Hobart, Huon River, IJlverstone, Mount
Wellintrton, Burnie), Victoria (Emeraild, Somerville) and New
South Wales (Forest Reefs, Armidale, National Park).

The suture near the middle is black, and each side of the
elvtra fmm near the base to about the middle is black : the black
rapidly diminishes in width, and terminates at about the sixth
interstice, but occasionally it is advanced to the fourth interstice,
and even sometimes to the suture ; so that on such specimens
there appears to be a broad, zigzag fascia ; the sutural marking
mav be confined to the suture itself, or extended to the second

Coleoptera of King Island. 179

or third interstice. Occasionally the sutural marking is entirely
absent, and the lateral marking confined to the outer interstice.
The soutellum, although apparently never blaick, is often darker
than the elytra. The apical segment of the abdomen is frequently
reddish.

The oohreous clothing of the prothorax is confined to the
sides (where it is directed towards the middle) and a spot at
the middle of the base, the derm elsewhere being apparently
glabrous ; but really with sparse clothing of similar colour to
the derm. On the elytra the clothing of the suture at the base
is nearly always white, and there is usually a distinct T of
white or pale clothing towards the apex, of which the cross
piece is about the summit of the posterior declivity, and ex-
tends to the fourth interstice on each side ; at the junction of
the fourth and sixth interstices there is also a pale spot, but
these are occasionally joined to the head of the T and of the
arpex. There is usually a pale spot on the fourth interstice
at its basal third ; elsewhere the clothing more or less ap-
proximates in colour to the derm. On the under-surface the
clothing is shorter and more or less white. Tlie head is densely
clothed between the eyes.

195. Be/u\' rubicundus, Lea.

In this species the tibiae have a finely granulated external
ridge. The apex of the elytra appears to be subject to vaa'ia-
tion, as in some specimens it is more produced than in others ;
but in all before me the sides at the apex are flattened, and
the suture raised, the convex space between being, as it were,
divided off by two impressed lines. In some specimens, usually
males, the head amd rostrum behind antennae are almost or
quite black, and all the tarsi are subject to infuscation. In
some specimens a faint line of pale hairs can be traced in the
median prothoracio line.

The species was described from Western Australia;, but
occurs also in King Island, Victoria and Tasmania.

196. Pachyiira dennestiventris^ J>oi.

197. Auletes pallipes^ Lea, var. kinoi^ n. var.

A specimen from the island, and two others from Tasmania,
differ from the type of pallipes in having the punctures of the

180 Arthur M. Lea:

head smaller, and those of the elytra smaller and less uniform;
the suture is more distinctly infuscate (in the type it is just
perceptibly darker than its surroundings) and the second joint
of the antennae is certainly shorter thian the first.

On examining the type I find that from some directions the
second joint of the antennae appears to be really slightly longer
than the first, but from other directions it appears to be
slightly shorter, nor can I satisfy myself whether it is longer,
shorter, or of equal length. Its clawB are black (as are also
those of the variety), and the base of its rostrum is longitu-
dinally impressed (also as in the variety).

198. Auletes cakeatus^ Pasc, var. insu/arts, n. var.

Two specimens from the island represent a variety of this
species, which^ is readily distinguished by a circular fringe of
whitish hairs near the scutellum. The variety differs from the
typical form by having an infuscate prothoraoic fascia, the
femora entirely pale, and the tip only of the aoatennae infuscate.
In one specimen the apical half of the abdomen is pallid. The
punctures are as coarse as in typical specimens.

A specimen from Tasmania hajs a feeble infuscate spot only
on the prothorax and the fringe of whitish hairs rather feeble.

All three specimens have the apical two-fifths of the rostrum
(but not the extreme apex) of a rather bright red, the red nnd
black parts being sharply limited.

199. Magdalis rufimanus^ \\. sp.

cT Black, antennae and tarsi red. Upper surface with irregu-
larly distributed and usually sparse pubescence; under with
rather sparse whitish pubeecence.

Head with dense but sometimes concealed punctures. Eyes
very large and feebly separated. Rostrum stout, not half the
length of prothorax ; with dense punctures and a shallow
median groove (both sometimes concealed). Antennae stout,
scape shorter than club. Frothorar siibquadrate, apex narrower
than base, the latter feebly bisinuate, depressed and feebly
subcarinated along middle; densely punctate. Elytra sub-
cylindrical; punctate — striate; interstices with numerous

1 Ah noted in P.L.S N.S.W., 18S)8, ]>. (Vlh.

Gcleoptei^a of King Island. 1 8 1

small granules. Under surfa-ce densely punctate. Femora
stout and acutely dentate, third tarsal joint wide. Length
(excluding rostrum), 2\ — 4J mm.

? Differs in having the eyes smaller and not so close
together; the rostrum more than half the length of prothorax,
moderately curved, shining, not grooved, and with smaller and
never concealed punctures ; the antennae, especially the scape,
are also much thinner.

Also from Tasmania (Ulverstone, Hobart, Mount Wellington
and Stonor), and New South Wales (Forest Reefs, Sydney, and
ArmidaJe).

Despite the great variation in clothing and size, I believe
all the specimens before me belong to but one species. On
mamy specimens the pubescence of the upper surface is con-
fined to the angles of the prothorax, and the space between
the eye&, with a little at the base of the elytra, and a little
beyond their middle; it is golden as a rule, but sometimes
whitish. On many others, however, the head behind the eyes
and the rostrum behind the antennae are fadrly densely
clothed as well, and the pubescence extends over most of the
prothorax (generally with such specimens most of it being red-
dish) with linear spots (frequently placed in two irregularly
transverse series) on the middle third of the elytra. On some
large specimens in addition to the two irregular transverse
series of spots, the suture amd base of elytra have reddish (or
whitish) pubescence and similar pubescence is scattered about
on most of the interstices. The club is sometimes black or
infuscate, and occasionally the scape as well. On one of the
King Island specimens the knees and tibiae as well as the tarsi
are red, and the elytral pubescence is fairly dense and mostly
red, but with two pale conjoined ellipses about the middle.
On some of the largest specimens the prothorax has a distinct
but very narrow carina, on most of the others the median line
appears to be more or less cicatrised. The scape of the male
is fully twice as thick as thait of the female.

200. Laemosacais queruhis^ Pasc.

201. Haplonyx nigrirostriSy Cliev.

202. H. kirbyi, Fhs.

182 Arthur M, Lea :

Brachyporoptepus, n. g.

Head of moderate size, partially concealed ; forehead sinuous.
Eyes ovate, widely separated, moderately faceted. Rostrum
moderately long and moderately curved, a shallow groove on
each side above scrobe. Antennae moderately thin or rather
stout ; scape inserted nearer apex than base of rostrum, shorter
than funicle ; two basal joints of the latter elongate ; club
ovate. Prothorax transverse, sides rounded ; ocular lobes
obtuse. Scutellum absent. Elytra subovate*. Pectoral canal
rather narrow and deep, terminated between intermediate
coxae. Meso-sternal receptacle scarcely raised, walls equal
throughout, emargination V-shaped ; slightly cavernous. Metas-
ternum very short; episterna not traceable. Abdomen rather
large, sutures distinct; two basal segments large; first as long
as second and third combined, suture incurved at apex, inter-
cox a 1 process of moderate width ; third and fourth combined,
slightly shorter than second or fifth. Legs not very long; pos-
terior coxae not touching elytra; femorai slightly thickened,
not grooved, edentate, posterior not extending to apex of
elytra ; tibiae scarcely compressed, bisinuate beneath ; tarsi
rather short and sparsely clothed ; third joint wide and deeply
bilobed, fourth elongate. Elliptic, strongly convex, squamose,
tuberculate, ajpterous.

The very short metasternum and sinuated forehead are
sufficient to denote that the genus belongs to the Poropterus
group, and although the short deep form is at variance with
Poropterus itself, it would probably have been referred to as
an aben-aoit species of that genus had I not a species^ in which
its si>ecial features are still more pronounced. From Porop-
terus the scarcely raised iiiesosternal receptacle, shaped much
like the half of a ring instead of strongly elevated will reiidily
distinguish it ; the claw joint is also longer than in Poropterus,
and the claws are less separated.

203. Brachy poropterus apicigriseus^ n, sp.

Black, antennae, tarsi and tibial hooks dull red. Densely
clothed with dark muddy brown scales, in places variegated
with grey.

1 Venni<-iilatU8, uwaiting desoriptioii in m.v revision of the Australian Cr}'P*<>*"h.vnfhlden.

Coleoptera of King Island. 183

Head at extreme base with dense and not concealed punc-
tures, these concealed elsewhere. Rostrum rart^her stout, shorter
than prothorax, sides feebly incun^ed to middle : with dense
punctures, concealed on basal third in female, (>n basal two-
thirds in male. Antennae moderately stout ; scape inserted two-
fifths from apex of rostrum, the length of five followinp: joints ;
first joint of funicle stouter and somewhat longer than second.
Prothorax convex, not much wider than lonpr, base almost
truncate, sides strongly rounded, apical third strongly diminish-
ing in width, with feeble tubercular elevations across the
middle; with a short feeble concealed median carina. Elytra
not twice the length of prothorax, and a very little wider, about
once and one-half the length of greatest depth ; with rows of
large, round but partially concealed (less so on sides than on
disc) punctures or foveae, somewhat interrupted by interstices ;
these usually narrower than punctures but subtuberculate in
places ; a small shining granule on each side of suture ait base ;
apex trisinuate. Punctures of under surface entirely c )ncealed,
but second segment of abdomen shallowly transversely im-
pn*es8ed. Legs rather short and stout, fourth joint distinctly
longer than first, claws feebly separated. Length, 5 — 6i mm.

The male has the rostrum shorter and stouter than in the
female, clothed to a greater exteht, and with the antennae
inserted rather nearer the apex.

On the elytra the posterior declivity has the scales more
grey than brown, and at the basal third there are also some
obscure greyish spots; there is usually an obscure pale stripe
along the middle of the prothorax and a similar one on the
abdomen. There are also obscure greyish rings on the legs.
In addition to the ordinary scales there are some stouter setose
ones, rather more numerous on the abdomen and legs than else-
where, but causing a fasciculate appearance on the prothora<;ic
and elytral tubercular elevations. The elevaitions on the pro-
thorax are very obtuse, and appear to be placed in two or three
feeble transverse series, but the individual tubercles themselves
are often obliquely placed. On each elytron there is a larger
{but still obtuse) tubercle than elsewhere on the third inter-
stice, and a somewhat smaller one on the fifth, forming (on
both elytra) a transverse series of four at the summit of the

184 Arthur M. Lea:

posterior declivity; this is rather abrupt and thickly studded
with small tubercles, the largest of which are almost apical;
there are other obtuse tubercles on the third, fifth and seventh
interstices. Most of the specimens before me are encrusted with
mud.

204. Poropterus rubeter, Erich s. {Acailes rubetra^ Erichs).

Referred by Erichson to Acailes,^ but belongs to the group
of Poropterus represented by such species as exitiosus and
bisignatus ; although in its deeply sulcate basal seigments of
abdomen 2 it is unique in the genus. There is usually a Ennall
shining tubercle on each side of the scutellar region, and the
elytra when abraded aippear to be vermiculate-tuberculate. The
derm obliquely behind the shoulders is occasionally diluted with
red. The two spots on each side of the head and the four
luteous spots placed transversely on the pro thorax are usually
indistinct ; and the median line is so faint as to be practically
invisible. The apex of the prothorax appears to be feebly bifid,
but this is due almost solely to the clothing.

The male has the rostrum stouter than in the female, with
denser and coarser punctures, and has scales almost to the
antennae instead of at the base only.

Specimens are to be taken under logs, or crawling over them
at night time. I have specimens from Frankford, Ulverstone,
Wilmot and Stanley in Tasmania, as well as from King Island,
and have seen the type.

205. P, conifer, Boh.

206. P. succisus, Er.

207. Microporopterus tumulosus, Pasc.

Roptoperus, n. g.

Head moderately large, not concealed. Eyes ovate, widely
separated, coarsely faceted. Rostrum raither short and wide,
feebly curved. Antennae moderately stout ; scape inserted
closer to base than apex of rostrum and much shorter than
funicle ; two basal joints of funicle elongate ; club ovate, much
wider than funicle. Prothorax slightly longer than wide, or

1. Pascoe thought it belonged to Paleticus.

2. A character overlooked by Erichson, but commented upon by Blaokburn.

Coleoptera of King Island, 185

slightly wider than long, base bisinuate, constriction feeble,
ocular lobes subabtuse. Scufellum not traceable. Elytra
elongate-ovate, considerably wider than and about twice the
length of prothorax. Pectoral canal deep and wide, terminated
between front part of middle coxae. Me^osternal receptacle
feebly raised in front, about once and one^half as wide as long,
emargination semicircular ; cavernous. Metasternum modearately
long but much shorter than the following segment; episterna
narrow, but distinct throughout. Abdomen large, sutures dis-
tinct and deep except that between first and second segments ;
first as long as second and third combined, intercoxal process
wide; third and fourth narrow, but with deep and wide sutures,
the distance between second and fifth equal in length to that
of either. Legs of moderate length ; femora stout, not grooved,
edentate, posterior terminated before apex of abdomen ; tibiae
feebly compressed and feebly bisinuate beneath, in addition to
the terminal hook with a small subapical tooth; tarsi shining,
thin but not very long, third joint feebly bilobed and very little
wider than second, fourth elongate. Elliptic ^ moderately con-
vex, squamose, fasciculate, apterous.

This genus appears to be intermediate in position between
the Chaetectetorus and Poropterus groups, but it may be placed
with the latter on account of the head being depressed at the

base in all the species, -^^ and on account of the narrow glabrous
tarsi — so suggestive of affinity with Methidrysis. The suture

between the first and second abdominal segments is deep and

distinct at the sides, but (unless the clothing be removed) not

traceable across the middle.

208. Roptoperus iasmaniensis^ n. sp.

Dark brown, antennae and tarsi of a rather pale red. Very
densely clothed with rather dingy fawn coloured scales ; with
stouter scales rather thickly scattered about and forming ten
fascicles on the prothorax and about twenty on the elytra;
femora and tibiae with indistinct pale rings and with rather
numel'ous elongate scales.

Head slightly convex, base depressed ; punctures concealed.
Rostrum the length of prothorax, slightly longer in female than

1. Two others are known to me in a<l(lition to the one described below.

186 Arthur M. Lea:

in male; basal third with coarse concealed punctures, apical
two-thirds polished and lightly punctate. Funicle with the first
joint slightly longer than second, the others about as long a3
wide. Prothorax slightly longer than wide, obcordate ; with
dense round concealed punctures ; very feebly elevated beneath
fascicles. Elytra about once- and one-third the width of and fully
twice the length of prothorax ; with series of large, but almost
entirely concealed punctures, subtuberculate beneath fascicles.
Abdomen with dense and minute punctures ; the two basal seg-
ments with moderately large round ones (two rows of similar
punctures on the metastemum); third and fourth each with a
row of rather smadl ones; all punctures entirely concealed, but
the larger ones seta-bearing. Posterior femora extending to
penultimate segment. Length 4 mm.

Also occurs in many places in Tasmania.

The fascicles on the prothorax consist of two series of four
each : one across middle, the other at base (the Jatter often in-
distinct) and a rather feeble one on each side of apex ; the elytral
fascicles may all be of a more or less decided fawn, or some of
them may be decidedly sooty; there is nearly always a large
fascicle on each side at summit of posterior declivity, and
usually there is a pateh of greyish scales on each side of middle.
In the female rather less of the base of the rostrum is clothed
than in the male. Specimens are not uncommon under logs and
stones, and may often be taken craiwling over logs and fences at
night.

209. Hexymus australis, Boi.

{Crypiorhynchus atistralis, }^{}\.; Crypiorhynchus solidus^ Er.*;

Hexymus subplaiiatus^ Lea.)

Dr. BoisduvaFs description is quite worthless for the identifica-
tion of this species, but I have examined his type (now in the
Brussels Museum), and it is certainly a Hexymus^ and the species
described by Erichson as Vryptnrhyiichus solulus - and by my-
self as^ Hexymus suhjjhuiatHs.

1 Wiegin. Arch., 1842, p. 205 (omitted from Master's Catalotfue).

2 I have examined a upecimen from the Berlin Museum marked ''Cryptorhynehus
solidus, Er.; Type 3i>937." It ib, however, probably the specimen of which Erichson foAH
** Variat corpore toto fusco-squamoso." But, except for the colours of its scales and that
the rostrum is almost entirely black, it afirrces with his description.

3 From a greatly abraded specimen.

Coleoptera of King Island. 187

The species is variable in the colour of its clothinir, and also
of its rostrum. &ichson described the rostrum as rnfr,, but
in most specimens it is reddish at the tip only. On tlie
prothorax there are usually eight fascicles placed in two trans-
▼erae series, but they are not alwa}'^ clearly defined, and often
appear as if but four in number. When perfectly fresh the
prothoracio carina is usually covered vnth scales, although
Always distinctly traceable. On the elytra there are usually four
{but sometimes only two or three) shininjj: <rranule« on e4K'h
side of the suture about the middla

I have specimens from New South Wales (Nepean Kiver and
Burrawang) and Tasmania, as well as from King Island.

210. Dccilaus major, n. sp.

Black: antennae and tarsi reddish. Densely clothed with
soft, pale brown scales ; on the elytra variegated with spot« (^f
paler and darker scales.

Head with sculpture entirely concealed. Rostrum with dense
punctures. Antennae inserted about one-third from apex of
rostrum in male, two-tifths in female; scape the length of five
basal joints of funicle; of these the first is as long as the
third and fourth combined and slightly longer than the second.
Prothorax about once and one-half as wide as long, sides
strongly diminishing in width from near base to apex ; with
•dense, fairly large, round punctures, uniform in size except at
apex. Elytra with outline almost continuous with that of pro-
thorax; with rows of large somewhat rounded, but almos^t en-
tirely concealed punctures ; each interstice with a^ row of round,
shining and very conspicuous granules. Abdomen with dense
«nd fairly large punctures on two basal segments ; the second
not much shorter than first along the middle, licngth, 7-9
mm.

The scales on the prothorax are stout, each is set in a
puncture and rises aibove the derm ; on the elytra the scales
Are smaller and denser than on the prothorax. except for a row
of semidecumbent and rather pale ones on each interstice. On
the elytra there are usually numerous small and somewhat sooty
spots scattered about, with a few pale spots in places. On
«ome the scales are almost uniform in colour, but on many a

~\

1 88 Arthur M. Lea :

faint pale V can be traced, oommencing on each shoulder and
directed towards the sutural third; immediately behind the
V is ' a large, irregular, indistinct dark triangle on each side.
The V and the triamgles are never sharply defined. The male
has the rostrum clothed more than half way to the antennae;
whilst in the female the scales are confined to the base. The
species is the largest known of its genus.

211. Decilaus sobrinus^ n. sp.

Black, antennae and tarsi reddish,, tibiae somewhat darker.
Sparsely clothed with whitish scales, becoming pale brown in
places ; each elytron with a distinct and fairly large pale spot
near the apex.

Head with dense and moderately coarse punctures, becoming
smaller posteriorly. Rostrum with crowded punctures, de-
cidedly coarser than on head. Scape inserted one-third from
apex of rostrum, not much shorter than funiole; first joint of
the latter distinctly longer than second; club apparently con-
tinuous with funicle. Prothorax about once amd one>-third a»
wide as long, sides strongly diminishing to apex on apical half
only.; with dense, round and fairly coarse punctures, decreasing
in size to apex. Elytra widest near base ; with rows of large^
round punctures; interstices convex, each with a row of small
and distinct, but seldom conspicuous granules. Abdomen with
fairly numerous and moderately large punctures on two basal
segments, suture between these almost obliterated an middle.
Tibiae with fine carinae partially concealing rows of punctures.
Length, 4 — 4 J mm.

Also from Victor iaj.

An obscure species close to perditus, but much more sparsely
clothed, prothorax narrower and with larger punctures, abdo-
men with larger and sparser punctures, the elytral interstices
feebly granulated and more convex. The abdominal punc-
tures are smaller amd more numerous than in memnonius, and
those on the prothorax are smaller, denser and shallower.

212. Decilaus mix i us, ii. sp.

Black or piceous-brown ; elytra sometimes paler than pro-
thorax ; antennae and tarsi reddish. Densely clothed with soft
scales varying from snowy white to sooty.

Goleopteixt of Kituj Island, 189

Head with dense aoid fairly large, but quite concealed puiic-
turee. Rostrum with crowded and fairly large, but more or less
ooQoealed punctures. Scape inserted almost in exact middle of
side of rostrum, less than half the length of funicle and club
combined -, two basal joints of funicle elongate and equal in
length. Prothorax about once and one-third as wide ais long,
strongly diminishing in width from near base to apex ; with
dense, large, round, deep puncturee. Elytra with outline almost
continuous with that of prothoraix ; with rows of large, scarcely
rounded punotures, only partially concealed by clothing.
Abdomen with dense, partially ooncealed aaid (for the genus)
rather small punctures; second segment not much shorter thau
first along the middle, it« suture with that segment very dis-
tinct throughout. Length, 4^ — 6^ mm.

On the prothorax the scales are stout and each arises from a
puncture. On the elytra the scales are smaller and uniform in
size, aoid mostly sooty brown, but with numerous irregularly
defined spots or patches of pale brown or ochreous, and with
snowy white scales scattered singly or in small spots, causing a
speckled appearance. On the prothorax the scales also vary in
oolour, but they are not condensed into spot«. On the under
surface the white scales are absent, but there are a few on the
legs. Where the clothing has been abraded minute «i:ranules can
sometimes be found on the elytra, but they are quite concealed
by the clothing ; the derm, both there and on the prothorax,
appears to be very finely wrinkled.

In general appearance somewhat close to apicatus, but the
scales much smaller and the punctures totally different. vat us
has much denser clothing, and its sculpture is very different.
Coryssopus is more densely and differently clothed, and has
armed femora; from squamipennis it dift'ers in being larger,
punctures of prothoraix more concealed by the scales (which are
individually larger) and by its unarmed femora. From all the
other described species it is very distinct.

213. Decilaus mollis^ n. sp.

Black or blackish brown, elytra reddish brown, rostrum
antennae and tarsi paler. Densely clothed \nth large so it
scales; interspersed with numerous stout suberect setae.

190 Arthv/i* M. Lea:

Rostrum wide, feebly curved, shining; with numerous small
punctures. Scape stout, inserted almost in exact middle of side
of rostrum, much shorter than funiole. Prothorax not much
wider than long, sides strongly rounded, apex lees than half the
width of base; with dense, large, round, concealed punctures.
Elytra subcordate, base almost truncate, rather strongly in-
flated near base and then strongly diminishing in width to near
aipex; with rows of large, round, concealed punctures; inter-
stices rather strongly and almost equally convex. Abdomen
with large, partially concealed punctures. Length, If - 2J mm.

The clothing is so dense that the derm is almost everywhere
concealed, and the elytra appear to be finely striated only. The
scales, however, are absent from all but the base of the rostrum.
The scales on the prothorax and abdomen are larger than else-
where, but on the prothorax they are wider and more closely
applied to the derm than on the abdomen. Most of the scales
are of a pale muddy grey, but on each elytron there is usually
an irregular triangle of black scales, the base of which is on the
side, and the apex nearly touching the suture about its middle;
but the triangle is sometimes broken up into small and irregular
si>ots, or appears m an irregular fascia. There are usually some
snowy white scales on the elytra. The legs are usually feebly
annulated. On the elytra the darker setae usually form two
loose fascicles on the third interstice — one near the base, the
other- median. I have a pair taken in cop., but cannot detect
any sexual differences, apart from a thickening of the male
femora.

Nearer nocti vagus than any other described species, but
smaller, with more variegated clothing, and which on the under
surface is sparser ; the scape shorter, stouter and more median,
and the mesostemal receptacle less raised and thinner.

214. Decilaus auricomus, Lea., var. insularis^ n. var.

A single specimen from the island evidently represents a
variety of this species ; it differs from the types in having the
body (but not the appendages) entirely black ; the clothing is
more variegated, and on the elytra the scales are distinctly
less rounded ; this latter character would probably have been

CoLeoptera of King Island. 191

regarded as of speoifio importance, but tliat the clothing of the
abdomen is of the same remarkable nature as in the types.

215. Decilaiis acerosus^ Er.

Referred by Erichson to Acalles, but belongs to this genus. It
is a common species near the coast, both on King Island and
Tasmania).

216. Achopera subuiosa, n. sp.

Black or blaekish-brown, antennae and tarsi reddish. Very
densely clothed with large, soft, round scales, closely applied to
the derm ; sides of prothorax, alternate interstices of elytra and
under surface with larger semidecumbent and not rounded
scales, usually fawn-coloured ; legs with setose scales and setae.

Antennae short, inserted almost in exact middle of sides of
rostrum ; scape very stout, not much more than half the length
of funicle ; the latter with first joint longer ami f?i outer than
second, third to seventh transverse. Prothorax apparently as
long as wide, but really slightly transverse, base bi sinuate.
Elytra conjointly trisinuate at base, apparently lightly striate.
Length, 4 — 5 mm.

Also from Tasmania (Hobart and Ulverstone).

The derm and punctures (except sometimes that some of those
in the elytral striae can be traced) are entirely concealed before
abrasion. The scales are mostly of ai pale fawn colour, but more
or less mottled with white or whitish and pal© brown, dark
brown and blackish scales. There is usually a whitish some-
what oblique spot on each elytron about the basal third on the
fourth interstice (usuadly also extending to the third and fifth),
and a sooty spot on each side of the base of the prothorax. The
ordinary scales of the abdomen are much darker along the
middle than on tho sides. On the legs faint traces of rings are
usually to be seen.

On abra-sion the head is seen to be densely covered with small
round punctures, becoming smaller on the rostrum (on the ros-
trum of the femaile they are normally exposed except at the base,
whilst in the male they are exposed only towards the apex). On
the prothorax they are equailly as dense and rather larger. The
punctures in the elytral striae are large and close together; the

192 Arthur M. Lea:

interstices are gently and regularly convex, wider than the
striae and closely covered with small punctures. The punctures
of the under surface are rather smaller tham on the prothorax,
but the abdomen has a few larger ones scattered about. In the
male the abdomen and metastemum are conjointly widely and
shallowly concave, but convex in the female.

In some respect* close to laohrymosa, but larger, stouter,
more convex, with paler clothing, the larger scales of the elytra
always confined to the alternate interstices and almost in-
variably pale (those of laichrymosa being frequently dark) ; the
punctures of the abdomen larger (except that the larger ones
are smaller than the larger ones of lachrymosa), base of elytra
less strongly trisinuate, femora stouter and the setose clothing
of the legs more pronounced. It is also a beach frequenting
species, whilst lachrymosa is common on rotting logs. As in
other species of the genus many specimens rapidly become
greasy, when the appearance of the scales is considerably altered.

217. Ephrycus parvus^ n. sp.

Brownish red ; antennae and tarsi paler, but derm usually
concealed. Upper surface with dense scales, varying from dingy
white to sooty-black; scutellum with white scales; under sur-
face and legs with sparser scales than on upper surface, the
scales mostly white; basal third of rostrum squamose. Pro-
thorax with eight fascicles : two at apex, two at base, and four
across middle, the two apical and two mediolateral usually com-
posed of reddish-brown scales, the others of blackish scales ;
each elytron with about six fascicles, and with scattered erect
scales.

Rostrum feebly curved, slightly increasing in width to apex,
apical two-thirds finely punctate. Scape stout, inserted nearer
base than apex of rostrum, half the length of funicle and club
combined. Prothorojc gently convex ; punctures entirely con-
cealed ; ajpex more than half the width of base. Elytra about
once and one-third the width of prothorax, shoulders strongly
rounded ; striate punctate, striae distinct, but punctures con-
cealed. Under surface with moderately dense and strong but
partially concealed punctures. Leys rather long; femora
edentate. Length, 1 5-6 — 2 mm.

Coleopte7'a of King Inland, 1U3

Also from Tasmania (Hobart, Bruni Island and Hiion River).

The fascicles of the prothorax are sometimes very ill-defined ;
on the elytra there is usually a more or less distinct patch of
reddish scales on the suture, behind the scutellum. The species
is the smalleet of the Chaeteotetorus group known to me.

218. Menios sordidatus^ n. sp.

Red, but colour (except of rostrum and antennae) concealed ;
rostrum shining towards apex. Densely clothed with soft slaty-
brown scales; under surface and femora with dinjrv whitish
scales. Prothorax with six fascicles : two at apex and four
across middle; suture, third and fifth interstices with rather
numerous small fascicles.

Head depressed between eyes. Rostrum straight, sides feebly
incurved to middle; apical half feebly punctured. Scape in-
serted almost in exact middle of side of rostrum. Vrothorar
moderately transverse, apex much narrower than base, sides
rounded and increasing in width to base, base bisinuate; with
dense but concealed punctures. Elytra closely applied to pro-
thorax and very little wider, base trisinuate ; striate-punctate,
striae distinct, but punctures almost concealed, third and fifth
interstices feebly elevated towards base ; preapical callus scarcely
traceable. Under surface with dense concealed punctures.
Femora moderately strongly and equally dentate, the front pair
from some directions apparently edentate. Length, 4 — 4i mm.

Also from W. Australia (Albany) and New South Wales
{Sydney).

On one of the specimens there are a few obscure whitish spots
on the elytra.

219. Phlaoglymma mixta^ n. sp.

Dark reddish-bro^vn, in places becoming black ; antennae (club
excepted) and claws reddish. Densely clothed with scales vary-
ing from white to black, and forming feeble fascicles in places.

Hexid with dense concealed punctures. Rostrum rather wide
and lightly curved, slightly shorter than prothorax ; with dense
punctures, concealed on basal third in male, on basal fourth in
female. Antennae inserted nearer base than apex of rostrum,
scape about half the length of funicle and club combined ; two

194 Arth\i/t^ M. Lea:

basal jr>ints of funicle the length of four following combined,
third to seventh transverse. Prothorax about once and one-
third as wide as long, apex much narrower than bsfie; with
dense and fairly large, but quite concealed punctures. Scutellum
small but distinct. Elytra elongate-mibcordate, shoulders feebly
produced : with rows of large, more or less concealed punctures,
in feeble striae ; interstices with dense, concealed punctures, and
subtuberculate beneath fascicles. Under surface with dense
more or less concealed punctures. Femora acutely dentate;
tibiae angular at external base. Length 5^ — 6J mm.

The clothing is so dense as to entirely conceal the derm. On
the head and base of r<» strum the scales are mostly pale ochreous
with numerous black scales interspersed; on the prothorax the
scales are somewhat similar, but wider, and there is usually a
pale median line, on each side of the apex of which is a feeble
black fascicle. On each elytron there is a pale (sometimes
almost white) oblique stripe from in line with the shoulder to
near the suture at about the middle, but touching neither suture
nor shoulder (the two to the naked eye appearing like a feeble
V) ; parallel mth this and about half way betweem it and apex
are traces of another feeble stripe, and there is us-ually a small
whitish spot close to apex. There are feeble black fascicles on
the second and fourth (and sometimes on the sixth) interstices
about the middle, on the third and fifth near the base, and a
few still more feeble ones elsewhere. The clothing of the under
surface and legs is paler than elsewhere, amd the black scales
are entirely absent.

In shape it closely resembles alternams, but is considerably
larger, with denser clothing (without lineate arrangement of
colours except the very indistinct median line of prothorax),
and with the rostrum decidedly shorter and wider.

MJcrocryptorhynchus, n. g.

Head large, invisible frcmi above. Eyes small, ovate, widely
separated, coarsely faceted. Rostrum short, stout amd almost
straight. Antennae rather stout; scape inserted at about the
middle of rostrum, shorter than funicle; two basal joints of
funicle elongate; club subcontinuous with funicle. Prothorax
longer than wide, sides slightly rounded, base and apex almost

Coleopleni oj Kinfj Island. 195

equal in width, ocular lobes obtuse. Scutellum not traceable.
Elytra slightly wider than prothorax, oblong-elliptic. Pectoral
canal deep and wide, terminated between intermediate coxae.
Mesosternal receptacle scarcely raised, emargination semi-circu-
lar; cavernous. Metasterniati slightly shorter than the follow-
ing segment; episterna not traceable. Abdomen moderately
large, two basal segments large, the three apical depressed.
Legs moderately long: ; femora not grooved or dentate, pos-
terior not extending to apex of abdomen; tibiae stout, almost
straight; tarsi short, 3rd joint wide and deeply bilobed, 4th
elongajte. Subcylindrical, elongate, squamose, apterous.

In addition to the species described below, two others are
known to me. I do not know amy closely allied genus and its
position in the Cryptorhynchides is very uncertain. For the
present it may be placed at the end of the allies of Poropterus,
although the appearance of the head and rostrum is not unlike
many of the allies of Chaetectetorus.

220. Microcrvptorhynchus pygmaeiis^ n. sp.

Dull red or brownish red. Densely clothed with muddy
scales : and with numerous semierect setaie scattered about.

Mead with rather coarse but concealed punctures. Rostrum
with distinct punctures on apical half in female, on apical third
in male ; elsewhere concealed. Prothorax very little wider than
long, sides moderately rounded, apex about two-thirds the width
of base ; with dense and coarse but concealed punctures.
Elytra elongate-cordate, gently elevated to about the middle,
thence strongly rounded to apex ; with rows of large concealed
punctures, interstices as wide as and slightly narrower than
punctures, the alternate ones distinctly raised. Two basal seg-
ments of abdomen with dense, large, concealed punctures.
Length, 1^ — IJ mm.

Tht smallest Australian species of the sub-faimily as yet
described. Before abrasion the sculpture is almost entirely con-
ceal^. The derm is sometimes of a dingy brown, especially in
the males. The scales are always muddy looking, and not in-
dividually traceable. The setae are stout and more or less
erect, but not long, but longer on the elytra than on the
prothorax; they are nowhere condensed into fascicles. Both

196 Arthur M. Lett:

scales and setae api>ear to be ©asily abraded, and specimens are
usually very dirty when obtained. The sexe« are readily dis-
tinguished by the clothing of the rostrum.

Two specimens from Tasmania (Mount Wellington) may repre-
sent a variety; they differ in beinj? almost black except for the
antennae, tarsi, and part of the rostrum.

Wiburdia, n. g.

Head rather large. Eyes rather small, distant, finely
faceted. Rostrum rather short, stout, feebly curved ; sorobes
considerably widened posteriorly and partially visible from
above. Antennae rather stout, submedian ; first joint of funicle
moderately long, the seventh widely transverse and apparently
forming portion of club. Prothorax transverse, apex narrow and
subtubular, base bisinuate, ocular lobes almost rectangular.
Scutellum distinct. Elytra subcylindrical, base trisinuate.
Pectoral canal deep and wide, terminated before middle coxae.
Mesosternal receptacle thick, not raised and slightly concave.
Metastemum elongate. Abdomen with all sutures distinct.
Femora edentaite,^ not grooved ; tibiae with subapical tooth as
well as with terminal hook ; third tarsal joint wide, deeply
bilobed, fourth elonjjate. Winfred.

In general appearance resembling Metyrus and the genus to
which Crypt orhynchus sirius, Eir. belongs, but with the me»os-
ternal receptacle' totally different to any of the allies of
Chaetectetorus and somewhat resembling that organ in Therebus,
and some of the other allies of Psepholax : for the present, how-
ever, it may be placed near Metyrus. The seventh joint of the
funicle, although apparently belonging to the club, ha;s clothing
as the rest of the funicle. The genus is named after Mr. J.
C. Wiburd, of Jenolan Caves, from whom specimens of the
only known species were first received.

221. Wiburdia scrohicnlata^ n. sp.
Black or piceous-black, in places obscurely diluted with red ;
antennae claws and tibial hooks (and sometimes parts of the

1. On em^h of the feinoru there is a feeble ridge on the under surface, and this ridge
being rather suddenly terminated, causes an appearance of a very small and obtuse tooth.

2. When looked at from a))Ove the receptacle appears to be solid, but when viewed in a
good light along the canal, or if probed with a pin, it is seen to be slightly cavernous,
although not of the usual vaulted character.

Coleoptera of King Island. 197

femora and tibiae) dull red. Rather densely clothed with soft,
dingy brown scales, but in plaees varying to black and to a pale
brown ; and paler on the under surface, legs, head and roatrum
than elsewhere. Prothorax with seven feeble fascicles ; elytra
with very feeble fascicles.

Head rather strongly convex, with dense but usually con-
cealed punctures. Rostrum increasing in width from base to
near apex ; with dense punctures, which, towards base, are
usually concealed ; more than half the length of scrobes visible
from above. Prothorax feebly transverse, apex rather sud-
denly narrowed and subtubular, sides subparallel towards base,
base strongly bisinuate, scarcely tuberculate beneath fascicles,
but with a very short median (and ujgpually concealed) carina;
with small, dense, round, concealed punctures. Elytra slightly
wider than prot-horax, parallel-sided to near ajpex, shoulders
feeWy produced; with rather large suboblong punctures, in
rather feeble striae ; interstices wide, scarcely separately convex ;
with dense punctures and small granules, but both usually con-
cealed. Under surface with dense but partially concealed punc-
tuiee ; metastemal epistemum with a single irregular row of
punctures. Abdomen with second segment slightly shorter thaaa
first, third and fourth fairly large, but their combined length
slightly less than that of seco-nd or fifth. Legs not very long ;
bind femora almost extending to apex of abdomen. Length,
8 — 11^ mm.

Also from Victoria (Warragul) and New South Wales (Jenolan).

Of the prothoracio fascicles there are two ait the apex and
five across the middle, but they are all feeble and easily abraded,
and the median one is often so feeble that it would probably
be best not to regard it as a fascicle ait all. The elytra in
several specimens appear to be totally without fascicles, but in
others numerous very feeble ones are present, unless indeed
they should be regarded as small spots of darker scales. On the
specimen from Warragul there are numerous feeble pale spots
transversely arranged on the elytra, but with four more dis-
tinct at the summit of the posterior declivity. The specimens
from the island are rather wider and the clothing slightly more
mottled than on mainland ones.

1 98 Arthur M. Lea : ^

222. Ampagia femoralis^ Er.

Referred by Erichson to Cryptorhynchus, but belongs to
Ampa^a. It is a common species near the coast, both on King
Island and Tasmania-

Con Ionia, u. g.

Head convex. Eyes small, distant, coarsely faxjeted. Rostrum
about half the width of apex of prothoraa and much shorter
than that segment, distinctly curved. Antennae inserted alwut
the middle of rostrum, rather thin ; scape passing eyes, rather
suddenly curved and thickened at apex ; funiole five jointed ;
club briefly ovaite. Prothorax convex, base distinctly wider
than apex, with very feeble ocular lobes. Soutellum absent.
Elytra elongate-elliptic, base truncate, apex widely rounded.
Metastemum elongate. Abdomen with two basal segments elon-
gate; suture between first and second indistinct at sides, in-
visible across middle, third and fourth short, with deep and
wide sutures. Femora moderately stout, edentate; tibiae rather
thin, almost straight, terminated by a strong curved hook;
tarsi not very wide, third joint rather feebly bilobed, fourth
somewhat shorter than three preceding combined. Apterous.

Belongs to the sub-family Cossonides, and in Wolliwton's
table of that sub-family would be placed in III. bbb. Four
genera of that sub-family having the funicle five-jointed have
been recorded as Australian. Of these Halorhynchus is blind.
Pentarthrura and Cossonideus have the scutellum conspicuous,
whilst Pentamimus has the rostrum very much shorter and
wider. In Australian catalogues the genus should be placed
close to Pent art brum. In the species described below each eye
is composed of about fifteen facet-s.

223. Coulonia litoralis^ n. sp.

Black or dark brown, appendages reddish. Glabrous.

Head smooth and iuipunctate, ocular fovea minute. Ros-
trum parallel-sided, about two-thirds the length of prothorax,
with fajirly numerous and small but distinct punctures. Fro-
thorax apparently longer than wide, sides increasing in width to
near base, and then strongly lessened, with small and sparse
but distinct punctures. Elytra not twice the length of, and

Coleoptera of King Island. \W

slightly narrower than prothorax, parallel-sided t(» ])ey(»nd the
middle, extreme base slightly raised a*nd slightly rugose; with
almost regular series of small punctures, and with very feeble
traces of striation. Under surface with small and sparse
punctures, larger on meso and metasternum than elsewliere.
Length (including rostrum), 1^ — 3 mm.

Fairly common under drift wood on l>eaches ; and occurs in
similar situations in Tasmania (Sorell, Hobart and Nubeena).

The difference in size and appearance of some of the speci-
mens is very great, but I am satisfied that they all belong to
but one species. The larger specimens are nearly always black.
whilst the smaller ones are often of a deep reddish brown ; occa-
sionally the prothorax only is reddish-brown, or its sides and
the sides of the elytra may be so coloured.

224. Pentainhnus canaliculatus^ Woll.

225. Pentarthrum nigrum^ Woll.

Anturibidae.
226. Epargemus tridens^ n. sp.

Black, the legs and antennae in places reddish, the elytra in
places diluted with red. Densely clothed Avith short setae or
pubescence, varying from white, through various s^liades of
yellow and brown, to black, and in places forming fascicles ;
legs annulated.

Head wdth dense partially concealed punotm'es. Rostrum
strongly inflated towards the apex, with three narrow shining
carinae, of w^hich the meditm one is longer than the others;
punctures as on head. Antennae not extending to base of pro-
thorax, first joint slightly shorter than second, the combined
length of both not much greater than that of third, the others
rather strongly decreasing in length, but none transverse.
Prothorax about as long as its greatest width, which is just
behind the middle, sides strongly rounded ; towards base with
a strong sinuous carina, interrupted in its middle, and at the
sides directed obliquely forwards : with dense partially con-
cealed punctures, and with three ver}- feeble tubercles trans-
versely placed across the middle. Elytra parallel sided to near
apex, somewhat flarttened along middle: with rows of moderate

200 Arthur M. Lea:

sized, but partially concealed punctures ; third, fifth and seventh
interstices raised, the third subtuberculate and distinctly, fascic-
ulate near base, and near summit of posterior declivity ; with
few and feeble fascicles elsewhere. Under surface with dense
and partially concealed punctures, fourth abdominal segment
strongly incurved at apex ; pygidium with a strong but short
carina. Length, 10 J mm.

In many respects this species agrees with the description of
Tropideres musi^^is, but its rostrum is strongly dilated toward*
the apex (not *' apice leviter dilataitum.") Erichson also makes no
mention of the conspicuous rostral carinae, and the size he
men before me.^ At a glance it appears to be close to Entromus
gives (2J German lines) is less than that of the smallest speci-
dorsoplagiatus, but the rostrum and prothoraicic carina are very
different from those of that species.

On the basal half of the rostrum most of the pubescence is
white, and the clothing of this colour extends backwards on to
the head in the form of a trident, the outer proaags of which
margin the eyes. On the prothorax there are numerous scat-
tered spots of whitish and yellowish pubescence. The scutellaa:
clothing is entirely pale. On the elytra there is a large sub-
quadrate pale patch extending from about one-fifth fro-ni the
base to near the middle, elsewhere there are numerous spate of
variable colours. The legs are prettily variega^ted with red and
black, and with rings of black and white pubescence. Between
the district prothoracic carina and the base another but much
more feeble one can be traced, and between the«e two there are
traces of two still more feeble ones.

In addition to the type and above described specimen there
are three others before me. Of these one from Jenolan (New
South Wales) is slightly smaller (9f mm.) than the type and the
subquadrate patch of paie scales on the elytra is much smaller
and much less distinct. One from Mount Kosciusko (New South
Wales) is still smaller (8 mm.), and the patch can scarcely be

1 Since this was written I have examined the type of Tropideres musivus, Er. ; it cer>

ainly belongs to Epargemus, and in fact is very close in i4>pearanoe to the Huon BiT«r

speuinien, but is smaller, less robust and with the rostral carinae (if prMeni) quite

concealed by the clothing, the prothoracic carinae are identical. Erichson's desoriptioa

of the rostrum is misleading, as it is quite strongly dilated towards the apex.

Coleopiera of King Island. 201

traced. The last from the Huon River (Tasmania) is smaller
still (7^ mm.), the paftch is also very indistinct, the antennae
(exceptin^j: the club) are entirely pale, the legs are also pale
with the exception of the tips of the tibiae, and the prothorax
and elytra are reddish. On all four specimens the suture, near
and on the posterior declivity, is alternately marktd with black
and white spots.

227. Xynotropis micans^ Blackb.

Cerambvcidak.

228. Toxeutes arcuatus^ Fabr.

229. Enneap/iyllus aeneipennis^ Watli.

230. Phacodes ohsciirus^ Fab.
2H1. P, persona tiis^ Er.

232. Epithora dorsalis, W. 8. Macl.

233. Callidiopsis scntellaris^ Fab.

234. Gracilia py^maea^ Fab.

235. Pterostenns concolor^ W. S. M.

236. P. sutuniiis, Oliv.

237. Amphirhoe decora^ Newm.

238. Macrones purpureipes^ n. sp.

Black, in places blackish brown ; appendages with a decided
bluish or purplish gloss; elytra whitish and semi-transparent,
but with the thickened parts blackish brown; hind tarsi with
first and second joints flavous, the third dark brown, and the
fourth reddish. Under surface with dense, fine, greyish
pubescence.

Head with numerous regularly distributed punctures ; with a
deeply impressed median line from near base to near clypeus.
Antennae extending to second segment of abdomen, first joint
as long a£ three following combined, third longer than fourth,
the others regularly decreasing in length, but eleventh once and
one-half the length c)f tenth. Frotliorax longer than wide,
irregularly transversely wrinkled, with three tubercles (of which
one is lateral and the median one is very feeble) transversely
placed at the basal third, and a feeble tubercular elevation on

8

202 Arthur M. Lea :

each side of middle, at apical third. Scutellum subtriangular,
with irregular punotiires. Elytra passing ba^^e of penultimate
segment of abdomen, strongly narrowed to basal third, thence
line-like to apex; each with two punctate or granulate discal
oostae, which towards the base curve round to and become con-
joined by rugulosities on the shoulder ; sides and margins
raised ; semitramsparent portion with shallow obscure punctures.
Under surface with dense minute punctures, and dense fine
transverse impressions. Length, 30 mm.

Also from Tasmania (Hobart).

A large species second only in size to rufus. The rugose
parts at the shoulders are less in area than in that species, and
the scupture of the prothoraa is very different. In general ap-
pearance (except that it is much larger) it somewhat resembles
exilis, but the femora are not reddish at the base. I have
described a Tasmanian specimen, as the only one from King
Island before me is evidently immaiture.

239. M. siibclavatus Pasc.

240. Ancita marginicoliis^ Boi.

Chrysomblidae.

241. Cryptocephalus pallens^ Lea.

Numerous specimens obtained from Melaleuca and Leptosper-
mum scrub.

In some of the females the whole of the under surface, the head,
scutellum nind legs are pallid ; and in some males the abdomen,
except at apex, is ahiiost entirely infuscate. The second joint
of the antennae is distinctly shorter than the third; not " almost
as long," as previously described; in some specimens, however,
it is slightly longer than in others.

242. C. subfasciatus, Sautid.

243. Cadmus austral is ^ BoL

244. C co^natus^ Saund.

245. Lx>xopleurus viridis^ Sauud.

246. Lachnabothra saundersi^ Baly.

247. Tomyris viridula^ Er.

248. Paropsis acclivis^ Blackb.

Coleoptera of King Island. ^03

249. F. subfasdatiiy Clip., var. pianior, Blackb.

250. P, agricohiy Ohp.
250a. P, agrico/a, Chp., vai-.

251. P, dehilis, Chp.

252. P, fallax^ Newin.

253. P. luiea. Marsh.

254. P. obliteraia, Er.

255. P. orphana^ Er.

256. P, porosa, Er.

257. P, reticulata^ Marsh.

258. Chalcolampra hursti^ Black b

259. Arsipoda variegata, Wath. var. kingensis^

Blackb.

260. A. eruhsoni\ Baly.

261. Haltica gtavida^ Blackb.

262. XJonolepta sordidula, Black I).

Erotyllidae.

263. Thallis vinula^ Er.

COCCINKLLIDAE.

264. Lets conjormis^ 13oi.

Four specimens from the island have the markings covering
-a greater arew, than any others E have- seen, the spots on the
elytra are all more or less conjoined, find the prothoracic mark-
ings are conjoined on the basal half.

265. Halyzia mellyi^ Muls.

266. Novius cardinal is, Muls.

267. Scyjfifius corticalis, n. sp.

Black; a wide median strii>e on each elytron, tarsi, tibiae
antennae and padpi mare or less red. Moderately clothed with
short, whitish pubescence, on the elytra sinuously disposed.

Upper surface with dense minute punctures, larger and sparser
■on elytra than elsewhere. Intercoxal process of presternum
idmost parallel -sided, sides very finely carinaited. Metasternum
and abdomen with dense, small punctures, sparser in middle

."^\

204 Arthur M, Lea:

than elsewhere ; lamellae touching suture, the latter very feeble
across middle. Length, 1§ — 2^ mm.

Also common under bark in Tasmania (Hobart and New Nor-
folk).

The reddish elytral stripes commence near the base and be-
come conjoined near the apex, on their outer margins their out-
line is regular, but on their inner sides they are sometimes angu-
larly encroached upon about the middle. Usually the front
angles of the prothorax are reddish at their tips and occasionally
the extreme apex is reddish. On a small specimen from Hobart
the elytra are mostly red, with a fairly large oval pioeous spot
extending from the base to the middle, and with the margins
very narrowly infuscated on the basal half. The tibiae nre
usually somewhat infuscated..

A depressed specie® close to description of yarrensis, but larger
and mostly deep black (including the head and femora). In
colour and size it is somewhat close to vittipennis, but the stripes
do not commence at the base itself as in tliat species, and meet
across the suture (except for the finely raised portion of the
suture itself) instead of terminating before it. It is also flatter
than that species, with denser punctures on elytra, wider pro-
thorax, darker legs and epipleurae entirely dark.

268. 6'. flavifrons^ iihickb.

269. Rhizobius fiigrovan'us, n. sp.

Flavous with black or infuscate markings. Moderately
cl(jthed with fine whitish pubescence.

Head and prothorax with minute punctures ; elytra with ermall
punctures, but, except when concealed by clothing, clearly de-
fined. Intercoxal process of prosternum wide, gently convex,
dilated to apex, sides very finely carina! ed. Sides of metaster-
num and of abdomen with distinct punctures, elsewhere shining
and almost or quite impunctate; lamellae extending rather more
than half-way to suture. Length, \\ — \\ mm.

Also from Tasmania (Frankford, Ulverstone, L»unce»ton and
New Norfolk).

Although there are 33 specimens before me, hardly any two
are identical in all their markings. The head is sometimes en-

Coleoptera of Khifj Island. 205

tirely pale, sometimes infuscaited and som-etimos almost entirely
black. The prothorax usually has a large infuscate blotch in the
middle, the blotch occasionally occupying th'e entire surface ex-
cept for a very narrow border, whilst sometimes » veiy faint
stain only can be traced. The elytral markings are very
variable and not always clearly defined ; the suture api>ears to be
alwajys narrowly infuscated throughout, at about its basal third
there is a blackish blotch (in some specimens this bl<.tch is
heart-shaped, in others it is connected with discal markini^s,
whilst in a common form it is represent*ed by a rounded spot
on each side close to, but not of, the suture), and at abcuit its
apical third it is again, but less strongly dilaited ; in many
specimens, however, the subapical dilatation is entirely absent.
On the disc there is usually a sinuous line extending from near
the base to one- third from the apex, where it becomes trans-
versely dilated and terminaites ; sometimes after proceeding a
short distance it bifurcates, but the two arms in such cases
become conjoined at one^hird from the apex. The meso and
metasternum are always more or less dark, but the abdomen
varies from entirely pale to entirely infuscaite.

On one specimen the elytral markings consist of a conspicuous
zig-zag fascia at the basal third (exteoiding across the suture but
not to the margins), and a feebly infu-scated spot at aibout one-
third from the apex. On several there is a feebly infuscated
spot on each side of the suture at its basal third, and a very
feeble oblique stripe between this and the margin. Usually,
however, the sinuous line can be traced in parts. The specimens
from the island, as a rule, are less distinctly marked than those
from Tasmania.

In general appearamce somewhat like alphabet ions, but smaller,
comparatively wider, with smaller punctures and different mai'k-
ings on elytra. In size and shape it is close to occidentalis,
but the elytral punctures are much more distinct than in that

species.

270. Rhizobius blackburni^ n. sp.

Black or blackish, head (infuscated posteriorly) front and sides
of prothorax, sides and apex of elytra, abdomen (the base in-
fuscated) and appendages more or less reddish. Clothed with
short pale yellowish pubescence interspersed with subsetose but
similarly coloured pubescence.

206 Arthur M. Lea:

Head and prothorax with small dense punctures. Elytra with
slightly larger and sparser punctures, interspersed with numer-
ous larger (but still small) punctures. Under surface- with
sparse and small puncture®, becoming very dense at sides. Inter-
coxal process of presternum moderately convex, oarinaite at apex
but not at sides. Lamellae extending to about oner-fifth from
suture. Length, 3J — 3^ mm.

Also from Tasmania (Hobart).

A greatly depressed species apparently close to aurantii, but
the profitemum convex instead of concave along the middle, and
apparently with smaller punctures, those on the elytra being
decidedly smaller and denser than on discolor, and uneven in
places; the punctures on the prothorax are rather denser than
on the elytra and are decidedly small.

The pale portion at the apex of the prothorax is very narrow ;
on each elytron it commences at the base, close to but not on
the margin itself,^ and dilates till it becomes marginal, and still
dila<tes till it occupies about one-third of the apex. On one
specimen, however, it commences behind the middle and be-
comes marginal only near the apex. On the elytra the
pubescence is somewhat sinuously disposed in. places, and on
abrasion very faint traces, as of striation, become visible.

271. Rhizobius kingensis, n. sp,

Black, elytra with a coppery gloss ; head, apex and sides of
prothorax, apex of abdomen, tursi, tibiae (the four hind ones
somewhat infuscated), knees, trochanters, antennae and palpi
reddish. Moderately clothed with rather long, whitish, curved
pubescence, interspersed with suberect fine brownish setae.

Upper surface with small punctures of even size, but denser
on head than on prothorax, and on prothorax th:m on elytra.
Intercoxal process of presternum flat, sides scarcely carinated.
Metasternum and abdomen with small and sparse punctures in
middle, becoming dense at sides ; lamellae extending to about
one-fourth from suture. Length, 2 mm.

Close to lindi, but smaller and darker, pubescence longer and
setae shorter and sparser. From plebejus (except that it is

1 On one Hpeeinien, however, it is marginal at the base.

Goleoptera of King Island. 207

about the same size) it differs in the same particulars. Com-
pared with a specimen of hirtellus of the same size it differs
(apart from colour) in having the pubescence longer, the setae
shorter, elytral punctures rather smaller and those on the pro-
thorax decidedly denser.

272. R. alphabeticus^ Lea.

273. R, discolor, Er.

274. R. ventralis, Er.

CORYLOPHIDAK.

275. Clypeaster elliptica, Lea.

A specimen from the island probably represents a variety of
this species; its elytra are of a dark red, with a large blotch
about the scutellum, and an obscure subfasciate blotch towards
apex, but the shoulders not infuscate. Beyond the subapical
blotch the colour is paler than elsewhere.

The description of the colour of the elytra of the tjrpe is some-
what misleading ; it should have been given as : — " Deep red ;
with a large blackish blotch at the base, partly extended along
the suture and sides." The two colours, however, are not
sharply defined.

276. Sericoderus basipennis, Lea.

277. S, hardcastlei^ Lea.

278. S, obesus, Lea.

[Proc. Rot. Soc. Victoria, 20 (N.S.), Pr. U * 1907.

Art. XIV. — New or Little-hiown Victor utn Fo8siUi in

the Natioiud Museum..

Part IX. — Some Teiitiary Species.

By FREDERICK CFfAPMAN, A.L.S., .vc.

National Museum.

(With Plates XVII.-XIX.).

[Read 12th December, 1907].

The following notes are based on some tertiary fossils ^hich
have been «et aside from time to time as deserving of descrip-
tion or further comment. With regard to the echinoids, no new
forms are here described, since other workers are engaged upon
this group ; but the opportunity is taken to figure, and record
a new locality for Linthia antiaustralis, and to record additional
localities and stratigraphical information regarding three other
interesting species.

The forms here dealt with are: —

Cliona mammillata, sp. nov.

? Cliona perejjiinator, sp. nov.

Ecionema newberyi, McCoy, sp.

Heliastraea tasmaniensis, Duncan.

Comoseris (Oroseris) australis, sp. nov.

Studeria elegans, Laube sp.

Linthia antiaustralis, Tate.

Maretia anomala, Duncan.

Eupatagus rotundus, Duncan.

Tschnochiton (Ischnoplax) granulosus, Ashby and" 'I'orr sp.

Class — Spongida.
Order — Moimctinellida,
Genus — Cliona^ Cnint.

Cliona mammillata, sp. nov.

(PI. XVIIT., Fig. 3).

Specific Characters. — The chambers excavated i)y the spou'^e
are comparatively large, irre<rularly spheroidal and depressed.

Victorian Fossils, Part IX. 209

In nearly all cases they bore smaller loculi on their lateral
walls, and these appear in the casts as mamniillate protuberamces.
Cavitiee connected by rather long and and conspicuously curvod
stolons. Average diameter of chambers, 4 mm. ; length of con-
necting stolons, about 3 mm. ; width, 0.5 mm.

These borings occur on the surface of the internal cast of a
Voluta having a length of 16.5 cm., and the Cliona crypts en-
tirely cover the spire and a large part of the body-whorl.

Observations. — In the absence of spicules it is difficult to
separate the fossil casts of the boring sponge Cliona by charaic-
ters which may be regarded as specific. In the present in-
stance, however, certain features are exhibited which we
can use for future reference, and we may therefore reasonably
give it ai distinguishing n^me. As an example of Cliona borings
flblready specifically described we may refer to Cliona ("Ento-
bia ") cretacea, Portlock^ a common form in Cretaceous ^shells in
Britain and elsewhere, which is recognised by its regularly
spheroidal form, crowded chambers and comparatively fine,
radiating system of stolons.

Locality and Horizon. — Swan Reach, Bairnsdale Lakes. Ter-
tiary (iCalimnan). Pres. by Mr. H. J. Hauschildt. [9146].

P Cliona peregrinator, sp. nov.
(PI. XVIII., Fig. 4).

Specific Characters. — Crypts globular to pyriform, sometimes
united into a more or less lengthy tube. The passages from
chamber to chamber are often reduced to a mere constriction
and there is also evidence of occasional, long slender stolons.
Diameter of an average-size globulaa* chamber, 2.5 mm. ; length
of pyriform chambers, rather less. The habit of this organism
in the wandering manner of its growth is unlike the majority
of Clionae. The fossil occurs on the surface of a limestone cast
of a coral, Comoseris, into the coenenchyma of which it had
bored in the errant manner described.

Locality and Horizon. — Valley of the Moorabool at Maude.
Tertiary (Barwonian). Coll. Geol. Surv., Vict. WTMi. [9ir)3].

1 Geol. Londonderry, 1843, p. 360. See also Cliomtes coii^ l>ean, Moni>^ ; Aii?i. Miii:.
Nat. Hist., vol. viii., 1851, pi. viii., fijf. 9.

210 F, Chapman:

Order — Tetbactinbllida.
Genus — Ecionenia, Bowerlwiiik.

Ecionema newberyl, McCoy sp.
(PI. XVIL, Figs. 1-13).

Tethya newberyi, McCoy, 1877, Prod. Palaeont. Vict., Dec.
v., p. 31, PI. XLVIIL, Fig. 1.

Observations. — ^Having recently ecsamined the above type speci-
men [9145], I am able to record the presence of typical tetractiii-
ellid spicules (protriaene), in reference to which McCoy remarked^
as follows : — " I have not seen any triradiate terminations to
any of the spicules such as occasionally occur with the simple
forms in the recent Tethya, but they are €o brittle that such
may yet well be found." In his description, McCoy compai*es this
fossil sponge with Tethya cranium, which speciee is now removed
to the genus Craniella, Schmidt. Among the spicules of the
Victorian fossil sponge are numerous microscleres, which are ab-
sent in all the forms of Craniella referred to by SoUas,* except-
ing C. schmidtii. This species alone possesses sigmaispiree : the
microscleres of our fossil, however, are represented, amongst
other forms, by the simpler modification, the microstrongyles.
The known species of Craniella are distinguished by numerous
megaloscleres of the form anatriaene, but these are absent in
our specimen.

With regard to Tethya, the definition of the genus as now
restricted and given by Sollas (op. cit. p. 427) is as follows: —

" Tethyidae of more or less spherical form, in which the
rhabdus is a strongyloxea. The chamber-system is diplodal."
This definition excludes our fossil, since all the oxea are bluntly
pointed, in contradistinction to the cylindrical strongyloxeiv.

The genus with which the Victorian fossil appears to show
most agreement, both in regard to form and spicular structure.
is Ecionema, which includes at least two species found in
southern Australian waters — viz., E. australiense, Carter sp. and
E. bacilliferum, var. robusta, Carter var.

1 Loc. fit., p. 31.

2 Chall. Rep., vol. xxv., 188S. Report on the Tetractiiiellirla, pp. 30-41.

Victmnan Fossils, Part IX. 211

The genus Ecionema is defined by SoUas^ as " Rhabdastrose
Stellettidae, in which the eotosome does not form a cortex,
with two forms of microscleres, one of them being a microrabd,
derived either from an anthaster or a chiaster by reduction
in the number of the actines to two."

In the present specimen there are at least four types of
microscleres; spherasters, sterrasters, micro strongyle« and the
microrabdfi (probably derived from a chiaster). Tt may subse-
quently be found necessary to form a new genus for the
reception of this sponge should other specimens occur, but for
the present it may be referred to Ecionema-

Extended Description. — In addition to the characters noted
by McCoy, we may state that the spicules consist both of the
large (megaloscleres) and the small types (microscleres). The
former consist of — (1) long arcuate or sigmoidal spicules pointed
at both ends (oxea), generally smooth, sometimes slightly
spinose ; and (2) tetraradiate spicules of the form protriaene,
with the three short rays directed away from the main axis,
sometimes curved, but more often straight, forming an angle of
about 45 deg. from the axis of the rhabdus produced. There
are also occasional dichotriaene, in which the three radial ciadi
are bifurcate, and with the main actines suppressed, after the
manner of Ecionema nana^ Carter sp.^ The microscleres con-
sist of — (1) arcuate or open V-shaped microrabds, cylindrical
and with rounded ends (micros trongyles), bearing surface tuber-
culations and depressions; (2) a Ispiraster, with blunt spines,
especially neaa: one extremity ; (3) a microxea with whorls of
spines; (4) a spheraster, with moderately long arms canying
two or more spines at the extreme tips ; (5) a depressed ellip-
soidal sterraster, with ?hilum nearly central ; and (6) a sani-
daster slightly tapering to one end, and armed with numerous
short ««pines.

Dimensions of the Spicules. — The chief skeletal spicules are
the oxea, which are nearly always slightly curved : the greatest
length they appear to attain is about 5 mm., although McCoy
says " some aipparently about 1 inch long.""* They are massed

1 Log. supra cit., p. 195.

2 Annahf and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. v., vol. vi., 1880, pi. vii., f. 43.
8 Log. cit., p. 31.

212 F. Chajwian :

together m a closely fasciculate manner. The examples now
figured measure as follows : — (PI. XVTT., Fig. 1). Length, 2.346
mm. ; greatest breadth, 0.0721 mm. A slightly sigmoidal
spicule (PI. XVTI., Pig. 2), length, 1.6 mm.

Protriaene. — A variety with straight cladi, 0:423 mm. long;
length of cladi, 0.154 mm. Cladi making am angle of 48 deg.
with the produced rhabdu*. A variety with curved cladi having
a length of 0.481 mm. ; cladi forming an angle of 30 deg. A
variety with the cladi sigmoidally coirved, 0.461 mm. in length;
width of chord, 0.25 mm.

Dichotriaene. — Rays of the trivium lying nearly in the same
plame. That which would ordinarily be considered the prin-
cipal aetine is almost entirely suppressed. An example from
this sponge has an extreme diameter of 0.48 mm.

Microstrongyles. — Length of an average example, 0.423 mm. ;
width, 0.0384 mm.

The ?spiraster. — Length. 0.346 mm.

Microxea with spines in whorls. — Length, 0.25 mm. ; width,
0.1 mm.

Spheraster. — Diameter of centrum, 0.0576 ; length of longest
rays, 0.0432 mm.

An ellipsoidal sterraster. — Longer diameter, 0.153 mm;
>horter diamieter, 0.11 mm.

A sanidaster with a length of 0.336 mm.

Class — Anthozo A .

Fami ly — AstraeUae.

Genus — Heliastraea^ Ed. and Haime.

Heliastraea tasmaniensis, Duncan.

H. tasmaniensis, Duncan, 1876, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc», Vol.
XXXIL, p. 342, PI. XXIL, Figs. 1-3.

Obitorvations. — An example of this coral occurs as a oast in
ironstone, and is sufficiently well preserved to furnish a sharp
wax impression, clearly showing the number of primary
and secondary septa and their quaternary arrangement, as
described by Duncan. The corallum measures about 4 cm.
square, whilst the calices have a diameter of about 4 mm.

Victoinan Fossils, Fart IX. 213

Near to one side of the corallum in this specimen there occurs
what is evidently a malformed calice of the same stock, form-
ing a funnel-shape depression about 15 mm. across, and sur-
rounded by a ring of calices of the normal form. The malformed
calice suggests at first sight that of an Agaricia, but a cast of
the bottom of the calice shows ft to be similar to that of the
smoller corallites of the group.

Locality and Horizon. — Flemington (*' Royal Park "). Pro-
bably from the Vict. Geol. Surv. coll. Tertiary (Barwonian).
[915'5].

Family — Thamnastrakidak.

Genus — Comoseris, D'Orbigny.

Sub-Genus — Oroseris, Edwards and Hainie.

Comoseris (Oroseris) austral is, sp. nov.
(PL XVTTI., Figs. 1, 2).

Description. — The present example occurs in the form of a
ferruginous limestone cast. Base of corallum encrusting.
Calices meajsuring about 6 mm. in diameter ; arranged in a
widely flexuous series, and divided by moderately high, rounded,
flexuous ridges. Septa (traibeculae) sinuous, strongly curved or
angu^ate, granulate on the sides, and united by synapticula ;
about 20 main septal plates, some of which branch into two,
usually at a distance of about one and a half millimetres from
the centre of the calice, continuous with the costae of the
ridges. Sometimes the branching of the septa occurs nearly at
the summit of the ridge. Columella small, formed of the united
ends of the septa. Depth of calices about 5 mm. From top of
ridge to bottom of calice, 9 mm.

Observations. — The coradlum of the type species has been ex-
tensively invaded by a boring sponge (?Cliona), the casts of
whose orypts stand up prominently on the fossil coral.

The coral before us bears liome resemblance to certain forms
of Stylomaeandra and Latimaeandra, both of which have the
calices situated between coUines or ridges ; the former genus
ha/ving a styliform columella, whilst the latter is deficient in
that respect. A closer examination of the septal arrangement

214 F. Chapman:

and the habit of the serial extension of the calices, together
with the presence of a rudimentary or papillose columella^ show
its affinity with the Thamnastraeans. The subgenus Oroseris is
distinguished from Comoseris by the limited extent of the ool-
lines, which do not traverse the entire length of the colony as in
Comoseris, and in this respecf our specimen is in agreement.^
A closely allied species to ours is Comoseris (Oroseris) regularis,
Fromentel, which, however, has fewer septa, and a more jwo-
nounced papillate columella. ^ This subgenus is represented in
the Jurassic, Neocomian, Cretaceous, Eocene and Miocene forma-
tions. In the Eocene it is known from Europe, and in the
Miocene from Italy.

Locality and Horizon. — Valley of the Moorabool, at Maude.
" From irregular bands of limestone not more than 2 ft. thick,
interstratified in the upper part of the older basalt." C. S.
Wilkinson, Dec, 1865. Coll. Geol. Surv., Vict. (WTM2). Ter-
tiary (Barwonian). [9153].

Class — ECHINOIDEA.

Family — Cassidii/idae.
Genus — Studeria, Duncan.

Studeria elegans, Laube sp.

Catopygus elegans, Laiube, 1869, Sitz. d.k. Akad. d. Wis-
sensoh. Wien, Vol. LIX, p. 190, PL Figs. 8, 8 aro. Tris-
tomanthus elegans, Bittner, 1892, Sitz. d.k. Akad. d. Wissensch.
Wien, Vol. CL, p. 352, PL IV., Fig. 3.

Observations. — Hitherto this echinoid has been recorded for
Victoria only from the mouth of the Glenelg River, near the
S. Australian Border, and from Apsley. In S. Australia it occurs
at the Murray River and Mt. Gambler. ' It is therefore in-
teresting to record its occurrence at another, widely removed,
locality in Victoria. The specimens, of which there are mx

1 See Duncan, " Revision of the Families and Genera of the Madreporaria," Journ.
Linn. Soc. Lond., Zoology, vol. xviii., 1885, p. 163.

2 Pal. FranQ , vol. viii., p. 478, pi. 117, figs. 2, 2a.

3 See Dennant and Kitson, Catalogue of the Described Species of Fowlls in the Cainosoic
Fauna of Victoria, S. Australia and Tasmania, iiecords of the Geol. Surv. Vict., vol. i.,
1903, pt. ii., p. 131.

Victoi-ian FvKsils, Paii IX.

215-

esamplM, were collected some yenrn ago by Mr. J. H. GbtlifF,
who has preBcmted them to the Museum tollection. They
are Bomewhat siii»ll, but otherwise typiciil, so far as can be
said of a Bpoeies in which no two examples are exactly alike in

Locality and HorizoB. — Spring Creek Beds at Torquay. Ter-
tiary (Jsnjukiain). [9147-52].

Family— SPATANdiDAK.
G«a\K—Liiiihia, Meiinu.

Linthia antiaustraiis, Tnte.
(Pi. XIX.).

L. antdaustralis, Tate, 1885, Southern Science H.cord. Vol.
L <New S«-.), No. 1, p. 4.

Obaervutions. — The above species was described by Tate from
tha Murray River Cliffs, but there has been no previous record
of its occurrence in Victoria. Tlie example now recorded

from Curlewis was collected by S. Daintree, and it was sent to
the National Museum witli other tertiary specimens from
the Geological Survey Office in April, 1861. Daintree's note as
to the precise spot where the fossils were obtained is as fol-
lows : — "These fossiU were collected from the base of tlie cliff on

from to AUi /'»MLls*/«rt
C«Utct€*t.

216 F. Cfutp7)ia7i:

which a fenced-in grave stands; the argillaceous limestone from
which tliey were taken has been upheaved by the intrusive basjilt,
and where the limestone was sufficiently pure it has been con-
verted into a coarse kind of marble." The Survey reference
to the locality is Ad. 12, Section 23, Block 1, Parish of Moolap.
A sketch is added by Daintree, which is here reproduced. Lin-
thia antiaustralis was described, but not figured by Pro-
fessor Tate. It may therefore be appropriate to give illus-
trations of the present example. The species differs from the
living L. australii^, as Tate points out, amongst other features,
in its greater height, less tumid sides, and the shallower
ambulacral zones having the aaaterior pair a little longer than
the posterior, ;is compared with L. australis, in which they are
of about equal length. Another important character is the dif-
ference in the angle of divergence in the posterior pair of am-
bulacra in the two forms, that of L. aintiaustralis being 50 deg.,
whilst in the living species it is 43 deg.

Locality and Horizon. — Curlewis, near Greelong. Tertiary
(Barwonian). [9154].

Genus — Ma re //a, G ray.

Maretia anomala, Duncan.

Maretia anomala, Duncan, 1877, Quart. Journ. GeoL Soc, Vol.
XXIIL, p. 52, PI. IV., Figs. 1-4.

Observations. — An incomplete specimen of a very large ex-
ample of this hamdsome echinoid occurs in the National Museum
collection. It was purchased from Mr. J. F. Bailey, who ob-
tained it from the Beaumaris Cliffs. There is no doubt as to
the accuracy of this locality, since this is sufficiently shown by
the matrix of the specimen.

Duncan gives 2f inches as the length of his type specimen,
and 2^ inches as the breadth. The present specimen has a
breadth of 3J inches, while the length when complete would
have been about 3f inches. The locality which Duncan gives
for the type specimen is the Mouth of the Sherbrook River
(loc. cit., p. 53). Messrs. Dennant and Kitson, in their Cata-
logue of Cainozoic Fossils,i give an additional locality, Aldinga.

1 RecordH Geol. Siirv. Vict., vol. i., pt. ii., 1903, p. 131.

Victorian Fossils , Fart IX, 217

The present record is made from a higher horizon than that of the
Sherbrook River. Further specimens from the same locality
may show a varietal difference, but to far ajs can be seen ours
agrees in all essential characters, and only differs in size.

Locality and Horizon. — -Beaumaris, Port Phillip. Tertiary
(Kalimnan). [4829].

Genus — Eupatagus^ Agassiz.

Eupatagus rotundus, Duncan.

Eupatagus rotundus, Duncan, 1877, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc,
Vol. XXXIIL, p. 53, PL III., Figs. 14-17.

Observations. — This species is not very abundant in our Ter-
tiary beds. It is readily recognised by its exceptionally large
size compared with the other Australian examples of the genus,
the almost circular ambitus, the gi'eater proportional height of
the vertex, which is § the length of the test, the nearly centric
position of the apical system, and the sharply angulated peri-
petalous fascicle.

A fine specimen of this echinoid has been presented by Mr.
F. P. Spry to the Museum collection [9156J. Tlie test is part-
ly encrusted by a hard pink or reddish brown limestone, and
the fossil itself is of a brick-red colour. This specimen wais
said to be from Muddy Creek, but the exact locality was
open to doubt. During a recent vi«it to the Hamilton District
I was able to locate the bed of limestone from whence the
present example was obtained. It is best developed at the junc-
tion of the Muddy Creek with the Grange Bum, and this par-
ticular fossil must have come from near the junction or below, on
on the Grange Burn, since it is there that the reddish - coloured
limestone occurs. The latter occurs as a very thick bed of
foraminiferai and polyzoal rock (Amphistegina and Cellepora
being the predominant genera), and throughout the bed are scat-
tered numerous tests of echinoids, chiefly of Eupatagus rotundus.
I also found a portion of a very large echinoid, probably refer-
able to Linthia gigas, McCoy sp. This bed of foraminiferai and
polyzoal limestone occupies ai position immediately oyer the
richly fossiliferous clays best seen elsewhere at Clifton Bank;

9

218 F. Gluipman :

and it can be traced up the Grange Burn to within a short dis-
tance of Forsyth's, where it is overlain by the nodule bed and
the Kalimnan shelly deposits. By the percolation of surface
water the limestone, has been fretted and excavated into numer-
ous " swallow-holes " and caves on the G-range Burn opposite Mr.
Henty's farm, where it perhaps attains its maximum thickness.

Duncan's original locality for this species is the Tertiaries of
the Murray River (loc. supra cit.). Since then the species has
been discovered in several localities, but apparently not at
Muddy Creek. Messrs. Dennant and Kit son ^ have given the
distribution of E. rotundus as follows : — Aire Coast ?, Grellibrand
River, Glen Aire, Calder River, Maude, Waum Ponds, Murray
River, Spring Creek, to which should now be added Muddy
Creek and Grange Bum, near their junction.

Order — Polyplacophora.

Family — Ischnochiionidae.

Genus — Ischnochiton^ Gray.

Sub-Genus — Ischnoplax^ Carpenter.

Ischnochiton (Ischnoplax) granulosus, Ashby and

Torr sp.
(PI. XVIII., Figs. 5-7).

Acanthochites (Notoplax) granulosus, Ashby and Torr, 1901,
Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., Vol. XXV., p. 139, PI. IV., Fig. 9.

Observations. — The above species was founded on median
valves from the Balcombian clays of Schnapper Point (Bal-
oombe's Bay, Port Phillip). Curiously, three out of five speci-
mens of this fossil in the National Museum collection are tail-
valves, and since this part of the external covering has not yet
been described, details are now given, with drawings from two of
the specimens.

This species must be transferred of the genus IschnocbitOD,
occasioned by the discovery of the tail-valve, particularly charac-
terised by a cailus- termination of the posterior border of the
articulamentum ; and to the sub-genus Isohnoplax, since the shape

1 Op. cit., p. 132.

VictmHan Fossils, Part IX. 219

of the valves indicate a narrow body, with an elevated posterior
valve and a posteriorly situated mucro. In view of the fact that
Acanthochites, subgenus Notoplax, is distinguished by the numer-
ous slits in the articulamentum of the tail-valve, which latter
also projects beyond the integumentum posteriorly, it is diffi-
cult to discern the ground upon which the original authors of
this species founded their conclusions as to the genus in which
it should be placed, seeing that they record only median valves.

Description of Posterior Valve. — ^Dimensions — Specimen a.
[4843] : Length, 7 mm.; greatest width, 7 mm. Specimen b.
[4842] : Length, 8.5 mm.; greatest width, 9 mm. Distance
from point of mucro to external posterior border, 2.5 mm.
Height at anterior margin, 3.75 mm. (specimen a). Width of
sinus (spec, a), 3 mm. ; (spec, b), 3.75 mm.

Dorsal airea bluntly wedge-shape, the summit, ending in the
mucro, roundly ridged and bearing about 16 longitudinal striae,
which become broken at the sides into rows of elliptical or
alongate-subquadrate beads. There are about 14 of these bead-
like striae on each side of the dorsal slope, over which they are
disposed in a radiately curved manner, and focussed on or around
the mucro. There are two beaded striae to one intermediate
and shorter. Area behind mucro, plane, undulate or slightly
concave, ornamented with numerous small pustules arranged in a
rather obscurely quincuncial pattern. The outer borders of these
pustules each carry a pigmented centre, slightly depressed, show-
ing the presence of the rudimentary eyes. The articulamentum
is of a pale creamy yellow, contraisting with the pale sage-green
coloTir of the tegmentum. As seen from the under side, it is
thickened and wrinkled by divergent ridges on either side of the
muoronal pit, and is delicately crenulated on the posterior bor-
der. The sutural laminae are produced 1.25 mm. beyond the
tegmentum, as seen from the upper surface.

Affinities. — Of living species of the sub-genus there appears
to be only one well-authenticated exajnple — viz., Ischnochitou
(Ischnoplax) i>ectinatus, Sowerby sp.,^ whose habitat is in the
West Indies (Cuba, Guadaloupe and Barbados). The salient
differences between the recent and the fossil form are the den-

1 Chiton pectiiiatus, Sow.; Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 1840 (June), p. 288, pi. xvi., fig. 8.
Hee also Try on and Pilsbry, Manual of Conchology, vol. xiv., p. 64, pi. xvii., figs. 26-30.

220 F. Chapman:

ticulate posterior mairgin of the articulamentum of the tail valve,
and the slightly greater elevation of the dorsal area in the former.

Locality and Horizon. — ^Baloombe's Bay, Port Phillip. Ter-
tiary (Balooni'bian). Collected by Mr. W. Kershaw.

For valuable assistance in comparing these fossils with the
living types, I am much indebted to Mr. R. A. Bastow.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate XVIT.

Fig. 1. — Spicules of Eciotiema newberyiy McCoy sp. An oxea;
slightly curved form (the principal skeletal spicules).
Fig. 2. — An oxea, having a sigmoidal curve.
Fig. 3. — Protriaene, with straight oladi.
Fig. 4. — Protriaene with curved cladi.
Fig. 5. — Diohotriaene.
Fig. 6. — Another, fragmentary specimen.
Fig. 7. — Microrabd (microstrongyle), showing pitted surface.
Fig. 8. — Probably a spiraster, with spines developed towards one

end.
Fig. 9. — ^Microxea, with whorls of spines.
Fig. 10. — Spheraater, with arms terminated by spines.
Fig. 11. — Sterraster.
Fig. 12. — Sanidaster.

Fig. 13. — Protriaene, with sigmoidally curved cladi.
All figures on the above plate magnified 52 diameters.

Plate XV III

Fig. 1. — Comoseris (Oroseris) australis, sp. nov. A drawing from

a wax squeeze. x 2.
Fig. 2. — The same. A calice more highly magnified, x 4.
Fig. 3. — Cliona mammillata, sp. nov. Natural casts of the cham*

bers. X 2.
Fig. 4. — ? Cliona peregrinator, sp. nov. A natural oast, x 2.
Fig. 5. — Ischnochiton (Ischnoplax) granulosus, Ashby and Torr,

sp. Posterior valve, dorsal view, x 3.
Fig. 6. — The same ; side view. x 3.

Proo. E.a. Victofift, 1907. Plate XVII.

Victorian Tertiary Fossils.

• •-•

••*.:•

'••••»

* •

• • •

• ••

*•

••••,

'..•j

*• *-

'* V

Proc. K.S. Victoria, 1907. Plate XVIII.

« w »<

P.C. del.

Spicules of Ecionema newberyi, McCoy, sp. (x 52).

^ «>

-www,

" to

Pr.jL', K,S. Viotii'iii. lituT- Pl»t-^ XIX,

• • •

■: .

*

•• ••

• •• ••

• •

• • •

„ «

Victoinan FossiU, Part IX. 221

Fig. 7. — Another specimen ; ventral aspect, showing the articu-
lamentum with the thickened area and crenulated
border, x 3.

Plate XIX.

Fig. 1. — Linthia antiaustralis, Tate. Profile.
Fig. 2. — Linthia antiaustralis, Tate. Dorsal view.
Fig. 3. — Linthia antiaustralis, Tate. Ventral view.

All figures natural size.

[Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 20 (N.S.), Pt. IT., 1907.]

Akt. XV. — The Anatomy of Some Australian

Amphibia.

Part I.

A. — The Openings op the Nephrostomes prom the Coelom.

B. — The Connection op the Vasa epferentia with thb

Kidney.

By GEORGINA SWEET, D.Sc. (Melb. Univ.).

(With Plates XX., XXL).
[Read 12th December, 1907].

INTRODUCTION.

The research, of which the following is a record, was sug-
gested in the first instance by the conspicuous character of the
Nephrostomes in the common '* green '* frog of Victoria, Hyla
aurea, especially in connection with Professor Sedgwick's state-
ment, so recently as 1905, of his doubt of the correctness of the
descriptions of previoui^ workers on the European and American
genus, Rana. So far as I have been able to find, Rana, Bufo,
Diacoglossus, Bombinaitor and Alytes are the only genera of the
Anura which have received any attention from workers in
reference to the points herein discussed. The remainder of the
Bufonidae, the Hylidae and the Cystignathidae, have been un-
touched heretofore. These three families are well represented
in Australia, especially the Cystignathidae. I haive therefore
endeavoured to fill the gap by this work on the following eight
forms : —

HVLID^.

Hyla aurea. H, lesueurii

BUPONID^.

Notaden bennettL Pseudophryne ausiraiis.

Anatmny of Australian Amphibia. 223

CYSTIGNATHIDiE.

Crinia si^nifera. Chiroleples alboguitatus.

Heleioponis picUis Limnodytiastes dorsaiis.

In the consideration of the two points especially dealt with
in this paper, a study of the general structure of the kidney
and testis also becomes necessary.

A. — The Openings of the Nepiirostomks fuom the Coelom.

The special interest of the Nephrostomes, or openings from
the body cavity, in connection with the kidneys, sus has pre-
viously been pointed out, lies in (1) the fact that they exhibit
according to the findings of Marshall, Bles, Frankl and Far-
rington (vide infra) in the forms examined by them, a good
example of transference of the structural relationships and func-
tion of an embryonic organ during development, and (2) the
importaoice of determining the exact forms in which an organ
present in the embryo loses its function or ceases to exist in
the adult, That these nephrostomes are present in the larval
Amphibian, as well as in the embryo of other groups, is well
known: that they persist in the adult of many of the Fishes
and of the Urodeles or " tailed-Amphibia," still with their em-
bryonic relationship to the uriniferous tubules of the kidney is
also an accepted fact, their function in this case being doubtless
the passage of fluid material from the coelom to the exterior.
Moreover it is just as certain that they do not normally persist
in the adult of the higher Vertebratai. It becomes desirable
then to ascertain just where these structures disappear as a
feature of the adult, and what changes take place in their re-
lationships and function during their disappeaorance.

HiUorical.

The history of the discussion as to the presence and relation-
ships of the nephrostomes in the Anura is a very interesting
one. I give it hea-e in brief outline: —

1874. Heidenhain. [Ecker, pp. 327, 336] was unable to find

them.

1875. Spengel. [Spengel, 77, and Marshall and Bles, '90, p.

147] stated that the nephrostomes open on the

224 Georgina Sweet :

surface of the kidney. He found them in Rana,
Bufo, Bombinator and Discogloscrus. There may
be one nephrostome to two tubules, or one to four
nephrostomes to one tubule. They are connected
with the fourth part of the uriniferous tubule.

1875. Meyer. [Ecker, pp. 328 and 336, and Marshall and
Bles, '90, p. 147]. -Quite independently and un-
known to each other, Meyer confirms Spengel's
work. He found 250-360 in Rana.

1877. Nussbaum. [Farrington, '93, p. 309], confirmed pre-
vious work as to the internal opening.

1880. Nussbaum. [Ecker, p. 328, 336: Nussbaum, '80],
stated that the nephrostome is connected with the
neck of the tubule in the larva, but opened into
the Renal Portal Vein in the adult.
Weidersheim, according to Hasiam [Ecker, p. 336],
at one time stated that the nephrostomes had no
openings &t all on the surface^

1886. Nussbaum and Wichmann. [Marshall and Bles, '90,
p. 150]. These found that in Rana fusca, R.
esculenta, Bufo calamites, and Alytes obstetricans,
they open into the Renal Veins and so to the
Inferior Vena Cava.

1886, Hoffmann. [Hoffman, '86], asserted that they end
blindly in the adult, though connected with the
neck of the capsule in the larva.

1886. Wiedersheim. [Wiedersheim, 86, p. 756], accepts
Nussbnum's work of 1886 with the remark that
the peritoneal fluid is no longer lost, but is re-
turned to the general circulation like the rest of
the lymph.

1889. Haislam. [Ecker, p. 336], sitates that he could not
find any trace of them, and that if present (1) they
are very difl&cult to find, (2) they do not form a
free communicating path between any part of the
uriniferous tubules and the abdominal cavity, and
(3) their superficial terminations have no free
cilia.

AnatoTYiy of Australian Amphibia. 225

1890. Marshall and Bles. [Marshall and Ble&, '90, p. 133].
They are easily seen, though not in every sec-
tion in a series; also, the whole length of a
nephrostome is rarely seen in one single section.
The nephro»tome»-tubule has no relation except
of apposition with the urinary tubules, and
opens by a conspicuous aperture through which a
tuft of flagella projects into the Renal Vein.

1893. Farrington. [Farrington, '93], states- that in Rana
oatesbiana, and R. virescens, they may open
directly inwards, or take a short horizontal first.
He could not trace the internal opening with
certainty: though ciliary action, was seen at the
external openings. By injection, he obtained
almost conclusive proof of their connection with
the Renal veins near the ventral surface.

1898. Bles. [Bles, '98], finding considerable scepticism re-
garding the point, exhibited before the Cain-
bridge Philosophical Society 4 sections, " show-
ing a nephrostome tubule opening into a narrow
space lined with endothelium and containing a
blood-corpuscle, the space being continuous with
venous spaces in neighbouring sections."

1898. Frankl of Vienna. [Frankl, '98], attacking an allied
problem finds incidentally by injection that there
is no connection between the nephrostomes and
urinary tubules.

1898. Beissner. [Beissner, '98], confirms the staitements of
NussbaAim [1886] Marshall and Bles.

1902. Marshall's '' Frog." In the 8th edition of this work, the
Editor confirms and accepts Marshall's and Bles'
findings in 1890 and 1898, i.e., that the nephro-
stomes open into the Renal Veins.

1902. Howes. [Howes, '02, PI. VII., Figs. XXXV., and
XXXVI.], shows clearly the opening into these
blood-vessels.

1905. Sedgwick, in the new edition of his te(xt-book of
Zoology ['05, p. 295], writes : " In the Anura
nephrostomes are present. ... It has been

226 Geovghia Sweet:

asserted that they open into the Renal Veins.
This statement must be accepted with caution.
It appears more probable that they have lost
their connection with the renal tubules, and per-
sist as ciliated cups on- the surface of the kidney."
1906. Holmes, ['06, p. 204] accepts the internal opening of
the nephrostomes as into the branches of the
Renal Vein.
It was then with the hope that our Australian forms might

throw some light on this problem, that this part of the work

has been done.

Structure.

In general external form and position, the kidneys of the
forms examined do not differ materially from those of Rana,
being flattened bodies, three to four tim^s as long as they are
broad, and one-third to one-quarter of their width in thickness.
[See PI. XX., flg. 1.] Situated just ventral to the dorsal body wall,
in the abdominal lymph space, they are covered ventrally by the
peritoneum which keeps them in position against the dorsal
body wall. The ventral surface is generally flat or occasionally
distinctly concave, while the dorsal surface is always more or
less convex. The outer edge of each kidney is formed by the
ureter which arises by branches in the substance of the
kidney, and rims back behind the kidney dorsad to the large
intestine, to open into the roof of the cloaca.

Blood-vessels. — The Renal Arteries vary in number, being
generally in 5 or 6 pairs. They enter the kidney usually at
about one-third of its ^vidth from the inner edge, and break up
at once into numerous branches. Somewhat dorsal to the ureter
runs the Renal Portal Vein often receiving one or more lumbar
veins from the body wall. This vein breaks up into numerous
branches running inwards across the dorsal surface of the
kidney, breaking up as they do so. The Renal Veins arise on
the ventral surface of the kidney, sometimes nearer to the
inner edge than the entrance of the Renal Arteries (e.g., in
Crinia signifera). More often these veins leave the kidney
on the outer side of the arteries (e.g., in Hyla aurea<, Pseudo-
phryne australi^, Heleioporus pictus, Notaden bennetti, and

Anatomy of Australian Amphibia.

a27

Chiroleptes ailboguttatua), in which kttw they arise from the
middle of the kidoey. In a few forms, these veinB are very
short, the kidueiya being so closely apposed ae to appear us
ona mass veintrally, as in Paeudophryne australia and Notaden
bennetti. RareJy th© kidneys are distinctly unequal in leiigth
as in Chiroleptee alboguttatus, where the right kidney is fully
2 mm. longer than the left.

In the more detailed structure of the kidney, consid^'able
Tariartions are found.

Scheme of Amphibian Kidney seen in transverse section — to
show the relationships of the male reproductive ducts and the
nriniferouB tubules.

a. ■=. Ampulla on loiigitudiiml Bidder's canal.

c. t. = Ciliated part of uriniferous tubule.

g. =i Glomerulus of Malpighian body.

n. ^ Neck of urinjferous tubule.

pet, = Peritoneum.

R. A. ^ Renal Artery.

R. P. V.= Renal Porta'l Vein.

R. V. = Renal Vein.

t. c. c. ^ Transverse collecting canal.

nr. = Ureter.

V. c. c. ;= Vertical collecting canal.

V. e. = Vas efferens.

V, t. c. := Ventral transverse canal.

228 Gemyina Sweet :

Hylidae.

Hyla aurea.

Tins may be taken as the normal type. [See PI. XX., fiof. 1.] In
transverse section the kidney is more or lees triangular, the base
being towards the middle line of the body. The branches of the
Renal Veins occupy much of the outer part of the ventral side, the
Renal Arteries entering nearer the inner edge of the kidney. The
peritoneum is continued dorsally on the kidney for a short
distance from the outer edge, but leaves the kidney well before
it reaches the inner edge of the ventral surface. An " adrenal
body " is present on the ventral part of each kidney.

The fibrous connective tissue supporting the tubules and
blood-vessels is present here, to much the same extent as in
Rana), where it has been known as "kidney-parenchyma" by
some German writers [Cf. PI. XXI., tig. 3.] The Malpighian bodies
are often very much elongated, but not always, their greatest
length being found in the inner part of the kidney. They form
a more or less irregular layer in the upper part of the ventral
half of the kidney. The neck emerges from the dorsal part
of the Capsule, and runs more or less vertically upwards. The
blood-vessels enter and leave the side of the glomerulus. There
are no special points of difference in the microscopic structure of
the tubules caiUing for comment — the pavement epithelium of Bow-
man's Cap&ule, the ciliated cubical epithelium of the neck, the
large-celled convoluted portion often pigmented, and the col-
lecting tubes with their wider cavities and more or less cubical
epithelium, being very similar to corresponding parts found in
other forms such as Rana.

Under favourable conditions, there may be seen under a hand-
lens numerous minute pit-like structures on the ventral surface
of the kidney. These are the external openings of the
nephrostomes. These funnel-shaped depressions are situated
chiefly on the inner half of the ventral surface of the kidney,
and pierce the peritoneum which is loosely attached to 1-he
kidney wall. The walls of the " funnel '' are formed of large
cubical flagellated cells, with round, sharply defined nuclei — the
flagella are always directed inwards, away from the surface of
the kidney. [Cf. PI. XXI., fig. 3.] Throughout this paper, the

Anatomy of Australian Avipkibia. 229

word " cilia " will be used instead of " flagella " for convenience
— though the la^tter is undoubtedly more correct.] In number
the nephrostomes vary considerably — from 150 to 200 — [Cf.
Rana oate«biana with 150 at mo-st, and R. esculenta with 250 to
360, Farrington, '93]. In diameter they average in this form
0.04 mm., i.e., somewhat larger than in Rana ; in length or
depth, the funnel averages 0.09 mm. In H. aurea we occasional-
ly find long branched ciliated tubules present as direct internal
prolongations of the funnels, these run parallel to the surface, or
at other times towards the centre of the kidney for about one-
third of its thickness, from the ventral edge. I have not
been able to detect any division or union of these finer tubes',
such as has been described by Spengel in Rana [Spengel, '77, p.
330]. Not infrequently, a large funnel is seen close to the outer
edge of the kidney where the parietad peritoneum leaves the
kidney to become attached to the body- wall.

The eflfecta of the activity of their oilia may sometimes
be seen on the surface of the kidney, in the currents set up by
their movement, e.g., when the living kidney is placed in salt
solution containing finely divided carmine. In such a case, in
H. aurea, I have seen undoubted though small movement of the
suspended particles of carmine, all external source of movement
having been carefully eliminated — ^although Haslam and Farring-
ton state that they hajve been unable to detect any such evidence
of ciliary movement, in the forms examined by them.

Their internal relations are by no means easy to make out,
owing to two circumstances. Not only must the internal open-
ing (if such exist) be very minute, else the corpuscles may be
forced through it outwards, but it is also extremely likely tliat
even if it be not collapsed at death, it will contract during
fixation. After the examination, however, of numerous com-
plete series of sections, amounting to many thousandfi- in num-
ber, there is not the slightest doubt as to the existence of
an internal opening [Cf. PI. XXI., fig. 3], and that this leads into
the Renal Veins, or into blood spaces directly continuous with
these veins, the long cilia protruding into theee cavities among
the corpuscles much in the Siame way ds in Rana [Bles, '98, p.
75 ; Howes, PI. VII., Figs. XXXV., XXXVI.]. The actual in-
ternal opening has only been found in other forms among the

230 Georgina Sweet:

Anura, so far as I am aware, hj Nussbaum and Wichmann,
Marshall and Bles, in the genera Rana, Bufo, Bombinator, and
Alytes. Several others speak of the close relationship of the
internal end with the blood-veesels, but state that the opening
could not be traced with certainty. In no case, however, is
there any semblance of a connection with the Renal tubules.

In order to further test the truth of this observation, various
experiments were made. In the first of these, a modification of
Nussbaum's method, carmine was injected into the body caivities
of freshly pithed frogs, so that the carmine might if possible
be taken in through the ciliated funnels. Upon examination,
the carmine was found to have entered the kidney by these
openings and to be present only in the blood-vessels of the
ventral surface, in the Renal Veins, and in the Posterior Vena
Cava. In the second experiments, carmine waa carefully in-
jected into the Renal Portal Vein of a freshly-killed frog, an
opening being made in a branch of the Truncus Arteriosus.
After proper fixing, staining, embedding and sectioning, the
carmine was found to be present in all the venous spaces of
the kidney, some having escaped under the considerable pres-
sure exerted, through the nephrostomes, the particles being en-
tangled among the cilia of the«e funnels. But I was not able
to find any carmine within the kidney tubules. Farrington
[*93, p. 312] found considerable difficulty in preventing the
carmine particles from being scattered by the knife, through
every part of the kidney; but in these experiments of mine,
no such difficulty appeared, as the carmine was present in such
a manner in the blood spaces as to leave no room for doubt as
to the method of it« distribution.

JjTy/a Usueurti.

The general relations of the kidney are as in H. anirea. The
adrenal body is very well developed.

The nephrostomee are comparatively few in number, averag-
ing about 30 in each kidney. Here also I have been able to
detect an internal opening from the nephrostomial funnels into
the blood spaces on the ventral surface of the kidney. This
observation is confirmed by the results of injection. After in-
jection of the body cavity of freshly-pithed frogs as previously

Anatomy of Australian Aniphihia. 231

described for H. aurea, the carmine pai::fcicles were found in the
nephrostomial tubes and throughout all the blood-spaces of the
kidney and in the Renal and Renal Portal Veins, in which the
particles were embedded in the mass of coagulum, but none in
the uriniferous tubules or ureter. Apparently the pressxire in
the Posterior Vena Cava was so great in this instance that the
carmine found it easier to spread back into the branches of
the Renal Portal Vein than to pass on into the Posterior Vena
Cava.

BUFONIDAE.

Pseudophryne ausiralis.

The kidneys in this form are much more triangular in trans-
verse section than those of Hyla aurea, the outer edge being
formed by the ureter ventrally and Renal Portal Vein dorsally.
The Renal Veins emerge at the ventral edge of the inner side,
while the Renal Arteries enter the kidney just internal or dortsal
to the exit of the Renal Veins, and the Vasa efferentia enter
immediately to the outer side of these veins.

The general arrangement of the uriniferous tubules seems to
be as in Hyla aurea, the difference in character between the
glandular and conducting parts of the tubules being specially
well-marked. The Malpighian bodies are almost spherical and
somewhat less numerous than in Hyla aurea. There is but little
supportive fibrous tissue, though the blood-spaces are still
small and normal in relationship. The nephrostomes are most
numerous posterior to the plane of the hinder end of the
Testes, and from the median line of each kidney outwards.
Their funnels run more lengthwise and obliquely in the kidney
in this form than in the previous forms, so that they are less
often cut longitudinally in transverse sections of the kidneys.
However, here, as in Hyla aurea and H. lesueurii, they open into
the blood-spaces directly connected with the Renal Veins, their
internal ends being always surrounded by a mass of blood
corpuscles.

Notaden bennetti.

The kidneys of this form show the same tendency to adpres-
sion of the inner part of their dorsal surfaces as has already
been found in Pseudophryne australis. Here also the Renal

232 Ge(ytyina Sweet :

Veins are short and enormously large, causing often deep de-
pressions on the ventral surface of the kidney. The ureter in
some specimens of this speciee lies right outside the kidney in
the parietal peritoneum. Seen in transv^se section [see PI.
XX., Hg. 2], especially in the posterior half, the kidney of
Notaden is conspicuously unlike any of the forma so far
described. The vertical disposition of the tubules is very
strongly marked, in places forming radiating lines from the
midventral line of the kidney. The tubules have often pig-
mented walls. There is practically no " kidney-parenchyma,"
the whole kidney being extremely vascular, more so than in
any other form of which I have any knowledge, though
Chiroleptes alboguttatus, and Heleioporus pictus are also re-
markably vascular. The extreme posterior end has compara-
tively small blood-spaces, but they increase very rapidly in size
and number forwards from this point. Along the midventral
line of each kidney is developed as a core or " pelvis" occupying
one-third to one-half the thickness of the kidney, a series of large
venous spaces traversed or subdivided by a network of trabeculae,
the blood-spaces in which are connected on the one hand with the
Renal Veins, and on the other with the radiating blood-spaces
of the general kidney-substance. The general appearance of
the kidney microscopically is that of a groundwork of corpuscles
in which the tubules and Malpighian bodies are embedded.
The Malpighian bodies are normal in number, round and some-
what small in comparison with the size of the kidney. Those
in the outer half are often quite close to the ventral surface of
the kidney, while those elsewhere form two or three irregular
rows ait about the middle of the kidney thickness. The dif-
ferences in structure and appearance between the necks of the
Capsules, the conducting, glandular and collecting tubules,
though similar in character to that found typically aa in Hyla
aurea, are very much more strongly marked. The nuclei of the
cells forming the necks, and the conducting tubules stain very
deeply indeed with nuclear stains, so that it is only by careful
tracing of the tubules along their length that one can believe
that these parts and the glandular pan^s are really connected.

Tn nephrostomes also, Notaden bennetti is quite unlike pre-
viously-described forms. They are extremely numerous po*-

Anatomy of Australian Amphibia. 233

teriorly where the venous spaces form nearly half the thickness
of the kidney, and diminish in number somewhat irregularly
towards the anterior end. In one kidney alone I counted 1067
external openings of nephrostome funnels : I have seen as many
as 10 external openings in a single thin section across one
kidney. There are here several totally different types of
nephrostomes. The first are the normal ones like those found
most frequently in H'yla aurea, which are wide, short and un-
branched, aiid run almost horizontally beneath the kidney sur-
face, and emptying directly into the main venous spaces, very
much like that figured for another form in Fig. 4, except that
there is no supporting tissue in Notaden bennetti. The second
set, although resembling some of those in Hyla aurea in that
they branch, are quite distinct from those in the structure of
the " funnel." This is long, narrow and more tubular than in
any form previously described : it branches freely, running a
considerable distance into the centre of the kidney. The
branches, of which there may be as many as five from one
nephro«tome, run generally along the trabeculae and then leav-
ing them, end in a blood-s^pace. There I believe them to open,
though I have not been able to detect the actual aperture.
These nephrostomes are especially numerous on either side of
the main venous space.

Just within the inner and outer edges of each kidney, es-
pecially in the outer edge, are here and there coils of small
thin-walled tubes, whose cells have deeply staining nuclei, resem-
bling generally the second or branching type of nephrostomial-
tubule. Sometimes these open clearly to the exterior — ^tiorae
even on the dorsal side of the outer edge and anteriorly
(though still through the peritoneum which often is continued
on to the dorsal side of the kidney for a short distance) — at
other times they do not open, but are still connected with the
surface of the kidney, and may end blindly internally in a
swollen masis of cells — or, one, two, or three nephrostomes may
open into a single uriniferous tubule in its 4th part — or, yet
again, may apparently come into relationship with a smaller
type of Malpighian body than that usual elsewhere, while in
yet others, the Malpighian body is still there, but ia ver}' de-
generate.

10

234 Georgina Sweet :

It is, I think, evident that here we have exactly what Spengel
[Spengel, 77] and Meyer have described in Rana, viz., that the
nephro^tomes open into the 4th part of the uriniferous tubules,
and that two or more funnels may open into one tubule and vice
versa. It is curious that after 20 years, diu-ing which time no
one has confirmed SpengeVs and Meyer's work, but on the con-
trary everyone has shown it not to be true in the generality of
cases, one should come across a similar condition evidently as a
passing stage in a form such as Notaden belonging to quite a
different group of the Anura.

Forms of Notaden bennetti have been examined from New
South Wales as well a« Central Australia. The description
above given refers to the Central Australian form. There is no
comparison in the amount of blood supply in the two sets of
forms, the New South Wales form being practically normal as
regards its general vascularity, though there is still a lack of
supporting tissue, and a tendency to a central arrangement of
large venous spaces such as are so marked in the Central Aus-
tralian form of Notaden, and to a less extent in Heleioporus,
as will be s^een later. It should be added, however, that in the
New South Wales, as well as the Central Australian forms, the
various types of nephrostomial tubules are present, although
the total number of external nephrostome openings is very
much less.

Notaden, it may be remembered, is one of the burrowing
forms met with frequently in Northern Central Australia, where
during the drought season they remain underground, in per-
manent burrows, having first filled themselves out with water
[Spencer, '96. pp. 159, 163, etc.]. This water is apparently
taken in through the mouth, and probably through the skin
also, during the time of plentiful water, being then absorbed
into the vascular system, and excreted by the kidneys, passing
into the urinary bladder. It will be found that in the Report
of the Horn Expediton [loc. cit.] Professor Baldwin Spencer
has described this water as being in the body-cavity of these
frogs, but he informs me that on subsequent visits to Central
Australia and dissection of a considerable number of forms, he
has discovered that it is stored in the urinary bladder and not
in the body cavity. In Notaden bennetti there is always a con-

AnatoTiiy of Australian Amphibia. 235

siderable amount of coaf^lum alongf the ventral surface of the
kidney, showing the presence of considerable lymph in the
body cavity also. How the presence of no much water in the
bladder is related to the tremendous development of the
nephrostomes in this form is not at all easy to see, though there
is certainly an intimate relationship between the two facts. It
seems most probable that the watC'r from the extremely thin-
walled bladder soaks out into the body-cavity, and is passed
back by the nephrostomes into the blood vascular system
whence what is required may be taken by the organs of the
body, the surplus being again excreted into the bladder, and so
on; thus maintaining a constant circulation of this wat^r for
the benefit of the body generally. This return of waste with
the water from the bladder would be less injurious than in
the ordinary frog, since in these aestivating frogs oxidation
of the tissue will be at a minimum, probably only sufficient to
maintain life.

Cystignathidae.

Crinia signifera.

The general kidney arrangement does not call for any special
comment, the relationships of the kidney tubules, blood-spaxjes
and supportive tissue resembling those found in Hyla aiurea.
The glomeruli are spherical, very few in number, and situated
close to the ventral surface. The nephrostomes also are very
few in number, what there are being chiefly at the anterior end.
Their walls, however, are very easily distinguishable from those
of the uriniferous tubules. They are often not much more than
a slit, in some cases no cavity or cilia being ^dsible, but wherever
determinable, they open into the venous blood-spwices on the
Tentral surface.

The body cavity of this form also was injected, with the result
that the carmine was drawn through the nephrostomesi into the
blood-spaces of the ventral one-third of the kidney, though to a
very much less extent tham in other forms similarly treated.
The small number of nephrostomes, their frequently diminished
cavity, and their apparently smaller functional activity would
«eem to indicate that in Crinia signifera, they are rapidly losing

10a

236 Geo7'gma Sweet :

their function and ceasing to exist, compared with other forms
herein described, unless possibly Hyla lesueurii.

Chirokptes alboguttatus.

This form, like Notaden bennetti, is a burrowing one which
stores up water in its body while aestivating. Its kidneys are
almost oval in transverse section, and seem peculiarly liable to
be folded back against one another, their inner edges with the
Renal Veins forming the ventral edge of the mass- (Cf. also
Pseudophryne australis, and Notaden bennetti). The dorsal sur-
face of the kidney is the more convex. The kidneys resemble
those of Notaden in having the minimum of fibrouH tissue and
very large blood-spaces, though the large central venous space
found in Notaden is lacking here, the Renal Veins arising in
the usual way in Chiroleptes alboguttatus. The general vertical
(dorso-ventral) arrangement of the tubules and blood-spaces is
very strongly marked as seen in transverse sections, the
tubules being much pigmented and the blood-spaces crammed
full of corpuscles. The Malpighian bodies are rounded, very
few in number, and remarkably small in comparison with the
size of the kidney. Indeed one often comes across. f.ections in
which no sign of Malpighian bodies is to be seen. They are
found in the ventral one-third of the kidney thickness. The
nephrostomes, on the other hand, are numerous and well-de-
veloped, though not nearly to such an extent as in Notaden
bennetti. In number I found in one kidney, 210 external open-
ings, the number diminishing from the anterior end back-
wards. There is hardly a section in a full series through the
whole length of the kidneys, in which the nephrostomes are
absent, while there may be as many as six in one section. To
a certain extent they resemble Notaden in having two kinds of
" funnels,^' though the branched forms are much less developed
than in Notaden. These slope inwards as a rule, at an angle of
20 to 30 deg. for a short distance, and then branch : the
branches coil more or less through the substance of the kidney,
but always end in blood-spaces, where their cilia protrude among
the corpuscles which are so densely packed around these in-
ternal openings. There is also, near the median edge of the

Anatomy of Australian Amphibia. 237

kidney a series of large short nephrostomial funnels which open
immediately without branching into the main Renal Veins.

The strength of the blood pressure in the kidney, as well as'
a oorraboration of tlie connection of the funnels with the blood-
spaces, is shown in the fact that in two or three cases the red
corpuscles had been forced through the internal opening of
the nephrostome funnel, and were lying entangled among its
cilia. As may be inferred from this statement, the cavity in
many of these funnels is much greater than in some others
of the previous genera. Here, too, although the development
of nephrostomes is not so great as in Notaden bennetti, the
association of intense vascularity of the kidney with aestivation
is very evident.

Heleioportis picius.

Here also the kidneys are almost oval in transverse section.
The Ureter and Renal Portal Vein lie on the dorsal sxu-face,
near but not at the outer edge. Heleioporus pictus is another
of the burrowing aestivating forms, amd, as in Notaden bennetti
and Chiroleptes alboguttatus, we have here a very vascular kidney
somewhat resembling Notaden in type, but much less developed.
As in those forms also, the connective tissue is very small in
amount, and the blood-spaces are so crammed full of corpuscles
that no definite walls are often to be found. The regular dorsal-
ventral arrangement of the kidney is interfered with somewhat
by the greater convolution of the glandular part of the kidney
tubules. The glomeruli are spherical and much more numerous
than in the last two forms. The neck of the tubule opens dor-
sally from the Malpighian body, while the blood vessels enter
and leave the outer side of the glomerulus [see Text figure and
PL XXI., fig. 4J. The nephrostomes are not as numerous as in the
last numbering in each kidney 105. They are almost entirely
absent at the anterior end, gradually increasing in number to
the beginning of the posterior one-third of the length of the
kidney, and then diminishing very rapidly to- the posterior end.
They have been found to open some into the general venous
blood-spaces of the kidney, where their cilia may be seen pro-
truding inwards and surrounded by blood corpuscles: others
lying on either side of the main branches of the Renal Veins

238 Georgina Sweet:

may open directly into them. The funnels are large and long
[see PL XXI., iig. 4], and in the case of the former, which are
branching forms, after entering the kidney obliquely they run
horizontally for some distance and then branch, their branches
running along the trabeculae far into the ventral half of the
kidney thickness. These branching form« of nephrostominal
tubules resemble those of Hyla aurea, and Chiroleptes albogut-
tatus, rather than the more strongly defined type found in
Notaden. I have examined specimens from Central Australia
and from Victoria, and find very little difference in the kidneys
of the forms from the two areas.

Litmiodynastes dorsalis.

The kidneys are here much flattened ventraJly and • convex
dorsally, the adrenal body forming in transverse sections a con-
spicuous structure along the middle of the kidney. In general
the internal structure is very similar to that found in Hyla
aurea, the connective tissue being considerable in amount
[see Plate XXI , fig. 3], and the blood-spaces small and
empty and well-defined compared with those of the last three
forms — ^the glomeruli are round and fairly numerous. The
nephrostome funnels are short and unbranched and somewhat
larger than in Rana catesbiana (.035 mm. in diameter ac-
cording to Farrington ['93, p. 310]), while those of Limno-
dynastes dorsalis are .037 to .04 mm. They have a well-
marked cavity, their internal ends projecting into the blood-
spacas [PL XXI., tig. 3] among the corpuscles when these are pre-
sent. I have not detected amy funnek opening into the main
branches of the Renal Veins as in some forms previously de-
scribed herein. In specimens injected from the Renal Portal
Veins under pressure, the carmine was found to be present
throughout the blood-spaces, and had beem forced out by the
pressure into the funnels where the particles were found en-
tangled among the cilia.

B. — TiiK Connection of tiik Vasa effkrentia with thk

Kidney.

Here, as in Part A, the object in view is to find a sequence of
forms in this case illustrating the mamner in which in the course
of the evolution of the group, the male reproductive ducts have

Anatomy of Australian A^niphibia. 239

been gradually separated off from the kidney tubules. In the
Fishes and in the Urodeles and Coecilidae, the male reproductive
ducts are very closely connected with the anterior sexual part
of the kidney. In Bufo and Rana esculenta, they are closely
connected with the Malpighian bodies of the urinary tubules
of the kidney ; in Raina fusca the connection is less close, being
only with the collecting tubules. The severance increases in
Bombinator and Disa^glossus, till in Alytes" the male ducts
open quite independently of the kidney, into the ureter : i.e., a
portion of the mesonephric duct separates off as a duct for the
testis, and at the level of the wider end of the kidney this
joins the remnant of the original mesonephric duct which
functions as a kidney duct.

The question of the relationships in Ranai has been a much
vexed one from the time of Bidder's work in 1846, but as most
of it has arisen through the confusion of the two species R.
e«culenta and R. fusca, its results may be summed up as
above. Nussbaum's work ['97, p. 425.], and that of Beissner
['98, p. 168.] practically settle the main connections as given
above for these two species, the only variation between the two
being that Nussbaum has only found the longitudinal Bidder's
canal in R. e^culenta, while Beissner describes it in R. fusca also.

General Structure and Relationships of Ducts.

The testes lie ventrally to the anterior portion of the kid-
ney, being kept in position by the mesorchium,, the fold of
peritoneum which encloses them entirely, except for one part
of their inner surfaces where the blood-vessels and ducts enter
or leave them. [See PI. XX., fig. 1.] In shape and size, they
vary greatly in different individuals and at different times of
the year — and as most of my material was spirit-preserved,
except Hyla aurea, Crinia signifera and Limnodynastes dorsalis,
due allowance has to be made for distortion by pressure of other
organs.

Hylidak.

Hyla aurea, [PI. XX., fig. 1].

When fully developed, the testes aire long, whitish cylindrical
bodies, each end being rounded. They average 10 or 11 mm. in

240 Oeorgina Sweet :

length and 3 mm. in diameter. The Yasa efferentia run
straight from the testis to the kidney, and then entering the
latter spread directly dorsalwards, branching to enter the
ventral ends of the long Malpighian capsules, a« in Bufo
[Spengel, '77] and Rana esculenta [Nu€sbaum, '97, 1 and 2, and
Beissner, '98]. These canals have narrow cavities, and thin
walla of small cubical cells with large darkly staining nuclei,
and, as a rule, they stand out conspicuously in sections across
the kidney of this form. I have not been able to make certain
of the existence of a Bidder's canal in Hyla aurea, comparaible
to that described for Bufo cinereus by Spengel ['77], and by
Nussbaum ['97, p. 425] for Rana esculenta, and by Beissner
['98, p. 168] for R. fu^ca also. There is no doubt, however,
that the vasa efferentia do open into the Malpighian Capsules,
unlike R. fusca, Bombinator, Disooglossus, and Alytes [Wieder-
sheim, '86 p. 784], where they open either into the collecting
tubules (Cf. R. fusca), or into the ureter itself. As the testis
in all male specimens examined by me was comparatively little
developed, and no spermatozoa were present in the vasa effer-
entia, either inside or outside the kidney, it is possible that the
Bidder's canal may be present, but small and contracted, and
so evade recognition. It is chiefly the Malo-ighian capsules near
the inner edge of the kidney which are thus connected with
the vasa efferentia.

BUFONIDAE.

Pseudophryfie aiistralis.

Here the testes were large, flat, irregular in outline, together
hiding fully two-third« of the kidneys when viewed from the
ventral surface, extending also anteriorly and laterally beyond
each kidney. Here, as in all other forms of which male speci-
mens were examined, tlie Vasa efferentia of each testis run in
the mesorchium dorsalwards to the kidney of its own side.
They then in Pseudophryne, enter the kidpey at the outer edge
of the Renal Veins without any previous branching. They
appear to run straight in and without forming a Bidder's
canal enter the Malpighian capsules at their ventral edge as in
Hyla aurea. Curiously, although the testes in the specimens
examined are large and well-developed, I could find no sperm

Anatcnny of AustrcUian A7)iphibia, 241

in the vasa efferentia, the kidney or ureter. I have, however,
no doubt as to the connection of the branches of the Vasa
eifferentia with the Malpighian capsules asi above described.
[Cf. PI. XX., fig. 1.]

Notaden bennetti.

In the male specimens of this species available, the testes
were spherical bodies having about the same diameter as the
kidney itself, but quite unsymmetrically placed — the one at
about the middle of the length of its kidney, the other at the
posterior end of its kidney — each lying laterally to the kidney
of its own side, the mark * [in PL XX., fig. 2] indicating the
inner edge of the testis lying in the mesorchium. As stated in
Part I. A., the ureter lies often in the peritoneum lateral to
the kidney, and often, near the hinder end of the kidney and
posterior to this, it swells out to form a large glandular Vesi-
cula seminalis. The Vasa efferentia pass in along the mesor-
chium, and entering the kidney run straight out to open into
the Bowman's capsules of the Malpighian bodies in the inner
one-third of the kidney. I have been unable to find any
longitudinal Bidder's canal.

Chiroleptes albogtittatus.

In this form the testes are long and thin, and in the t-peci-
mens examined very feebly developed, probably owing to the
season of the year. They were approximately one-half the
length of the kidney and one-third its average width. The
Vasa efferentia pass into the kidney at its inner edge from the
inner side of the testis as u^uaJ, and spread out at once into
the kidney substance without forming any longitudinal canal.
Apparently they enter the ventral part of Bowman's capsule, as
in previous forms. Owing to the extreme vascularity of the
kidney and the great number of corpuscles present in all the
blood-spaces, it is difficult to make out the relationship of these
ducts further than as indicated above.

Heleioporus pidus.

The testes of H. pictus are very irregular in shape, and
unequally developed on each side — that on the one side being

242 Georgina Siveet :

m

nearly the full length of the kidney, and that on the other
only half that length. The path followed by the sperm on its
way to the exterior* is more clearly seen here than in any other
form examined by me, as not only were the testes very larg«
and well developed, but the «perm could be traced right through
the kidney to the ureter.

Tlie Vasa efferentia leaving the testis run dorsally, forming a
network in the mesorchium, to open into a longitudinal Bid-
der's canal. Both network and canal are continued posteriorly
and also anteriorly to the plane of the testis. The canal lies
further from the middle line than the Renal Arteriefi, and both
are nearer the middle line than the Renal Veins. From the
ampullae on this canal ducts pass both dorsally aoid laterally,
dividing up greatly — one ventral branch runs ventrally
towards the outer edge of the kidney forming the ventral
transverse canal, as seen in the Text-figure. The branches of
these canals open into the ventral part of the Malpighian Cap-
sules. In many cases, thi« Bowman's capsule is greatly distended
by tlie masses of sperm [See Pi. XXL, tig. 5j, the glomerulus being
pushed quite to one side. All the Malpighian bodies are not
so connected with the sperm ducts, and there is certainly a
relationship between the position of the Malpighian body and
its connection or otherwise with the sperm duct*. Thus no
sperm is to be found in the Malpighian bodies occupying the
outer nne-third of the width of the kidney even when sperm is
present in the tubules near by. One is apt to be misled as to
the existence of such connection, since it does not follow
invariably that even when the sperm ducts, and the uriniferous
tubules are both full of sperm, that any will be found in the
Bowman's capsule to and from which they are clearly open.
Nevertheless, I have not been able to find any sperm ducts
opening' into the Capsules along the outer edge of either kidney
(Of. previous forms, e.g., Hyla aurea, amd Notaden bennetti).
From the Malpighian bodies, the sperm passes by the ordinary
uriniferous tubules into the tranfeverse collecting tubes which
run outwards parallel with the dorsal surface of the kidney to
pass their contents into the ureter where the sperm may be
seen in great numbers.

ATiatoniy of Australian Amphibia. 243

Lying in the coelom ventral to the kidney is a flat branching
structure nearly coextensive in length with the testis on either
side. It is attached to the mesorchium on the outer side of
the latter, by connective tissue across which small arteries
pass from the Renal Arteries, and small veins to the Renal
Veins. In appearance it is somewhat lymphoid, and might be
regarded as a rudimentary fat-body, this being absent in the
specimens examined, but for its position. That structure is
att«<;hed normally to the anterior end of the testis, while this
liee between the kidney and the testis for almost the whole
extent of the latter. A very rudimentary^ condition of what is
apparently the same structure was «een in one instaoace in
Notaden bennetti, where it is in much closer relationship to
th© kidney surface. I am unable at this stage to add any
further evidence as to its homologies or function.

Limnodynastes dorsalis.

Here the testes are very similar to tho^e of Hyla aurea, except
that occasionally the testis may lie quite anterior to the kidney.
The arrangement of the Vasa efferentia, of the sperm ducts in
the kidney and their entrance into the Malpighian capsules, are
all similar to that already described in previous forms. As
in Hyla aurea, Pseudophryne australis and Notaden bennetti, I
have not been able to find any longitudinal Bidder's canal, ihe
"Vasa efferentia apparently going straight into the substance of
the kidney.

Summary.

The results of this enquiry may be briefly summed up thus : —

1. Nephrostomial openings from the coelom are present in
each of the eight species examined — ^viz., Hyla aurea and H.
lesueurii ; Pseudophryne australis and Notaden bennetti ;
Crinia signifera, Chiroleptes alboguttatus, Heleiporu« pictus and
Limnodynastes dorsalis.

2. There are five main types of nephrostomes and nephros-
tomial tubules.

3. The first, which never branch, open directly into the main
braniches of the Renal Veins. These are present in all forms.

244 Gemyina Sweet:

4. Those of the second type are unbranched nephron tomee
opening into the uriniferous tubules, as first described by
Spengel in Rana. These are found in Notaden bennetti only.

5. The third type consists of branched nephrostomial tubulee
opening into the venous spaces. These are found in all forms,
and especially well developed in Notaden bennetti.

6. The fourth type is also branched nephrostomial tube^
opening however into the uriniferous tubules. This is found in
Notaden bennetti only.

7. The fifth type is a third form of branched nephrostome
tube, which is closed at either or both ends. These are only
known in Notaden bennetti.

8. It will thus be seen that in all forms, nephrostomes open-
ing into the Renal Veins are present, these being the only type
present in most; in one form Notaden bennetti, all five kinds
of internal connections are found.

9. It appears evident that these structures are undergoing
very rapid modification at the present time.

10. In Notaden bennetti anad Chiroleptes alboguttatus, the
vascularity of the kidney is very strongly marked — the
uriniferous tubules appearing to lie in a series of much branched
sinuses — the epithelial lining being in many cases almost im-
possible to determine. The same is true, though to a less ex-
tent, in Heleioporus pictus. The vascularity would thus appear
to be associated with the capacity of these frogs for storing
water in the urinary bladder while aestivating in their burrows
during the dry seasons.

11. There is also a marked difference in the number of
nephrostome openings in one kidney from a minimum of 30 in
Hyla lesueurii, to a maximum of 1067 in Notaden bennetti.

12. Hyla lesueurii and Crinia signifera are the most de-
generate in respect of their nephrostomes.

13. Evidence from frogs injected with carmine indicates
that the nephrostomes do function for the conveyance of
material from the body cavity into the kidney.

14. In all forms, the Vasa efferentia enter the kidney just
external to the Renal Arteries.

15. In Heleioporus pictus a well-marked longitudinal Bid-
der's canal is present, as possibly also in Hyla aurea, though

Anatomy of Australian Amphibia. 245

not in Pseudophryne australis, Chiroleptes alboguttatus, Nota-
den bennetti, or Limnodynastes dorsalis.

16. In all forms examined the Vasa efferent i a brivnch and
enter the ventral part of Bowman's capsules, in the inner one-
third or two-thirds of the kidney.

Conclusions.

It must be conceded that there is considerable evidence
given by the forms herein described, that in the course of
their disappearance in the adult condition during the evolution
of the group, the nephrostomes have been subjected to well-
marked nM)dification — their original connection with the kidney
tubules being tramsferred to the Renal Veins, w^ith a correlated
change of function from the pa.^sage of fluid to the exterior
from the body cavity, to that of lymph vessels. Moreover their
degree of development seems to be to a great extent individual
or characteristic of the species, varying greatly in harmony
with their functional importance both in turn being associated
apparently with differences in the habit of the animal. In
Notaden bennetti for some reason or other, alongside the greater
development in one direction, there seems to h^ve been a check
to the harmonious development of these structures in all parts
of the kidney, since there are still present along the edges,
nephrostomial tubules in various stages of modification, a^ to
their internal connections.

In all the speoies here described, of which male specimens
wCTe obtained, we find that the separation of the male re-
productive ducts from the excretory ducts has not yet begun,
the condition being comparable to that found in Rana esculenta,
the higher stage found in Rana fusca not being present in the
Australiajn species so far examined. They are therefore far
lees specialised than are the corresponding parts in Alytes
obstetricans, the most specialised known in the Anura.

I have again to thank Professor Baldwin Spencer for the use
of the Biological Laboratory in the University of Melbourne,
where this work has been done, and for the use of his collec-
tion of BpCHsimens, and those of the Biological Museum, as well
as for much kindly interest and valued advice.

246 Georgina Sweet:

Literature.

Beissner, H. — Der Bau der samenableitenden Weg© bei Rana

fusca und R. esculent a: Archiv. fur Mikroskopiscbe

Anatomie: Bd. 53: 1898—9: p. 168.
Ble«, E. J. — Correlated Distribution of Abdominal Pores and

Nephrostomes in Fishes : Jour, of Anat. and Phys. : Vol.

XXXII. 1898,2 p. 484.
Bles, E. J. — On the connection between the peritoneal cavity

and Renal Veins through Nephrostomial tubules in

Frog: Proc. Camb. Phil. Soc, Vol. 9, Pt. 2, 1895-8, p.

73.
Brauer, A. — Zur Kenntnis der Entwickelung der Excretions

organe der Gymnophionen : Zool. Anzeiger. Bd. 23,

1900, p. 353.
Ecker. — Anatomy of Frog (English translation) by Haslam \

Oxford, 1889.
Frankl, 0. — Die Ausfuhrwege der Harnsamenniere dee

Frosches ; Zeitschr. wissen. Zoolog . Bd. 63, Heft 1 :

1898, p. 23.
Farrington, 0. C. — The Nephrostomes of Rana. Trans. Con-
necticut Academy, Vol. VIII., Part 2 (1893), p. 309.
Hill, J. P. — Abnormal Connection of Renal Portals in young

Limnodynastes peronii : Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W., Ser.

3. Vol. 8, Part 2, p. 222.
Hoffmann. — "Zur Entwickelungsgeschicte der Urogenitalorgane

bei den Anamnia" — Zeitschrift wissen. Zool. Bd.

44, 1886, p. 573.
Holmes. — ^Biology of the Frog. New York, 1906.
Howes. — Atlas of Practical Elementary Zootomy, Plat© VIL,

Figs. XXXV. and XXXVI.
Marshall and Bles. — Development of Kidneys and Fat-bodies in

the Frog-studies from the Biological Department, Owwi's

College, Vol. 2, 1890, p. 133.
Nussbaum. — Ueber die Endigung der Wimpertrichter in der

Niere der Anuren. Zool. Anz., 1880, p. 514.
Nussbaum. — Der Geschlechtsteil der Froschniere — Zool. Anz.,

1897, p. 425.

Proo. K.8. Victoria, 1907. Plate XX

/•»

f'-

: •'

--- ■

r

^

-"-

Y

*
f

«

4»

9

^

■

v"*

5

Anatomy oj Australian Aviphibia. 247

Nussbaum.— ^Notiz zu dem Auf^atze — 0. Frankl's. " Die Ausfuhr.

der Ham. des Frosches" — Archiv. f. Mikr. Anat. Bd. 51,

1897,3 p. 213.
Sedgwick.— Text-book of Zoology, Vol. 2, 1905.
Shore, T.W. — Renal Portal Veins in the Frog* — Jour. Anat. and

Phys., Vol. 34, 1900, p. 398.
Shore, T. W. — Development of the Renal Portals and fate of

the Posterior Cardinals in the Frog. Jour. Amat. and

Phys., Vol. 36, 1901, p. 20.
Spencer, W. B. — Report of the Horn Expedition, 1896, Part I.,

Narrative p. 21 — Part XL, Zoology, etc., of. p. 159, 163,

etc.
Spengel, J. W. — " Die Segmentalorgane der Amphibien " ; and

Das Urogenitalsy>tem der Amphibien " : Jahresberichte

Anatomic und Physiologic. Band V. 1877, p. 330 [see

also Ecker, p. 329].
Warren. — Variations in the Blood vasculao" system of Rana

t^mporaria : Zool. Anzieger, Bd. 25, 1902, p. 221.
Wiedersheim. — ^Anatomic der Wirbelthiere, 1886.
Woodland, W. — A suggestion concerning the origin and signi-
ficance of the " Renal Portal System. '* Proc. Zool. Soc,

London, 1906, p. 886.

a.

b. sp.

c. t.

e. o. n.

g-

gl.

i. 0. n.

k. s.

mes.

n.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES XX., XXI.

Reference Letters.

= Ampulla on longitudinal Bidder's canal.

= Blood-space.

=: Ciliated part of uriniferous tubule.

= External opening of nephrostome.

= Glomerulus in Malpighian body.

= Gland (?)

^ Internal opening of nephrostome.

= Connective tissue forming supportive substance of

kidney.
= Mesorchiura.
=: Neck of uriniferous tubule

248 Georgina Sweet

per.

= Peritoneum.

R. A.

= Renal artery,

K P. V.

= Renal portal vein.

R. V.

= Renal vein.

R. Vp

= Main branch of Renal vein.

t.

Testis.

t. c. c.

= Transverse collecting canal.

ur.

= Ureter.

ur. t.

= Uriniferous tubule.

V. c. c.

= Vertical collecting canal.

V. e.

Vas eflferens.

V. t. c.

Ventral transverse canal.

All figures except Fig. 1 were drawn by the aid of the Camera

lucida.

Figure 1.

Transverse vertical section through both kidneys and testes
of Hyla aurea, showing general structure and relationships of
kidney and Testis. The blood capillaries among the tubules
are much too small to be shown in this figure. x 1 2.

FiGURK 2.

Transverse vertical section through the kidney of Notaden
bennetti, showing the tendency to form a " hilus " and the
marked vasoulairity compared with that of Hyla aurea. The
testis is not represented in the figure, but is enclosed by the
mesorchium lying on the outer side of *. The section drawn
is one taken through the region where the nephrostomes are
least numerous ; one, however, is shown at X, its openings
being in succeeding sections. x 12.

Figure 3.

Small portion of ventral edge of a trantverse vertical section
across the kidney of Limnodynastes dorsalis, showing the in-
ternal (i.o.n.) and external (e.o.n.) openings of a typical
nephrostonie ; and its relationships to the blood-spaces (b. sp.)
and uriniferous tubules (ur. t.). The blood-spaces marked i
and -4", communicate directly with each other in the section

Anatomy of Australian Amphibia. 249

succeeding the one drawn — ± being situated in a main branch
of the Renal Vein (R.V.). The amount of supportive connec-
tive tissue present in this form should be noted as characteristic
of one type of kidney. x 200.

Figure 4.

Small portion of ventral edge of a transverse vertical section
across the kidney of Heleioporus pictus. In contrast to Figure
3, there is to be noted here, the remarkable development of
blood-spaces (b. sp.) — often without walls of their own—at the
expense of the supportive connective tissue. The length of the
nephrostomes is well seen, as also the internal opening (i.o.n.)
with the cilia protruding among the blood corpuscles in the
blood-space. For the sake of clearness, the blood corpuscles
have been represented ats much fewer than they really are, the
whole space being crammed full of them in this form. x 200.

Figure 5.

Section similar to that in Figure 4, though much anterior to
it, aaid less magnified, showing the gland (?) (gl.)» ^^d the con-
nection of a Vas efferens with the ampulla (a), on Bidder's
longitudinal canal, and especially the opening of w branch from
the ampulla directly into the Malpighian capsule, where the
mass of sperm has pushed the glomerulus (g.) quite to one side.
The presence of sperm in the uriniferous tubules is also shown.
x60.

11

[Proc. Koy. Soc. Victoria, 20 (N.S.), Pt. II.. 1907.]

Akt. XVI. — The Hvjltlands and Main Divide of

Westeini Victoria.

By T. S. hart, M.A., F;G.S.
(With Plates XXII.-XXVI.).
[Read 12th December, 1907.]

The highlands of AVe«tern Victoria form an area mostly occu-
pied by ancient rocks between the north-western and south-
western plarinsr. The line of Division on these highlands be-
tween the north and south flowing streams is variously spoken
of as the Main Divide or the Dividing Range; to the latter
name the words '' Main ' and " Great " are pften prefixed. TOiese
names are also applied to the rest of the main watershed line
throughout the State.

The name Great Dividing Range had a very simple origin.
In the days of early settlement exact description of localitiee
was desirable, and the colony was divided into counties. For
the most part the boundary lines of these counties are the
streams, as being easily located natural boundaries ; hence the
main wajtershed became the boundary between the counties of
the south slope and those of the north. This watershed is an
actual fact on the land, usually easily located, though not always
conspicuous. For the most part it forms a range in the popular
sense of the word. It divides adjacent valleys, and from the
fact that it forms the dividing line between a series of northerc
and a series of southern valleys, it easily became known as the
Great Dividing Range. The first official use of the term was in
connection with the definition of county boundaries,' purely
as a descriptive term without reference to its varying character.
But apart from any geological examination the early surveyors
must have known that its aspect varied considerably, and that
occasionally it required careful observation to exactly decide

1 N. S. Wales Government Gazette, 1848.

Highlands of Western Victoria. 251

its position. The use of the term did not imply that it was a
Mountain Range in an exact geological sense (the date of in-
troduction of the term should be remembered), nor do geologists
ever seem to have regarded it as such.

Rather strangely Professor Gregory^ has described Mr.
Reginald Murray as supporting the term, and connects with this
supposed support its frequent use. Murray^s "Geology and
Physical Geography" was published in 1887, nearly forty years
after the term had first been officially used. But we find on
reference to the book that Murray does not use the term Great
Dividing Range, but consistently speaks of the "Main Divide."
Apparently his supposed support consisted in describing a madn
divide in Victoria running from east to west, whereas Brough
Smyth^ had previously described the principal dividing line as
running south to Wilson's Promontory. But Selwyn' had
already dealt with this idea, tracing it to Coujit Strzelecki in
A map published in 1845.

Every objection which is urged against the Great Dividing
Range can be used with at leaat equal force against this line
to the Promontory. It does not conform to the arrangement of
the ancient folded rocks ; it is composed of residual ridges of
denudation, and further it crosses the Mesozoic trough (a feature
which cannot be paralleled on the Main Divide) ; so that on this
Bouthern line the continuity of any early high land area was soon
interrupted. Brough Smyth himself uses the terms " Dividing
Range" and "Great Dividing Range," and applies the shorter
term even to the Mt. Ararat ridge far distant from his main
dividing line, and subsequent to the date at which, he had
-described the latter.^

On the geological map of Victoria the term Great Dividing
Range appears, but its use is not due to Murray. He distinctly
says* that " the latest Geological Sketch map is — ^with the addi-
tion of being geologically coloured — the topographical map is-
sued from the Crown Lands Department." Even here the con-

1 The Geography of Victoria, 1903, p. 62.

2 Ooldftelds and Mineral Districts of Victoria, 1809.

8 Notes on the Physical Geography and Geology of Victoria, 1867.
4 Report of Progress of the Geological Survey of Victoria, II., 1874, p. 18; HI., 1875,
p. 17.

6 Op. oit., p. 8.

llA

252 T. S. Hart :

spicuousness of the Divide i« largely due to the fact that in
addition to the hill-shading there is the broken line used to
denote the county boundary. The boundary is an actual fact in
the configuration of the surface, but without the hill-shading
would have been shown in the same way as the point-to-point
lines which have to do duty as boundaries in ?ome parts of the
plains.-!-

North-west of Ballarat is a part of the range which Professor
Gregory particularly criticises. He presents what is said to be
an actual view of the country, and states that a number of
persons would vary considerably in their location of the Divide
at this point. I have put the question to a. class of students
on the road between Blowhaffd and Ascot, and though most of
them were quite unacquainted with the place they had no diffi-
culty in determining its position, and were all in agreement. I
have, however, good information that the photograph reproduced
in illustration was not taken on the Divide Jit all. Certainly
it does not truly represent the character of the Divide at this
point.

Enough has probably been said to show that Murray cannot
be regarded as in any way responsible for the use of the term,
and that its use and the prominence assigned to it by the
Lands Department is not, from their point of view, unreasonable.

Professor Gregory goes further, and says that the Great
Dividing Range is " a misleading geographical myth." We
have seen that the Divide is certainly an actual fact ; the name
may be badly chosen, but it is ordinary curreoit language, and
makes no claim to be a scientific term. It does not seem to
have misled many scientific investigators, though it may have
been misleading in the teaching of geography by teachers with
little scientific knowledge. Professor Gregory attacks the
biological evidence. He depreciates the support of the-
biologists by hinting that it biassed and selects out of the mass
of evidence, two items for his argument of disproof, the dis-
tribution of the eel and of the varieties of magpies. He says
that he has heard from fishermen of eels being taken froni the
tributaries of the Murray; so have most people, but unfor-

1 See boiuidaries of the County of Ripon on the Geological Map of Victoria.

Highlands of Western Victoria. 253

tunately for the argument the Murray eels turn out on investiga-
tion to be either lampreys or importations, though it is quite in
accordance with the known habits of eels to wriggle across the
Divide occasionally, as they can travel some distance on land
during heavy rains. The magpie is scarcely worth considera-
tion in this connection ; it can fly across the Divide if it likes
If one variety is northern and the other southern, there is
nothing to keep either exactly in its place. In spite of any-
thing that can be said, the fact remains that there is a greater
difference between the plants and animals of northern and
southern Victoria than there is between those of southern Vic-
toria and Tasmania.^ This is all the more remarkable when
we consider the Divide closely. Differences in climate and soil
haive a large share in producing this result, but we can only
explain its importance in this respect by considering it a Divide
which has been much longer established than Bass' Strait.

There is little doubt, however, that Bass' Strait dates from
within the human period in Victoria,^

The Main Divide, from a geographical point of view, is a
watershed line of composite chai'acter between the north and
south flowing gtrea.ms. Biologically it is an area of highlands
sufficient to offer some direct obstruction to the migration of
plants and animals, and to establish a climatic difference which
further affects their distribution. Commercially and indus-
trially it is important, not only for this climatic difference, but
because it is a sufficient barrier to have determined trade routes
by its easiest passes. Politically it has become incorporated as
a boundary line of districts in much of our administrative
system.

I propose now to consider the character of the western high-
lands as a whole, then of the Divide as we now see it, then its
origin and early history.

The rocks of the western highlands are for the most part
coloured as Ordovician on the geological maps, though direct
evidence of fossils has not yet been obtained over the greater

1 A. H. S. Lucas, " On some facts in the Geogrraphical Distribution of Land and Fresh-
water Vertebrates in Victoria." Froc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, IX., new senes, 1897.

2 A. W. Howitt, Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science, Sydney,
1898. Presidential Address, Section G.

254 T. 8. Hart:

part of the area. With th«?6 are associated granitic and
metamorphic rocks and a few small patches of more basic
igneous rocks. In the extreme west a considerable area of
sandstones usually regarded as Upper Palaeozoic occurs, resting
on the granitic, metamorphic and other old rocks. A few scat-
tered patches of the Permo-carboniferous glacial series also occur,
though these are absent from the greater part of the area.

The Mesozoic rocks we may regard as outside our present sub-
ject. The supposed occurrence of this series at Skipton requires
further evidence before it can be accepted as definitely of this
age. I

Overlying the older rocks on the highlands are fluviatile,
lacustrine and volcanic rocks of Cainozoic age. On the margins
of the highlands some of these beds may be literal or eatuarine.
The fluviatile deposits are in some cases remnants, and then
usually at a high level ; in other cases they are well preserved
continuous valley deposits, forming deep leads either above or
below the present valley levels.

The present surface configuration is not determined by the
folding of the older rocks. To quote Selwyn, " the strike of the
older rocks constituting the mass of the main range is at right
angles to the axis of the range itself, and quite uninfluenced by the
granitic and other plutonic or basaltic rocks occasionally met
with equally on the range as on either side of, and remote from,
its axis."

From almost any eminence one of the first features of the
landscape which attracts attention is the occurrence of long
lines of nearly level-topped or undulating ridges. Occasionally
these ridges may abruptly end or be continued at a lower level
Here and there an isolated volcanic hill rises, or it may be a
group of such hills, and more rarely there are lolitary hills and
ranges of other appearance. The general character is that of a
plateau which has been deeply trenched by a series of valleys.
Between these valleys are the residual ridges, the remnants of the
old high plain.

If we imagine the high plain restored following the line of
the present nearly level hill crests, we would have a plain

1 R. A. F. Murray-, Rei)ort on the Skipton Coal Seams. Report of ProgreM Oeol. Surv.
Victoria, VII., 18«

Highlands of Westei^i Victm^ia. 255

often with an appreciable slope and with marked difference of
level at different parts. Abrupt inequalities would be found at
places, a«, for instance, on the east face of the Grampians, the
south face of the Pyrenees, and to the south-west of Bacchus
Marsh. In other cases the fall would be gradual as from
Daylesford south-westerly. We must bear in mind, however,
that it is possible for a long gradual slope of the summits to be
a result of denudation of a once level surface; as the lower
parts of the valleys are likely to be deeper and wider, the
ridges between ih&m, if narrow, may be reduced in height.

The plain clearly does not conform to the folds of the under-
lying rocks, and is a plain due to excavation, not accumulation
of material. As the superficial deposits of the plain are of
terrestrial origin we may regard the plain as due to subaerial
denudation, and a§ representing a peneplain formed by long
continued erosion.

Possibly a few low ridges older than the peneplain may still
be recognised. The present highest point in Western Victoria *
is Mt. William, 3827 feet above sea level; Mt. Buangor in the
Pyrenees reaches 3247- Mt. Buangor is, however, simply a part
of the sloping plateau stretching far to the north. If it were
part of an older peneplain we would expect more advanced dis-
section of the mass, whereas the steep valleys of the south
slope of the Pyrenees are clearly of no great antiquity. Also
if Mt. William and the accompanying ridges had existed before
the peneplain was established, we would expect them to be either
more dissected, or that we would find marine deposits extending
into their deep valleys. Both of these are best regarded a®
most elevated parts of the peneplain itself. The peak of Mt.
Ararat is in the hard contact rocks adjacent to the granitic
rock, and with the present small width of the ridge would
naturally result from denudation of a late darte, and still in
progress.

The granitic hills of Mts. Beckworth, Bolton and Miseiy
appear to be possible peaks rising above the peneplain ; the
highest points of the first two of these, at whatever date estab-
lished, are due to the resistant character of a fine gradned
granite poor in mica. Their relation to the general level of the
peneplain is obscured by the extensive basaltic covering on both

256 T. S, Hart :

sides of them. Most probably they stand above it. Mt. Doran
stands up well above the level of a flarf; ledge on its east side.
On this ledge are the Lai Lai iron ores, but recent deep valleys
running down to the Moorabool have reduced both ledge and
iron ores to a series of fragments. Probably the ledge repre-
sents the peneplain level. Mt. Egerton may be similar to Mt.
Doran.

The great volcanic plains are subsequent to the elevation and
partial dissection of the peneplain.

As to age, it appears most reasonable to a«sign the pene-
plain to the long continued Mesozoic denudation reaching its
final condition at the commencement of the Cainozoic. The
oldest of the fluviatile deposits on its surface, commonly called
the oldest gold drift., afford no fossils, but on field evidence both
on the Moorabool and at Stawell, they are to be regarded afl
equivalents of some part of the Barwonian series in the marine
beds, and probably of its lower part.^

The older volcanic Rocks in many parts of Eastern Victoria
bury lacustrine deposits with fossils of early Tertiary age.
The Older Volcanic hsus been shown to be Barwonian by Messrs.
Hall and Pritchard,^ and it appears to occupy in some cases
positions which are practically level with the peneplain as if it
had flowed in and filled the earliest valleys of the first stages
of elevation.

The elevation which stopped the formation of the peneplain
and introduced a new period of deep valleys, may not have
been simultaneous in all parts of Victoria, nor was it without
interruption as is seen by the advance of the marine deposits
over fluviatile at the Welcome Rush, Stawell,^ and by oscil-
lations of level proved in the marine tertiaries.

The folding of the old sediments and their invasion by the
granitic rocks had long ceased before the formation of the pene-
plain. But unequal movements were no doubt still in progress
through the Mesozoic period. The Mesozoic rocks occur in defi-

1 N. Taylor, Report on the Stawell Goldfield. Projfrews Report Geol. Surv. Vic, II.
and III.

2 Hall and Pritchard, '♦ The Older Tertiaries of Maude, etc." Proc. Roy. See. Victoria,
VII., New Seri»J8, 1895.

3 N. Taylor, loc. cit.

Highlands of Western Victoria. 257

nite areas to, the south; they probably have never extended
across the present highlands. If the surface had been made
almost flat the appearance of granites on the peneplain would be
simply a question of the level reached by the granites. This
would depend partly on the level it originally reached at the
time of its intrusion, and partly on later movements, which it
might share with adjacent sediments. The granitic rocks of
Victoria do not a^t a rule appear in well marked axial lines, but
in places they show very straight boundaries on the peneplain ;
the south edge of the Mt. Cole granite in the Pyrenees is an
example, though on the map the straight boundary is obscured
by the accumulaition of detritus at the mouth of a short valley.
A fault had probably already existed while the peneplain was
forming, and the more elevated granite to the north had been
exposed by denudation. On its northern boundary this granitic
area meets the sedimentary and metamorphic rocks on irregular
lines. A similar explanation might be given of many other
granitic boundaries in Victoria, Selwyn had already in 1857
referred to a fault line on the east coast of Port Phillip, making
the boxmdary of the granitic areas there.^

We have not only to consider in connection with the positions
occupied by granites, the height to which they were brought
at the time of their intrusion, but also the subsequent move-
ments as inert masses. In the formation of the peneplain it is
evident that a jx)int of maximum elevation is a point of maxi-
mum denudation, and consequent more probable exposure of
deep seated rocks. On the other hand the downthrow side of
a fault is, other things being equal, a point favourable for the
preservation of the newer and more superficial deposits. This
may have been the reason of the survival of a small glacial area
at the Midas mines^ north of BaJlarat. Messrs. Officer and
Hogg^ have also described the glacial rocks as terminating north
of Coimaidai at a steep bank of Ordovician rocks, and though
they regard it as a pre-existent valley wall, it seems to me that

1 See Hall and Pritchard. Some Sections Illustrating the Geolosrical Structure of the
C!ountry about Mornington. Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, XIV., pt. I., New Series.

2 E. J. Dunn, Notes on the Glacial Confflonierate, Wild Duck Creek, Department of
Mines, Melbourne, 1802.

3 Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, X., pt. II., New Series, 1898.

258 T. 8, Hart :

it may also bo a fault line, north of which the glacial beds are
lost by denudation.

Before considering the history of the elevation and dissection
of the peneplain, we may look further at the present condition
of the highlands.

On the whole the valleys run to north and south, though
there are some peculiar exceptions, especially in the head waters
of the Loddon and the Wimmera, and the course of the water
frbm the north of Ballarat to the Hopkins. Going westward
from Ballarat by rail it is apparent that the present surface
is occupied by a number of north and south ridges and inter-
vening valleys, and a wider acquaintance with the district not
only confirms this view, but shows that the north flowing and
the south flowing stream ait places seem to occupy the two ends
of one great valley.

Taking them in order from the west there is a great valley
between the Grampians and the Mt. Ararat Range. This drains
north by the Little Wimmera or Mt. William Creek and south
into the Hopkins; there is no perceptible Divide for some dis-
tance in the floor of the valley. On the map the county boundary
takes a straight line from the spur of Mt. William to a spur
of Mt. Ararat. This is not part of the line marked as the
Great Dividing Range; it stops on the spur from Mt. Ararat,
The Mt. Ararat Range runs nearly north and south and is con-
tinuous (with a slight irregularity in its line) with the Black
Range south of Stawell. West of thi« range is another valley.
The railway rises up its south end, crosses to the north fall at
an elevation of 1070 feet above sea level, and follows down the
valley of the Concongella Creek to Stawell. In view of the
barrier presented by the long Mt. Ararat rajige on the west, this
will probably long remain the chief entrance to north-western
Victoria.

By the next valley the Ararat-Avoca railway passes to the
north of the Divide, crossing it in a gap at an elevation of 1104
feet; it thus enters the valley of the Upper Wimmera, and
follows it up eastward through the Pjrrenees to Mt. Direction,
where by another pass at an elevation of 1214 feet it enters the
Glenlogie valluy and thence to the Avoca.

Highlands of Western Victoria. ti59

One of the most remarkable of these meridional valleys lies
betiween Lam^-Gerin and Mt. Buangror. To the north the Mt.
Cole Creek runs down to the Wimmera. But as one stands on
Ben Nevis, some miles to the north of the Divide, there is an
uninterrupted view down the valleys of Middle Creek and Fiery
Creek into the south-western plains. The Divide in this valley
needs looking for. Standing on Ben Nevis more than a thou-
sand feet above it, it sinks into insignificance. From Mt. Cole
looking south similar meridional valleys and ridges are seen on
the lower country. The Larne-Gerin range continues south of
the railway line, and i« sufficiently important to cause the road
and railway to run to the same low notch close up to Lame-
Gerin.

East of the Mt. Cole Ranges the same north and south
ridges continue, but with less elevations. The road from Chute
to Lexton crosses a low Divide, but is flanked on either side by
more prominent ridges. In fact this portion of the Divide, from
the heads of the Glenelg to the heads of Trawalla Creek, is
composed of two differing constituents. It is high where it
crosses the meridional ridges or continues along them for some
distance; it is usually low where it crosses the intervening
valleys. A$ the head of each valley is to some extent indepen-
dent of the next one, the Divide sometimes acquires a distinct-
ly angular character, most marked in the rectangular portion at
the head of Mt. Cole Creek.

But a short distance to the south-east of Lexton the character
of the Divide changes. The old rocks disappear, and, instead, the
€ummit of the watershed is composed of Volcanic rocks. Out of
a great area of volcanic rocks there staoid up the peaks of Mt.
Misery, Bolton and Beckwbrth, none of them actually on the
present Divide, but forming the highest points of a meridional
ridge buried by the volcanic rocks. If these rocks are supposed
removed we would have two more great valleys. We may call
the western one, from the parish name, the Ercildoun Gap, and
the eastern, similarly, the Ascot Gap. The latter is the lower,
and even with its extensive lava streams and volcanic hills
is still the easiest and lowest level pass across the Divide be-
tween Kilmore and the neighbourhood of Ararat. Here four
madn roads and two railways cross the Divide from Ballarat, and

260 T, S. Hart :

the situation of Ballarat is at the entrance to a large area of
north-central Victoria just as Ararat stands at the gate of the
north-west.

Further east the Divide is again composed of Ordovician
Ranges, but the meridional ridges are prominent even in them
in spite of the existence of the west flowing heads of the Burrum-
beet and Yarrowee Creeks. From west of Creswick a ridge
runs south to far beyond Buninyong. The complete infilling
of the valley on its east side by basalts has diverted waters
across this ridge into the Yarrowee, but this is clearly a late
modification. In this eastern valley the Divide is again buried
under basalts in what we may call the Dean Gap. The area
south of this is commonly known in Ballarat- as the Eastern
Plateau. Mt. Warrenheip stands on it, but contributes very
little to it'. The plateau lavas are from the north near the
hills on the present Divide, and its surface falls with an un-
broken slope past the east side of Wai-renheip. Further east
the Divide follows Ordovician rocks with gradually rising levels
to the vicinity of Daylesford.

I have attempted to illustrate these features of the Divide
by the accompanying plans and sketches. On the general plan
of the Divide I have indicated some of the north and south
ridges. I have had to compile this from various sources. Two
early maips of Ripon County issued by the Lands Department
both note the absence of a distinct ridge west of Mt. Ararat.
One of these marks the ridge south of Lame-Gerin, and states
that it was noticed by Mitchell. From these maps also I have
obtained the position of the volcanic hills in the Ercil-
doun Gap. I have obtaiined other information from the
Geological maps of Ararat and of Learmonth. The view taken
from the summit of Mt. Buninyong shows the south ends of a
succession of ridges and the intervening valleys. The line of
sight to Larne-Gerin crosses the Divide so that the slope of that
hill facing the observer drains north by Mt. Cole Creek.

The view from Mt. Blowhard shows the series of Volcanic
hills which form the Divide in the Ascot Gap. The broken
line round the base of each hill on the map shows the approxi-
mate extent of the slope from that hill. The Divide is formed
by the coalescence of the bases of the volcanic hills, and hence

Highlands of Western Victoria. 261

may be at any height which was sufficient to turn the waters of
the adjacent valley. Thus the drainage of the south slope of
the Mt. Bolton Range is diverted northward. A Divide is ob-
tained which, though usually quite distinct, is yet at a low level,
and we have a remarkable feature of the levels of the Waubra
Railway that it is everywhere at a higher level than close to
the Divide, falling from 1508 feet at Waubra Junction to 1350
at Learmonth, then crossing the Divide at about 1360 and
ascending a valley to Waubra. There are several swamps close
to the Divide where the slopes of the volcanic hills meet. Lake
Learmonth only differs from these swamps in being lai'ger and
practically permanent, which has been helped by building up
its outlet and bringing in water across the Divide.

Beneath the extensive volcanic area both north -west and north-
east of Ballarat there is still some uncertainty as to the courses of
the old Divide and of the old valleys. We may safely say that
the whole area which now drains north also drained north before
the lava flows. In the Ercildoun Gap is a lead falling north ; in
the Ascot Gap another lead also falling to the north, and a
north falling lead exists not far north of the present Divide at
Dean. But south of the Divide there are three areas which
present difficulties, the Burrumbeet Basin, the western leads
of Ballarat and the Haddon leads, and the area about Warren-
heip and Bungaree. Investigations have usually proceeded on
the assumption of the non-disturbance of relative levels at
different points, but we have sufficient evidence that thi« is not
absolutely safe. We must take account of local disturbances^
and of unequal movements affecting large areas, as will be shown
below.

The question is further complicated by changes of the flow of
iatreams by the ordinary process of river capture, and by the fact
that various lava streams which have altered the flow or in-
fluenced it are not absolutely, and sometimes not approximately,
contemporaneous even within the one drainage area. By this
means a great change might be produced in one part of a valley
while another part of the same valley was unaffected.

1 Notes on the Stony Creek Basin, Daylesford, and references there. Proc. Roy. Soc.
Victoria, XVII., pt. II.. New Series.

2()VJ T. S, Hart:

From Smythesdale certainly a lead was worked with a fall
northward under the present south flowing Smjrfche's Creek.
The alteration was probably due to the lava streams. From
ne^ar Staffordshire Reef a large valley falls to the north to join
the Yarrowee Creek, and its waters are turned south again down
that creek. The Yarrowee valley itself west and south of Bunin-
yong, and the old Durham Lead which preceded it, are compara-
tively narrow. The Lai Lad Basin cannot have drained south
at the west end of Mt. Doran. We find thus a considerable
east and west Divide many miles south of the present Divide.
{Such a Divide is mentioned without the evidence being quoted
in Professor Gregory's Geography. It can, however, scarcely
turn to the north-ea^t as shown in the figure there.) At Smythes-
dale it has long been recognised.

It must not be assumed that this was a Main Divide from
which the streams flow^ed north to the Murray. North of Mt.
Doran we find an outlet to the east. Alluvial sands just show
below the basalt at the foot of the Lai Lai Falls. Half a mile
east, just below the little falls of the Western Moorabool, the
ba.^alt for a short distance comes down to the bed of the river.
On a creek a little further east a considerable width of sands
is exposed and not bottomed. On the Eastern Moorabool nt
Bungeeltap, they are much wider, and show also in some of the
creeks in the parish of Bungal. Thence the volcanic plain is
unbroken till we reach the Parwan valley, where the estuarine
beds appear and are well exposed as far as the steep descent on
the Rowsley fault. There is little doubt that this is the original
outlet from the Lai Lai Basin. (The actual area of the brown
coal at Lai Lai may be regarded as a local subsidence.) This
eastward valley could scarcely have drained any appreciable area
west of Mt. Buninyong. It received, no doubt, a part of the
drainage of the country buried under the southern edge of the
Eastern Plateau. Further north a part of the area north of
Warrenheip may have discharged its waters past Gordon and
thence also to the Parwan Estuary.

To return to the lead at Smvthesdale. The main Trunk Lead
has been worked for some distance north, but not far enough to
leave its final course without doubt. From the Ballarat Common
westward, the railway follows down the gentle slope of a lava

Highlands of Western Victoria. 263

stream to the Burrumbeet Creek. Beneath it is a valley into
which the Trunk Le-ad flows, but opinions have been divided as
to whether the outlet of this valley is towards Burrumbeet or
in the opposite direction, and thence to the Ascot Gap. If
the fall is into the Burrumbeet Basin, we are still in doubt as
to the outlet from that Bajyin. Parts of that area may drain
northward by the Ercildoun Gap, north-east to the Ascot Gap
or south-west by a route near the present outlet.

The western leads of Ballarat are subject to the same uncer-
tainty as the Ti'unk lead. But even with regard to the Golden
Point Gutter itself there is still some diversity of opinion.
Close to the south limit of Ballarat City a point is reached at
which there is a broad lead to the west, and a comparatively
narrow lead to the south. Both have been worked. The ques-
tion as to which was the real outlet of the stream above was
discussed by MurrayjJ- and he decided for the southern — that is,
that the lead followed the same valley as the present Yarrowee.
But the decision was based on small differences of levels. Either
way the average gradient for some distance is much less than
in the lead upstream. Against the southern outlet are the
change in width and perhaps some minor features of the lead
itself, the narrow valley of the Yarrowee downstream and the
•decided north fall from near Staffordshire Reef. Recent bores^
jshow that an outlet is possible to the west. There is thus
& double uncertainty in the course of the old valley, both as
to the direction the waters took at Ballarat and as to the
subsequent course of the Western Leads. Probably at Ballarat
both outlets have been used, the head wafers of the lead having
been captured and diverted.

The present drainage system at Ballarat is determined largely
hy the volcanic centres. From the Ballarat Common extensive
iflows of lava have run to north, south, and west. Murray con-
sidered, from the records of the rock passed through in the
Bonshaw shaft, that the uppermost lava stream or "first rock"
is here missing. This shaft is in a valley at the south end
of Sebastopol. In the present cxmdition of the creek, the second
rock, much decomposed on its surface, is seen exposed under

1 Reporfc of Progress Geol. Surv. Vic, I.

2 Annual Report, Mines Department, Victoria, 1892.

264 T. S. Hart :

the first rock. The first rock is missing from the sliaft, but it
continues on the opposite side of the little creek, and is trace-
able to the south end of the Buninyang Estate.

There is no reason to regard Lake Wendour^e as a crater ;
it is only a shallow depression on the edge of the lava stream.
But the source of the Ballarat '* first rock " at least must be
placed on the Common close to Wendouree. There is no cone
of volcanic fragments ; explosive action appears to have been
of little magnitude at the emission of this lava. This is the
present limit of the waters received by the Yarrowee ; the north
slope of the Common drains to the Burrumbeet Creek. The
barrier of volcanic hills in the Ascot Gap quite prevents a
northern outlet, and the Burrumbeet Creek is forced to flow
west, and eventually to the Hopkins, though ordinarily the
waters do not pass Lake Burrumbeet.

The original drainage of the elevating peneplain was then pro-
bably as follows : — ^In the western part one principal east and
west crest divided a north and a south fajll, but in the neighbour-
hood of Ballarat there was another import-ant crest further
south. It is not demonstrated, however, that any part of this
formed a Main Divide, from which the waters flowed north to
the Murray. In its western part it is uncertain, but in the
©ivstern part the Parwan Estuary lay between the southern crest
and a crest near the present Divide. Much of the waters from
the north would formerly reach the Parwan, but they have been
diverted by the volcanic barrier of Mts. Ingliston, Darriwill,
Gorong, and an unnamed centre near Ballan. This has caused
the forma/tion of the present rugged Werribee Gorge in the old
rocks, contrasting strongly with the smooth outlines of the
Parwan valley in its soft materials. Further north there may
have been an east and west ridge at Tarrengower.

Various suggestions have been made as to the possible origin
of the Divide or of these paraillel crests. Selwyn suggests '' that
the first outline of the existing main watershed waf« determined
by some slight and almost accidental undulation, that may either
have pre-existed on the old sea bed, or been produced during one
of the earliest broad and equable upheavals, thnrt: resulted in a
dry land surface.^' Professor Gregory regards it as connected
with the intru>ion of a series of granitic masses forming a IM-

Highlands of Western Victoria. 265

mitive Mountain CLain. Apparently this is regarded as Devonian
in age. Mr. T. S. HalR has ascribed it to cross folding connected
with the pitch commonly observed in the folds of the older
rocks.

I think it can be shown that any feature produced prior to
the development of the peneplain must be of oninor importance
in determining the position of the Main Divide.

The gradient of the streams which formed the peneplain mus-t
halve been very s^light by the time that operation was finished.
Without taking the estimated grade as low as 1 in 50,000,^ we
may say that if a& low as 3 feet to the mile (about the gradient
of a large part of the Thames), it would be quite inadequate to
account for even the more moderate inequalities of level of the
peneplain. Some other cause has established far greater differ-
ences of elevation than those of the peneplain as formed, and
this cause must have operated subsequent to the formation of
the peneplain. At Warrenheip the peneplain level is about 1750
feet above the sea level. Thirty miles to the €outh are contem-
poraneous marine beds which even allowing for depth of water
may be stated as elevated less than 700 feet. This gives a
difference in elevation equal to 1000 feet in 30 miles. From the
south-west of Daylesford to Warrenheip the general level of the
peneplain falls from about 2350 to 1750, or about 30 feet to the
mile. These would give slopes quite sufficient to overcome the
slopes of the original peneplain, though it would not neces-
sarily reverse the original slope in the vicinity of a ridge. And
it mu«t be remembered that the ridge remaining on the peneplain
would only be a very much modified remnant of an older
eminence.

The more marked differences of elevation about the Grampians
and Pyrenees would be correspondingly more effective in over-
coming older inequalities.

Selwyn's suggestion leaves the question very open if we
substitute peneplain for original sea bottom. Professor Gre-
gory's Primitive Chain, if it existed, would have been reduced
to insignificance in the formation of the peneplain, but there
are great difficulties in supposing its existence. In the first

1 Victorian Year Book, 1905-6.

2 Oregorj', op eit., p. 78. 12

266 T. 8. HaH :

place our granitic rocks do not, as a rule, present the character
of axes of even smiall mount adn masses. The dip and strike of
adjacent rocks are little affected by them (except perhaps as will
be noticed below). He states^ that the Warrenheip granite
affects the direction of the beds at Ballarat, but he has stated
the direction of the graaiite boundary wrongly, and missed the
abundant evidence of folding. Hi« argument on this point at
Ballarat completely fails on examination. It is far more pro-
bable that most of our granitic intrusions were introduced by a
" stoping " process with foundering and absorption of the ad-
jacent rock overhead. In addition a Primitive Divide as early
as the granitic intrusions doee not provide for the southern
origin of the glacial series.^

With regard to Mr. T. S. Hall's suggestion, we require a good
deal more evidence on the matter of pitch, particularly as to
the extent to which it is persistent, and how it varie« from place
to place. It may be supposed to originate in many ways, and
may be consistent or inconsistent in neighbourins^ folds. It is
liable to be inconsistent if it is due to the making and dying
away of individual folds, or if due to local disturbance as by a
fault affecting a small area. Beside® these it is possible that
pitch may originate by varying intensity of the folding from
place to place, so that the fold is sharper at one place than at
another, and is curved in its strike. Or it may be due to the
fact that compression in a solid produces a tendency to expand
in a direction ait right angles to the pressure, and this, if pre-
vented, may give rise to a simultaneous transverse folding. Or
it may be due to subsequent crossfolding. Or to the settlement
of an imperfectly supported area over an invading granite. Or
finally to the tilting of folded blocks the folds themselves being
inert.

Settlement on an invading granite might be suggested in the
case of the southward pitch from Bendigo, and the northward
pitch from Keilor. But there are other cases which cannot
be so explained. Mr. W. Baragwanath, jun., has called my at-
tention to the pitch at Ballarat East, northerly at Black Hill, and
southerly at Magpie Gully, and neither of them near granite.

1 Memoirs Geol. Survey, Vic, No. 4, 1907.

2 Officer and Hogg, loc. cit.

Highlands of Weatet^n Victoria. 267

Pitoh certainly influences details of hill and cliff shapes
especially when combined with steep dip joints at right angles to
the pitch. Examples of this are found at the Werribee Gorge and
at Bendigo.

If crossfolding determined the original crests of the elevating
plain, it must have been a cross folding produced concurrently
wit^ the elevation, amd I think the pitoh of our older folded
rocks will as a rule be better explained by some cause nearly or
quite contemporaneous with the main folding.

The clue to the cause of the early Divide on the elevating plain
is to be found in the movements of elevating and tilting fault
blocks.

The most conspicuous feature of the southern limit of the
Victorian highlands is that they terminate at a practically
straight line. The restoration on the latest geological map of
Yictoria of the granitic areas near Mt. Elephant makes this still
more evident. It must be remembered that the volcanic area
north of these granitic inliers is gradually rising to the north and
though not very high at the foot of Mt. EUephant it rises gradual-
ly and continuously to the Divide in the Ercildoun Gap.
Similarly in Eastern Victoria two straight lines terminate the
main mass of the highlands. These lines are independent of
the rock folding, cross various rocks, and are no doubt fault
lines forming the north limit of a -relatively depressed area.
Movement on these lines, or near them may have been both
pre-tertiary and later. Consequently the comparison of levels
on the north and south of these lines does not give a safe
•estimate of the amount /)f tilting, apart from dislocation, of the
peneplain, if such peneplain be regarded as continuing beneath
the tertiary areas, or merging in a plain of marine denudation.

It is likely, but not altogethea* certain, that similar move-
ments had already formed the Mesozoic trough. In Western
Victoria it is largely a question of what Mesozoic rocks are
i>uried under the tertiary — a point which has not yet been in-
vestigated.

At the east edge of the Ballarat Plateau we have the wall at
Bacchus Marsh. This does not coincide with the bamk of
Ordovician rocks against which the glacial rocks rest. Even the
importance of that bank may be exaggerated ; it must be kef)t

12a

268 T. S. HaH :

in mind that remnants of the glacial series are also found west
of it.

A note to Daintree and Wilkinson's map of 1866 (^sheet
12NE), states that the basalts seem to have flowed over a steep
declivity, and further north the accompanying section shows
inclined beds of the early tertiary rocks. These compara-
tively steep beds are in contact with a mass of intrusive older
volcanic rocks, and I had the impression formerly that the in-
clination was regarded as an effect of the basaltic intrusion, but
I do not find it described as such. West of the disturbed portion
the tertiaries continue at higher levels and horizontal, and a
better explanation is that »t this point on the north side of the
Werribee there is a monocline probably faulted and further south
along the edge of the high basaltic plateau, a fault ^arp over
which the lavas have flowed. It continues further south still
with a curve a little to the west, and the quarter-sheet 12SE to
the south shows the Ordovioian rocks terminated a straight line
which is also the edge of the higher land to the west. Down
this a number of «hort steep valle3rs flow. The aspect of the
locality as seen from any point of vantage to the north agrees
with this. As the line of fault passes between the old town-
ship of Rowsley and the railway station of the same name I
would call it the Rowsley fault.

On the east or depressed side the surface of the plain below
is overspread with detrital material. This evidently is material
carried by the streams down their steep courses from the high-
land, but which they could not transport across the plain. Hie
Parwan Creek hais cut its valley down to the base of the jwresent
wall, but with its slighter fall it has not cut through the basalt
on the lower country. Its level is here temporarily kept up,
and it has attained a gentle slope in its bed above the obstacle,
and being in soft material of the old estuary has long gentle
slopes on the sides of the valley, rising gradually to a basaltic
escarpment, which is sometimes over a mile from the main
waterway. Below the escarpment the slopes are strewn with
broken basalt from the plateau edge, undermined by the working
away of the soft sands below, but unable to travel down the
long gentle slopes. The head of the Parwan tributary near
Ingliston station shows an earlier stage in the development of

Highlands of Westeim Victoria. 269

such a valley, full of aiogular blocks from the basalt, and with
its sides for some distance an almost continuous series of land-
slips. A similar explanation can be applied to Bacchus Marsh
itself. At the Mairsh the valley has been cut through the basalt
to the underlying tertiaries. Down stream deepening is less rapid
because the hard rocks extend to lower levels and are not yet
penetrated. Hence the valley has been greatly widened in the
soft rocks. When the Parwan has out through the couple of
miles of basalt in its course between its upper valley and the
Marsh, it will be able to deepen its upper vadley again at a
more rapid rate and perhaps even to recapture what it has lost
to make the Bkistern Moorabool.

Professor Gregory has described the Grampians as ranges of
the Pennine type. The aorea of Upper Palaeozoic rocks forms
a great syncline with a few minor corrugations. The long gentle
slopes towards the syncline are near the direction of the bedding,
and the short steep slopes in their present form' seem largely
due to strong jointing. A well-developed jointing also occurs
in a direction at right angles to the ranges contributing to the
jagged character of their summits. Selwyn shows a section of
the south end, and Erause^ has given a section near the north
end. The latter shows one of the minor folds. He also shows
the granitic rocks as intrusive, though in his description he re-
gards this point as doubtful. Two causes may have led to his
favouring the idea that the granodiorite was intrusive. In the
area afterwards worked for gold at Mt. William sandstone from
the high hills close by is common. In its natural condition it
would be difficult to see that this area was granodiorite covered
with a thin layer of debris from the hills, and he «eems to have
mapped it as sandstone with dykes. Also there are undoubted
dykes in the sandstone. Those with which I am acquainted ait
Hall's Gap are more probably allied to the Coleraine trachyte
than to the granitic rocks.

The strike of the Grampians sandstone varies considerably,
being distinctly west of north in the northern parts, but more
meridional or east of north in the vicinity of Mr. William. The
dips are usually low, but near Hall's Gap Krause records 77 deg.,

1 Progress Report, Oeol. Surv., Vic. I.

270 T. S. Hart :

and I have observed 60 degrees, both on the outer range. A dip
of 51 degrees is shown on Stony Creek by Krause.

The greatest elevation is at Mt. William, in the centre of the
eastern ranges.

Neither of the earlier sections show any faulting, though the
descriptions in both cases give estimaftes of thickness which are
quite inadequate, apart from faulting. The main faults have
not been observed, and I have no definite information to assign
them a probable inclination. I have observed a nearly vertical
strike fault in Stony Creek, near Hall's Gap. There is, however,
little doubt that the great valleys here are determined primarily
by faults allowing a succession of parallel ranges to be formed
of the same beds, and it is probable also that many other
parallel faults occur allowing repetition of bed« in the long
gentle slopes of the hill towards the sjmcline. The average in-
clination of these slopes is much more gentle than the dip,
though in a hill south of the junction of Fyan's and Stony
Creeks at Hall's Gap it is possible to walk a long distance down
the bare rock following the bedding plains.

A feature of Fyam's Creek valley, which indicates late move-
ment on this fault, is the form of some of the tributary valleya
At the Silver Band fall the stream comes out from a gap in the
east face of the range and drops into the valley below.

We may ascribe the Grampiams to the unequal elevation and
tilting of a number of fault blocks, in which the principal faults
were approximately meridional. The syncline was probably pre-
existent and sandstones already somewhat denuded, forming a
part of the peneplain, so that they already were reduced in
thickness on their eastern edge. Another fault may exist under
the Mt. William Creek valley outside the ranges, and the whole
series may be associated with similar faults determining the
west end of the high lands as a whole. The faults need not
necessairily be altogether of late date ; all that is requisite is
movement subsequent to the peneplain formation, it may be on
old faults, and only on some of these.

We may extend this idea of block elevation to the rest of the
highlands. A striking example is seen in a side view of the
Pyrenees. Such a view is obtained from many points ; that from
Maiden Hill at Waubra is paarticularly good. At the south end

Highlands of Western Victoria. 21 \

the ranges drop suddenly to the lower country about Beaufort-
There is no doubt that this southern end of the Mt. Cole Ranges
is a fault scarp, and forms the south end of a great tilted block.
It is ako probably a fault line of early date on which move-
ment has been renewed, as the granite is apparently absent from
the peneplain below. The south end is deeply scarred with
short steep valleys (not visible from this point), and the edge of
the granite is in part buried under the talus fans. Northward
the rajnges present a long even slope. Buangor is 3247 feet
above sea level ; Ben Nevis, 2875 ;- Avooa Hill, 2464 ; and Land&-
borough Hill, 1903. The Avooa River runs north, down the east
side of the highest ranges. Further north the Richardson and
the Avon drain the north end of the block. The summits of
the Pyrenees are to be regarded as the same peneplain as at
Ballarat, but elevated more than 1000 feet higher. The parallel
range of Ben Major and Ben More is on this side the Avoea
River between it and the Bet Bet Creek. Possibly the Avoca
followfi down an east boundary fault, for the Ben Major range
is much lower, and the levels fall still more to the east under
the lava filled valleys.

There is one great interruption to the regular slope of the
line of the Pyrenees subimits. Behind Lexton we look into a
great gap in the mass; in the gap is the pointed summit of the
Sugarloaf, and beyond is the shoulder of Ben Nevis. We look
down the valley of the Upper Wiramera. Iwo explanations are
possible. There may have been an original slight hollow pro-
duced in the elevation of the block or a change of slope. The
smadl difference in height between Ben Nevis and Avoca Hill
seems to favour this as well as the extent of country whose
drainage is diverted west and the fact that the diversion is not
very new. As an alternative it may be simply a case of rivei*
capture, perhaps helped by an original steep fall at a fault on
the west of the block. Some amount of capture from the
Richardson and Avon has probably taken place, but an original
inequality of elevation very likely started this course of the
Wimmera.

The Pyrenees may be taken as representing a range, due to
the same causes as ordinarily produce the Pennine type, but with
a gentle or slightly undulating long slope and now much modi-
fied by denudation. It is evident that in such a series of eleva-

272 T. S HaH:

tions and tilting there may be more than one east and west
crest produced. This would explain the character of the drainage
system initiated in the Ballarat area, Mt. Doran, if previously
formed, helping somewhat to constitute the southern crest.
From the high land before mentioned running from east of Cres-
wick to beyond Buninyong there seems to be a general fall to
the west; Much of this may be due to the later denudation,
but it is not unlikely that a fault exists under the Ascot Gap or
at least a line of an original minimum elevation. A fault might
have contribute! to the preservation of the small patch of
glacial rocks known to exist at the Midas Mines.

That east and west crests would be ait first produced might
be expected from the general trend of the Mesozoic trough, the
tertiary trough and Bass Strait, all of which may be regarded as
a series indicating a prominence of movements on east and
west fractures since the time at which the active folding of the
older rocks ceased.

Some of the faults suggested may seem to have little to sup-
port them, but I think there is sufficient evidence to sum up
the character of our western highland and Divide as due to
unequal block elevations of a Mesozoio or early Tertiary pene-
plain, with subsequent extensive modification by denudation
and volcanic activity.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES XXII.-XXVI.

Fig. 1 . The Main Divide and some of the transverse ridges, from
near Lexton westwards, compiled from various sources. The
names of the principal north flowing streams are shown. The
south slope, except close to the Serra Range, drains eventually
to the Hopkins. The numbers indicate hills as follows: — 1, Mt.
Ararat; 2, Lame Gerin; 3, Mt. Buangor; 4, Ben Nevis; 5,
Sugarloaf ; 6, Avoca ffill ; 7, Ben More ; 8, Ben Major ; 9, Mt.
William, a is the gap by which the railway goes from Ararat
to Stawell ; at h the Ararat^ Avoca railway crosses the Divide ;
and at c passes from the Wimmera to the Avoca valley. The
Main Divide is indicated by a broken line.

Fig. 2. Hills on and near the Divide at the Ercildounand Ascot
Gaps. indicates Ordovician amd G granitic areas. The full

Proc. R.S. Victoria, 1907. Plat« XXII.

.00

/
I

V)

ul

in

.W^

ylO

t^V

/llC^

t/^

R

<7^

1

Is.

• I •

• •

«• u

Proc. R.S. Victoria. 1907. Plate XXIII.

' • • /•

• ••-

• to

Proe. E.S. Victoria, 1907. Plate XXIV.

o

.^fuj

I

K..

UJ

5:

o

o q

O. (<

- PQ

Uj

J5

^

I

••• •.

••• • •

••••

• I •

'•"••

Proc. R.S. Victoria, 1907. Plate XXV.

^^^

^^- >o.

^ij-«.

(^

Proc. R.S. Victoria, 1907. Plate XXVI.

ft.

^
^

Xl

^

g

^

^

^

CO

V3

to.

I

••J
--J

I

S5

to

Ix
kl

:<

• • • • "

• •

,••<

r-

. • •
•••••

•••••

• •••

* •

• • ••

« to

■ • •

Highlands oj We8te7m Victoria. 273

lines are the main roads across the Divide. The Divide itself
is indicated by the heavy broken line, and the fainter broken
lines mark the approximate limit of the slopes from each vol-
canic centre. A number of swanaipe are shown by the letter S.
The volcanic hills are as follows: — On the Divide: 1, Brown's
HiU ; 2, Bankings Hill ; 3, Coghiirs Hill, 1630 feet ; 4, Mt.
Cavern, 1588 ; 5, Mt. Hollowback, 1842 ; 6, Mt. Pi^gah, 1771.
South of the Divide: 7, Mt. Blowhard, 1664; 8, McLean's Hill;
9, Morton's Hill; 10, Saddleback Hill, 1548; 11, Weatherboai-d
Hill, 1826 ; 16, Mt. Rowan. North of the Divide : 12, Tinkler's
Hill; 13, Webster's HiU; 14, Vaugham's Hill, 1611; 15, One
Mile Hill, 1443.

The information is largely from Mr. Norman Taylor's Geologi-
cal Map of Learmonth.

Fig. 3. Profile of the Divide in Ascot Gap, Granite and
Oi-dovician Ranges in the background shaded ; the numbers
have the same significance as in the preceding diagram.
Sketched from Mt. Blowhard. The level topped Ordovician
Ranges seen in the distance are partly west and partly east of
the Dean Gap, a few volcanic Hills in this Gap are shown.

Fig. 4. Sketch of the Hills west and north-west from Mt.
Buninyong. The distances of several of the hills are given under
their names. Distances from point to point are also s&own. The
Serra Range is often visible as a more continuous line.

Fig. 5. Diagram to illustrate the possible courses of the leads
south of the present Divide. indicates areas of Ordovician
rocks close to the surface; G of granitic rocks. The interven-
ing areas are mainly volcanic or alluvial. The direction of the
fall of some of the leads is shown by arrows.

Fig. 6. Diagrammatic cross section of the Grampians, south of
Hall's Gap. The full lines show the probable position of the
fault lines along two valleys, the dotted lines probable other
faults whose number and position aire uncertain. The depth to
which the sandstone extends is also uncertain.

Fig. 7. Profile of the Pyrenees as seen from Maiden Hill near
Waubra. Mt. Mitchell, in the foreground, is a volcanic hill.
The increasing distances of the hills are shown by fainter lines.

ANNUAL REPORT OF THE COUNCIL

FOE THE YEAE 1906.

-»♦<-

The Council herewith presents to Members of the Society the
Annual Report and Details of Receipts and Expenditure for the
year 1906.

The following meetings were held : —

March 8. — Annual Meeting and Election of Officers. Ordi-
nary Meeting. Mr. J. A. Smith exhibited and described a new
method of testing lenses during their figuring. Mr. A. E. Kitson
exhibited some snakes from Western Australia which were stated
to have killed themselves by self-inflicted bites. Also some dried
plants which were reported to have grown several inches in length
while in the Herbarium cases.

April 19. — Mr. J. A. Smith delivered a lecture on "The flow
ci fluids, illustrated by stream-line methods." The lecture was
illustrated by experiments.

May 10: — Papers read : 1. " Some little-known Victorian
Decapod Crustacea, with descriptions of new species, No. 3," by
S. W. Fulton and F. E. Grant. 2. " Census of Victorian Decapod
Crustacea, Part 1 : Brachyura ; " by S. W. Fulton and F. E. Grant.
3. " New Species of Victorian Marine MoUusca," by J. H. Gatliff.

June 14. — Paper read: " Micrometric measurements by a
projected scale," by Dr. F. Clendinnen. Illustrated by
experiments.

July 12.— Lecture by Prof. W. C. Kernot, M.A., M.C.E., on
" Balloons and Airships." Illustrated by lantern slides.

Aug. 9. — Lecture by Kerr Grant, M.Sc, " The Vibrations of
Jets." Illustrated by numerous experiments.

September 9. — Lecture by W. N. Kernot, B.C.E., " Some
applications of the Electro-magnet." Illustrated by lantern slides
and by numerous experiments.

October 11 — Papers read : 1. " New or little-known Victorian
Fossils in the National Museum ; Part 8. — Some Palaeozoic Brittle

Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria. 275

Stars of the Melbourniau series," by F. Chapman, A.L.S. 2.
"Note on Caligorgia flabellum from Port Phillip," by Prof.
Sydney J. Hickson, D.Sc, F.R.S. 3. " Ne w or rare A ustralian
Plants," by Prof. A. J. Ewart; D.Sc, Ph.D.

November 8.— Lecture by Prof. E. W. Skeats, D.Sc, "The
life history of a crystal." Illustrated by lantern slides.

December 13. — Papers read: 1. " Remarks on some Sub-fossil
Bones from King Island," by Prof. W. Baldwin Spencer, O.M.G.,
F.R.S. 2. "Surface-tension as an aid in Canyon-formation," by
J. A. Leach, M.Sc 3. " Description of a new species of Cypridina
from Hobson's Bay," by F. Chapman, A.L.S. 4. "Four new
Echinoids from the Australian Tertiary," by T. S. Hall, M.A.

The series of lectures delivered during the year was a great
success and large numbers of members and their friends attended.

During the year four Members and six Associates have been
elected, two Associates have resigned, while one member and
three Associates have died.

Mr. H. Moors, for many years member of Council, Treasurer,
and more lately Auditor, of the Society, passed away at an ad-
vanced age, regretted by a large number of friends to whom his
kindly nature had endeared him. The three Associates whose
deaths we have to mourn are Messrs. F. J. Odling, C. Stewart,
C.E., and G. J. Bolton, M.A.

The Proceedings of the Society, Vol. XVIII., Part 2, and Vol.
XIX., Part 1, were published during the year, and owing to the.
low state of our finances in a most attenuated form.

Owing to the generosity of the Treasurer of the State our grant
has been increased to £100, and we hope to increase our output of
printed matter.

The Librarian reports 1454 additions during the year, which is
the largest number yet recorded. The sum of £25 has been voted
by the Committee for binding.

276 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

u

•a

I

I

«

2

R;

C0O©^O"*00rHC0OC0OroO

OOOCOOCOi-lUJOO-^i-lON®
fH iH iH fH iH

10«HC<INM30COO
fH

t^ 05 O ^
CO c^

oa-*

iH

CO

»0 CO

o ;o

r-t rH

CO

QQ

o U -®

®

d^ d^ -fli W f2| 5 o w O

I

OO OOOOOOCO

iH

fH O OO "^ CO Oi Oi O f-i
^ iH fH

So rH'<!}l'«JtO05t*fH

W5 t>» CO CO fH

CO

8
I

d
o

44
O

o

•T3

1

i

5

13

Eh

•T3

d

Af

^

s

PQ

s'

M

s

H

d

O

525

o

pes

t>

«

«

U4

CO

o

lis

s

§lopl <^acictg of ^irtarm

1907.

|9utron :

SIR REGINALD TALBOT, K.C.B.

^redtbrnt :

C. E. OLIVER, M.C.E.

'^ice-^rcsibcnt« :

p. BARACCHI, F.R.A.S.
E. J. WHITE, F.R.A.S.

SJoii. treasurer :

J. SHEPHARD.
R. D. BOYS, B.A.

II on. (Sfcrctarg :

T. S. HALL, M.A.

Council :

PROP. R. J. A. BERRY, M.D., PROF. E. W, SKEATS, D.Sc.

F.R.S.E. E. J. DUNN, F.G.S.

J. DENNANT, F.G.S., F.C.S. PROF. W. C. KERNOT, M.A., M.C.E.

PROF. A. J. EWART, D.Sc., Pu.D. PROF. W. BALDWIN SPENCER,

P. HK J. GRUT. ! C.M.G., M.A., F.R.S.

DR. J. JAMIESON, M.D. G. SWEET, F.G.S.

J. A. KERSHAW, F.E.S. j R. H. WALCOTT, F.G.S.
PROF. T. R. LYLE, M.A.

®onimitt^£S of tb« ffiuimctl:

Houdc (Eomuuttee :

THE HON. TREASURER (Convbnbr).
P. DB J. GRUT.
G. SWEET, F.G.S.

printing Committet :

THE HON. TREASURER.

THE HON. SECRETARY (CoNVBSBit).

PROF. W. BALDWIN SPENCER, C.M.G., M.A., F.R.S.

Ig Olio ran] Jlubttord :

J. E. GILBERT.
P. DE J. GRUT.

Sjouoviinj 3^vclutfct

W. A. M. BLACKETT.

'(EniSitCfd :

R. L. J. ELLEKY, C.M.G., F.R.S., Ic.

E. J. WHITE, F.K.A.S.

PROFESSOR W. C. KERNOT, M.A., M.C.E.. &c.

1907.

LIST OF MEMBERS,

WITH THEIR YEAR OF JOINING,

-<»5=-*sS»>-

Patron.
His Excellency Sir Reginald Talbot, K.C.B 1904

Honorary Mbmbers.
Forrest, The Hon. Sir J., K.C.M.G., West Australia ... 1888

Hector, Sir James, K.C.M.G., M.D., F.R.S., Wellington, 1888
N.Z.

Liversidge, Professor A., LL.D., F.R.S., University, 1892
Sydney, N.S.W.

Neumayer, Prof. George, Ph.D., F.R.S., Neustadt a.d. 1857
Haardt, Germany

RusseU, H. C B.A., F.R.S., F.R.A.S., Observatory, 1888
Sydney, N.S.W.

Scott, Rev. W., M.A., Kurrajong Heights, N.S.W 1855

Todd, Sir Charles, K.C.M.G., F.R.S., Adelaide, S.A 1856

Verbeek, Dr. R. D. M., Buitenzorg, Batavia, Java 1886

Life Members.

Butters, J. S., F.R.G.S., Empire Buildings, Collins-street 1860
west

Eaton, H. F 1857

Fowler, Thos. W., M.C.E., Colonial Mutual Ch., 421 Col- 1879
lins-street, Melbourne

280 List of Members.

Gibbons, Sydney, F.C.S., 31 Gipps-street, East Mel- 1854

bourne.

Gilbert, J. E., " Mebrose," Glenferrie-road, Kew 1872

Love, E. F. J., M.A., F.R.A.S., 213 Victoria Tmraoe, 1888
Royal Park

Nicholas, William, F.G.S 1864

Rusden, H. E., Glenhuntly-road, Elsternwick 1866

Selby, G. W., 99 Queen-street, Melbourne 1881

White, E. J., F.R.A.S., Observatory, Melbourne 1868

Ordinary Mbmbbrs.

Balfour, Lewis, B.A., M.B., B.S., Burwood-road, Hawthorn 1892

Baracchi, Pietro, F.R.A.S., Observatory, Melbourne 1887

Barnes, Benjamin, Queen's Terrace, South Melbourne ... 1866

Bavay, A. F. J. de, Foster Brewery, CoUingwood 1905

Boese, C. H. E 1895

Boys, R. D., B.A., Public Library, Melbourne 1903

Berry, Prof. R. J. A., M.D., F.R.S.E., University ... 1906

Cherry, T., M.D., M.S., Department of Agriculture, Mel- 1893

bourne

Cohen, Joseph B., A.R.I.B.A., Public Works Department, 1877

Melbourne

Dennant, John, F.G.S., F.C.S., Stanhope-grove, Camber- 1886

well

Dunn, E. J., F.G.S., " Roseneath," Pakington-street, Kew 1893

Ellery, R. L. J., C.M.G., F.R.S., F.R.A.S., Observatory, 1856

Melbourne

Ewart, Prof. A. J., D.Sc, F.L.S., University, Melbourne 1906

Fox, Dr. W. R., L.R.C.S., L.R.C.P., 90 Collins-street 1899

Melbourne

Fryett, A. G., care Dr. F. Bird, Spring-street, Melbourne 1900

Gault, Dr. E. L., M.A., M.B., B.S., Collins-street, Mel- 1899

bourne

Gillott, The Hon. Sir S., K.C.M.G., " Edensor," Bruns- 1905

wick-street, Fitzroy

Grut, P. de Jersey, 125 Osborne-street, South Yarra ... 1901

List of Members, .281

Hake, C. N., F.C.S., Melbourne Club, Melbourne 1890

Hall, T. S., M.A., University, Melbourne 1890

Hartnell, W. A., " Irrewarra," Burke-road Camberwell ... 1900

Harvey, J. H., A.R.V.I.A., 128 Powlett-street, East Mel- 1895

bourne

Heffernan, E. B., M.D., B.S., 10 Brunswick-street, Fitzroy 1879

Hooper, Dr. J. W. Dunbar, L.R.C.S., etc., Collins-street, 1904

Melbourne

Jamieson, James, M.D., 96 Exhibition-street, Melbourne 1877

Kernot, Professor W. C, M.A., M.C.E., University, Mel- 1870

bourne

Kernot, W. N., B.C.E., Working Men's College, Melbourne 1906

Kershaw, J. A., F.E.S., National Museum, Swanston-street 1900

Kitson, A. E., F.G S 1894

Lyle, Prof. T. R., M.A., University, Melbourne 1889

Loughrey, B., M.A., M.D., Ch.B., M.C.E., 1 Elgin-street, 1880
Hawthorn

Masson, Prof. Orme, M.A., D.Sc, University, Melbourne 1887

Michell, J. H., M.A, F.R.S., University, Melbourne ... ... 1900

Mills, A. L., University, Melbourne 1903

Nanson, Prof. E. T., M.A., University, Melbourne 1875

Oliver, C. E., M.C.E., Metropolitan Board of Works, 1878
Melbourne.

Schlapp, H. H., 31 Queen-street, Melbourne 1906

Shephard, John, Clarke-street, South Melbourne 1894

Skeats, Prof. E. W., D.Sc, University, Melbourne 1905

Spencer, Prof. W. Baldwin, C.M.G., M.A., F.R.S., Uni- 1887

versity, Melbourne

Sugden, Rev. E. H., M.A., B.Sc, Queen's College, Carlton 1899

Sweet, George, F.G.S., Wilson-street, Brunswick 1887

Swinburne, The Hon. G., M.L.A., " Shenton,'' Kinkora- 1905

road. Hawthorn

Tait, Thos., " Ijanark,'' Queen's-road, South Melbourne ... 1905

Taylor, R., 31 Queen-street, Melbourne 1 907

Walcott, R. H., F.G.S., Technological Museum, Swanston- 1897
street

Ware, S., M.A., Eduoai:ion Department, Melbourne 1901

Wilkinson, W^ Percy, Govt. Analyst, Melbourne 1894

Wisewould, F., 408 Collins-street, Melbourne 1902

13

28 '4 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

COUNTBT MbMBBRS.

Brittlebank, C. C, "Dunbar," Myrniong, Victoria 1898

Desmond, J., R.V.S., G.M.V.C, " Ellerslie," Hurtle^uare 1901
Adelaide, S.A.

Gregory, Prof. J. W., D.Sc, F.R.S., University, Glasgow 1900

Hart, T. S., M.A., B.C.E., School of Mines, Ballarat 1894

Heden, E. C. B., B.A., B.Sc, B.E 1904

Hill, W. H. F., "Glenrowan," Dandenong-road, Windsor 1894

Hogg, H. R., M.A., 2 Vicarage Gate, Kensington, W. ... 1890

Howitt, A. W., F.G.S., D.Sc, **CloveUy," Metung 1877

Ingram, Alex., Hamilton, Victoria 1903

Maplestone, C. M., Eltham, Victoria 1898

Martell, F. J., School of Mines, Ballarat 1897

Mennell, F. P., Rhodesian Museum, Buluwayo, South 1902

Africa

Murray, Stuart, C.E., " Morningside," Eyneton 1874

Oddie, James, Dana-street, Ballarut, Victoria 1882

Officer, C. G. W., B.Sc, "Kallara," Bourke, N.S.W 1890

CORRBSPONDINO MbmBERS.

Bailey, F. M., F.L.S., Government Botanist, Brisbane, 1880
Queensland

Dendy, Professor Arthur, D.Sc, F.L.S., King's College, 1888
London

Etheridge, Robert, Junr., Australian Museum, Sydnev, 1877

N.S.W.

Lucas, A. H. S., M.A., B.Sc, Sydney Grammar School, 1895
Sydney, N.S.W.

Stirton, James, M.D., F.L.S., 15 Newton-street, Glasgow 1880

ASSOGIATBS.

Anderson, J., 225 Beaconsfield Parade, Middle Park 1903

Armita«(e, 11. W., Continuation School, E. Melbourne 1907

List of Members. 283

Bage, Mrs. Edward, Fulton-street, St. Kildai 1906

Bage, Miss F., M.Sc, Fulton-street, St. Kilda 1906

Baker, Thomas, Bond-street, Abbotsford, Victoria 1889

Bale, W. M., F.R.M.S., Walpole-street, Hyde Park, Kew, 1887

Victoria

Bennetts, W. R., c/o W. J. Clark, High-street, Kew ... 1894

Boyd, R. M., " Glynderbourne," Boundary-road, Toorak ... 1906

Booth, John, M.C.E., 25 Katlidown-street, Carlton 1872

Brook, R. H. T., 119 Errard-street, Ballarat 1906

Chapman, F., A.L.S., National Museum, Melbourne 1902

Cresswell, Rev. A. W., M.A., St. John's Parsonage, 1887
Camberwell, Victoria

Clendinnen, Dr. F. J., Williams-road, Toorak ... 1906

Corbett, J., "Clifton," 39 Rushall-cresc nt, N. Fitzroy ... 1907

Danks, A. T., 391 Bourke-street West, Melbourne 1883

Ferguson, W. H., '* Maryland Villa,' Camberwcll-road, 1894

Camberwell

Finney, W. H., 40 Merton-street, Albert Park ... ... ... 1881

FisOn, Rev. Lorimer, M.A., D.D., Essendon, Victoria ... 1889

Fulton, S. W., 369 Collins-street, Melbourne 1900

Gabriel, J., Victoria-street, Abbotsford, Victoria 1887

Gatliff, J. H., Commercial Bank of Australasia, Lygon- 1898
street, Carlton

Grant, Kerr, M.Sc, Ormond College, Parkville 1905

Green, W. Heber, D.Sc, University, Melbourne 1896

Grayson, H. J., University, Melbourne 1902

Hall, Robt., F.L.S., C.M.Z.S , Elgar-road, Box Hill 1900

Hardy, A. D., F.L.S., Lands Depairtment, Melbourne 1903

Henderson, A. A., B.Sc, School of Mines, Box 12, Bairns- 1905

dale

Herman, Hyman, B.C.E., F.G.S., 60 Queen-st., Melbourne 1897

Holmes, W. A., Telegraph Engineer's Office, Railway 1879

Department, Melbourne

Jobbins, G. G., Electric Lighting and Traction Co., 1902

Geelong

Jutson, J. T., " Oakworth," Smith-street, Northcote 1902

Kenyon, A. S., Heidelberg 1901

Kernot, Frederick A., 57 Russell-street, Melbourne 1881

13A

284 Proceediogs oj the Royal Society of Victoria.

Lambert, Thomas, Bank of New South Wales, Collins- 1890

street, Melbourne

Larking, R. J., '* Woorigoleen," Clendon-road, Toorak ... 1905

Law, R., F.LC, F.C.S., Royal Mint, Melbourne 1905

Le Souef, D., C.M.Z.S., Royal Park, Melbourne 1894

Luly, W. H., Department of Lands, Treasury, Melbourne 1896

Leach, J. A., M.Sc, Training College, Melbourne 1904

Muntz, T. B., C.E., Wattletree-road, Malvern 1873

Macleam, C. W., "Bronte," Strand, Williamstown 1879

Mahony, D. J., B.Sc, " Locksley," St. Kilda-rd., Melbourne 1904

Mattingley, A. H. E., 6 Alfred-street, N. Melbourne 1903

Mathew, Rev. John, M.A., B.D., Coburg 1890

McEwan, John, 317 Collins-street 1898

iMcKenzie, G., Lands Department, Melbourne 1907

NichoUs, E. B., 164a Victoria-street, N. Melbourne 1904

O'Neill, W. J., Lands Department, Melbourne 1903

Pritchard, G. B., F.G.S., Mantell-street, Moonee Ponds ... 1892

Sayce, A., Harcourt-street, Hawthorn 1898

Schafer, R., " Invercloy," Napier-street, Essendon 1883

Shaw, Alfred C, Bond-street, Abbotsford, Victoria 1896

Smith, F. Voss 1901

Smith, G. P., " Earlscourt/' Glenferrie-road, Hawthorn ... 1901

Smith, J. A., 15 Collins-place, Melbourne 1905

Stephen, Rev. R., M.A 1901

Summers, H., B.Sc, 67 Leopold-street, S. Yarra 1902

Sutherland, Ian M., '' Novar," Dandenong 1905

Sweet, Miss G., D.Sc, Wilson-street, Brunswick 1906

Thorn, Wra., Lands Department, Melbourne 1907

Thiele, E. 0., " Heimruh," Finlayson-street, Malvern ... 1898

Traill, J. C, B.A., B.C.E., "Osmington," Domain-road, 1903
South Yarra

Wedeles, James, 231 Flinders-lane, Melbourne 1896

Woodward, J. H., Queen's Buildings, Rathdowne-street, 1903
Carlton

INDEX.

(The names of new ^eeies and genera are printed in italics,)

Acacia accola, 127

neriifolia, 127
Acalles rubeter, 184
Acanthochites retro jeotus, 34
Achopera snbulosa, 191
Acthosus westwoodi, var. insularis,

165
Adenanthos cygnoruui, 127

sericea, 127
Aizoon glahrum, 128

intermedium, 128

Bodwayi, 128
Aleochara kershawi, 1 50
Alkanna lutea, 86
Amphibia, Anatomy, 222
Angianthus humifusus, 76

humifuBus, var. graudifloms,
129
Annual Report, 274
Anthicus crassipee, 167
Apteropilo pictipes, 162
Auletes calceatus. var. insularis, 180

pallipes, var. kingi, 179
Baeckea crispiflora, 76
Baker, R. T., 104
Bastow, R. A., 28
Belus rubicundus, 179
Berry, R. J. A., 1
Beta vulgaris, 80
Botany, Latin in, 125
Bi-achyporopterus apieigriseus, 182
Callitris Morrisoni, 76, 104
Carditeila elegantula, 37
Cassinia laevis, 77, 129

Theodori. 77
Cerithiopsis marmorata, 34
Chamaelaucium Halli, 77
Chapman, F., 59, 208
Chiroleptes albog^tatus, 236, 241
Chiton, new, 28
Choristodon rubig^nosus, 85
Cingtdina diaphana, 33
Clypeaster elliptica, 207
Cliona (?) perigrinator, 209

mammillata, 208
Coleoptera, 143
Committees, 278

Comoseris australis, 213
Conifers, Red wood in, 107
Conium maculatum, 86
Conlonia litoralis, 198
Conospermum Croniniae, 78

leianthum, 129

polycephalum, 129
Copidita lUoralis, 168
Crepidomenus aherrans, 158
Crinia signifera, 235
Crossea labiata, 33
Cryptodon globosum, 35
Cryptorhynchus australis, 186

solidus, 186
Cyclostrema bastowi, 34
Daphnella excavata, 32
Daviesia corymbosa, 130
Decilaus auricomus, var. insularis,
190

major, 187

mixtus, 188

mollis, 189

sohrinvs, 188
Diplodonta zealandica, 36
Diplotaxis muralis, 130
Diodon connewarrensis, 69

formosus, 66
Divide, Main. 250
Dystrichothorax plaeidus, 148
Ecballium elaterium, 86
Ecliinoid with marsiipium, 140
Ecionema uewberyi, 210
Edaphodon sweeti, 61
Elater grantUatipennis, 157
Elloschodea eucalypti, 178
Eniopea subc(urulea, 176
Enoplochiton torri, 27
Epargemus tridens, 199
Ephrycus parvus, 192
Eristus pallidus, 176
Eriostemon deserti, 181

diflformia, 131

gibboflus, 79

gracile, 131

intermedins, 131
Eupatagus rotondus, 217
Euphrasia eollina, 131

286 Proceedinys of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Ewai-t, A. J., 38, 77, 125
Fish, tertiary, 59
Flora, Australian, 7t>, 125
Fossils, tertiary, 208
Gatlifif, J. H., 28. 31
Geococcus pusillus, 79
Qladiohis cuspidatns, 86
Graptolites, 92
Gunniopsis intermedia, 80
Hall, T. S., 21 140
Hart. T. S., 260
Hapatesus hirtus, 157
Heleo}2^aster effeminaius, 162
Helichrysum snbulifolium, 81

Tepperi. 81
Heleioporus pictus, 237, 241
Heliasti-aea tasmaniensis, 212
Helipteniiu OuiJfoylei, 82

Jesseni. 81
Heteromastix apiciflavus, 160
Hexymus australis, 186

subplanatus, 186
Highlands, Yictonan, 250
Hybrid orchid, 134
Hyla aurea, 228, 239

iesuenrii, 230
Hyocis cancellata, 1G4
Hypattalus insularii, 161
Ischyodus wortom, *63
Ischnochiton granulosus, 218

resplendens, 34
Kangaroo Island, 1
Kellia jacksoniensis, 36

solida, 36
Kershawcis cylindriciis, 174
King Island, Coleoptera, 143
Kochia jtfossoni, 82

yillosa, 132
Labrodon confertidein, 56

depressus, 66
Latin in Botany, 125
Lea, A. M., 143
Lima angtilata, 37
Limnodynastes dorsalis, 238, 243
Linthia antiaustralis, 215
Lixus tasmanicus, 175
Lolium italicum, 86
Lyonsia straminea, 132
Macrohelodes niger, 159
Macrones purpureipes, 201
Magdalis rufimanus, 180
Mangilia delicatula, 31

granulosissima, 32
Mandalotus caviventris, 170
Manures, 38
Maretia anomala, 216
Matricaria discoidea, 86

Medicsgo hispida, 133

reticulata, 133
Menephilus ruficomis, var insul-

arts, 165
Menios sordidatus, 193
Metiiorrhynchus kingensis, 160
Mierocryptorhynehui pygniaeus, 194
Mitra cineracea, 31
Mitromorpha pallidula, 32
Mollusca, 31
Moorooduc, (xeology, 80
Mornington peninsula, 89
Moun^t Eliza, rocks, 97
Mount Gambler, 23
Myliobatis moorcAhinensis, 60

t<$liapica, 61
Nacel)a stowae, 34
Notadeu bennetti, 231, 241
Nototolpingus variipennis 166
Ochesia minuta, 167
Office-bearers, 277
Olearia homolepis, var. pilosa, 133
Patersonia Drnmmondi, 83
Perperus conloni, 172

costirostris, 171
Petrology, 95
Phymatooarpus, 134
Plants, natimdised aliens, 86
Plilaoglynuna miuta, 193
Podolepis Eendallj. 83
Podolepis /Spenetri, 83, 134
Poropterus rubeter, 184
Pritchard, G. R, 59
Promecoderus cordicollU, 147
Psendophryne australis, 231, 240
Pterostylis hybrid, 134
Pterostylis i-eflexa, var. irUemiedia,

84
Pultenaea Gunnii, 137

incurvata, 137

larg^orens, 137

Maideni, 136

stricta, 135
QnediuB pectinatus, 151

xylophilvs, 152
Ranunculus sceleratus, S6
Eeseda Luteola, 86
Bhizobius hlctckhurni, 205

kingensis, 206

nigrovaritts, 204
Kochefoi-tia lactea, 36
Roptopems tasmaniensis, 184
Scala invalida, 33

nepeanensis, 33

tenella, 32

translucida, 33
Scolymus hispanicus, 87

Index.

287

Scopodes lineatus, 146
Scutellina, sp. 140
Scyomaenus Jkinyi, 158
Scymniis cortiealiSy 203
Shells, marine, 31
Siphonaria stowae, 35
Skeats, E. W., 89
Soil constituents, 39
Soil, seasonal variations, 38
Sporobolus Benthami, 138

virginicus, 138
Studeria elegans, 214
Styliferina translucida, 34
Sweet, G., 222
Swinhumia phyllosteg^a, 85

Tasmanian half-caste, 1
Thraciopsis elegantnla, 35
Timareta suhterranea^ lfi9
Trichalus kershawi, 159
Trigonella omithopodoides, 87
'I'rigonothops vitti'pennis, 145
Trogodeima blackbumi, 155
Tuffs, bedded, 21
Tunica prolifera, 139

velutina, 139
Tysonia phyllostegia, 85
Vei*ticordia Pritzelli, 85
White, J., 107
Wihurdia scrobiculata, 19G
Wood, Ked, 107

END OF VOLUME XX

[Part IE. Issued March, 1908.]

V
■ •

r

.J I
I

•j ■

•1 I

PRINTKD BV

FOHD AND 80.V,

MRLKOIJRXK.